JP7182220B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine").

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of symbols when a starting condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined game value when the symbols stop result in a predetermined mode. In such a game machine, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number of starting conditions that are established during the variable display of the preceding symbols, and the holding state is displayed as an image so that the player can easily grasp the holding state. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-097292 A

In some of the gaming machines described above, in the image display indicating the pending state, an effect (pre-reading effect) is executed to inform in advance of the degree of expectation that the pattern stop result corresponding to the pending start condition will be in a predetermined mode. However, there is concern that players will lose interest in staging, which is becoming standardized, and their interest in games will decline.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in amusement in a game.

In one aspect of the representative gaming machine of the present invention, a starting information storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of starting information that can be acquired upon receipt of a game medium in a receiving area within the game area; a lottery executing means capable of executing a lottery based on the lottery result; an effect executing means capable of executing an effect including a variable display of symbols on a display device based on the lottery result of the lottery; and the lottery result of the lottery are specified. A specific game state control means for controlling a specific game state advantageous to a player when a result is obtained, and capable of determining whether or not the lottery result of the lottery is the specific result before executing the variable display. A starting memory display can be individually displayed according to the starting information stored by the prior determination means and the starting information storage means, and the displayed starting memory display is a pattern of the starting information corresponding to the starting memory display. starting memory display means capable of displaying until the end of the variable display; starting memory number display means capable of displaying the number of the starting information stored by the starting information memory means; The display of the number of information is performed on a display device on which the display of the starting memory display by the starting memory display means is performed, and the variation in the determined starting information is performed based on the result of determination by the prior determining means. A preliminary performance executing means capable of executing a preliminary performance suggesting the degree of expectation that the determined start information will result in the specified result before the display is executed, and a variable region in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner are used. and compound effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect, wherein at least the preliminary effect is selected from among the plurality of starting memory displays displayed by the starting memory display means when the specific effect is being executed. The starting memory display that is not targeted is hidden, the specific performance is executed, and at least while the starting memory display that is not targeted for the preliminary performance is hidden, the starting information is displayed by the starting memory number display means. It is possible to display the number of the starting information stored by the storage means, the preliminary performance has a plurality of aspects with different degrees of expectation, and at least the starting memory display not targeted for the preliminary performance is hidden. After the specific performance to be executed is started, the mode of the preliminary performance for the starting memory display which is the target of the preliminary performance is a mode with a higher degree of expectation than before the start of the specific performance. , and the change in the mode of the preliminary performance with respect to the starting memory display that is the target of the preliminary performance can be changed to the preliminary The starting information displayed by the starting memory number display means is made executable in a situation where the starting memory display that is not the target of the performance is hidden and only the starting memory display that is the target of the preliminary performance is displayed. is displayed at a specific display position without changing its display position.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to solve the above problems and provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest in gaming.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the body frame. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. 1 is a plan view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame, a body frame, a game board, and a door frame, which constitute a pachinko machine, viewed from behind; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame, a body frame, a game board, and a door frame that constitute a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. FIG. 4 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure between an upper shaft support metal fitting of a body frame and an upper support metal fitting of an outer frame; (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of (A) viewed from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect|action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front; It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame base unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a door-frame base board cover and a wiring holding member in the door-frame base unit; It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit exploded and viewed from behind; (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit, which is disassembled and viewed from the rear; It is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission state of a left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit being exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and viewed from behind; It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit and was seen from behind. It is a cross-sectional view cut at the portion of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in the door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front right upper side; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit when it is exploded and viewed from the lower right front side; It is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a pressing operation portion of the operation unit is pressed; (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame, and (B) is an exploded rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed; (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the anti-tampering member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the anti-tampering member, (C) is a perspective view of the anti-tampering member seen from the front, and (D) is a perspective view of the anti-tampering member. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the fraud prevention member; FIG. It is sectional drawing which cut|disconnects and shows a door frame in the up-down direction approximate center. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system|strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the main body frame, and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the main-body frame, and was seen from the back. 4 is a front perspective view of a body frame base in the body frame; FIG. Fig. 4 is a rear perspective view of a body frame base in the body frame; It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled a prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit exploded from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball device in the prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotator in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the flow-down passage of the ball|bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening and closing unit in the body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board unit in the body frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the body frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit when it is exploded and viewed from behind; FIG. 10 is a perspective view for explaining the action of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit; (A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded front perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit. (A) is a front view of a launch power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover of the body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the body frame. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of a fastening mechanism in the back cover; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism of the rear cover, viewed from the rear side; (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the body frame, and (B) is a front perspective view of the lock device in the body frame. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a glass door sliding rod and a body frame sliding rod slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the lock device. FIG. 4C is a front perspective view of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lock device and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation|movement of the sliding rod for glass doors in a lock device, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a front view which expands and shows the principal part of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the prize-winning unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the prize-winning unit from behind. Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the main components of the winning opening unit, as seen from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the winning opening unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind; It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit of the winning a prize mouth unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable starting opening unit of the prize winning opening unit from the front. Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the variable starter unit; It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the variable starting mouth unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the variable starting mouth unit, and was seen from the back. It is an explanatory view showing from above a state in which the starting port door member of the variable starting port unit is retracted. It is an explanatory view showing from above a state in which the starting port door member of the variable starting port unit has moved forward. (a) is a front perspective view of the accessory unit of the prize-winning unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the accessory unit. (a) is a front view of the accessory unit, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (a). Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory winning opening unit of the accessory unit, viewed from the front; It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the accessory prize-winning mouth unit, and was seen from the back. Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning slot unit of the accessory unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning opening unit as seen from the rear; (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the receiving part of the rotating body of the V winning opening unit faces the receiving side, and (b) shows a state in which the receiving part of the rotating body faces the V winning opening side. It is an explanatory view shown from the front side. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls on the right side of the game board. (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls from the front side when the starter door member is retracted in the variable starter unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls when the starter door member is advanced. It is explanatory drawing which shows a flow from a front side. (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls from the left front when the starter door member is retracted in the variable starter unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls when the starter door member is advanced. It is an explanatory view showing the flow from the front left, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball from the front left in a state in which the starting port door member is retreating. (a) is an explanatory view showing a variable starter unit according to a modification from the front side, and (b) shows the flow of game balls in a state where the starter door member is retracted in the variable starter unit according to the modification. It is an explanatory view shown from the front left, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in a state in which the starter door member moves forward in the variable starter unit according to the modification from the front left. (a), (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the movement when two game balls are continuously supplied to the variable starting port unit according to the modification. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls from the front side when the accessory winning opening in the accessory unit can be received; It is an explanatory view showing from the front side the flow of the game ball when facing the side. It is the figure which looked at the accessory prize-winning opening opening/closing member from the top. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. 3 is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a peripheral side relay terminal board, an abnormal audio signal blocking board, and a lower speaker; FIG. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of an abnormal audio signal blocking board; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by a main control MPU; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs; 6 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of control processing in a special design. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a variation pattern setting process in a special design. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during fluctuation in the special design. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit game start processing of a special design. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game process of a special design. It is a flow chart showing an example of a special symbol jackpot game start process. It is a flow chart showing an example of a special symbol jackpot game process. It is a figure which shows the distribution table of various random numbers provided for special design lottery. It is a time chart showing an example of the relationship between the open state of the accessory winning opening and the operating state of the rotating body (distribution device) when the small winning game (disadvantage small winning, advantageous small winning) is performed. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of an example of normal control processing executed by a main control MPU; 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of an example of gate passage processing executed by a main control MPU; It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about an example of normal design normal processing performed by main control MPU. 4 is a flow chart showing a processing procedure for an example of processing performed by a peripheral control MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady-state processing that is executed every 16 ms in sub-main processing; FIG. 4 is a time chart showing an example of a game flow when a game is progressed based on the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. It is a flow chart showing an example of special figure prefetch effect control processing in the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal prefetch effect lottery table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending|holding display effect pattern selection probability setting table of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the continuous look-ahead effect setting process of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the various tables which relate to the specific production|presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation pattern of the continuous prefetch production|presentation of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a screen transition common to the pending display effect pattern and the specific effect type when a specific effect (successful pattern of continuous variation) is performed in the continuous look-ahead effect of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the screen transition of the specific production|presentation A type of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the screen transition of the specific production|presentation B type of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending|holding display effect|presentation pattern and screen transition in the case of performing specific effect|presentation B (single-shot variation success pattern) in the continuous look-ahead effect|presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending|holding display effect pattern and screen transition in the case of performing the specific effect|effect B (single-shot variation failure pattern) in the continuous look-ahead effect|action of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending|holding display effect pattern and screen transition in the case of performing the specific effect|presentation B (successful pattern of the continuous variation of zone mixture effect|effect) of a modification in the continuous look-ahead effect|presentation of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hit opening display processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hit opening display processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of display processing during a small hit of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the small hit ending display processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of normal figure fluctuation display processing of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the small hit display production|presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the small hit display production|presentation of this embodiment.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the overall pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and an outer frame 2 pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable, and the front side is open. A box-shaped body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 attached and fixed to the body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball T as a game medium is driven, and a front surface of the body frame 3 and the game board 4 are played. A door frame 5 pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side of the person. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game ball T which is arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls T. and a handle device 500 operated by the player to hit the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5. .

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. , and the vertical width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is slightly shorter than that of the outer frame 2 . A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged such that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably pivoted at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. The right ends of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 to open them.

When viewed from the front, the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that a game area 1100 into which game balls T are hit can be seen through a substantially circular game window 101. An upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 are arranged vertically. A handle device 500 for a player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5 . is rotated, the game ball T in the upper tray 301 is hit into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player cannot see inside the game area 1100. The player cannot touch the game ball T, obstacle nail G (see FIG. 98), various winning openings, accessories, etc. in the game area 1100 by inserting his/her hand or the like. Various control boards are provided on the rear side of the body frame 3, and a cover body 1250 that closes the game board 4 so as to cover the rear side thereof is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side plates extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 connecting ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 are provided. By connecting them together, they are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) with a predetermined thickness, and are placed approximately in the center in the front-rear direction of both the left and right ends. An engagement notch 15 is provided which penetrates through the body and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. Mounting stepped portions 10a that are recessed from other general surfaces are formed on the upper surface and front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and upper support metal fittings 20, which will be described later, are mounted on the mounting stepped portions 10a. It's like

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal material (for example, an aluminum alloy) with a constant cross section, and the outer side surfaces are substantially flat surfaces, and the inner side surfaces protrude inward at the rear ends. It has a protruding portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) to increase strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer and inner side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island equipment of the game hall, the operator can The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger rest, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For the sake of convenience, there are drawings in which the plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of the present example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate of a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 and fixed to the left-right direction. a plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending from the outer edge of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13; and a plate-like engaging piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted into and engaged with the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 . In this example, the connecting member 14 connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are left-right asymmetrical. , and a vertical piece 18 is formed so as to be divided into front and rear portions. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12, and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape. It is

The upper and lower surfaces of the horizontal piece 17 abut against the lower and upper surfaces of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 , and the engaging piece 19 of the connecting member 14 engages the upper and lower frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 . In the state of being inserted into and engaged with the portion 15, a predetermined screw is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19, whereby the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11 . The connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is screwed through the side frames 12, 13 with the vertical piece 18 in contact with the inner side surface of the upper end of the side frames 12, 13 and screwed with a predetermined screw. is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It's like Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 is inserted through the side frames 12, 13 with the vertical piece 18 in contact with the inner side surface of the lower end of the side frames 12, 13 and screwed with a predetermined screw. is screwed into the vertical piece 18 to connect the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Four connecting members 14 connect the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 , and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example includes an upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the top surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and is arranged to face the upper support metal fitting 20 and fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. a lower supporting metal fitting 21 attached to the lower supporting metal fitting 21; a reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged so as to support the lower surface of the lower supporting metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13; and a decorative cover 23. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

First, the upper support metal fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a supporting projecting piece 20b projecting forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20a beyond the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a supporting projection. A supporting hook hole 20c is formed by notching from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b so as to bend toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame hangs downward from the left ends of the fixed piece 20 and the supporting protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixed piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixed piece 20d and hangs down along the outer edge of the support projecting piece 20b (see FIG. 14A). 14) and a stop droop 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the depending wall 20e and slopes inwardly at the entrance end of the support barb 20c. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper pivot bracket 630 of the body frame 3, which will be described later, is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support bracket 20. As shown in FIG. Also, the upper support fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by means of a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

The strength of the support projecting piece 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e that hangs down from the outer edge of the support projecting piece 20b. The lock member 27 arranged on the rear surface of the player can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the external appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protruding piece 20b is bent in a V-shape so as to be inclined toward the center of the tip from the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed. , and the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20 c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633 .

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 21 comprises a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixed piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin-like projecting upward from near the front end of the support projecting piece 21c. and a support projection 21d. A body frame shaft support formed on a body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 66, etc.) of the body frame 3, which will be described later, is inserted into the support projection 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame pivot metal fitting 644 of the main body frame 3, the pivot pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is engaged with the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

As shown in the drawing, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 arranged vertically apart from each other by a predetermined distance inside the right side frame plate 13 and fixed. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L-shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are attached along the open sides of the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and turned to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by pressing.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22 . This guide plate 26 is for smoothly guiding the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is attached and fixed so as to be replaceable.

14, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support metal fitting 20, and is secured to the support projecting piece 20b by a rivet 28. It is rotatably supported with respect to. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from the position where it is supported by the rivet 28, and a portion that is shorter than the stopper portion 27a to the right from the position where it is supported by the rivet 28. A projecting operation portion 27b, an elastic piece 27c projecting from the side opposite to the position where the operation portion 27b is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and an elastic piece 27c formed at the tip of the stopper portion 27a so as to bulge forward. and an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. The elastic portion 27c of the locking member 27 is formed to have a width narrower than that of the stopper portion 27a and the operating portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as it moves leftward from the stopper portion 27a.

As shown in FIGS. 14(B) and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support protruding piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the end abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. 20e, the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a contacts the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. is not closed, and a space is formed in the leading space of the support hook hole 20c so that the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the body frame 3 can be inserted. .

In the support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this embodiment, the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a is locked. A state in which the tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f of the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f, and they are in contact with each other). (not shown), the axial support pin 633 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a They face each other with their centers shifted in an oblique direction. In this normal pivoting state, the pivot pin 633 that pivotally supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip of the support hook hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is in a state where no load is applied. In addition, since the stopper portion 27a has an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27, the lock member 27 can be rotated smoothly. It's becoming Also, in the illustration, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the axial support pin 633 contacts the arcuate end surface 27d with an acting force F acting in a direction in which the axial support pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the acting force F is applied to the axial support pin 633. A force component F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped tip end surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the support pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c When the direction of the component force F1 is directed toward the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27), the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is stopped. No moment acts to rotate the tip portion in the direction (clockwise in the figure) to separate from the support projecting piece 20b, and the pivot pin 633 is positioned between the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. It maintains the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface of one side. Therefore, even in a normal axially supported state or in a state in which the force of the axially supporting pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always subjected to a load, and the elastic member 27c integrally formed of synthetic resin is secured. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the locking member 27 is rotated in the direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) in which the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the locking member 27 is disengaged from the support projecting piece 20b by applying an excessive force, the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a will not move to one side. abuts on the stop drooping portion 20f and does not rotate further in the direction of detachment, so that the locking member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b.

Even if the shape of the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate, the tip portion of the locking member 27 may be placed in a position where the force component F1 does not generate a rotational moment, or the tip portion of the locking member 27 may be positioned toward the outside of the support projecting piece 20b. By locating the center of rotation of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Even if the member 27 rotates, the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts the stop drooping portion 20f. Confirmed.

The action of the locking member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. On the premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, lower support metal fittings are inserted into the main body frame shaft support holes (not shown) formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fittings 644 (see FIG. 63) of the main body frame 3 . It is necessary that the support projections 21d of 21 are inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. As shown in 16(B), the locking member 27 rotates the elastic piece 27c counterclockwise while deforming it, so that the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the supporting hook hole 20c. Then, when the pivot pin 633 reaches the top space of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the lock member 27 is biased by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to its normal state to close the entrance portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the pivot pin 633 so that the pivot pin 633 does not drop out of the support hook hole 20c.

This state is maintained even when the body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening/closing operation of the body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 16(D). Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the body frame 3 is lifted up to release the engagement between the body frame shaft support holes formed in the body frame shaft support metal fittings 644 and the support projections 21d of the lower support metal fittings 21, thereby moving the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2. can be removed from the

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 that constitute the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, aluminum alloy) is used as an extruded material, so when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facilities arranged in a line in the game hall, it is necessary to fix it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily driven, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily installed in the existing island equipment. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are extruded materials of light weight metal (for example, aluminum alloy), it is possible to form a thin wall thickness while maintaining the strength compared to the conventional wooden outer frame. The lateral width of the peripheral wall 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12, 13 can be widened when viewed from the front, and the game board 4 with a large lateral dimension. can be attached to the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which constitute the outline of the outer frame 2, are connected by a connecting member 14. The connecting member 14 connects the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the outer frame 2 is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and is fixed while the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and the outer frame 2 is sturdy. It is designed to be able to be a square-shaped framework. After the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support bracket 20 is attached at a predetermined position, each Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openable and closable on the front side of the body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. FIG. The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game window 101 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and a slightly vertically long circular (elliptical) inner peripheral shape, as shown in the figure. A base unit 100, a right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and a right side decoration unit 200 facing the right side decoration unit 200 and to the left of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100. A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer circumference and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

The door frame 5 includes a plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a door penetrating the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving the game ball T, and a door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear surface, a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the game window 101. and an attached glass unit 590 .

[1-2A. door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. FIG. As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of this example has a vertically long rectangular outer shape and a game window 101 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has an inner circumference that is substantially elliptical in a vertically long shape. A frame base body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged in front of the door frame base body 110 on both left and right sides of the lower end of the game window 101, and speakers for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110. A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 at the lower right corner in front view are provided.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decorative unit 200 and the like on the outside of the right side speaker 130 when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer circumference of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

In addition, the door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a rear surface of the door frame base body 110 so as to cover the lower part of the game window 101. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer circumference of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left and right direction in rear view. ) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 under the firing cover 191 A handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, a handle device relay board cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay board 192, and a launch cover 191 sandwiching the center in the left-right direction. A door frame base substrate 194 arranged on the opposite side (on the right side (rotary support side) of the center in the left-right direction in rear view) from the handle device relay substrate 192 and the like and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base A door frame base board cover 195 covering the rear side of the board 194, and a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 1) which is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195 and connects the door frame 5 side and the body frame 3 side. 28), and a wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of the wiring.

The door frame base unit 100 of this example has a reinforcing unit 150 assembled from metal sheets with rivets or the like and fixed to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin, thereby increasing the rigidity of the whole. In addition, it has sufficient strength to support each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, and the like.

The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222, 262 of the left and right side decorative units 200, 240, and is connected to a peripheral control board provided on the game board 4, which will be described later. 4010 , and has an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs it to each speaker 130 . In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, sensors 432a, 432b, 432c, the wiring cord 196 that connects the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the plate unit 300, etc., and the dispensing control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4010, etc. is on the right side (axis After being collectively bundled at the position of the support side), although details will be described later, it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends rearward, and the main side relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the present embodiment is formed of synthetic resin in the shape of a vertically long picture frame. A substantially elliptical game window 101 is formed in such a manner that it is entirely offset upward. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed such that the left, right, and upper inner peripheral edges are formed in continuous smooth curved lines, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted is provided on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110 on the pivot side (left side in front view). is formed. The width of the upper side formed by the game window 101 and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 are equal to the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150, which will be described later. , and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 than that of the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It's like

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base body 110 has a speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 which is arranged on both left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and a ball feeding unit 580. A ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) for feeding game balls T penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feeding opening 113 for supplying to the ball, and a handle for mounting a handle bracket 140, which is arranged at the lower right corner in front view and is inclined so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface bulging forward is retreated. A mounting portion 114, a wire passage opening 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass therethrough, and a cylindrical shape that extends short forward above the handle mounting portion 114. and a lock hole 116 through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 has a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body as viewed from the rear. From the substrate mounting portion 118 arranged on the lower right side (rotary support side) for mounting the door frame base substrate 194, and the arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 projecting backward and the door frame base main body 110 are recessed forward along the inner periphery of the game window 101 on the rear side and the glass unit 590. A glass unit supporting stepped portion 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the game window 101 can abut, and two locking members that protrude backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 and support the glass unit locking member 190 in a rotatable manner. and a portion 110b.

Further, on the rear side of the door-frame base body 110, there is provided a door-frame projecting piece 110c projecting backward from the lower side of the door-frame base body 110 by a predetermined amount. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower sides of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame projecting piece 110c engaged with the engaging groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in a rear view and fits into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d into the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e protruding forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, etc. on the front surface thereof. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handlebar bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has mounting portions 110g for mounting the speaker brackets 132 for mounting the side speakers 130, and mounting holes 110h (see FIG. 18, etc.) for mounting the side speaker covers 338 at appropriate positions. formed.

Further, in the door frame base body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, a lower plate ball supply port 310g in the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 and a foul cover unit 540, which will be described later, are provided. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base main body 110 is formed above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 on the front side thereof, and has shallow dish-shaped anti-crime recesses 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A shallow box-shaped security member 121 is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed into a shallow box shape with an open front side by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to carry out an illegal act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, a thin drill or the like is used to make a hole from the joining portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the plate unit 300. It can be blocked by the security member 121, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act.

In addition, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 are not shown in detail, but the point of intersection of their central axes is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1 m) forward from the center of the game area 1100 when viewed from the front. 5 m), so that the sound reaches the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. The side speaker 130 mainly outputs mid-to-high range sound, and is arranged at a position separated from the pachinko machine 1 in the horizontal direction as much as possible. By outputting related and different sounds from the side speakers 130, it is possible to output sound with a high sense of stereo.

The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and the speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 arranged on the rear side, so that the door frame It is adapted to be attached to the base body 110 . The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

25 to 27, the door-frame base board cover 195 in the door-frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box-like shape with an open front side, and a vertical A stepped portion 195a recessed forward is provided at a position slightly lower than the center. A wire holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base board cover 195. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the wire holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate-like shape elongated in the horizontal direction and has an I-shaped cross section. , which is made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. The wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three each in the upper and lower direction in this example) along the longitudinal direction at predetermined intervals at both upper and lower ends, as shown in the figure. The wire holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5, and is vertically attached to the stepped portion 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195. The wire holding member 197 is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the wire holding member 197 is rotated toward the door frame base board cover 195 by rotating the free end side of the wire holding member 197 toward the door frame base board cover 195 side. It can be accommodated in the step portion 195 a of the door frame base board cover 195 .

The wire holding member 197 has a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface thereof, and is bound in a pair of upper and lower holding holes 197a. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 with the banding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wire holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the free end side of the wire holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the body frame 3. The door frame base board cover 195 is pushed forward by a portion of the door frame base board cover 195 to rotate. As a result, as the door frame 5 closes, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base board cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 toward the body frame 3 side becomes free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in half at the free end of the wiring holding member 197 in the horizontal direction.

On the other hand, when opening the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 move relatively away from each other. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wire holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base board cover 195 (toward the body frame 3). As a result, the wiring cord 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring cord 196. - 特許庁

Thus, according to this example, the end portion of the wire holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is attached to the door frame base board cover 195 so that the free end side moves toward the body frame 3 side. A part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be laterally folded or unfolded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, so that the wiring cord 196 is not caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent troubles (disconnection of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to being pinched.

Further, according to this example, since the wire holding member 197 is made of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even if a force acts through the wire cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from swaying in the vertical direction, and to reliably fold the wiring cord 196 in the horizontal direction to prevent the occurrence of problems.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 creates a state as if a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 is removed. Since a part of the wire holding member 197 is bridged, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from sagging even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electrical equipment can be prevented from occurring, and the door frame 5 cannot be closed. Defect in the wiring 196 connecting the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, the speakers 130, 222, 262, the ball rental unit 360, the handle device 500, etc. as electric devices. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of .

A part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, so that even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 will not rotate. Since the force can be released by , it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection of the wiring 196 and disconnection of the connector due to the pulling of the wiring 196 . can. In addition, since a portion of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 only partially bends as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, conventional methods (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-213675) can be used. ), it is possible to prevent troubles such as electric leakage and disconnection due to rubbing of the wiring 196 .

Furthermore, in the wiring holding member 197, a binding band 198 is inserted through a plurality of penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 is reliably prevented from falling off from the wiring holding member 197 together with the binding band 198. can do.

Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged away from the side edge on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wire 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the body frame 3 is improved in strength and rigidity on the pivotally supported side of the door frame 5.例文帳に追加and a door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 having high security against fraud.

Furthermore, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with projections projecting from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least to the side along which the wiring 196 runs, the pair of projections and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197 can hold the wiring together. 196 can be surrounded on three sides, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197 . In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the ridge, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the bending of the wiring holding member 197 is prevented when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in good condition.

In addition, the length from the base end to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same length as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the wiring 196 extends from the body frame 3. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axis of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axis of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member are aligned. Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wire holding member 197, and the position where the wire 196 extends in the body frame 3, the wire when opening and closing the door frame 5 is formed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening/closing operation can be facilitated, and the application of excessive force to the wiring 196, etc., can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. can be prevented. Also, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back at the tip side so as to be along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wire holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wire holding member 197 is positioned on the step provided on the door frame base board cover 195. Since the wire holding member 197 is housed in the portion 195a, it is possible to almost eliminate the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the side of the door frame 5 to the side of the body frame 3, making it easier to close the door frame 5, The wiring 196 can be gathered compactly, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being caught on other members and thereby preventing the occurrence of troubles.

Furthermore, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 . When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side) as possible, so that wiring from the door frame 5 is also prevented. The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced as much as possible.

In addition, since the wire holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wire holding member 197 can be easily rotated by the inertial force or impact force that causes the door frame 5 to open and close. It is possible to reliably achieve the effects of the above. In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame 5, there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 on the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can hold a game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by increasing the size of the game board 4 and can strongly attract the player's interest with the large game board 4.例文帳に追加can.

25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft extending from the rear end of the tubular portion 141 to the axis of the tubular portion 141. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the opposite direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions projecting into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143 , and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141 . The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although not shown, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wire passage opening 115 when attached to the handle attachment portion 114 .

The handle bracket 140 is provided with two projections 143 on the upper side and two on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141 . They are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three grooves 502a of the handle device 500 are aligned. there is Accordingly, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140 .

The handle bracket 140 is attached to the obliquely inclined handle attachment portion 114 so that the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 extends to the right (open side) as it goes forward in a front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is similarly tilted.

25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door-frame base unit 100 consists of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear surface of the upper side of the door-frame base body 110, and a door-frame base body. A support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the back surface of the pivot-side side portion of the door-frame base body 110 , an opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the back surface of the open-side side portion of the door-frame base body 110 , and the door-frame base body 110 . A lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the back surface of the lower side of the game window 101 is provided, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets, or the like to form a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, this reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface thereof at the upper and lower ends of a supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and a lower surface thereof. and a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper and lower shaft support fittings 630 and 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 on the shaft support side, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It is pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially equal to the width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent projecting piece 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent projecting piece 160 bent forward on the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in front view. and a vertically bent projecting piece 161 which is bent backward at the central portion of the upper long side edge and extends vertically. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by a lower bending projecting piece 159, an upper bending projecting piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 is engaged with the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is horizontally and vertically bent. It is designed to be able to restrict backward movement. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101 a of the door frame base body 110 .

In addition, the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes open-side outward bending projecting pieces 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, As shown in the figure, the opening-side inward bending projection 164 is formed to extend longer rearward than the opening-side outward bending projection 163 . ing. A hook cover 165 is provided on the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 so as to abut on a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later. Further, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a support-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 extending rearward from the outer end of the long side thereof and opening outward on the support side (Fig. 108). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending projecting pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of its long sides.

The support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcement unit 150 is attached to and supported by the body frame 3 only at two points above and below the upper support portion 156 and the lower support portion 158. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes larger, resulting in an illegal operation. Although there is a risk that the action may become easier, the support-side reinforcement sheet metal 152 of this example includes the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the support-side reinforcement sheet metal 152 is further increased. , the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is designed such that a front end piece 952b of a side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3, which will be described later, is inserted into the U-shape (Fig. 108), it is possible to prevent the insertion of a tool, and it is possible to prevent only the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from bending, so that the security function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. The crime prevention cover 180 covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and has a crime prevention function to prevent unauthorized devices from entering the game board 4. The contact recess 181 is formed in a flat plate shape to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the contact recess 181 is formed in an arc shape at the upper side of the plate. A security rear projecting piece 182 projecting rearward along the upper end is provided. Further, security rear end projecting pieces 183 are provided at both left and right ends of the security cover 180 so as to protrude rearward along the edge shape thereof. In addition, the crime prevention rear end projection 183 on the right side (rotary support side) in the rear view extends longer rearward than the crime prevention rear end projection 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, a crime prevention front projecting piece 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right security projection pieces 184 on the outside of the crime prevention front projection piece 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward is provided at the lower end of the .

In this security cover 180, the attachment elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in a front view is attached to the security cover attachment portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the attachment elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (rotary support side) is attached to the plate. By attaching it to the crime prevention cover attachment part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. - 特許庁When the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although detailed illustration is omitted, the crime prevention front projecting piece 184 is fitted to the outer periphery of the lower portion of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 abuts on the vertically bent projecting piece 161 . In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed, the anti-crime rear projecting piece 182 projecting backward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail fixed to the game board 4 at the half on the pivot side, and the half on the open side is the front configuration. It is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail of the member 1110 . As a result, even if an illegal tool tries to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the security rear projecting piece 182 inserted under the inner rail can prevent the entry.

The back surface of the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the guide passage for the hit ball formed by the outer rail and the inner rail when the door frame 5 is closed. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the ball flying or reversed through the passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594 .

As a result, in this example, since the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower periphery of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are separated from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the holes to commit fraud in the pachinko machine 1 (inside the game area 1100), the crime prevention cover 180 prevents the tool from entering, thereby preventing fraudulent activity. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have higher safety against such as.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portions 110b projecting rearward from the door frame base body 110. , and a locking piece 190b that extends in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locks the locking projecting piece 451f of the glass unit 590. As shown in FIG. The glass unit locking member 190 has a locking screw attached to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state in which the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 passes through the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably pivotally supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge projecting rearward to the rear side. It serves as a finger grip for operation.

Also, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 . Also, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the ball shooting device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. right side decorative unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in this embodiment, as illustrated, decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. The outer side is formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100 . The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a side inner lens 212 that is arranged behind the side lens 210, A right side upper decorative substrate 214 arranged above from the approximate center in the vertical direction on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 and having a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LED) and 214b (white LED) mounted on the surface, and a side inner on the lower side. A right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged below the lens 212 from the center in the vertical direction and having a plurality of LEDs 216a (full-color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface, and a right side upper decoration substrate 214 on the rear side. and a right side upper decorative board cover 218 attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the right side upper decorative board 214 and cover the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 so as to hold the right side lower decorative board 216 therebetween. a right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 attached to the lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202;

In addition, the right side decoration unit 200 includes a side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210, and a side outer cover 202 which is arranged in front of the side lens 210 and in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 at predetermined intervals. A plurality of side flashing lenses 204 radially extending from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between the upper left part of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and the side upper inner lens 206 as the side inner lens. 212 and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the side upper inner lens 206 .

In this right side decoration unit 200, the side outer cover 202, the side flashing lens 204, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are formed of translucent members. , the side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flashing lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, LEDs 214a, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b, 214b respectively 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen by the player. In addition, the front surfaces of the upper right side decoration board 214 and the lower right side decoration board 216 are white, and the right side decoration unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. In addition, when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are off, the decorative substrates 214, 216 are inconspicuous. The right side upper decoration board 214 and the right side lower decoration board 216 are connected to the peripheral control board 4010, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c and 216a are controlled by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control board 4010. , 216b to emit light, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be decorated with light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has the right end and the upper end linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 when viewed from the front, and the left end is the game window 101. It is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery of the right side. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a which are divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extend substantially concentrically with the game window 101. and a radiation lens portion 210b consisting of a prism surface of . A plurality of radiation lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend radially from the center lower portion of the game window 101 in a front view, as shown in the figure, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. is recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

In addition, the side lens 210 has a side diffusion lens portion 210c extending in the front-rear direction and arranged in rows in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusing lens portion 210c can widely diffuse the light from the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that the sound from the upper right speaker can be transmitted to the player side. It is designed so that it can be transmitted.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed to have a flat surface. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the side inner lens 212 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the crests protruding forward in the wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210 . The side inner lens 212 can irregularly refract and irregularly reflect light with a wrinkled portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses, and cooperates with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side to make the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 sparkling. At the same time, it is possible to show a mysterious feeling in which the sense of perspective is unclear.

A plurality of high-intensity color LEDs are mounted on the surfaces of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right side decoration unit 200, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a of the side lenses 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°), and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at a position corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 have a relatively wide irradiation angle. Narrower angles (eg, 15° to 60°) are used. In this example, the LEDs 214c of the upper right decorative board 214 are red and green LEDs.

The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decorative unit 200 outputs sounds in the mid-to-high range similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by means of the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion that extends obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right speaker 222 of this example emits sound from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by means of the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, thereby making noise in relation to other pachinko machines. It is becoming difficult to As with the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkled front surface, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the forward protruding ridges of the wrinkled portion. The wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses can refract and reflect light irregularly.

The side flashing lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged to be inserted in front of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and simulates a rugged rocky area with a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. The side lens 210 can be accented. In addition, the side flashing lens 204 can perform radial light emission effect by light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. are divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 so that each can be emphasized.

[1-2C. Left side decorative unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. FIG. The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in this embodiment, as shown, decorates the left half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part when viewed from the front, and the game window 101 on the right side. The left side and the upper side are formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decorative unit 200. - 特許庁The left side decoration unit 240 includes a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width as the right side decoration unit 200, and elliptical windows arranged between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped lower side decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a continuous to the upper side of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and arranged in a row, and a large A frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a is provided.

In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a side flashing lens 246 fitted from the rear side into the small window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flashing lens 246 on the rear side. a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a which are supported from the rear side and are fitted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244; An inner decorative member 251 provided with a plurality of slits 251a arranged behind the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and provided with a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. and a side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by a plurality of belt-shaped lenses arranged radially around the lower left and right central portions of the game window 101. As shown in FIG.

Also, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. a substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged below from the approximate center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and having a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof; A left side upper decorative board cover 258 which covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and a left side cover which covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. and a left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 256. - 特許庁

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 arranged in front of the side inner lens 252 and in the upper right part when viewed from the front, and a transparent transparent speaker 262 which supports the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the front upper right part of the side inner lens 252 . A diffuser portion formed by an upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of band-shaped lenses that are attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and are inserted into the inner decorative member 251 on the upper right in front view from the rear side and extend radially around the lower left and right center. a right upper inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate through which sound can pass.

In this left side decoration unit 240, the side lower decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration board cover 258, and the left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of opaque members. A plated layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver) is provided on the surface of the decorative member 251 . The side flash lens 246 is made of translucent synthetic resin and is entirely made of opaque white synthetic resin. Also, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In addition, in this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (small windows in the radial axial direction centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) On both sides of the frames 242b and 244b, there are formed opening frames 242c and 244c that penetrate the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 in a notched state. Opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by side flash lenses 246 from the rear side. Therefore, the rear side of the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the player due to the milky-white side flashing lens 246. .

On the other hand, the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are closed by inserting the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 from the rear side. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side through 250a can be visually recognized from the player side. A diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is positioned on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. Light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion portion 252a and passes through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 to the rear side of the side inner lens 252. A clear view of the sides is no longer possible. In other words, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player's side.

In addition, the front surfaces of the left side upper decoration board 254 and the left side lower decoration board 256 are white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light from the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b. In addition, when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are off, the decorative substrates 254, 256 are inconspicuous. The left side upper decoration board 254 and the left side lower decoration board 256 are connected to the peripheral control board 4010, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are controlled by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control board 4010. can be appropriately illuminated to decorate the left side decoration unit 240 with light emission.

The side lower decorative frame 242 in the left side decorative unit 240 of this example extends vertically along the left outer periphery of the game window 101 and has a U-shaped cross section with an open rear side. The side lower decorative frame 242 includes a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame 242a arranged between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side are provided, and are made of synthetic resin. formed.

The side lower decorative frame 242 has a peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and a side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form the outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side flashing lens 246, which correspond to each other.

The upper side decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer periphery of the game window 101 to the upper outer periphery. It has a U-shaped cross section with an open side. The side upper decorative frame 244 includes two large window frames 244a that extend along the game window 101 and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame that is arranged between the large window frames 244a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. 244b, and an opening frame 244c that is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the side of the game window 101 and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is notched to the side, and is formed of synthetic resin. ing.

The side upper decorative frame 244 is configured such that a peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and a side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. In other words, the side upper decorative frame 244 can form the outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side flashing lens 246, which correspond to each other. The upper side decorative frame 244 forms a continuous design with the lower side decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240 .

In this example, the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses viewed from the large window frames 242a, 244a, the small window frames 242b, 244b, and the opening frames 242c, 244c 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized.

In addition, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and is sized to cover the left side and the upper side of the game window 101 from the center. there is The side lens 250 has a peripheral lens portion 250a that is fitted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and a shape recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. and a radiation lens portion 250b having a side flash lens 246 disposed on the front side thereof. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed of a single smoothly curved surface, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed of a substantially flat surface. Also, the side lenses 250 are made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 is arranged behind each peripheral lens portion 250a in the side lens 250 and has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the figure, the inner decorative member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and also in the width direction so as to form concentric circles around the center of the game window 101. Multiple are provided. Further, the inner decorative member 251 has a front surface in which a plurality of slits 251 a are formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 . The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer with silver metallic luster on the surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

The side inner lens 252 in the left side decorative unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251, has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is made of substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. there is The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffused portion 252a that bulges forward so that the portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into each inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffusing portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 has a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially around the center lower portion in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface. It intersects (substantially perpendicularly) with the extending direction of the slit 251 a of the decorative member 251 .

The side inner lens 252 has a diffusing portion 252a that can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. However, light is irregularly refracted by a plurality of belt-like lenses formed in the diffusing portion 252a. The rear side is not clearly visible through the portion 252a. As shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a. can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

The left side upper decoration board 254 and the left side lower decoration board 256 of the left side decoration unit 240 are mounted with a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs on their surfaces. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°). LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flashing lens 246), 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15° to 60°).

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decorative unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-to-high range similarly to the side speaker 130, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by an upper speaker bracket 264. there is The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 has a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) projecting obliquely forward and downward at the left-right center of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via a protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 is not visible from the player side when viewed from the front. It has become. In addition, the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the upper left speaker 262 from being mischievous, and the cone of the upper left speaker 262 to be broken to insert an illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1. It's becoming The upper left speaker 262 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, so that it is difficult to make noise with respect to other pachinko machines.

Next, a characteristic light emission effect in the left side decorative unit 240 of this example will be described. The left side decorative unit 240 includes, as described above, the side lens 250 that forms the outer surface of the left side decorative unit 240 and has a curved transparent peripheral lens portion 250a, and the peripheral lens portion 250a that is disposed behind the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plated layer with metallic luster and having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction crossing the direction in which the slits 251a extend. A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a made up of a plurality of band-shaped lenses, and a left side upper decoration substrate 254 and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lens 252 and having a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a mounted thereon. and (see FIG. 35, etc.). Thus, in the left side decorative unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252, passes through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251, Light is emitted from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 toward the player side, and the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission.

By the way, the light emitted forward (toward the side lens 250) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is partially transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250, which is partially transparent, and is emitted to the player side. At the same time, the rest of the light is reflected on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a and illuminates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 . Since the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer having a silvery metallic luster, the light reflected toward the inner decorative member 251 from the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a reaches the surface of the inner decorative member 251. The (front surface) reflects toward the peripheral lens portion 250a side, and part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a and is irradiated to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251, and the diffuser portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved. The light reflected on the rear surface side) converges, and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front side) is diffused. The indirect light reflected by the lens portion 250a and the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 are irradiated to positions that are shifted from each other. Further, the light passing through the slits 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in stripes in the extending direction of the slits 251a by the diffusing portions 252a formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252, and crosses the slits 251a. (substantially orthogonal). Therefore, the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped light beams having different densities and extending in a direction that is longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. As a result, a fantastic luminous decoration with perspective can be achieved (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of this embodiment is, as shown in FIG. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 includes an annular center frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b extending slenderly from the top of the center frame 281a to the left and right and tapering toward the tip, and A front decorative member 281 provided with a frame-shaped lower extension frame 281c extending left and right from the lower portion of the central frame 281a and tapering toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower portion disposed on the rear side of the front decorative member 281. A translucent upper lens 282 that closes the extension frame 281c and has a through hole 282a smaller in diameter than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a; A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 that is inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulges forward, and a plate-like diffusing lens 285 that is arranged behind the upper central lens 284 and has a plurality of fine prisms formed on its surface. , an annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffuser lens 285 and is supported behind the upper lens 282, and a cylinder that is disposed behind the lens support member 286 and has approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286. A light shielding member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged on the rear side of the light shielding member 287 and at positions corresponding to the inner side of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287, and positions corresponding to the outer side of the cylindrical portion 287a. a top center decorative substrate 288 having a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged in the front mounted thereon.

The upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289 on the front side. , a board cover 291 covering the rear surface of the upper side decoration board 290 and attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and a board cover 291 attached to the lower rear surface of the board cover 291 and extending rearward. a mounting bracket 292; an upper and lower cover 293 mounted on the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281; and a contoured upper and lower decorative cover 294 .

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the board cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 in a plate-like shape, and has a notch 295a at the center in the left-right direction, the rear end side of which is open. It includes a cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 attached to the right side of the unit base 289 in front view and shaped into a predetermined shape. .

In the upper decoration unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, so that the front decoration member 281 glitters with external light. The upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a central ring lens portion 282b that faces the central frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a, and an upper extending portion of the front decorative member 281. and an extension frame lens portion 282c facing inside the frames of the frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c. The upper lens 282 has a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b and arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. A plurality of prisms extending concentrically are formed. As a result, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms and belt-like lenses of the upper lens 282, so that the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be seen clearly.

Also, the upper center lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper center lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, and a plurality of concentric lenses on the rear side. is invisible to

In addition, the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface, each of which is a full-color LED. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately decorated with light. Furthermore, the upper side decoration substrate 290 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface thereof, each of which is a full-color LED. are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can light-embellish the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 by properly emitting light from the LEDs 290a.

[1-2E. plate unit]
Next, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper tray 301 and a lower tray 302 for storing game balls T dispensed from a prize ball device 740 described later. A game ball T can be supplied to a batted ball launching device 650 to be described later via a ball feeding unit 580 . As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 that is fixed to the approximate center of the front surface, is open upward and rearward, and has a large frontwardly bulging left side (rotary support side) when viewed from the front. A top plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the horizontal direction projects forward when viewed, a top plate front decoration member 316 attached to the upper front edge of the top plate top panel 314, and a top plate front part. A top plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the top plate top panel 314 continues to the right portion of the top plate front decorative member 316 and covers the top right portion of the top plate top panel 314. An upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is provided.

In addition, the plate unit 300 is mounted on the lower surface of the upper plate 314 on the right side from the center in the left and right direction. and an upper dish decoration substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on its upper surface. A part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper right upper plate decorative member 319 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 to emit light.

Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper plate main body 312 and is opened upward and rearward, and the center in the horizontal direction bulges forward when viewed from the front, and the front end extends to the center in the horizontal direction. A dish-shaped lower plate body 324 is formed so as to become lower as it goes, and is fixed to the upper part of the lower plate body 324, and when viewed from the front, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in substantially the same way as the lower plate body 324, and the front end is bulged in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower tray top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000, which will be described later, cover the front end of the lower side of the lower tray main body 324 and extend to the right when viewed from the front. A lower tray cover 328 having a facing lock hole 328a, and an upper opening 330a and an upper opening 330a which decorate the right side of the lower end of the lower tray cover 328 from a left-right center position and are coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower tray cover 328. and a lower tray right side cover 330 having a lower opening 330b that opens downward and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

The plate unit 300 also includes a lower plate upper left side cover 332 extending obliquely to cover the left front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and the lower plate upper left side cover 332 arranged at the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332 and extending forward and backward. A lower pan left lower side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in a direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that closes the opening 334a of the lower pan left lower side cover 334 from the rear side and allows sound to pass through, and a protection and a frame-like holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower pan. The right front end of the lower tray top plate 326 is covered with the upper tray front decoration member 316 .

In addition, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 formed in a continuous shape and having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. A cover body 339 having a gently curved disc shape and having a plurality of holes is provided so as to close the cover 338a from the rear side and protrude forward.

In this example, since the cover body 339 is made of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to deform even if it is pushed or hit from the front side. as long as it can be protected. Also, the side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer with a silvery metallic luster formed on its surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball extracting mechanism 340 attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 for removing game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower tray ball extracting mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for extracting game balls T stored in the lower tray 302 downward, and a lower tray ball extracting mechanism 350 attached to the upper left side of the tray unit base 310 in front view and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. and a ball lending unit 360 that operates a ball lending machine (also called CR unit 6, not shown).

The plate unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls T by a part of the plate unit base 310, an upper plate main body 312, an upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls T by a part of the plate unit base 310, a lower plate main body 324, a lower plate top plate 326, a lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate-like shape extending in the left-right direction. are provided. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for mounting a ball rental unit 360 is formed through the left end of the decoration portion 310a in the longitudinal direction. The plate unit base 310 includes an upper plate ball supply port 310c arranged below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) and penetrating in the longitudinal direction in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and an upper plate ball supply port 310c. An upper tray ball discharge port 310d penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically below the right end of the decorative portion 310a below the opening 310c (approximately in the middle of the plate unit base 310 in the height direction), and an upper plate. A pair of lower plate support portions 310e are arranged directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface height. In addition, the upper tray ball outlet 310d is formed continuously up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower tray support portion 310e arranged directly below.

The tray unit 300 is disposed between a pair of lower tray support portions 310e and is fitted with the lower tray main body 324 and the rear end of the lower tray top plate 326 to form a horizontally long rectangular annular lower tray support when viewed from the front. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower tray ball supply port 310g that is arranged in the lower portion of the part surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and is located on the right side of the center and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h that extends cylindrically rearward so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. A notch portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball T can pass is provided.

The upper tray ball supply port 310c of the tray unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the cutouts 101a and 162 of the door frame base body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the first bulb outlet 544 a of the unit 540 . The front end of the upper tray ball supply port 310c is provided with a guide recess 310j that extends long to the right in front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is slanted so that the right end side in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is slanted so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball T.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper tray ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls T stored in the upper tray 301, the game balls T paid out from the prize ball device 740 through the foul cover unit 540 However, since it is no longer possible to enter the upper tray 301 in a straight line from the upper tray ball supply port 310c, the game ball T that is paid out comes into contact with the game ball T that closes the front side of the upper tray ball supply port 310c. The direction of rolling is changed by the movement of the ball, and the ball is guided to roll in the right direction in front view in the guide recess 310j, and from near the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball T stored in the upper tray 301. It will be released. As a result, the game balls T can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper tray 301, so that when the game balls T block the front of the upper tray ball supply port 310c, the player can move the game balls T by hand. It is possible to continue to supply (release) the put-out game balls T into the upper tray 301 without bringing the game balls T closer together, thereby preventing the player from feeling annoyed by the accumulation of the game balls T in the upper tray 301.例文帳に追加It is possible to prevent the player from declining interest in the game by devoting himself to the operation of hitting the game ball T and the game with the hit game ball T, and at the same time suppressing the decline in interest in the game. The storage amount of T can be increased.

The upper tray ball discharge opening 310d of the tray unit base 310 includes the opening 344a of the upper tray ball removal base 344 of the upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entry port 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 through the hole. Further, the lower tray ball supply port 310g has a lower tray ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side thereof, which penetrates the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h is connected to the upper tray ball extraction mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal channel 344c of the upper tray ball removal base 344. As shown in FIG.

In this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower tray ball supply port 310g is provided with a widening portion 310k that widens leftward in a front view. The front end of 310g spreads out in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early occurrence of ball clogging in the lower tray ball supply port 310g due to the game balls T in the lower tray 302 accumulated in front of the lower tray ball supply port 310g. A game ball T can be supplied into the lower tray 302. - 特許庁

The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (rotary support side) bulges forward from the center when viewed from the front, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. there is The bottom surface of the upper tray main body 312 has a rear end near the bottom of the upper tray ball supply opening 310c in the tray unit base 310 on the pivot side, and a rear end on the open side near the upper tray ball discharge opening 310d in the tray unit base 310. The game balls T supplied to the upper tray main body 312 (upper tray 301) from the upper tray ball supply port 310c are guided to the upper tray ball discharge port 310d. It is designed to be

The upper plate main body 312 has a metal upper plate rail 313 that can come into contact with the game ball T from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although illustration is omitted, the upper tray rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that the static electricity charged on the game ball T can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate main body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction projects forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate main body 312. is formed with a mounting hole 314a penetrating vertically and into which an upper tray ball removing button 341 of an upper tray ball removing mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a stepped shape that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312 at the front end thereof, and has a decorative mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 thereon. and an operation unit mounting portion 314c formed in a stepped shape further lower than the decoration mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate main body 312 at the center in the left-right direction and for mounting an operation unit 400 described later. there is

The upper plate front decorative member 316 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and is formed into a curved shape extending in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314 . The upper plate front decorative member 316 has a smooth shape on the left side from the right side of the center in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in a rugged shape like this. In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate front decorative member 316 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the right rear surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and can refract light irregularly. The rear side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is arranged behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having silver metallic luster on its surface. ing. As a result, when the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is assembled, the portion that can be seen through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side, whereas the portion that can be seen through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is clearly visible from the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The part that can be seen through is made so that it looks unclear from the player's side and the sense of distance is uncertain.

In addition, the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The surface of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape like the right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 . It is formed integrally with the right portion, and the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer circumference of an upper bowl ball extracting button 341 of an upper bowl ball extracting mechanism 340 described later. In addition, the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the rear surface (lower surface), which can refract light irregularly and prevent the player from clearly seeing the lower side. there is An upper plate decoration board 322 is arranged behind the right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration board 322 By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately caused to emit light.

The lower plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 includes a bottom plate 324a that spreads forward in a fan shape in a plan view, the rear end of which is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction, and the bottom plate 324a that is formed so that the approximate center of the upper surface is the lowest, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. and side plates 324c rising upward from the front and side ends of the bottom plate 324a except for the rear end. The side plate 324c of the lower tray main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side. The upper end that rises upward from the side end is formed in a linear shape, and both the left and right ends of the lower tray top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

The bottom plate 324a and the rear ends of the side plates 324c of the lower plate main body 324 are inserted and supported in the lower plate support grooves 310f formed in the front surface of the plate unit base 310. As shown in FIG. The lower tray ball removal hole 324b of the lower tray main body 324 is closed by an open/close shutter 352 of a lower tray ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower tray cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower tray side cover 330 is made of a predetermined synthetic resin, and has a plated layer with a silver metallic feel (not a mirror surface but a matt state as if sandblasted) on the surface. The lower tray side cover 330 has a plate-like portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the tray unit 300 . The lock hole 328a of the lower tray cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower tray side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

The lower plate upper left cover 332 is made of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plated layer with silver metallic luster on its surface. The lower left lower cover 334 of the lower tray is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plated layer with a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends rearward from the lower end of the lower left side of the lower tray unit 300 . It has a plate-like part that forms a The opening 334a of the lower left cover 334 of the lower tray is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of a speaker 821 provided in the body frame 3, which will be described later, so that the sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side. It has become. A protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left lower cover 334 is made of a punching metal plate with a plurality of holes to prevent unauthorized tools from being inserted therein.

The plate unit 300 of this example is closed at the bottom surface except for the center in the horizontal direction by the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower left lower plate cover 334. The lower plate side cover 330 and the lower left lower plate cover 334 The bottom surface between is closed by a lower tray ball removing mechanism 340 which will be described later.

The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 includes an upper tray ball removal button 341 that is attached to the mounting hole 314a of the upper tray upper panel 314 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction, and the upper tray ball removal button 341. and an operating piece 342 supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310 which moves up and down more than the upper plate ball removal button 341, and which supports the operating piece 342 so as to be operable (rotatable) and the plate unit base 310. and a contact piece that slides vertically by the vertical movement of the mounting base 346 attached to the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 that is supported by the mounting base 346, and contacts the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feed unit 580, which will be described later. An upper tray ball extracting slider 343 provided on the rear side of the tray unit base 310 provided with 343a, and an upper tray ball attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 310 by supporting the upper tray ball removing slider 343 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. a punch base 344;

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340 has an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper tray ball removing button 341 so that the upper tray ball removing button 341 is positioned at the upper movement end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 343 is in a state of being biased upward by a coil spring provided between it and the upper bowl ball extraction base 344 .

The upper tray ball removal base 344 of the upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper tray ball discharge opening 310d of the tray unit base 310, and at the same time, communicates with the upper tray ball discharge opening 310d to open forward. 43), and a ball guiding passage 344b (FIGS. 42 and 44), and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guide channel 344b, it extends substantially along the lower side of the upper tray ball extraction base 344 toward the end on the right side (rotary support side) in rear view. It is provided with a ball removal channel 344c in which the played game ball T can flow down.

The upper tray ball extraction base 344 has an opening 344a that communicates with the upper tray ball discharge port 310d, and a lower end of a ball guide passage 344b that communicates with the opening 344a. Through the feed opening 113, it communicates with the entry port 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. 580.

The upper end of the ball extraction channel 344c of the upper tray ball extraction base 344, which is adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b, communicates with the ball extraction port 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h in the tray unit base 310, and the game ball T discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580. can be guided to the lower plate 302. A lower rear end portion of the ball removal channel 344c is closed by an upper plate ball removal channel cover 345. As shown in FIG.

In this upper bowl ball extracting mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball extracting button 341 is pushed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also moves. Move down. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580, which contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a, rotates the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. As a result, the partition between the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. As a result, the game balls T stored in the upper tray 301 pass from the upper tray ball outlet 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper tray ball extraction base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After entering the ball outlet 581b, the ball is discharged from the ball outlet 581b into the ball outlet channel 344c of the upper tray ball outlet base 344, and through the lower tray ball supply trough 310h of the tray unit base 310, from the lower tray ball supply opening 310g to the lower tray 302. can be discharged to

The ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removing slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper tray ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be absorbed. can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball T can be prevented from bouncing off the partition portion 583a.

The lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 in the tray unit 300 is disposed between the lower tray side cover 330 and the lower left lower tray cover 334 on the lower side of the lower tray main body 324, and forms the bottom center portion of the tray unit 300. A pull-out base 351, a plate-like open/close shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower pan ball pull-out base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower pan ball pull-out hole 324b of the lower pan main body 324, and the open/close shutter 352 is rotated. a lower dish ball extracting slider 353 supported on the upper surface of a lower dish ball extracting base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction; there is

The lower tray ball removal base 351 has a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating vertically at a position facing the lower tray ball removal hole 324b of the lower tray main body 324. As shown in FIG. The opening/closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower tray ball removal hole 324b, and a shutter ball removal hole disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in the vertical direction substantially coinciding with the lower tray ball removal hole 324b. The closing portion 352a is urged by a coil spring 356 between the lower tray ball removal base 351 and the closing portion 352a to a position to close the lower tray ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a. .

Although not shown in detail, the open/close shutter 352 has a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower plate ball removal slider 353. When this contact pin contacts the lower plate ball removal slider 353, , the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b are rotated backward by the lower plate ball removal slider 353, and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. It is possible to do so.

In addition, the lower tray ball removal mechanism 350 is configured so that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the open/close shutter 352 is substantially coincident with the lower tray ball removal hole 324b of the lower tray main body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower tray ball removal base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in place to hold it in the moving position.

When the surface shape of the lower tray ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower tray cover 328 and the like, the lower tray ball removal mechanism 350 is closed when the lower tray ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end. The closing portion 352a of the open/close shutter 352 closes the lower tray ball extraction hole 324b of the lower tray main body 324. As shown in FIG. In this state, game balls T can be stored in the lower tray main body 324 (lower tray 302). When the lower tray ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed backward, the lower tray ball removal button 354 and the lower tray ball removal slider 353 slide rearward, and the lower tray ball removal slider 353 slides rearward. The opening/closing shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

As the open/close shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball removal hole 352b overlaps with the lower tray ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a. 324b, and the game balls T stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged below the tray unit 300 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 324b. When the lower tray ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower tray ball removal hole 324b are substantially aligned, the lower tray ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. By locking (holding) the slide of the lower pan ball extracting slider 353, the lower pan ball extracting button 354 remains in an open state in which it retreats rearward, and the shutter ball extracting hole 352b is opened. The game balls T stored in the lower tray 302 can be ejected downward even if the lower tray ball extraction button 354 is not kept pressed.

On the other hand, when closing the lower tray ball removal hole 324b, pressing the retracted open lower tray ball removal button 354 further rearward releases the lower tray ball removal slide 353 held by the holding mechanism 355, and the lower tray ball removal slide 353 is released. The ball removal slide 353 is slidable, and the open/close shutter 352 is biased by the coil spring in the direction in which the closing portion 352a closes the lower plate ball removal hole 324b. It rotates in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball extraction hole 324b. As the open/close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower tray ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower tray ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower tray ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the closed state position substantially matching the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game ball T can be stored in the lower plate 302.例文帳に追加

Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above function, and the detailed explanation of the mechanism is omitted.

A ball rental unit 360 in the plate unit 300 has a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pushed backward, and a rental balance display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 . This ball lending unit 360 puts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and presses a ball lending button 361 to release a predetermined number of game balls T to the tray unit. 300 can be lent (paid out) into the upper tray 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the lent cash and the prepaid card will be returned after subtracting the balance of the lent amount. ing. In addition, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed in the remaining lending display section 363 .

The ball rental unit 360 is attached to the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed in the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the plate unit base 310 from the rear side. The ball lending unit 360 is also provided with a crime prevention cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the crime prevention cover 180 .

More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 includes a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the remaining rental display portion 363, and a remaining rental display portion 363 that is arranged behind the front cover 365 and attached with the rental ball button 361. and a ball rental unit substrate 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operation of the return button 362 is attached, and the rear side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 covering the rear side of the ball rental unit substrate 366. and a rear cover 367 attached to the . The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364 .

The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and a front portion formed between the button openings 310m. A transparent front cover 365 having a rectangular display opening 310n closed by a cover 365, and projections 310o formed on the outer peripheries of the two button openings 310m and protruding forward, respectively, to close the display opening 310n. A remaining loan display portion 363 arranged on the rear side through the hole can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the projecting portion 310o of the plate unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

In the ball rental unit 360 of this example, as shown in the figure, the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 is arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c. are placed facing the Further, in the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball rental button 361 is. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a different color from the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball rental button 361 and return button 362 .

In addition, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a projecting portion 310o projecting forward (toward the player) from the outer periphery of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before touching the ball rental button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball rental button 361 or the return button 362, and the ball rental button 361, the return button 362, etc. can be prevented from being erroneously operated.

The plate unit 300 of this example is provided with an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and can be made into a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as the conventional pachinko machine provided with two storage plates. To make the pachinko machine 1 reminiscent of a pachinko machine and to reduce the feeling of uneasiness or the like given to a player even with a new pachinko machine 1 (a new model of pachinko machine) so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine for playing. It's becoming

[1-2F. operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. FIG. The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper tray 301 at substantially the center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. It is equipped with an operation unit 405, and can receive the operation of the player according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved, and the player can be operated only by hitting the game ball T. Instead, it enables the player to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation portion 401 , a cylindrical pressing operation portion 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation portion 401 , and an annular driven portion 405 connected to the lower end of the dial operation portion 405 . A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 to which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction; A base member having an opening 420a through which a spring 418 biasing upward and a gear rail 416a and a button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 can pass, and to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. 420, an upper cover 422 covering the upper surface of the base member 420 and having an opening 422a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operating portion 401 can pass; A lower cover 424 that covers the lower surface of the member 420 and the dial drive motor 414 is mainly provided.

The operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and extends outward from an opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the plate unit 300, and a cover body 426 disposed above the cover body 426 and formed into a predetermined shape and plated with silver metallic luster on the surface. It has a layered inner cover 427 and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 . The inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylindrical portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

Furthermore, the operation unit 400 is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass. A dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of , and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 for detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401, 432b, a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the press operation unit 405. The button decoration substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by the substrate holding claws 416g of the operation portion holding member 416. As shown in FIG.

The dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a translucent material, and includes a cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction, and an inner cylinder portion 401a extending outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending cylindrically downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b and shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder and a flange portion 401d annularly extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401 d of the dial operating portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a of the upper cover 422 . In addition, the dial operation portion 401 has a connection locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylindrical portion 401a, and by locking the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410, the dial operation portion 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

Further, the dial operating portion 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. A projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylindrical portion 401a. Although the details will be described later, this projecting portion 401f can come into contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. slanted surfaces, so that the contact area becomes large when they come into contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) toward the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a closed upper end, and includes a cylindrical button body 406 with a bottom, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 . The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape that tapers downward as the lower surface of the bottom portion goes downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape and penetrates in the vertical direction. It's like

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower part of the outer periphery and having lower ends protruding outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking protrusion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support tube 416b, the upward moving end is prevented from coming off the button body 406 from the button support section 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the engaging claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support tube 416b. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the abutting portion in the button support cylinder 416b. It is designed to be able to rotate within a range.

Further, the button body 406 is provided with a press detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer periphery lower portion of the button body 406b and that can be detected by the press detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432 . When the button main body 406 (press operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418, the press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c.

Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller outer diameter on the lower side than the approximate center in the vertical direction, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper and lower sides. is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 below the stepped portion 407a, and has a dial operation portion above the stepped portion 407a. 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a and a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f. Accordingly, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. , the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be retracted further into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are made of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408 , and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407 .

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the driving gear 412 on its annular outer circumference. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operating portion holding member 416, and has an annular slide on the lower surface thereof that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416. It has a moving surface 410a. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button supporting cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 slides and rotates substantially concentrically with the button supporting cylinder 416b. It is possible.

In addition, the driven gear 410 has a pair of connecting locking claws 410b extending upward from opposite positions of the upper end and protruding inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operating portion 401 are connected so as to be rotatable together by being engaged with the connection engaging portion 401e of the inner cylindrical portion 401a.

The driven gear 410 also has a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b. With the slit 410d formed therebetween, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operating portion 401 can be detected by the detection patterns of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detecting piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

Further, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 as shown, and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 so as to rotate integrally therewith. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control the direction of rotation, the speed of rotation, and the angle of rotation. , the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410 . In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the driving gear 412 (rotating shaft) forward and reverse in small increments by the dial driving motor 414 . Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short period of time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is suppressed by clicking. It is designed to be able to give a feeling.

Furthermore, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a cylindrical button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. and a locking projection 416f ( 49 and 50), and a through hole 416c that penetrates through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and transmits light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 into the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). An opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 can pass vertically through the bottom outside the button support cylinder 416b, and an opening 416d through which the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b can pass. and a pair of board holding claws 416g extending downward from the bottom surface for engaging and holding the button decoration board 432. I have it.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed inside the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and locks. It further includes a plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claws 406b. This abutting portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angular range, and prevents it from rotating around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, the operation unit holding member 416 has screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, etc., which are appropriately positioned. provided for.

The driven gear 410 is inserted through the outer circumference of the button support cylinder 416b and placed on the gear rail 416a, so that the driven gear 410 (dial operation part 401) slides around a predetermined rotation axis. It can be supported so as to be dynamically rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the bottom surface of the button main body 406 in the shape of a truncated cone. 405) is biased upward.

The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is made of metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is less likely to break even if the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is strongly struck. The base member 420 includes a lower recessed portion 420b recessed upward into which the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 can be fitted, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower recessed portion 420b. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c recessed downward and capable of accommodating at least the driven gear 410, arranged on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b. I have it. As shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 has a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414, which opens downward outside the lower recessed portion 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d which opens downward from the outside of the lower recessed portion 420b. It has a plurality of (four in this example) legs 420e that protrude by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f that open downward at the lower ends of the legs 420e.

In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged upwardly outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portions 420g are arranged upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. A plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the protruding dial decoration board 430 are provided. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 has positioning bosses for positioning each member, mounting holes, etc., at appropriate positions on its upper and lower surfaces.

This base member 420 has an opening 420a in the center, and the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower recessed portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from below. is screwed into the operating section holding member 416 from above through the ceiling of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operating section holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, when the operating portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the lower recessed portion 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recessed portion 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

A positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end of the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 is fitted with a positioning projection 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of a lower cover 424, which will be described later. 420 and lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions relative to each other. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is attached to the driven gear 420h. It is kept out of contact with the gear 410 .

Further, the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the motor attachment portion 420d of the base member 420, so that the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 and the surface of the base member 420 are in contact with each other. , and the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420 . As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, thereby preventing malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an inner diameter opening 422a through which the outer cylindrical portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass but the collar portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The top cover 422 is long in the direction connecting the axial center of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axial center of the dial driving motor 414 (driving gear 412) (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) in plan view. It is formed to extend, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled together.

In addition, the upper cover 422 has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c extending downward from the outer periphery of one side (the front side of the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1) and having a lower end protruding outward. I have. This locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

The upper cover 422 has the operation portion holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial member 401, etc. attached to the base member 420, and the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 422a from below. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422a can prevent the dial operation part 401 from coming off upward.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box-like shape with an open top, and the outer circumference of the lower cover 424 has a shape that substantially matches the outer circumference of the upper cover 422 . A positioning projection 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b at the upper portions of both ends in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422. The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

As shown, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and an opening 426a extending outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the plate unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300. In this state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) can be attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). When the is pressed or hit, the cover main body 426 is elastically deformed to reduce the impact.

With the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the operation unit 400 attaches the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300 with predetermined screws. The structure is such that an inner cover 427 and a surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426 .

In the operation unit 400 of this embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation part 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is assumed to be the same length. The pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 has a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 that is 2.5 times the length of the rotation detection piece 410 in the circumferential direction. It is said that As a result, although the details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs between detection and non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation is detected. From the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b, it is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating.

Further, although details will be described later, the operation unit 400 of this example can rotate the dial operation section 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation section 401 step by step by the driving force of a dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, and rotates the dial operation section 401 when the player rotates it. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating on purpose, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation section 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial driving motor 414 forward and backward in small steps.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts against the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, thereby 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e, so that the load applied to the pressing operation portion 405 is transferred to the dial via the stepped portion 407a and the projecting portion 401f. It can be distributed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is hard to break.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed to bring the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 into contact with each other, and the dial drive motor 414 is rotated in small increments. By repeating rotation and reversal, it is possible to vibrate not only the dial operation unit 401 but also the pressing operation unit 405, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 surprises the player to enjoy the game and performance. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation part 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation part 405 that can be pressed by the player are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like strikes the operation units 401 and 405 strongly. In addition to being able to operate, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. can.

Further, the pressing operation part 405 is arranged at the center of the ring-shaped dial operation part 401, and if the pressing operation part 405 is to be hit strongly, the dial operation part 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation part The force of striking 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405, and the concentration of the striking impact is suppressed to prevent the operation unit 400 and the plate unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operating sections 401 and 405 of the operating unit 400 can be made to withstand strong blows, and the player can freely operate the operating sections 401 and 405. The operability of the player 405 can be improved, and the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 and the like are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. When the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300 as shown in FIG. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the shock and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 contacts the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom portion of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (dish unit 300) can receive impact and load, so the impact and the like from the operation portions 401 and 405 are dispersed to avoid concentration of the impact and the like. The impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the plate unit 300 can be enhanced.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward at positions away from the positions supporting the operation portions 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the plate unit 300. Even if the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by coming into contact with the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the operation portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not placed directly under the impact. is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed) to absorb the impact from the operation parts 401 and 405 to some extent. By reducing the impact, it is possible to prevent the plate unit 300 from being damaged.

In addition, the dial operation portion 401 is held by the operation portion holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a portion of the dial operation portion 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even if the operation portion holding member 416 that holds the dial operation portion 401 is disengaged from the base member 420 and moves downward when the operation portion 401 is struck from above, the dial operation portion 401 is in contact with the upper surface of the base member 420 . The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 can be well prevented from falling down.

Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 with the pressing operation unit 405 arranged in the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates (rotational drive including vibration) without permission. As a result, the player can be surprised and focused on the performance by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. 401 (press operation unit 405) can be made more diverse to make it difficult to get bored, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, the dial operating portion 401 is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the driving gear 412, and it is likely that the position of the rotating shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is set to the position of the dial operating portion 401 (driven gear). 410), so that even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted through the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to avoid direct contact with the dial drive motor 414 and prevent damage to the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400).

Furthermore, the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a diameter smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to the impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 can move downward. It is possible to reliably prevent depression beyond 420 . In addition, since the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating portion 401 and the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to disperse the impact and load from the operation section holding member 416 and prevent the breakage of the operation section holding member 416 .

Further, since the dial driving motor 414 for rotating the dial operating section 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operating section 401 is frequently rotated by the dial driving motor 414, and the dial driving motor 414 rotates. Even if the amount of heat generated increases due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 due to the player forcibly stopping the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 in spite of being driven to rotate by The heat generated from the dial driving motor 414 can be well dissipated and radiated through the base member 420, and the dial driving means 414 can be prevented from malfunctioning due to overheating. A pachinko machine 1 capable of withstanding a high load, sufficiently embodying the effects of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial driving means 414 as described above, and entertaining the players. can do.

Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rotation of the dial operation section 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting pressure of the pressure operation section 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the controller, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the player's operation based on the detection signal. It is possible to provide a performance with bodily sensation, amuse the player, and suppress the decline in interest in the game. In addition, a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 for decorating the operation units 401 and 405 with light emission are provided. By doing so, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be made to operate the operation units 401 and 405 easily.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are brought into contact with each other. is pressed, the dial driving motor 414 vibrates the dial operating portion 401 by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined angle range, so that the stepped portion 407a in contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 The pressing operation part 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, it is possible to provide the player with an operational feeling for the pressing operation 405, so that the performance using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game. In addition, since the pressing operation part 405 vibrates when the pressing operation part 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation part 405, which was thought not to move by itself. It is possible to make the player think that something is going to happen, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be moved without permission, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the performance using the operation unit 400. At the same time, the player can actively operate the operation unit 400, and enjoy the operation of the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the operation unit 400, thereby reducing interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed, the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 are brought into contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation portion 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation portion 401 side. Even if the pressing operation part 405 is hit hard, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation part 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation part 401 side, and the load resistance and impact resistance of the pressing operation part 405 can be improved. can increase Therefore, even if the pressing operation part 405 is hit hard, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation part 405 from being damaged, thereby avoiding the interruption of the game due to the damage of the pressing operation part 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation portion 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range about an axis extending in the vertical direction. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, the dial operation on the operation unit 400 can be prevented by the player. The respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be reliably recognized, the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405 can be guided. The characters of ``PUSH'' which are displayed are not rotated or tilted greatly, and can be easily read from the player side, and the player can surely recognize that the pressing operation part 405 is to be pressed. be able to.

In addition, the dial operation portion 401 is provided with a projecting portion 401f projecting from the inner circumference of the inner cylindrical portion 401a toward the axial center side, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction. At the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. The gap between the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dirt and dust to enter, and to prevent the occurrence of problems such as difficulty in rotating the dial operation part 401 or difficulty in pressing the pressing operation part 405 due to the intrusion of foreign matter. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed, any part in the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation portion 401 is pressed. Since the contact can be made even at any position, even if the pressing operation part 405 is pressed with a feeling of tilting (pressing a position biased toward the outer periphery of the pressing operation part 405 from the center), the dial operation part 401 can be reliably brought into contact with the pressing operation part 401. Thus, the rotation drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation portion 405 via the dial operation portion 401 . Further, since the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 are in annular contact with each other, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation portion 401 side, and the load resistance of the pressing operation portion 405 and the Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the rotation axis of the dial operation portion 401, it is not inclined. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial driving motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation portion 405 via the dial operation portion 401 . In addition, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially dispersed in the outer direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing concentration of the load and increasing the durability of the operation unit 400 . The load capacity and impact resistance can be surely increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of troubles during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor that can rotate forward and backward, the dial operation unit 401 is not only rotated, but also easily stopped at a predetermined position and rotated forward and reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and has the above effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing the game balls T, it is likely that the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 for storing a large number of game balls T will be reduced. is high, it is possible to sufficiently respond to a strong blow to the operation unit 400 (pressing operation portion 405), and the effect using the operation unit 400 can be easily enjoyed.

[1-2G. handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As illustrated, the handle device 500 of this embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the dish side outer cover 334 of the dish unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and has a cylindrical shape with a front end that bulges in the direction perpendicular to the axis; and a front end cover 506 disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and cooperating with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the handle body rear 504 .

The handle device 500 is rotatably supported at its rear and front ends by an inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle body 504, the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506, and the handle body 500 is mounted on the handle body. A shaft member 510 which is rotatable integrally with 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on its outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 which meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a which is integrally rotatable with the transmission gear 511. and a rotational position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502 .

Further, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511. Through the transmission gear 511, the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated clockwise in a front view. a biasing auxiliary spring 514; a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508; A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported to operate a firing stop switch 518, and one end of which is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end of which is attached to the handle main body 504 to rotate the handle main body 504 to an initial rotational position (counterclockwise when viewed from the front). and a handle return spring 522 that biases the handle to return to the rotation end in the direction of .

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of this embodiment has a front end that is open on the front side and bulges out roundly to the rear, and a rear end that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape. Three grooves 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylindrical shape. The three grooves 502a of the handlebar base 502 correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handlebar bracket 140, one on the upper side and two on the lower side, at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. are placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting it into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502 a fits with the ridge 143 .

The handle device 500 has a handle main body 504 formed with arc-shaped slits 504a arranged concentrically with its rotation axis, and a front end cover 506 formed with three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward. These mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. As shown in FIG. As a result, the circumferential ends of the slits 504a in the handle body 504 come into contact with the attachment bosses 506a of the front end cover 506, thereby restricting the rotation range of the handle body 504. As shown in FIG.

In the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking protrusion 504b that protrudes rearward. By being locked, the handle body 504 is urged to rotate counterclockwise in a front view by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end.

The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140 . The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface slanted so as to face the outside (opening side) in plan view from above, so that the handle mounted via the handle bracket 140 can be mounted. The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1), and the door frame 5 is attached and fixed. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the rotation operation can be easily performed without any sense of incompatibility.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. The internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball shooting device 650, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500. - 特許庁

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductivity, and when the player touches the handle body 504 or the like, the touch sensor 516 detects the contact. When the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 is detecting the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball T is hit. It is possible to do so. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball T by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the shooting solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball T can be hit. First, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original one, thereby reducing the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

When the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing power supply board 831 stops the rotation of the firing solenoid 654. It's like As a result, the shooting of the game ball T can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, The game ball T can be shot with a hitting strength of .

The handle device 500 of this example electrically detects the rotation operation of the handle body 504 by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512, the firing power supply board 831. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the batted ball firing device 650 provided on the body frame 3 are connected to the door like a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism for linking with each other when the frame 5 is closed and releasing the link when the door frame 5 is opened, so that the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of troubles in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to the trouble of hitting the game ball T.

[1-2H. foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and the game ball T dispensed from the prize ball unit 700 described later and the shot ball launcher 650 are fired. A game ball T (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 despite being played is guided to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.例文帳に追加The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having an open front side and having flow paths for a plurality of game balls T inside, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542 .

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first ball inlet 542a arranged in the upper right corner in a rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a cover base communicating with the first ball inlet. A first ball passage 542b that widens to the right in front view toward the front end of 542, and a second ball inlet 542c that is arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball inlet 542a. , and a second ball inlet 542c extending downward inside the cover base 542 and communicating with the second ball passage 542d and inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower right corner in a front view. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. are formed at positions facing each other. The second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, as shown in the figure, which is approximately three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball T. A housing space 546 capable of housing a predetermined amount of game balls T is formed.

In addition, the cover base 542 has a foul ball inlet 542e that is arranged in the upper part of the center in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e to guide the game ball T to the upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. and a foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 also has an opening/closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the rear surface of the lower side of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the opening/closing operation piece 542g comes into contact with the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening/closing crank 793. The opening/closing shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is arranged in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. and a second ball outlet 544b arranged at the lower right corner in front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the tray unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100 . The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h in the tray unit 300 through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110. As shown in FIG.

The foul cover unit 540 of this example passes the game ball T supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. Balls can be supplied from the outlet 544a to the upper tray 301 through the upper tray ball supply port 310c of the tray unit 300. FIG. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball T supplied from the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. The lower tray 302 can be supplied from the outlet 544b through the lower tray ball supply gutter 310h and the lower tray ball supply port 310g of the tray unit 300. As shown in FIG.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 is such that when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the body frame 3, although the details will be described later. When the game ball T shot by the batted ball shooting device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and falls down the foul space 626 as a foul ball, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball T received by the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d ( supply).

In addition, the foul cover unit 540 of this example forms an upstream side (left side in a front view) of the storage space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and is swingable by the game balls T stored in the storage space 546. A swinging member 548 pivotally supported by 542, a full-tank detection sensor 550 for detecting swinging of the swinging member 548, and the swinging member 548 is urged in the direction of non-detection by the full-tank detection sensor 550. and a spring 552 . As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 has its lower end rotatably supported on the cover base 542 and its upper end rotating to the left when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Also, the swing member 548 is biased by a spring 552 to a substantially vertical position. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the housing space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. .

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes a ground rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and plate-shaped ground metal fittings 556 covering the right and left ends of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , so that the static electricity generated by the rolling resistance caused by the game ball T flowing down can be removed.

In this example, the game balls T paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. , Even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, if the game ball T is paid out from the prize ball unit 700, it will stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and the normal ball outlet in the full tank branch unit 770. When the normal passage 773 upstream of 774 is also full, game balls T flow down to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79), and the full tank branch. The full ball outlet 776 of the unit 770 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540.

When the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls T, the game balls T cannot exit from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the storage space 546 in the second ball passage 542d is filled. The stagnated game balls T are stored. Furthermore, as the game balls T are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls T are stored in the storage space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls T acts on the swing member 548, and the biasing force of the spring 552 is applied. The upper end of the rocking member 548 moves to the left against this. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 126) stops the payout of the game balls T from the prize ball unit 700, A notification prompting the player to discharge the game balls T in the plate unit 300 to the outside is sent.

When the game ball T in the storage space 546 (lower tray 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. becomes non-detection, and the payout of game balls T from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2I. Ball feed unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. FIG. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls T supplied from the upper tray 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 301. T can be removed to the lower tray 302 by operating the upper tray ball removal button 341 of the upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 .

In this ball feeding unit 580, the game balls T stored in the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300 are supplied through the upper tray ball outlet 310d of the tray unit base 310 and the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110, and are fed back and forth. A box-shaped front cover 581 having an entry port 581a penetrating through and a ball extraction port 581b opening below the entry port 581a, the rear end of which is closed and the front being open. a box-shaped rear cover 582 having a batted ball supply opening 582a for supplying the game ball T entering from the inlet 581a of the front cover 581 to the batted ball launching device 650; the rear cover 582; A ball extracting member having a partitioning portion 583a which is pivotally supported between the front covers 581 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and partitions the entrance port 581a and the ball extraction port 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. 583, the game balls T on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and rotated around the shaft extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. It has a ball feed member 584 that can be supported and a ball feed solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feed member 584 . In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entry port 581a when viewed from the front. are placed.

The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 has an arcuate slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing opening 581b in front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward from 581c. The front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 581a. is formed to close the

In addition, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a which partitions between the entrance port 581a and the ball removal port 581b below the entrance port 581a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 584, and a partition portion 583a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 581b. A rotating rod portion 583b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod portion 583c. and a weight portion 583d projecting in the opposite direction to the partition portion 583a. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54). 113, the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 is contacted.

Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 584a centered on a rotational axis extending vertically in the direction of the entrance port 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball extraction member 583, and a cut-off portion 584a. It has a ball holding portion 584b recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angular range of about 90° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball T. As shown in FIG. The ball feed member 584 rotates around the rotation axis by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 to move the rod portion 584c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation axis, in the left-right direction. ing.

The ball feeding member 584 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a and the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a at the same time, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between holding positions. When the ball feeding member 584 is at the supply position, the game ball T held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650, and enters the partition portion 583a from the entry port 581a. The game ball T is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a, and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the rod portion 584c side closes the hit ball supply port 582a. , Only one game ball T on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 580 includes a ball feeding operating rod 586 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energizing) a ball feeding solenoid 585, and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 586 which swings up and down moves forward and backward. and a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis that extends in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 has an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction that can be engaged with the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 that moves up and down, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. is arranged on the opposite side and is supported between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction; and a transmitting portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 56) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 580 of this example uses a ball feeding operating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587 to transmit the movement of the ball feeding operating rod 586, which swings when driven by a ball feeding solenoid 585 that advances and retreats in the vertical direction, to transmit the movement of the ball feeding member. 584 can be rotated. When the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the ball-feeding operating rod 586 moves away from the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 585, and the tip of the ball-feeding solenoid 586 swings downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is positioned at the supply position. When the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball-feeding actuation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 585, and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball-feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball-feeding member 584 receives one game ball T, and when the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is deactivated (OFF state), the ball-feeding member 584 The received game ball T is sent (supplied) to the batted ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing power supply board 831 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 654 .

Further, the rotatably pivoted ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 of this embodiment is subjected to a moment by the weight portion 583c so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The forwardly projecting actuating rod 583c abuts on the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball extracting slider 343 in the upper tray ball extracting mechanism 340 of the tray unit 300, thereby restricting its rotation. Normally, the partition portion 583a of the ball extraction member 583 separates the entry port 581a and the ball extraction port 581b so that the game ball T does not enter the ball extraction port 581b side. Then, when the player presses downward the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300, the upper tray ball removing slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and contacts. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340, the ball removing member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition 583a closes the entry opening. The partition between 381a and the ball extraction port 381b is released, and the game ball T entering from the entrance port 381a is discharged from the ball extraction port 381b to the ball extraction channel 344c of the upper tray ball extraction base 344 of the tray unit 300. and discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 302 .

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removal slider 343 with which the actuating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 contacts is biased upward by the coil spring, the game balls T are vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper tray ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, thereby preventing damage to the ball removal member 583 and the like, and preventing the game ball from being damaged. T can be prevented from rebounding on the partition portion 583a.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 580 of this example is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 582b (see FIG. 56B, etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the hit ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. In addition, a fraud prevention member 588 is attached in the attachment recess 582b. The tamper-proof member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 582a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the tamper-proof member 588 has a laterally long rectangular outer diameter when viewed from the rear. An upper piece portion 588b and a lower piece portion 588c, which are divided vertically by a dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of the A V is formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in a direction (backward) perpendicular to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 588 so as to move away from each other. It has a letter-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the ends of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d.

As shown in the figure, the tamper-proof member 588 is such that the distal end of the upper piece 588b (the left end in a rear view) is bent so that the base end of the upper piece 588b is bent so that the cut portion 588d is It is formed in a V shape in plan view, and a wire rod Iw attached to an illegal game ball I is inserted into the inside of the V shape. In the cutting portion 588d of the tamper-proof member 588, the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap narrows toward the base end side. is formed as

The slanted portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illicit game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the slanted portion 588e. It's like In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, as shown in the figure, the anti-tampering member 588 is attached from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is installed. A portion corresponding to the portion where is formed penetrates in the longitudinal direction and at the same time communicates with the batted ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in such a shape that the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the batted ball launcher 650, and the illegal game ball I is delivered to the game area of the game board 4 by the batted ball launcher 650. 1100, the illegal game ball I shot by the shot ball launching device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left in a front view along the shooting rail 660 and passes between the outer rail and the inner rail. Attempt to enter the game area 1100. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire Iw is different from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, and the wire Iw is attached to the game ball T. It will move along the shortest route in the passage. Therefore, the wire rod Iw extending from the plate unit 300 through the ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 toward the ball launching device 650 moves the game ball I in the upper left direction when viewed from the front (upper right when viewed from the back). Then, it is pulled toward the upper right corner of the batted ball feed port 582a in the rear view to move to the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the batted ball feed port 582a in the rear view. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the batted ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the tamper-proof member 588 arranged at that position. After being guided into 588d, the force of the illegal game ball I further pulls it to the right in the rear view.

As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I is pulled by the force of the fraudulent game ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (to the left in front view) by the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588. Friction and shearing force are applied by the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire Iw (see FIG. 57(D)). At this time, the illegal game ball I attached to the wire Iw is attenuated by friction or the like acting on the wire Iw. will be discharged through

Therefore, since the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, cheating can be performed with the illegal game ball I attached to the wire Iw in the game area 605. It is designed to be able to prevent being caught. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the anti-tamper member 588 as described above, so that illegal acts cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw cannot be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cut portion 588d, thereby attenuating the force of the illegal game ball I, thereby reducing the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed.

As described above, according to this example, after the game balls T are stored in the upper tray 301 and supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 is operated. When operated by a player, the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580 is driven to send the game ball T to the batted ball launching device 650, and the game ball T is hit into the game area 1100 by the batting ball launching device 650, thereby opening the door frame 5. The game is played in the game area 1100 that is visible through the game window 101, and the player can be entertained. Since a ball feeding unit 580 having a ball feeding solenoid 585 etc.) and a discharge mechanism (a ball extracting member 583) is arranged, not only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball extracting member 583 but also the ball feeding member 584 and the hitting ball launching device are arranged. 650 is also as close as possible, and when the game balls T in the upper tray 301 are ejected by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 341, the number of game balls T remaining on the side of the ball feeding member 584 is reduced as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the ball feeding unit 580 having the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the game balls T in the upper tray 301 from running out early and the inside of the upper tray 301 from being filled up with the game balls T early due to the loading operation. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of annoyance with the ball T, suppress the decline in interest, and reduce the size of the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301. By making the game area 1100 relatively large (wide), the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the interest of the player.

In addition, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball removing member 583, the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 are separated from each other. 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, and the labor involved in assembly can be simplified, the game ball T can be easily replaced with the feeding unit 580, and the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be easily replaced. Even if a problem occurs, the problem can be easily solved by exchanging the ball feeding unit 580.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the upper tray ball The transmission mechanism (upper tray ball extracting mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the extracting button 341 to the ball extracting member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 does not need to be configured to straddle the door frame 5 that can be opened and closed and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. In addition, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism ( By shutting off the upper tray ball extracting mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will wear out early and malfunction or be damaged, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. and durability can be improved.

Further, since the upper tray ball removing button 341 is operated downward, the game ball T can be discharged from the upper tray 301 to the lower tray 302 or the upper tray simply by pressing the upper tray ball removing button 341 downward. Discharge of the game ball T from the 301 can be stopped, and the player can easily operate the ball removal operation in the upper tray 301 by the upper tray ball removal button 341. - 特許庁

In addition, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in accordance with the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partitioning portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper tray ball removing slider 343 and the partitioning portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The size of the unit 580 can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

Further, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper bowl ball extraction slider 343 is at the raised position, the partition portion 583a of the ball extraction member 583 communicates the entry port 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a. Therefore, even if the game ball T from the upper tray 301 vigorously contacts the partition 583a, the impact can be alleviated by the biasing force acting on the upper tray ball removal slider 343, and the partition 583a (ball removal The durability of the member 583) can be increased. In addition, the biasing force acting on the upper tray ball removing slider 343 can reduce the impact on the partition 583a. It is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 and the like from being damaged due to the rebound of the ball.

In addition, since the partitioning portion 583a is rotated, compared with the case where the partitioning portion 583a is slid, the movement of the partitioning portion 583a when the load of the game ball T is applied to the partitioning portion 583a. This friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341 can be lightened, and operability can be improved, and the movement range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plan projection. Similar effects can be obtained.

In addition, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the entrance port 581a and the ball extraction port 581b are communicated with each other, if the partition 583a or the upper tray ball extraction mechanism 340 malfunctions, the partition 583a rotates due to its own weight, the entry port and the discharge port are in a state of communication, and the game media in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (insertion device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since the ball is discharged to the player side without being discharged, the player can be made to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and the player can be moved to the pachinko machine 1 without the problem and enjoy the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Furthermore, since the ball removing member 583 is configured to rotate the partitioning portion 583a through the bent rotating rod portion 583b, when the game ball T collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the impact is transferred to the bent rotating rod. By dispersing the impact by the portion 583b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotating rod portion 583b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being transmitted in a straight line to the rotating shaft. can increase

In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entry port 581a communicating with the upper tray 301 side, when the game ball T in the upper tray 301 is ejected, the game ball T in the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged. movement in the horizontal direction can be minimized, and the passage of the game ball T in the ball feeding unit 580 can be improved, so that the game ball T can be discharged satisfactorily. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the inlet 581a, the discharge path of the game ball T in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 functions as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

Further, the anti-tampering member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the anti-tampering member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the ball shooting device 650. Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentum) state immediately after being shot by the ball shooting device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d By pulling the wire Iw quickly (strongly) against the ball, the wire Iw can be reliably cut, and the impetus of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent it from entering the game area 1100. It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts caused by fraudulent game balls I.

Further, since the anti-tampering member 588 having the cut portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cut portion 588d is formed. The rearwardly bent upper piece 588b can be kept in a state in which it does not protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the operator is prevented from being injured during assembly or the like by the upper piece 588b of the tamper-proof member 588. You can prevent it from getting lost.

In addition, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I, the upper upper piece 588b is bent backward across the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate. Thus, since the V-shaped cut portion 588d is formed, the cut portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. This glass unit 590 consists of an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 molded of synthetic resin and having an opening of approximately the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that respectively close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. and a transparent glass plate 594 . A unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two plate-like stopper pieces 592a arranged at the upper portions of both left and right sides and extending outward in a plate-like shape, and a plate-like engaging piece 592a extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. and a stop piece 592b.

This glass unit 590 has a locking piece 592b at the lower end that is locked so as to be engaged with the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting stepped portion 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the glass unit locking member 190 locks the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592, whereby the door frame is closed. It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21, etc.).

[1-2K. Figurative decoration on the door frame]
Next, the molding decoration on the door frame 5, that is, the shape decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20 and 58. FIG. As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper tray 301 and a lower tray 302 for storing game balls T arranged vertically under the vertically long elliptical game window 101. At the same time, on the right side of the lower tray 302 in front view, the game ball T stored in the upper tray 301 is hit into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 closing the game window 101. A handle device 500 is arranged for. In addition, the door frame 5 has a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the game window 101, and also surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. The plate unit 300 is arranged as follows.

The door frame 5 has a largely different appearance on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has an appearance like a rugged natural rock due to the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the left side can be seen from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240. The lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 give a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 have different amounts of forward protrusion, and the right side decorative unit 200 is larger than the left side decorative unit. It protrudes forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that sharpens forward, while the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved flat shape.

As a result, when the door frame 5 of this example is viewed from the front right, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 appear to have the same volume (see FIG. 19), whereas the front left When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, so that different impressions can be given depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加It's like In other words, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 looks different depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1, giving the illusion of a pachinko machine of a different model. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of the players.

In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left-right asymmetrical, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in the left-right direction in an island facility of a game hall, the appearance of the entire island facility looks flat and solid. By alternately arranging the right side decoration units 200 and the left side decoration units 240 of different forms, a rhythmical impression is given to provide an appearance (atmosphere) that excites the player. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

In addition, the door frame 5 emits light from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300. can be decorated with an arbitrary luminescent color so as to surround the . Among the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246 , 254b, and 256 are turned on or off, the mode of the luminous decoration surrounding the game window 101 can be changed.

[1-2 L. Light-emitting decoration on the door frame]
Next, the luminous decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. The door frame 5 of this embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by means of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed so as to surround the Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery of the can be decorated with light emission.

The right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference of the game window 101 except for the lower side, as described above. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 are arranged so as to extend along radial axes around the lower part of the center of the game window 101 in the horizontal direction. are arranged between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decorative unit 240 , the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth, gently curved surface. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 . In addition, in the left side decorative unit 240 , an inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251 a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 .

In addition, the door frame 5 includes a right side upper decoration substrate 214 , a right side lower decoration substrate 216 , and a left side upper decoration substrate 254 behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 . , and left side lower decoration board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flashing lenses 204, 246). . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high luminance. LEDs are used. The two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are coated with white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), white paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 reflect the light from the player when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating their appearance, and by reflecting the light from the emitting LEDs 210a and 210b to the player side by the substrate, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be The lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with brighter light emission.

As described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects the ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing toward the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101 . The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged in the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer circumference of the upper central lens 284, and an outer ring outside the central ring lens portion 282b. and four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to the outside. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side when viewed from the front is covered with an upper and lower decorative cover 294. As shown in FIG.

The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 arranged behind the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and the upper lens 282 extending laterally beyond the upper central decorative substrate 288. and an upper side decoration substrate 290 arranged behind the extension frame lens portion 282 c and the upper central decoration substrate 288 . A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper central decorative substrate 288, and the upper central lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted. and can be decorated with light emission separately. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290 so that each extension frame lens portion 282c can be decorated with light. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a of the upper center decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Next, in the plate unit 300 , the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and has an appearance that is continuous with the appearance of the right side decorative unit 200 . In this plate unit 300, a top plate decoration board 322 is arranged on the rear side of a top plate front decorative member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the top plate decoration board 322 light up the top plate front decorative member 316. The right side portion and the top plate upper right decorative member 319 that decorates the front side outer periphery of the top plate ball removal button 341 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LEDs 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 300 includes a translucent ring-shaped dial operation portion 401 and a translucent cylindrical press operation portion disposed inside the dial operation portion 401 . 405, and a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are arranged below the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality (four in this example) of LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation portion 401 . Further, the button decoration board 432 is provided with one LED 432 d corresponding to the pressing operation portion 405 . In this example, the LEDs 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 are high-brightness white LEDs, and the LEDs 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 are full-color LEDs. The surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effect as described above can be achieved.

By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged in the first annular group 102 (within the range of hatches in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the game window 101, and the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102 (Within the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60), and by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, substantially concentric circles so as to surround the game window 101 A plurality of (in this example, two) light-emitting decorations can be applied to each. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of hatches near the game window 101 is decorated with annular light emission, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the second annular group 103 are illuminated. When all of them are illuminated, the range of the crosshatch away from the game window 101 is annularly decorated with illumination.

In the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250) in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 are provided. , Radial groups 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60 within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of this radial group 104, the outer side of the game window 101 can be radially decorated with light emission. The luminous decoration can be divided in the circumferential direction.

In addition, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decoration board 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is included in the notification group 105. Various kinds of information can be notified to the pachinko player, the employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the like.

In addition, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are arranged in the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. An upper center group 106 is provided for luminous decoration at the upper center of the frame. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper center group 106, the center of the upper part of the game window 101 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, the reference of the ring light emission decoration by the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 It is designed so that it can be decorated with light emitting like dots. Also, the LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portions 282c in the upper decorative unit 280 form the upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106 with light. By appropriately lighting the LEDs 290a of the upper center side group 107, the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper center group 106 can be decorated with light.

Furthermore, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 of the plate unit 300 arranged on the lower side of the game window 101 are used to decorate the upper plate 301 with light emission. A plate group 108 is provided. In addition, in the door frame 5, LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the center of the lower side of the game window 101 and in the center of the upper portion of the plate unit 300 activate the operation unit 400. It is an operation unit group 109 that is decorated with light. By appropriately lighting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be illuminated and decorated, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be controlled. Players can be notified.

More specifically, the luminous decoration on the door frame 5 in this embodiment will be described in more detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system within groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108 and 109 to which they belong respectively. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are connected to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 103a to 103j for each peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It is

The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Also, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems of an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Furthermore, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of central portion 106a, right portion 106b, and left portion 106c. Also, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems of the right side 107a and the left side 107b.

Furthermore, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d in the front, rear, left and right directions. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 are arranged diagonally with the pressing operation portion 405 interposed between the four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation portion 401. , and one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs. The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. In the light emission control, the number is tripled to 84 systems. In addition, the LEDs 288a and 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. 1 system is connected, and in actual light emission control, the number is doubled to 8 systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs with normal brightness, and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Also, the LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. Since the ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, the same number of ten systems are used in actual light emission control.

Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, it is possible to perform an expressive lighting effect.

As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are sequentially lighted (same color or similar color), so that the game window 101 spreads outward. Light emitting effect, or conversely, light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102 (sequentially emitting light in the same color or similar color), Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect or the like in which the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 is illuminated widely.

In addition, by cooperating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first ring group 102 near the game window 101, and the LEDs of the first ring group 102 With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside, it is possible to perform a more expressive light emission effect, strongly attracting the player's interest, and amusing and entertaining the player. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, each system 102a ~ 102j, 103a ~ 103j by appropriately emitting light, along the outer periphery of the game window 101 upper decoration unit 280 It is possible to perform a lighting effect such that light moves toward the center lens 284 or light moves from the upper center lens 284 along the outer circumference of the game window 101 . In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided (10 divisions) into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. , 8 divisions (about 8 divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emitting effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101. - 特許庁

Furthermore, by causing only the radial group 104 to emit light, a light emitting effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the game window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 emit light at the same time as the radial group 104. By making the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 emit light substantially uniformly, or by causing the radial group 104 to emit light (lighting/blinking) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a luminous production that gives an accent to the luminous decoration of the. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b) rotate.

In addition, by emitting light from the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105, the arrival of a chance and a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a probability variable game state, a time reduction game state, a probability variable time reduction game state , etc.) can be performed.

Further, by appropriately lighting the respective systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light-emitting effect of decorating the upper tray 301 is performed, or by light-emitting in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation are performed. It is possible to perform a lighting effect to prompt the user to operate the unit 405 . In addition, by appropriately lighting the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is urged and the direction of rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is guided. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a lighting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation portion 405. FIG.

The system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is full-color LED. 109 and each of the systems 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, and 109c can perform light emission effects with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness. It is possible to perform a rich light emission effect.

[1-3. Overall configuration of main body frame]
Next, the body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. FIG. The body frame 3 of this embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side of the outer frame 2 in a front view, and is supported in a door-like manner so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5 . , the front side of which can be opened and closed by a door frame 5. - 特許庁The main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5 .

The main body frame 3 of this example includes a main body frame base 600 that forms the skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 4 . Upper and lower shaft support fittings 630 and 640, which are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of 600 in front view and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the body frame base 600. A hitting ball launching device 650 for hitting a game ball T into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4, and a game ball T to the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. A prize ball unit 700 for putting out and a game ball T from the prize ball unit 700 to the tray unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame base 600 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. and a sphere outlet opening and closing unit 790 that blocks the flow.

In addition, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards and a power supply board 851 for controlling the electrical parts provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except for the game board 4 are provided. , a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. and a locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view for opening and closing and locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opening and closing and locking the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 .

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the body frame base 600 of the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded of synthetic resin, and has a vertically long rectangular shape in front view along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially elongated in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a constant depth D (see Figure 65). As a result, when mounting the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the rear cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. on the rear side of the body frame base 600, the work is performed with the body frame base 600 facing down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is in a substantially flat state at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, so that the prize ball unit 700 etc. can be easily placed, and the workability related to the assembly of the main body frame 3 can be improved.

As shown in the figure, the body frame base 600 has a game board holding opening which penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part and which can fit and hold the outer circumference of the game board 4. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side in front view, and a door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. The door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower end, the upper curved protrusion 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outer side protruding rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 and an engaging groove 603 into which the bent projecting piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and is a lower rear wall portion that spreads in the left and right direction in a plate shape. 604 , and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms the inner peripheral wall of the game board holding opening 601 . The peripheral wall 605 connects the free ends (upper and lower left ends in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602, so that the body frame base 600 has a frame shape. It's like

In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and the game board placing part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placing part 606. A positioning projection 607 projecting upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction and engaging with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1112 of the game board 4 , and a game board of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the front. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which a stopper 1120 is secured, and a plate-like plate that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are arranged. The positioning projections 607 of the main body frame base 600 are engaged with the out-ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the rearward direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking part 608 can regulate the front-view right side of the game board 4 from moving forward and backward by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 . there is The front-view left side of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward and backward by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950, although the details will be described later.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has metal fittings for mounting an upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and a lower shaft support metal fitting 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 (upper and lower left end portions in front view). A portion 610 is provided (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68, the front side of the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally, so that the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 can be attached with sufficient strength. is now possible. The body frame base 600 also has a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and a door frame 5 that is formed in the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 in front view. A U-shaped fitting groove 612 fitted with the positioning projection 110d protruding rearward from the door frame base body 110 in , and a firing solenoid 654 of the ball shooting device 650 formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front. A solenoid housing recess 613 is provided.

As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example has the lower rear wall portion 604 recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. The ball shooting device 650 is mounted on the front side so that the shooting solenoid 654 of the ball shooting device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613 . When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIGS. A downward widening foul space 626 is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. A game ball T is received by a foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 .

Further, the main body frame base 600 has an opening 614 that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a rectangular shape to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front, and a plurality of openings 614 are formed above the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides when viewed from the front. and a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66, etc.). The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear face of the board face forward. Also, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600 . The through-holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having partition walls on the front side.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support section that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall section 604 above the opening 614 . 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right side of the fixture support portion 616 in front view and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690. As shown in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing member 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan-like shape around the axis supported by the fixing member support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and the fixing piece 690a. and an operating piece 690b that extends outward from one end in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in a front view). The game board fixing member 690 is pivotally supported by the fixing member supporting portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing member 690 clockwise in a front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed concave portion 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. can be prevented from moving forward. The game board fixture 690 has an operating piece 690b that abuts against the stopper 617. By abutting the stopper 617, the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is restricted. It's becoming

Furthermore, the body frame base 600 has a door frame open switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611 . When the door frame 5 is opened (released), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. In addition, the body frame base 600 has a body frame open switch 619 for detecting opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 attached to the lower rear surface than the position where the door frame open switch 618 is attached ( 69), when the body frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the body frame 3 can be detected.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 has three longitudinally penetrating portions extending in the front-rear direction inside (rotary support side) of the engaging groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 when viewed from the front. A door hook hole 620 and two lock engaging holes 621 lined up in the left-right direction are provided below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and penetrating in the front-rear direction. These three door hook holes 620 are formed near the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and approximately in the center in the vertical direction. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621 . The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620, and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000 is projected forward. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

Further, the body frame base 600 is located on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and is gently and obliquely lowered from the right upper end toward the approximate center in the left-right direction in a rear view. A body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is provided, which hangs down from the middle in the vertical direction to a slightly upper position and allows the game ball T to flow down. The rear side of the body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800. Although details will be described later, the game ball T that has flowed down the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 is flowing down.

In addition, the body frame base 600 has a plurality of back cover shaft support portions 623 arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the rear, and rotatably supporting the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900 . A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the front view obliquely upper left of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the lock device 1000 is mounted on the right side (opening side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the front. and a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description is omitted, the body frame base 600 has, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the hit ball launching device 650, prize ball unit 700, board unit 800, etc., at appropriate positions. is formed in

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal fitting mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed, and the body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 includes a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 extending forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. A forward extending portion 632, a pivot pin 633 projecting upward from near the front end of the forward extending portion 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in front view. is inserted vertically through the door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63, etc.), and the forward extending portion 632 hangs downward from the left end of the front view and rotates the door frame 5 to the open side. and a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) that restricts the ends. In this upper shaft support metal fitting 630, a mounting portion 631, a forward extending portion 632, and a stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame support metal fitting 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame support metal fitting 642 to support the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 . and a body frame pivot bracket 644 for The door frame pivot bracket 642 of the lower pivot bracket 640 has a plate-like mounting portion 642a that is attached to the bracket mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions. A plate-shaped forward extension portion 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the forward extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and the forward extension portion. A stopper 642d is provided to stand upward from the left end portion of the door frame 642a in a front view and to restrict the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In the door frame pivot fitting 642, a mounting portion 642a, a forward extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 includes a plate-shaped mounting portion 644a that is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions. It has a front extension portion 644b that extends forward, and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically near the front end of the front extension portion 644b. The body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 is also integrally formed by bending a single metal plate so that the mounting portion 644a and the forward extending portion 644b are formed.

In the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame The forward extending portion 642b of the shaft support fitting 642 and the forward extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support fitting 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined vertical separation. It's like

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 and are connected to the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 . are coaxially positioned, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 of the outer frame 2. , the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame pivot bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and then the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting it into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support metal fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

The upper and lower shaft support metal fittings 630 and 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 so that the door frame support hole 634 of the upper and lower shaft support metal fittings 630 and the door frame support hole of the lower and lower shaft support metal fittings 640 are connected to each other. The door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 on the forward extending portion 642 b of the door frame support metal fitting 642 , the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 . By inserting it, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. Once slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the forward extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 overlap vertically, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634 .

[1-3C. Ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball T supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a force corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is.

The ball shooting device 650 of this embodiment includes a metal plate shooting base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a protruding forward from the lower rear surface of the shooting base 652. A shooting solenoid 654 attached so as to do so, a ball-hitting mallet 656 fixed to a drive shaft 654a of the shooting solenoid 654 so as to be able to rotate integrally, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the ball-hitting mallet 656, and a movement trajectory of the mallet tip 658. A shooting rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left in front view and attached to the front surface of the shooting base 652 with a predetermined position on the top as the base end, and the shooting rail 660 above the base end of the shooting rail 660. A ball stopping piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball T cannot pass and holds the game ball T at the proximal end of the firing rail 660, and a stopper 664 for restricting the rotation of the ball hitting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) toward the launch rail 660 from the ball hitting position where the game ball T held in the ball T can be hit.

The shooting solenoid 654 in the hitting ball shooting device 650 has a drive shaft 654a that reciprocates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500, although detailed illustration is omitted. The ball hitting mallet 656 of the ball shooting device 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the driving shaft 654a of the shooting solenoid 654, and a tip extending in a gentle arc shape from the fixing portion 656a. A rod portion 656b to which a mallet tip 658 is fixed at the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b across the fixing portion 656a and is capable of coming into contact with the stopper 664. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the ball hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the tip 658 of the mallet tip 658 rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the ball hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is supposed to be regulated.

In addition, the shooting rail 660 of the hitting ball shooting device 650 has a gentle circular arc shape with a downward recess so as to be substantially along the extension line of the lower end of the outer rail 1111a of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98). On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped depression so that the game ball T hit by the ball hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided along the launch rail 660 to the game board 4 side. . The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The ball shooting device 650 also includes a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting the end of the ball hitting position toward the ball hitting position of the ball hitting mallet 656, and a rotating position of the ball hitting mallet 656 away from the ball hitting position. and a stopper 668 that regulates the end (rotating end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the ball shooting device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that it is possible to absorb the impact when the ball hitting mallet 656 abuts and to suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. It is possible to do so.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 98, the ball shooting device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and the upper end of the shooting rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601) is positioned below, and the outside of the game board 4 held by the game board holding opening 601 is positioned. A foul space 626 is formed between the rail 1111a and the lower end of the rail 1111a. The hitting ball launcher 650 of this example shoots the game ball T into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by jumping over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660 in the front view. It is designed so that it can be driven in. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball T that has become a foul ball without being hit inside falls through the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower tray 302. - 特許庁

In addition, in the ball shooting device 650, the shooting solenoid 654 is driven by the shooting power supply board 831 with driving strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580 is driven so as to synchronize with the driving of Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball T to the batted ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball T, and from that state, the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF), the game ball T received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the batted ball launching device 650 side. By driving (ON) 654, the game ball T can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the shooting rail 660, and the game ball T can be reliably shot by the rotation of the ball hitting mallet 656. can be done.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. FIG. The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores game balls T supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from the island facility side in the island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then pays out a predetermined amount. It pays out to the upper tray 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the instruction. This prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank that is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores the game balls T supplied from the island facility side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 that arranges the game balls T arranged under the prize ball tank 720 and stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sends them to the downstream side, and the game balls T that are aligned by the tank rail unit 730. A prize ball device 740 that pays out based on a predetermined payout instruction, a game ball T paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper tray 301 of the plate unit, and the upper tray 301 is filled with the game balls T. It is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the paid out game balls T to the lower tray 302 side.

In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage lid 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a ground metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on the rear surface, and a rear cover engagement groove 780a on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a for fastening and fixing the back cover 900. A back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75, etc.).

In this prize ball unit 700, a prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a prize ball tank 720 and a tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. Along with being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. In addition, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720 above the tank rail unit 730 directly above the prize ball device 740 .

Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding opening 601 when viewed from the front. It is integrally molded from transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 is arranged substantially flush with a peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward along the outer periphery of the inverted L shape and extending inwardly from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width. and a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. As shown in FIG. The rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 is located at a position recessed from the front end, and when attached to the body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

In addition, the prize ball base 710 has a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate arranged beside the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal board mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the lower end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 on the prize ball device mounting portion 714, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding downward the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and a rear A mounting locking portion 716 for mounting a full-tank branch unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the wall portion 710b.

Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740. and a back cover engagement groove 718 for securing the cover 900 . In addition, although detailed description is omitted, the prize ball base 710 has mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., and the body frame base 600, etc., at appropriate positions. is formed in

Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top, and the bottom wall portion has a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and projects rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape only at the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) in a plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion. A discharge port 723 formed by a portion protruding rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 of the right rear portion of 722 and opening downward, and a plate shape from the left side of the discharge port 723 in plan view (shaft support side) to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 a rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves portion 724 in plan view; and a mounting portion 726 for mounting 720 to the ball tank mounting portion 711 of the ball base 710 .

The outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722 so that a predetermined amount of game balls T can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721 . In the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined so as to become lower toward the discharge port 723, and the game ball T on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It's like

The prize ball tank 720 also includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725 . As shown in the figure, this sphere leveling member 727 has one end supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside so that the other end hangs down due to its own weight. . This ball leveling member 727 is designed to hang down inside a tank rail unit 730 which will be described later, and can level and align game balls T flowing down inside the tank rail unit 730 . In addition, the canopy part 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, and it is possible to prevent the game balls T from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. Intrusion of dust or the like into the tank rail unit 730 can be prevented.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side closer to the discharge port 723 ) in plan view is formed so as to incline toward the rear discharge port 723 . As a result, the flow of the game balls T can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball T can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 has a tank rail 731 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open top and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows the game balls T to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is slanted so that the bottom is low. The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (rotary support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom substantially at the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface at the front end. It is provided with a plurality of locking projecting pieces 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

The tank rail 731 has a right (open side) end in a front view located directly under the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 After receiving it, it can be rolled to the left and delivered to the prize ball device 740 side from the discharge port 731a. In addition, by locking the locking projecting piece 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the prize ball base 710. ing.

In addition, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with an alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper part of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the top of the alignment gear 732, and a right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stop that can move forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball T in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a side. A piece 735 and an earth plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of coming into contact with the game ball T in the tank rail 731 are provided. As illustrated, two aligning gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls T partitioned into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731 . Also, the ball retainer plate 734 has an attachment portion 734a to which the ball stopper 735 is attached, and two slits 734b that penetrate vertically and into which the projecting pieces 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls T discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 are smoothed by a ball smoothing member 727 and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. can be done. Further, the ball retainer plate 734 is for forcing the game ball T that has not reached a single level by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 so that it becomes.

As illustrated, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer circumference, and is pivotally supported such that the tooth pitches of the pair of alignment gears 732 are shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper portion of the game ball T flowing down the tank rail 731 meshes with the teeth of the alignment gear 732 and flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side, the game balls T aligned in two rows are alternately arranged one by one. It is designed to be sent to prize ball device 740 .

In addition, a narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed in the bottom of the tank rail 731, and foreign matter such as dust rolling along with the game ball T in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. It has become. Further, the grounding plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside through the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782, although detailed illustration is omitted. When the game ball T comes into contact with the ground plate 736 within the tank rail 731, the static electricity can be removed.

In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 that is rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734 so that the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 is inserted into the tank rail 730 through the slit 734a. By inserting it into, it is possible to close the two-row flow path in the tank rail 731 by the projecting piece 735a, and it is possible to stop the supply of the game ball T to the prize ball device 740 side. ing.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game balls T and the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 pays out the game balls T discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. belongs to. This prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to a prize ball device mounting portion 714 of a prize ball base 710, as shown in FIGS. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball T and extending to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction. A passage 741a, a distribution space 741b having a space of a predetermined size that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and a left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b in rear view that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b. A winning ball passage 741c that opens on the left side of the view, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (pivot side) of the rear view and extends downward and opens on the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball extraction passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a rearwardly open state.

The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter length in the vertical direction than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support arranged under the back cover 742. A board 743, a payout motor 744 arranged in front of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects backward beyond the motor support plate 743, and the payout motor 744 is integrated with the rotary shaft 744a. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate 743 , a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 , and meshes with the second gear 746 . A third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741, a payout rotator 748 that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the sorting space 741c of the unit base 741, and the payout rotator 748 is the third gear. A rotation detection plate 749 having a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction is provided on the opposite side of the plate 747 with the rotation detection plate 749 therebetween.

In addition, the prize ball device 740 includes a ball break switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 and detecting the presence or absence of the game ball T in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball T attached to the unit base 741 and flowing down the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the number of , a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a of a rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with the dispensing rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 are held on the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753 to be attached, a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the back surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the payout motor 744, the ball cutoff switch 750, the counting sensor 751, and the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. , is equipped with

Furthermore, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749 ), and a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 therebetween covering the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side, and a supply passage that can contact the game balls T flowing down the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. A ground fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and a screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744, and a back cover 742 are detachably supported on the unit base 741. and an attachment/detachment button 759 .

The prize ball device 740 of this example has a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball extraction passage 741d are opened. is to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball T ejected and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. can be done. In addition, the unit base 741 has one side surface (left side in the rear view) that is partially cut out below the rearwardly bulging position of the supply passage 741a, and is outside the cutout position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball cut switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a lower side than the prize ball passage 741a so as to penetrate in the front and back direction. and a motor insertion hole 741g formed through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

By attaching the ball breaker switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball breaker switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a. When the actuating piece is pressed by the game ball T, the presence or absence of the game ball T in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball break switch 741e. In the state where the game ball T in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball-out switch 741e (ball-out state), the payout motor 744 is not rotated, and the player and the player know that the ball is out. The hall side is notified.

In addition, the unit base 741 includes a bearing portion 741h for axially supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotating body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. and a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 disposed on the upper part of the unit base 741 and for detachably supporting the back cover 742. I have it. The unit base 741 has a supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 attached to the grounding fitting portion 741i so that the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball T in the supply passage 741a. , The front surface of the supply passage grounding fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped grounding fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball T flowing down the supply passage 741a via the supply passage grounding fitting 757 is removed. You can do it.

The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically elongated plate shape as a whole, and the upper end thereof is bulged rearward. In the upper part of the back cover 742, there are a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attach/detach button 759, a relay board mounting part 742b for mounting the winning ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the rear surface of the approximately center in the vertical direction, and a relay board mounting part. A sensor board mounting portion 742c for mounting the sensor board 753 disposed below the portion 742b, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the rear cover 742 is formed so as to be positioned behind the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be removed. It is designed to facilitate heat dissipation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball T at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the body 748, the game balls T supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated in the recess 748a one by one, and can be paid out to the winning ball passage 741c or the ball extraction passage 741d side. Three detection slits 749a of a rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotor 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the recesses 748a of the payout rotor 748. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or a payout motor is operated by operating the ball extraction switch 860b. 744 rotates to discharge a predetermined number of game balls T to the player side (upper tray 301) or to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 is rotated. A third gear 747 meshing with is rotated. A payout rotor 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detection board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be rotatable together. It is designed to rotate.

As shown in FIG. 78, the prize ball device 740 has a payout rotating body 748 rotatably supported substantially in the center of the sorting space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls T in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the winning ball passage 741c. The game balls T delivered to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the rotating body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751, and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. . On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the game ball T in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the ball extraction passage 741d side, and the payout rotator The game ball T paid out to the ball extraction passage 741d side by 748 is distributed from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d to the ball extraction passage 778 of the full tank distribution unit 770 described later, the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, It can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power board box holder 840 .

In addition, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball extraction passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and troubles such as ball clogging can be easily discovered. .

Next, the full-tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. FIG. The full tank distribution unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls T dispensed to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the plate unit 300. In addition, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls T, the game balls T can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be put out.

This full tank branch unit 770 has a locking portion 770a that is locked to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part in the approximate center in the front-rear direction, and is fixed to the lower end back surface of the prize ball base 710 at the upper rear end. and a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and the prize ball base By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

As shown in the figure, the full-tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box-like shape that is lowered from the rear end to the front end. A prize ball receiving port 771 that receives the game ball T that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 that is arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and spreads in the left and right direction (see FIG. 79) ), a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball T forward from directly below the winning ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772, and releases the game ball T that has flowed down the normal passage 773 forward. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end in the front view of the front end, and a full tank passage 775 ( 79), and a full ball outlet 776 that discharges the game ball T flowing down the full tank passage 775 forward and opens on the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 in front view.

Furthermore, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball extraction receiving opening 777 that opens upward at the left end of the front view of the upper rear end and receives the game ball T that has flowed down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball T received in the ball extraction receiving port 777 forward, and a game ball T that has flowed down the ball extraction passage 778 is released forward and a normal ball is released at the left end in the front view. A ball extraction port 779 opened at a position behind the outlet 774 and the full-filled ball outlet 776 is provided.

In the full-tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full-tank ball outlet 776 are the first foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. The game ball T released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and is communicated with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game ball T supplied to the upper tray 301 and released from the full ball outlet 776 passes through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540 and is supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300. there is In addition, the ball extraction port 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear. It is delivered to the body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of 600 .

This full-tank branch unit 770 receives the game ball T discharged to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 at the prize ball receiving port 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball T entering the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 . Then, the game ball T that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal exit 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and exits the first ball exit 544a of the plate unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper tray 301 .

By the way, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls T and the game balls T are dispensed from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first foul cover unit 540 is discharged. The game ball T, which cannot exit from the ball outlet 544a to the upper tray 301 side, stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually passes through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 to the upstream normal passage 773. It will be full inside. In this state, the game ball T that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and begins to move laterally within the branch space 772, moving laterally. The game ball T enters the full tank passage 775 and passes through the second ball entrance 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b from the full tank ball exit 776 to the plate unit 300. is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the

The full-tank branch unit 770 of this example is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full-tank branch unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily found without disassembling the full-tank branch unit 7700. .

Thus, the full-tank branching unit 770 of this example, when the game balls T become full in the upper tray 301, keeps the game balls T paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full tank is cleared. Since it can be automatically supplied to the lower tray 302, game balls T are supplied to the hitting ball shooting device by operating the ball ejection button of the upper tray when the upper tray is full like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to avoid the interruption of the hitting of the game ball T due to the lack of movement, eliminate the annoyance during the game, and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, as described above, the full-tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the upper tray 301 is full, moves the passage of the game balls T directly below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Since the game balls T staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are dispensed to the upper tray 301, the game balls T in the upper tray 301 and the game balls T in the normal passage 773 becomes a game ball T that can be directly hit by the hitting ball launching device 650, and the amount of game balls T stored in the upper tray 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper tray 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. Become. In other words, even if the capacity of the upper tray 301 is smaller than that of the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls T as the conventional ones are stored in the upper tray 301. be able to. Therefore, by making the upper tray 301 smaller, it becomes possible to relatively enlarge (widen) the game window 101 in the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be provided. The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the players, and the wide game area 1100 can entertain the players.

Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, and the receiving port (first Even if there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball T can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays without changing the flow path (full-tank branch unit 770) of the game balls T in the body frame 3. At the same time, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of line-up of pachinko machines 1 having door frames 5 with different numbers of storage trays.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be dealt with without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 related to the change of the door frame 5 cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

Furthermore, the game ball T sent to the door frame 5 side from the normal ball outlet 774 through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame has only one storage tray. 5, the game balls T put out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. In this way, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player due to lack of game balls T to be hit, and to sufficiently cope with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays. It's becoming

In addition, unless the upper tray 301 is full, the game balls T paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper tray 301, so the frequency of moving the game balls T stored in the lower tray 302 to the upper tray 301 is reduced. This allows the player to concentrate on the operation of hitting the game ball T, etc., and prevents the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even if the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a etc. can be made the same height as the first ball inlet 542a etc. corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 having two storage plates, It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls T by deepening the storage tray, and prevent the player from frequently worrying about the storage amount. A game can be played, and a door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be made compatible without changing the body frame 3 side, and the cost required for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper tray 301 is filled with game balls T. Even if the game ball T becomes tongue and can not come out from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game balls T stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is reduced as much as possible. , and the substantial amount of game balls T stored in the upper tray 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the storage tray becomes full of game balls T, and the game balls T cannot come out from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full ball outlet 776. Also, since the position where the full-filled passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the ball prize device 740, not only the normal passage 773 but also the full-filled passage 775 has many The game balls T can be stored, and the substantial amount of game balls T stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the amount of game balls T stored in each door frame 5 can be changed without changing the body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be made as large as possible and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.例文帳に追加

In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full-tank passage 775 in the full-tank branch unit 770 have a size that allows the game balls T to flow down in a plurality of rows, and the amount of game balls T retained in the full-tank branch unit 770 (storage amount ) can be increased, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to reduce the substantial storage amount including the game balls T in the full tank branch unit 770. The pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays without changing the flow paths of the game balls T in the body frame 3.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be viewed from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, there is no problem that the game ball T is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770. When the clogging occurs, it is possible to easily find the location of clogged balls from the outside of the full-tank branch unit 770, to eliminate the trouble early, and to increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

[1-3E. Ball exit opening/closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the body frame 3 of this embodiment is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 goes to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls T.

The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front so as not to protrude beyond the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A shutter base 791 is attached. Then, a plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, an opening/closing crank 793 for sliding the opening/closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening/closing shutter 792 are lifted through the opening/closing crank 793. and an opening/closing spring 794 that biases the opening and closing.

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening/closing shutter 792 so as to be vertically slidable so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed on the front surface of the left end in a front view and supporting an opening/closing crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening/closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged in the vicinity of the upper left side of the left-right center in front view.

The opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding projections (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide grooves 791a of the shutter base 791. ), and a laterally long rectangular drive hole 792b that is arranged between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening/closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in front view. A drive rod 793b extends right outward from the opening 791b and has a tip extending to the vicinity of the center of the opening 791b in the left-right direction. an abutment portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and having a spherical tip; ), and a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

In addition, in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening/closing shutter 792 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised, it is arranged on the rear side through the opening/closing shutter 792. A normal ball outlet 774, a full tank outlet 776, and the like in the full-tank branch unit 770 can be visually recognized.

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the opening/closing crank 793 rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, so that the driving pin 793c of the opening/closing crank 793 rotates in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c rotates. The open/close shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which the is inserted. In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3, the abutting portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 abuts the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated clockwise in front view against the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, and the driving pin 793c rotates clockwise in front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open/close shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 .

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3 from this state, the abutment between the contact portion 793c of the opening/closing crank 793 and the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening/closing crank 793 is released. is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening/closing shutter 792 rises to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. It is possible to do so.

Thus, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3, the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 automatically opens the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls T remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game balls T will not spill from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank ball outlet 776. can be prevented.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A power supply board box 830 attached to the rear surface of the right end of 810 in front view, a power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 which is attached to the rear surface and whose rear end is formed in a size that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820; a terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the dispensing control board box 860 in front view; A terminal plate 882 is provided.

The substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example is, as shown in the drawing, elongated in the left-right direction, and the substantially center portion in the left-right direction is lowered by one step and gradually inclined upward toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening 812 disposed above a position one step lower than the center in the left-right direction of the shielding wall portion 811 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811. A substrate mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and a rectangular shape elongated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 in front view. A tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates through, a plurality of longitudinal slit-shaped through holes 815 that penetrate in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the speakers 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the left side in rear view (right side in front view). A box housing portion 816 that is open rearward and upward and can house the front side of the firing power supply board box 830 is provided on the rear surface of the upper portion.

The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from dropping downward from the base ball extraction passage 622 and to increase the strength of the board unit base 810 . In addition, the board base unit 810 passes the game ball T flowing down the body frame base ball extraction passage 622 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the power board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810. can be sent.

Further, the substrate unit base 810 is arranged such that the substrate mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 is positioned at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600 . When the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are positioned forward from the opening 614 of the body frame base 600. It is designed to come to Further, the board unit base 810 is configured so that the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 can be transmitted satisfactorily to the front side by means of the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815 .

Furthermore, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing part 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 on which the box housing part 816 is arranged on the rear side. , it is possible to form a housing recess for housing the firing power supply board box 830 .

A speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally has a speaker 821 mounted facing forward. The speaker box 820 hermetically covers the rear side of the speaker 821 and has a laterally long rectangular opening 822 on the left side of the speaker 821 in front view. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinthine passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and It is a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting a deeper bass sound with respect to the diameter of the speaker 821 . The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

A firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The emission power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the emission power supply board 831. Heat from the electronic components, etc. can be released to the outside.

The launching power supply board box 830 is attached and detached from above into a housing recess that opens upward and is formed by the box housing part 816 of the board unit base 810 and the front box housing part 844 of the power supply board box holder 840, which will be described later. be accommodated as much as possible. As a result, when the body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the firing power board box 830, the firing power board box 830 can be easily removed from the front side of the body frame 3 and replaced or repaired. (See Figure 63).

Further detailing the firing power supply board box 830, as shown in FIG. 89, the firing power supply board 831 includes a DC/DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 that charges and discharges power from the DC/DC converter 831a. , and a combined current of the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is applied to the shooting solenoid 654 of the hitting ball shooting device 650 to drive it. The emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a formed on its upper and lower surfaces as heat radiation holes in order to release heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the emission power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC/DC converter 831a, the side surface of the emission power supply board box 830 where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged has heat dissipation holes. A slit 830a is formed. In addition, in the emission power supply board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC/DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. and the inner wall of the lower surface are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening. Accordingly, when the launch power board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power board box 830 to close the internal space of the launch power board box 830, the internal space of the launch power board box 830 is accommodated by the partition wall 830b to accommodate the electrolytic capacitor SC0. and an accommodation space 830d for accommodating the DC/DC converter 831a. , and an accommodation space 830d for accommodating the DC/DC converter 831a.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is released through the slits as heat dissipation holes formed in the upper, side, and lower surfaces that communicate the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By releasing the heat to the outside through 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC/DC converter 831a. The heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a is dissipated through heat dissipation holes formed in the upper and lower surfaces that communicate the accommodation space 830d and the outside air. By releasing the heat to the outside through the slit 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In this embodiment, the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current to flow through the shooting solenoid 654 of the batted ball shooting device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are separate from the power supply board 851. By being provided on the power supply board 831 , the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851 . Therefore, the smaller size of the emission power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle, and the replacement work of the emission power supply board 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent on the replacement work. In this replacement work, the firing power board box 830 can be replaced while the firing power board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power board box 830 , that is, the entire firing power board box 830 can be replaced.

In addition, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving discharge by the discharge solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to discharge and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the discharge power supply board 831 is easy. Interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage by being able to do it immediately. Therefore, the impossibility of shooting due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be very easily resolved, and the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of shooting can be resolved at an early stage to resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. can be suppressed.

In addition, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is repeatedly charged and discharged at a frequency of 100 times per minute, for example, every time the firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of island facilities such as game halls, charging and discharging are not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. , compared to the launch power board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the emission power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current to flow through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the power supply board 851 and the separate firing power supply board 831, thereby shortening the service life. It is possible to concentrate on the power supply board 851 the electronic components associated with long-term aging. As a result, it is possible to prevent an electronic component with a long life due to secular change from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 with a short life.

In addition, since the shooting power supply board 831 having the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball shooting device 650 can be attached and detached from the front side through the game board holding opening 601 holding the game board 4, the capacity Even if an attempt is made to cheat by changing to a different electrolytic capacitor SC0, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601 in order to detach the firing power supply board 831, and it is difficult to replace the firing power supply board 831. By making it difficult to commit fraud, it is possible to deter fraud that intentionally changes the injection strength that is optimized by illegally modifying the launch power supply board 831, and to make it difficult to commit fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent a frustrated player from developing into dishonesty such as dishonesty.

In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if fraud is done to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 etc. of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 is immediately replaced to prevent fraud. The game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and the frustration and regret caused by the interruption of the game can be eliminated early. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player in the game.

Furthermore, a shooting power supply board 831 equipped with an electrolytic capacitor SC0 that controls the hitting ball shooting device 650 can be attached and detached from the front side through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 that holds the game board 4. Since the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) can be easily replaced when the game board 4 is replaced, electrolytic capacitor SC0 and By replacing the shooting power supply board 831 with the DC/DC converter 831a, it is possible to match the shooting characteristics of the ball shooting device 650 previously provided in the body frame 3 with the new game board 4. can. Therefore, since the hitting characteristic of the game ball T can be easily matched with the concept of the game board 4, the game by the new model of the game board 4 can be sufficiently enjoyed, and the player's interest is not lowered. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 can be attached and detached from the front side, when replacing the firing power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 with respect to the island facilities such as game halls, which reduces the time and effort required for replacement. It can be simplified, replaced in a short time, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed. In addition, since the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, compared to the case where the entire payout control board 4110 is replaced, the cost of changing the driving characteristics is reduced. It is possible to reduce the burden on the hall side and the like.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is replaced, and the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like deteriorates, as described above, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, so the deterioration causes a problem, and the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced to solve the problem. The interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the frustration and disappointment caused by the interruption of the game can be eliminated early. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the firing power supply board 831 (shooting power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for cheating is inserted through the gap between the door frame 5 and the body frame 3, the game board 4 prevents the cheating tool from reaching the emission power supply board 831. can be blocked, and the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being fraudulent with respect to the launching power supply board 831, and has a high defense against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the firing power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding opening 601, it is likely that the position where the firing power supply board box 830 is supported is behind the front surface of the body frame 3, so the firing power supply A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the emission power board box 830 and achieves the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply board 831, and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power can be supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 increases and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (the launch power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be resolved early to interrupt the game. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of shortening the time as much as possible and reliably exhibiting the above-described effects.

In addition, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is opened upward to the front left side of the left-right center in front view, and the game ball T discharged downward discharged from the out-ball discharge part 1161 of the game board 4 is received. A discharge ball receiving portion 841 to receive, a discharge passage 842 that guides downward and discharges the game ball T received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, and a side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) A front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward on the front surface of the power supply board box 830 and can accommodate the rear side of the power supply board box 830. and a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating the front end.

The power board box holder 840 is arranged such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810 , and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842 . 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 flows down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 and passes through the opening 812 of the board base unit 810 to the rear side of the board unit base 810. The game balls T that have flowed down to the pachinko machine 1 and the game balls T that have been discharged from the out-ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharged ball receiving portion 841, which will be described in detail later, are passed through the discharge passage 842 to the rear of the pachinko machine 1. It is designed so that it can be discharged downward.

In addition, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 are formed to accommodate the firing power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851. Heat from the electronic components and the like is removed to the outside through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. can be released to As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to a power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 .

In addition, the power board box 850 has a standing wall in which a power terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 on the power board 851 protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening facing the rear side. A wiring cord 854 can be inserted between a portion 850b, a protrusion 850c projecting rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer circumference of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and below the standing wall portion 850b. and a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the power terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855. The locking claw and the locking piece By locking the connector terminal 855 from the power terminal 853 , the connector terminal 855 is prevented from coming off.

As shown in FIG. 87, the power supply board box 850 has an upright wall portion 850b that extends slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 when the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851, as shown in FIG. It is formed so as to protrude to the In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 wraps around from the front lower side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear side so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the connector is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 . A terminal 855 is adapted to be connected.

By the way, when a connector terminal with a wiring cord extending out is connected to a connection terminal attached to a substrate and then the wiring cord is pulled toward the substrate, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (the front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if the wiring cord 854 is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around (turned back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b projecting rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent the terminal 855 from being pressed against the power terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 can be easily removed.

In addition, since the power supply board box 850 has protrusions 850c that protrude rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, Protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, thereby preventing the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

In addition, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, after folding the wiring cord 854 at the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring guide portion 850d can immediately move the wiring cord 854 toward the standing wall portion 850b side, so a series of operations can be performed continuously. can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the front-to-rear dimensions when assembled with each other are substantially the same as the front-to-rear dimensions of the speaker box 820 . When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

In this example, the connector terminals 855 are connected to the power supply terminals 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851, and the connector is connected by the vertical wall portion 850b projecting rearward from the rear end of the connector terminals 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 due to the pulling of the wiring cord 854 is reduced by the power supply terminal to which the connection is fixed by the locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in such a direction as to release the connection with 853, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from being unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 can be avoided. can be easily removed, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

In addition, since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 can be bent more loosely than when the vertical wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to avoid applying an unreasonable force to the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from breaking due to an unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Furthermore, the vertical wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power terminal 853. Since the vertical wall portion 850b is likely to be positioned adjacent to the power terminal 853, it is connected to the power terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connected connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting, and it is possible to prevent troubles such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with the vertical wall part 850b covering the power supply board 851, the power supply board 851 does not need to be provided with the vertical wall part 850b, and the power supply board 851 can be easily assembled. . In addition, since the power supply board box 850 covers the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from adhering to the power supply board 851, which may cause problems. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic parts (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.), and to increase the defense against fraud. It's becoming

Also, the direction in which the connector terminals 855 are connected to the power terminals 853 on the power board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (the front-rear direction). 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851 when connecting or disconnecting 855, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portions of the power supply terminals 853. It is possible to prevent the breakage of the power supply terminal 853 and the disconnection of the power supply terminal 853 from the power supply board 851, thereby making it possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which troubles are unlikely to occur.

Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means of the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 can be fixed. Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to disconnect the connector terminal 855 from the power supply terminal 853 through the connector terminal 855, the disconnection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented. By reliably maintaining the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor conduction.

In addition, since the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 where the wiring cord 854 is folded back is provided with projections 850c projecting backward, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the side, the projections 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, thereby preventing the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the effects described above by preventing the above.

In addition, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 guides the wiring cord 854 folded back at the vertical wall portion 850b toward the vertical wall portion 850b, it is difficult for the wiring cord 854 to come off the vertical wall portion 850b. In addition, the wiring cord 854 can be folded back at the vertical wall portion 850b and immediately brought to the vertical wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. can be performed, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified, thereby suppressing an increase in cost.

The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 which is oblong and open at the rear, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened at the front. 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 126) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862 . In addition, the payout control board box 860 has a plurality of separation cuts 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 projecting outward from the left end in the rear view. A box base 861 and a cover 862 are caulked and fixed. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, they cannot be separated unless the separation cutting portion 863 is cut, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened or closed. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

The payout control board box 860 has an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 facing backward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). In the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting with the main control board 4100 or the like face rearward through the cover 862. As shown in FIG.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side when viewed from the rear, and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end when viewed from the rear. a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and having peripheral panel relay terminals 872a mounted on the rear surface thereof; A connection terminal plate cover 873, which is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b extending vertically in the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873, are attached to the rear surface. and a board box cover 875 covering the rear side of the board base 871 together with the connection joint terminal board cover 873 .

The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the side of the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 with a ball lending machine (also referred to as CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The substrate base 871, the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 are each made of transparent synthetic resin, so that the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the CR unit connection terminals can be connected from the outside to the inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a problem such as ball jam occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the contents of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator and the CR unit 6 installed on the island equipment side are displayed. A displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 of the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 includes a fixing piece (not shown) formed on the inner upper part of the board mounting part 871a for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and a peripheral panel relay terminal plate formed on the inner lower part of the board mounting part 871a. A locking claw 871c that locks the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

The substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871 is formed in the shape of a thin box that is open rearward, and the size of the inner periphery is such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted thereinto. In addition, the inner peripheral wall thereof serves as an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 has a pair of fixing holes 871d that pass through the outer piece 871c on the right side in the rear view, and a bottom wall of the board cover mounting part 871b that extends rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting part 871b and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two ridges 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f that is arranged on the left outer side of the board cover mounting portion 871b in a rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The ridges 871e on the substrate base 871 project slightly less backward than the outer piece portions 871c, and as shown in the figure, extend as far as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. are arranged so as to be close to the

Further, the board base 871 includes a pair of bearings 871g arranged separately in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the right side of the board cover mounting part 871b when viewed from the rear and for rotatably supporting the board box cover 875, and the left end when viewed from the rear. and a rectangular tubular locking portion 871h arranged on the rear surface near the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 872 and has an outer wall portion 873c that can be inserted into the board cover mounting portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a that closes the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening 873b that penetrates the rear wall portion 873a and extends in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion that extends substantially along the inner circumference of the opening portion 873b. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the inner wall portion 873d extending forward (toward the substrate base 871 side) from 873a and the front end of the inner wall portion 873d abut against the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions are attached. and a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed on 873c.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f arranged in the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (to the right) from the right end of the outer wall portion 873c in rear view. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d of the substrate base 871, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall 873c in rear view and can be engaged with the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. and a locking claw piece 873i. Although not shown, inner wall portions 873d extending forward are also formed on the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery of the central opening 873f provided with the protective portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with an open front side formed by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. In addition, by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 inside the connection terminal plate cover 873 from the front side of the opening, the front end of the inner wall portion 873d can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward. In addition, forward movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be restricted by the pair of board holding portions 873e, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It's becoming Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured by inserting its fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the board base 871 and then locking the locking claw piece 873i into the locking hole 871f of the board base 871, whereby the board is It can be detachably attached to the substrate cover attachment portion 871b of the base 871. As shown in FIG.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has CR unit connection terminals 874a on its surface side (rear side) for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall. In addition, a payout control board 4110 and a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting with the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a rectangular two-piece connector. there is

The board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that is open to the front side and has a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 . A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through hole 875b penetrating in the front-rear direction corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and forward from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b. and a locking piece 875d that is locked to the locking portion 871h of the board base 871 .

The substrate box cover 875 can open and close the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portions 871g of the substrate base 871. there is Further, the substrate box cover 875 has a length such that the partition wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side on which the shaft is supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the partition wall on the side farther from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. As shown in FIG. In other words, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the partition walls 875c are substantially in contact with the board base 871 and the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873. It's like

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, the CR unit connection terminals 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are D-sub connectors. The body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside even on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. FIG. The internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a rectangular two-piece connector, and as shown in the figure, it is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, in the assembled state, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 extend in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. As shown in FIG. In the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c and inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875 are arranged. Since the barrier walls 875c on the sides are present, multiple layers of barriers are constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 is shaped like a meandering crank. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is attempted to enter between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool will not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminals will not be bent. Intrusion of unauthorized tools from the direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be reliably prevented, and tampering with the CR unit connection terminals 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

In the terminal board box 870, the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 abuts the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, so that the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a can be connected to the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer circumference of the exposed lead portion can be covered by the inner wall portion 873d, and fraud can be prevented. It's like

The terminal board box 870 has a board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871. A pair of shaft parts 875a are provided on the shaft part 875a side of the through hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a. A partition wall 875c is provided with a length that spans between them, and the partition box cover 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, the board box cover 875 can be prevented from being distorted and the formation of the gap can be prevented. It is designed to be expensive.

Furthermore, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminals 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection part 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, it is illegal to insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord while the wiring cord side connection terminal is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b that is a two-piece connector. Even so, the protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875 can prevent the electrode from being inserted, and can prevent tampering with the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are connected from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through a gap or the like and the tip of the illegal tool enters the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the CR unit connection terminal board 874 accommodated. Thus, tampering with the CR unit connection terminal board 874 can be reliably prevented.

In addition, when the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board are in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 (back surface of the board). The projection 871e and the outer piece 871c of the base 871 extend in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 (the surface of the substrate). Since the partition walls 875c of the box cover 875 are present, multiple layers of defense walls are constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. For example, even if an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility is tried to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool will not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal board will not be bent. It is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tools from entering from the direction along the surface of 874, and to reliably prevent unauthorized actions on the CR unit connection terminals 874a and internal connection terminals 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of

In addition, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the board and the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the inner wall 873d can cover the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion, and fraudulent actions can be reliably prevented.

Furthermore, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 to cover the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 so as to be able to open and close, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is provided. A substrate box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the pivotally supported side end of the through hole 875b corresponding to the substrate to the rear surface of the substrate base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted to form a gap between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported on the substrate base 871 to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the barrier wall 875c prevents the unauthorized tool from entering the connection terminals. It is possible to prevent it from reaching the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side and prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then open the connection terminal plate cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against fraud. In addition, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c, even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 cannot be removed. can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of gaps, making it difficult for fraudulent actions to be performed, thereby increasing deterrence.

Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to commit a fraudulent act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector body is covered with the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 is covered. The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted into the gap of the connector body from (the rear side), and it is possible to prevent tampering with the terminals of the connected wiring cord, and the crime-prevention ability is high. can be

Further, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a board holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c extends forward beyond the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to commit fraud, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer circumference of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). can remain protected by the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at etc.

Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is made of transparent resin, the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be seen from the outside. Whether an unauthorized tool has been inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, etc., which are accommodated inside, or whether the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, etc. itself has been replaced with an unauthorized one. Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether electronic components (eg, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like have been replaced with unauthorized ones. Therefore, it is possible to make the fraudulent act easier to discover, and to make the person who commits the fraudulent act hesitate to carry out the fraudulent act, thereby enhancing the deterrence against the fraudulent act. can.

In addition, since the terminal board box 870 is mounted on the back side of the body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 etc. faces the rear side, it is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged during maintenance or the like. When the body frame 5 is rotated forward and the rear side of the body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal board box 870 face the operator side (player side), and the CR Inspection of the unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be facilitated.

The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include the peripheral control board 4010 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like, and the door frame. 5 for relaying connection with the handle device 500, each decorative substrate, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side. By attaching to the attachment portion 813 , these connection terminals are directed forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 .

61 and 63, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face forward through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

In addition, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes the ball rental button 361, the return button 362, the remaining rental display portion 363, and the rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 of the ball rental unit 360 in the plate unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 is connected to each of the decoration units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration substrates 430 and 432 provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, 432c and the peripheral control board 4010 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. back cover]
Next, the rear cover 900 of the body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. The back cover 900 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the body frame 3 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

The back cover 900 of the body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 (the game board 4 attached to the body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the body frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-shaped body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the body portion 902 when viewed from the front, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of shaft support pins 906 are arranged in a vertical direction and protrude downward and are supported by the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, and prize balls are formed respectively at the upper and lower left side of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front. Engaging pieces 908 that engage with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, and the back cover 900 near the engaging piece 908 on the lower side of the body frame. 3, and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening so that it cannot be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 is a circular insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction to the left side of the lower locking piece 908 in the body portion 902 of the back cover 900 when viewed from the rear. 921, a vertically elongated rectangular locking opening 922 which is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side of the insertion hole 921 in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and locking which is elastically locked to the locking opening 922 from the rear side. A plate-like guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally elongated hole 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and the main body portion 902 is inserted through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924. A holding member 925 is provided. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is made of soft synthetic resin and is easily bendable.

Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is configured so that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely fitted into the locking opening 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is locked within a predetermined range. It is designed to be able to roam around. In addition, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not drop out of the long hole 923b. In this fastening mechanism 920, when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902 from the rear side, the fastening member 924 projects forward through the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924 a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the body portion 902 .

The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear side opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame 3 by supporting the back cover supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 with the pivot pin 906. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 are substantially aligned.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted into the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male threaded portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the body portion 902 of the back cover 900. FIG. By the way, in this example, the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 engaged with the body portion 902 of the back cover 900. The state of being located on the rear side of the body portion 9002 is maintained.

Then, by inserting the tip of the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b from this state and rotating the fastening member 924, the male threaded portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. mated) so that the back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. In the fastening mechanism 920 of this example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is slanted with respect to the main body portion 902, the fastening member 924 can be screwed. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male threaded portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be smoothly inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b. It is designed so that it can be screwed in.

In addition, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, the fastening member 924 at one place can be easily fastened and fastened. It is possible to release the back cover 900, thereby simplifying the time and effort involved in opening and closing the back cover 900 and improving maintainability.

The rear cover 900 also has a connection cutout portion 910 cut upward in a rectangular shape at the right lower end of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening which penetrates in a rectangular shape at the upper side of the connection cutout portion 910 when viewed from the front. 912 , and a confirmation notch 914 cut in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 5, the rear cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 1103a, test terminals 1103b, etc. of the main control board box 1103 on the game board 4 are connected through the connection notch 910. is designed to face the rear side. Further, the rear cover 900 has a board management seal 1103c (see FIG. 5) pasted on the rear surface of the main control board box 1103 facing rearward through an opening 912 for confirmation. The sealing portion 1103 d of the main control board box 1103 faces through the notch portion 914 . As a result, without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to check the operation, appearance, management status, etc. of the main control board box 1103 and the main control board 4100. FIG.

In addition, the back cover 900 has a plurality of elongated slits 916 penetrating through the body portion 902 and the side portion 904. Through these slits 916, the heat generated in the game board 4 and the like is transferred to the body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the rear outside. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 that are wide and elongated in the vertical direction are arranged in a line at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction at a position slightly left of the center in a front view. These through holes 918 are formed on the rear side of the effect display device 1115 on the game board 4 in a state in which the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3 . It is located behind a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control board 4010 and the like provided in the , so that the heat from the peripheral control board 4010 and the like can be exhausted well. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball T so that the game ball T does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918 .

As a result, in this example, the fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held by the body frame 3 to the body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Therefore, when the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance on the rear side of the game board 4 while the main body frame 3 holds the game board 4, Even if the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 does not move to the guide member 923. It is held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900, and it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left behind in the pachinko machine 1, and the fastening member 924 is removed from the back cover 900. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from falling off.

In addition, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling out of the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the unfastened fastening member 924 in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. , can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking opening 922, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight into the rear cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the rear cover 900, and the male threaded portion 924a can be securely fixed in the correct state with respect to the rear cover fastening hole 780b. can be concluded in Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head portion of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 movably with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head of the holding member 925 and the holding member 925, so that the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from slipping out of the long hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 The fastening member 924 can be movably held with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a housing recess around the insertion hole 921 in which the holding member can be housed. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are tightly attached. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced, thereby reducing the occurrence of problems. You can do it and you can make it look better.

In addition, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female threaded portion and is screwed to the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it can be fastened by simply pulling it, compared to engagement by a simple locking claw. can be made difficult to remove the back cover 900, the crime-prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be enhanced, and the Pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

Furthermore, since the guide member 923 is flexible and can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and to move the male screw portion 924 straight to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be reliably fastened to the rear cover fastening hole 780b.

In addition, in a state in which the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening is closed. Since it is elastically locked to 922, the tip end side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 attached movably is attached to the axis extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. It can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking opening 922 . Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 can be rotated to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3. Therefore, the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation of the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engaging grooves 718, 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engaging grooves 718, 780a. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, fastening by the fastening member 924 is achieved. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the number of places to be fastened using the fastening member 924 can be reduced to only one place, and the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible. can enhance sexuality. In addition, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the body frame 3 by engaging the engaging pieces 908 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even with the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 (the rear side of the game board 4) in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good condition without increasing the fastening points by the fastening members 924. FIG.

Further, the back cover 900 can be rotatably supported with respect to the body frame 3 by allowing the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600 ) to support the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900 . Since the back cover 900 is rotated in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b through the insertion hole 921. As shown in FIG. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the body frame 3, even if the back cover 900 is opened by releasing the fastening by the fastening members 924 during maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 can be opened. The cover 900 can be kept pivotally supported on the body frame 3, the back cover 900 does not need to be removed from the body frame 3, and the labor required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. lock device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached along the outer side surface of the opening side of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 from substantially the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 2, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600, a locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base having a U-shaped cross section and a door frame lock slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001 . A sliding rod 1040, a main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and a U-shaped structure to prevent illegal sliding of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base 1001 .

The U-shaped base body 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided therein. and are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base 1001 has a width dimension that is extremely thin as compared with that of a conventional lock device that is integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the horizontal dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, thereby increasing the game area. A wide game board 4 of 1100 can be provided.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 is attached with the open side of the U-shaped cross section facing the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the body frame base 600 . As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are attached to the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-tampering structure that makes it difficult for the lock device 1000 to be tampered with from the outside.

The U-shaped base body 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate above and below the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screwing portion 1003 protruding outward from the upper part of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side and a screwing portion 1003, and a screwing portion. Protrudes forward from the upper and middle portions of the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the 1003 protrudes, and from the lower ends of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side. and a locking protrusion 1004 .

The screw portion 1003 and locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base body 1001 are for attaching the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. and the lock engaging hole 621 from the rear side, and then moved upward, the screwed portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other, and the screwed portion 1003 is The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock mounting portion 625 through it.

It should be noted that the lock device 1000 is attached with screws not only at the upper and middle screw fastening portions 1003, but also at the screw fastening portions 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through-hole 611. The lock mounting portion 625 is also fixed to the body frame base 600 with screws (not shown), and the lock device 1000 is also mounted below.

When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the top, middle, and bottom of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole at the top and middle. 621 and is positioned and locked, and the screwing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. (Main body frame 3) can be firmly fixed.

In other words, even if the lock device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having an extremely thin width, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the body frame 3 by engaging and fixing the front and rear sides of the lock device 1000. can be fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (fixing structure may be used) on the front side protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side protrudes toward the peripheral wall portion 605 from the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 which is in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure on the front side is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the body frame 3 so as not to rattle, compared to the case where the lock device 1001 is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the lock device 1001b.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 has insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction in the upper, middle and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it in a state where the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is housed, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are installed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 . can be mounted so as to be vertically slidable.

That is, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the rivets 1006 pass through the upper end portions of the rivet slotted holes 1042 formed at three locations, upper, middle and lower, of the door frame sliding rod 1040. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower ends of the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. The door frame sliding lever 1040 can be moved upward, and the main body frame sliding lever 1050 can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped substrate 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the body frame base 600 on the open side, and from the anti-tamper notch portion 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion of the U-shaped substrate 1001. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and a vertical insertion opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed in the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. Although the details will be described later, the tamper-preventing notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 is such that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-preventing member 1023 advances and retreats. The lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is positioned below the lower edge of the game board holding opening 601 when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009 protrudes laterally from the front end portion, through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and a mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting base plate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 for mounting with screws 1012 at two upper and lower positions. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in and a screw portion 1003 drilled for mounting the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the body frame 3 are formed.

The U-shaped base body 1001 also has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. , a spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a side clearance hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to hinder the movement of the connecting pin 1034, It has

The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001 . This cylinder lock 1010 has a lock mounting base plate 1011 fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting base plate 1011. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019 . The engaging cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engaging projecting piece 1017 that engages with the downward engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engaging protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame during rotation.

This cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 from the rear side, and mounting holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower positions of a lock mounting base plate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 .

The anti-tampering members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 are designed to prevent the cylinder lock 1010 from being rotated by an official key, and to be used, for example, by a piano wire or a wire to tamper with the sliding lever 1050 for the body frame. to prevent it from dropping. These anti-tampering members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first anti-tampering member 1023 and a second anti-tampering member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034, as shown in FIG. The first tamper-proof member 1023 has a vertically long plate-like shape and is supported by the U-shaped base 1001 so as to be capable of swinging around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 passes through the swing shaft hole 1025 and is most likely to move along with the door frame sliding lever 1040 and the main body frame sliding lever 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 . It is attached by lower insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 .

In addition, the first tamper-proof member 1023 has a vertically long opening at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-like surface so that the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 can be inserted. It has a protruding piece insertion hole 1026 which has been shaped. The second engaging projection 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 penetrates the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the vertical insertion opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 is moved. The rising engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is provided on the front obliquely upper outer edge of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to come into contact with the rear side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. When the engaging cam 1016 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging projection piece 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves around the swing shaft hole 1025. (Clockwise direction in FIG. 97(B)).

Further, the first tamper-proof member 1023 includes a stopper piece 1027 projecting toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the oblique rear lower outer edge of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and further from the position where the stopper piece 1027 projects. It has a regulating projection piece 1031 projecting downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 arranged vertically through the front side of the regulating projection piece 1031 in the horizontal direction. The stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engaging notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding lever 1050 when the main body frame sliding lever 1050 is locked. Thus, the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from illicitly sliding. In addition, the regulating protrusion 1031 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 contacts the second tamper-proof member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second tamper-proof member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). Movement can be regulated.

Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first tamper-proof member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the oblong opening formed at the lowest end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. can be done. Furthermore, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 with a connecting pin 1034 .

On the other hand, the second anti-tampering member 1032 connected to the first anti-tampering member 1023 is formed of an inverted "T"-shaped plate material, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one end of its upper portion and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other end of its upper portion. , and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The second anti-tampering member 1032 can be relatively rotatably connected to the first anti-tampering member 1023 by aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first anti-tampering member 1023 and inserting the connecting pin 1034. It is possible. In addition, the second tamper-proof member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of a spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036 . Thus, the spring 1035 urges it upward. Further, the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. This door sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations, upper, middle and lower, on one longitudinal side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001 . When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. can be engaged with a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the rear surface of the. The door-frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, so that the door-frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover can be engaged by lifting the door-frame sliding rod 1040 . 165 can be released.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a vertically elongated rivet slot 1042 drilled in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and a lower part of the uppermost slotted rivet hole 1042 and for the door frame. A guide projection 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowest end of the sliding rod 1040 . The rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040 is adapted to receive the rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the upward motion of 1040 . In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is arranged such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, it is possible to guide the mutual sliding motion between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 .

A spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of a spring 1048 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040 . The other end of the spring 1048 engaged with the spring hook portion 1046 is engaged with the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 allows the door frame to slide. The rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. Further, the door frame sliding lever 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is pressed out from one side surface of the door frame sliding lever 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 contacts the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 and can suppress the door frame sliding rod 1040 from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001 . It's like

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a vertically elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. This play hole 1044 is formed at the tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space in which the part can move. In addition, the rising engagement hole 1045 is designed so that when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 . for engaging the The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 vertically larger than the tampering prevention notch 1007 at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side. The relief notch 1049 is provided so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-tampering member 1023 can be reliably engaged with the anti-tampering notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is in the way. The corresponding part is notched so that it does not become

On the other hand, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting rod 1052 that connects the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has In other words, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically elongated metal plate as in the conventional art, but an upper hook member 1051 having hook portions 1054 and 1065 and a lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and an upper hook member 1051 and a lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connecting rod 1053 . As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently accommodated in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001 .

The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed toward the rear at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction through the plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 . , a projecting piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the horizontal direction below the long hole 1055 for rivet, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the front vertical side of the projecting piece moving hole 1056, and the lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 and contact portions 1059 formed on the upper and lower sides of the upper hook member 1051 . The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates through the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw portion is formed upward.

The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to receive the guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame. 1050 and mutual movement can be guided.

The other end of the spring 1048 is engaged with the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 . Further, the upper end of the connecting rod 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 . Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 contacts the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is accommodated in the U-shaped base 1001. It can slide smoothly without rattling.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet portion penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 . A slotted hole 1061, a descending engagement hole 1062 arranged below the slotted rivet hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the descending engagement hole 1062, and below the play hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed in the lower portion of the rear vertical side of the lower hook member 1052. A notch portion 1066 and contact portions 1067 formed on the upper and lower sides of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook through-opening 1002 below the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the bottom inside the open side of the outer frame 2. , and a locking claw portion is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is passed through, the rivet 1006 passes through the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061 . This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

Further, when the first engagement projecting piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and pivoted, the main body frame slide rod 1050 descends due to the pivoting motion. It is intended to engage as In addition, when the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted into the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the second engaging protrusion 1018 does not interfere with the rotating operation. can form a movable space. Further, the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052 is adapted to receive the guide projecting piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1040 are connected to each other. Mutual movement with the movable rod 1050 can be guided.

Further, the bent lower end of the connecting rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052 . Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped substrate 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001 . When the hook member 1052 slides, it can slide smoothly without play.

Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding lever 1050 are connected by the connecting rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding lever 1040 is connected. The pieces 1043 are inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook through-opening 1002 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 while sliding the door frame slide rod 1040 and the main body frame slide. After inserting the movable rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001 , the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005 .

When inserting this rivet 1006 , the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 1055 , 1061 , 1042 . When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first anti-tampering member 1023 to attach the first anti-tampering member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. In addition, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected with a connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the pin hole. 1029 is fixed with a screw (not shown), and then the guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the vertical insertion opening 1020 .

Furthermore, with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is stretched between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057 to move the door. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in mutually opposite directions, and a spring 1035 is hung between the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to perform the second fraud prevention. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restricting projecting piece 1031 . After that, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with the screw 1012 . At this time, the tip of the first engaging projection 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the vertical insertion opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engaging projection of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock mounting piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first anti-tampering member 1023 .

In order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 in this manner, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding lever 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is removed. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the body frame base 600 by aligning it with the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing screws (not shown) into the aligned holes. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 1001a of the U-shaped base 1001 not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screwed portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 which is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure at the front portion is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 without rattling, compared to the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. FIG. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 are engaged. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the vertical insertion opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the downward engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the urging force of the spring 1048 and connect with it. The connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is pulled forward to remove the main body frame 3. It can be opened to the frame 2.

When the body frame 3 is closed, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (same raised position as shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 are inclined downward toward the outside, the body frame 3 is forcibly pressed against the outer frame 2 so that the upper inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are inclined downward from the closing plates 24 and 25. Since it abuts against the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claws of the hooks 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are engaged again. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the vertical insertion opening 1020, the second The tip of the two engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 to push the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the urging force of the spring 1048 . As a result, the locked state between the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is released. It can be opened with respect to the body frame 3 .

When closing the door frame 5, the door frame hook 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the door frame hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is inclined toward the hook cover 165. The door-frame sliding rod 1040 comes into contact with the upper end and rises upward, and furthermore, the downward claw portion of the door-frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 engage again, and the door-frame slide The movable rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have a length substantially equal to the overall length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 extends approximately along the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is attached over the entire length, and the door frame hook portion 1041 which is the engaging portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations, namely, the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040 . Therefore, the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 can be securely locked over the entire length in the vertical direction. It has become incapable of performing an act.

In this way, the lock device 1000 for the door frame 3 of this embodiment unlocks the body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by turning the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and locks it in the other direction. By rotating, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment is designed so that a piano wire or the like is hooked on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 and the hook is lowered. is not possible. The first structure to prevent such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped substrate 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the locking mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. It is in a state of In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 rotates the first anti-tampering member 1023 counterclockwise so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the anti-tampering notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 moves into the anti-tampering notch. It is engaged with the engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at the position corresponding to 1007 . As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and an attempt is made to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engaging notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other, so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be pulled down. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) is disabled, and the unauthorized act of opening the body frame 3 cannot be performed.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to unlock the body frame 3 normally, the key is rotated to engage the first engagement projection of the engagement cam 1016 as shown in FIG. 97(B). Piece 1017 is pivoted to enter into longitudinal insertion opening 1020 . When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 abut against each other. It starts to rotate clockwise around 1025 , and the stopper piece 1027 also moves away from the tamper prevention notch 1007 . As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projecting piece 1017 as well, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 is engaged with the downward engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. As a result, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are released from the locked state, and the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031, so the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1023 are in contact with each other. 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 97(A). When the body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 come into front contact with each other, finally resulting in the state shown in FIG. 97(A). As a result, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 do not get in the way when the body frame 3 is closed. In this embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 only prevent the body frame sliding lever 1050 from being illegally lowered because the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to illegally raise the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 .

Further, even with the locking mechanism, which is the first anti-tampering structure, it may be impossible to disable the function of the locking mechanism by swinging the first anti-tampering member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. do not have. Therefore, assuming that the locking function of the locking mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), the internal The sliding lever 1040 for the door frame and the sliding lever 1050 for the main body frame, except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065, are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped substrate 1001 and completely covered. In this state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped substrate 1001, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped substrate 1001 will not move. Since the entry of unauthorized tools into the closed space is prevented by the structure, unauthorized actions cannot be easily carried out.

Thus, in the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is placed inside the U-shaped base 1001, which is extremely thin compared to the conventional lock device in which the width dimension is integrated into the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 to the U-shaped substrate 1001 is set below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the horizontal and vertical sizes of the game board 4 are made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is enlarged, the lock device 1000 can be placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. It can be installed firmly.

In addition, since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped substrate 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. , a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the body frame slide rod 1050 provided inside, and other illegal acts cannot be easily performed.

When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions, upper, middle and lower, on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. , and the screwing portions 1003 formed at three locations, upper, middle and lower, on the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, which makes the structure extremely simple. With such a structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the body frame 3 (body frame base 600).

In addition, in the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment, a screwing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 and near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the body frame 3 Although a structure is shown in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed, instead of this, a screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is used for lock mounting. A structure in which lock mounting holes to be screwed through the piece 1008 are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611 may be employed. In addition, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the lock mounting portion 625 to the screw fastening portion 1003 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000. It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding lever 1040 and the main body frame sliding lever 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with rivets or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped base (lock base) is used, and a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod are provided in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and a first side wall 540. 1050 may be accommodated, and effects similar to those of the lock device 1000 described above can be obtained.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize sphere base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (forward and backward) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize sphere base 710 A prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls T supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the rear wall of the prize ball base where the game balls T discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the part 710b, and a game ball T released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction. A portion of the prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side of the wall portion 710b and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 are provided. and a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially on the same plane, the back of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The pachinko machine allows visual confirmation of the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 and allows easy inspection (visual inspection) of the rear side of the game board 4 without opening a back cover 900 covering the rear side of the game board 4.例文帳に追加can be 1.

In addition, since not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the game board holding opening of the main body frame base 600 When the game board 4 is removed from the front side of the game board 601, even if tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, cleaning rags, dust, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, they are removed from the outside. It can be easily found from the inside, and it is possible to prevent any trouble caused by the residue.

Furthermore, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, it is possible to attach illegal devices, tools, etc. to the rear side, side surface, etc. of the game board 4 for cheating. Even if it is installed, it can be easily detected, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly deterrent to fraudulent actions by making the player hesitate to install an illegal device or the like.

In addition, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed may come into contact with the game board 4, or the game board 4 may be damaged. It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dirt and dust from adhering to the rear side of the board, maintain the game board 4 in a good state, and suppress the occurrence of defects.

In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position approximately twice as deep from the front end of the main body frame base 600 as the depth D of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., and the above effects can be reliably achieved. be able to. In addition, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is approximately half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height of the main body frame base 600 when laid down can be lowered as much as possible to form a flat shape. , It is possible to facilitate the installation work of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

Furthermore, the rear surface of the transparent back cover 900 (body portion 902) is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be formed into a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating rearward projections, it is possible to prevent the machine from being caught or abutted by other members in the installed island facility. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring by preventing them. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use cushioning materials with a simple shape and to increase the stacking efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost associated with the machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, the rear side and rear side of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 and the like can be made easier to see, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900 and the like. , It is possible to prevent the heat from the game board 4 from accumulating, and to suppress the occurrence of problems such as unstable control related to the game due to heat and deformation of members such as synthetic resin. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are set to a size that the game ball T cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball T spills to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the slit 916 will be closed. Intrusion of the game ball T into the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented through such as, and occurrence of trouble due to the intrusion of the game ball T can be prevented.

[2. Configuration of game board]
The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 125. FIG. The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A flat plate-like game panel 1112 that partitions the rear end side of the game area 1100 is provided.

The front component member 1111 has a quadrangular outer peripheral shape, and an inner peripheral shape that is substantially semicircular on the left side and substantially U-shaped on the right side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The front component member 1111 forms a first inner wall portion (outer rail) 1111a smoothly connected to the entire semicircular portion on the inner peripheral surface and the portion extending left and right above the U-shaped portion. The second inner wall portion 1111b is formed by connecting the remaining vertically extending portion of the U-shaped portion and the lower horizontally extending portion in an L shape. In addition, the front component member 1111 is a guide wall that extends in an arc along the first inner wall portion 1111a from the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111b (the left end of the portion extending horizontally in a front view) to near the upper left corner in a front view. (Inner rail) 1111c and a check piece 1111d rotatably attached to the upper end of the guide wall 1111c.

The game panel 1112 is formed with an out port 1112a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the lower end of the inner periphery of the front structural member 1111 in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The out port 1112a is formed at a position where the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front structural member 1111 and the lower end of the guide wall 1111c are connected. In addition, the game panel 1112 is formed with an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction at substantially the center of the game area 1100 .

The game board 4 includes a board holder 1102 (see FIG. 6) attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1112, a main control board box 1103 attached to the board holder 1102, and a main control board box 1103. A main control board 4100 (see FIG. 126) which is housed inside and controls game content, and a function attached to the front structural member 1111 which displays the game state etc. based on control signals from the main control board 4100. and a display 1114 .

Furthermore, the game board 4 includes an effect display device 1115 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1112 so as to be visible from the front side through the opening of the game panel 1112, and a main control device attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1115. A peripheral control board 4010 for controlling the performance display device 1115 and the like based on a control signal from the board 4100 is provided. The game board 4 includes a front unit 1120 attached to the front of the game panel 1112 in the front view game area 1100, and a back unit 3000 (see FIG. 6) attached to the rear of the game panel 1112. , is equipped with

The table unit 1120 includes a center accessory 1130 that is attached substantially in the center of the game area 1100 when viewed from the front and divides the game area 1100 into left and right, and a winning opening attached to the lower side of the center accessory 1130. A unit 1150 is provided.

[2-1. Center role]
The center accessory 1130 is formed in the shape of a frame penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the game panel 1112 while being inserted from the front side into the opening of the game panel 1112 . This center accessory 1130 has a warp entrance 1131 into which the game ball T can enter on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in the front view, and a lower part in the center in the left-right direction in the front view from which the game ball T entering the warp entrance 1131 is released. and a warp exit 1132 .

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a game ball T struck (left-handed) into the left channel passes through the left channel on the left side of the center accessory 1130 when viewed from the front. A gate member 1134 and a gate sensor 1135 for detecting passage of the game ball T through the gate member 1134 are provided. Also, as will be described later, in this left flow path, a flow-down path is provided in which the game ball T that has passed through the gate member 1134 can be further received into the first start port 1152 .

In addition, on the right side of the center accessory 1130 when viewed from the front, there is a right channel 1133 through which the game ball T can flow down, and a game ball T hit (right-handed) into the right channel 1133 can pass through. A gate member 1134 and a gate sensor 1135 for detecting passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134 are provided.

The right flow path 1133 opens upward below the blocking portion 1111e where the first inner wall portion 1111a and the second inner wall portion 1111b at the upper right corner in the front view of the front structural member 1111 intersect. an entrance 1133a, an entrance path 1133b guiding the game ball T downward from the entrance 1133a, a gate space 1133c of a predetermined size connected to the lower end of the entrance path 1133b and having a gate member 1134 arranged in the center; A guideway 1133d that guides the game ball T downward along a part of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component 1111 from the lower end of the gate space 1133c, and a guideway 1133d that opens at the lower end of the guideway 1133d to guide the game ball T downward. and a discharge port 1133e that discharges to.

The right flow path 1133 has an entrance 1133a which is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, and an entrance path 1133b leading to the entrance 1133a has a width slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball T at the lower end side. It is formed so as to become narrower as it goes downward. The gate space 1133c is widened vertically and horizontally below the entrance path 1133b, and is formed in such a size that the game ball T can flow down the left and right sides of the gate member 1134 arranged substantially in the center. In this gate space 1133c, a gate member 1134 is arranged at a position slightly to the right in front view from directly below the entrance path 1133b. The bottom surface of the gate space 1133c is inclined to the right in front view, and the upper end of the guideway 1133d opens at the lowest right end.

The guide path 1133d extends in an arc shape along the vertically extending portion of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component 1111 . As shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the inner wall of the guideway 1133d is provided with a plurality of protrusions, and the game ball T can be brought into contact with these protrusions so that the falling speed of the game ball T can be suppressed. This guideway 1133d extends downward to about half the height of the game area 1100 . A discharge port 1133e at the lower end of the guideway 1133d opens slightly to the left when viewed from the front.

[2-2. Schematic configuration of the prize-winning unit]
The prize winning port unit 1150 is arranged below the discharge port 1133e of the right flow path 1133 in the center role 1130, and has a general prize winning port 1151 capable of always receiving the game ball T and a warp exit 1132 of the center role 1130. A first starting port 1152 which is arranged on the lower side and can always accept the game ball T, and a second starting port which is arranged on the right side of the first starting port 1152 in front view and is always open into the game area 1100. 1153, a large winning opening 1154 which is arranged below the first starting opening 1152 and can be opened and closed according to the game state to receive the game ball T, and is arranged on the right side of the second starting opening 1153 in front view. and a role winning opening 1155 that can receive a game ball T by opening and closing according to the game state, and a game received in the role winning opening 1155 that is arranged in the internal area of the role winning opening 1155. and a V prize opening 1156 capable of receiving a ball T.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 103, the winning opening unit 1150 has a first start opening 1152 and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1112. A transparent front flow path forming member 1161 which is provided with a general winning port 1151 and forms a flow path for the game ball T, and a transparent front surface attached to the front side of the front flow path forming member 1161. A decorative plate 1162, an attacker unit 1200 arranged in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and equipped with a large winning opening 1154 and attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160, and the front of the attacker unit 1200 A variable starting port unit 1210 that is arranged diagonally to the upper right in the view and is provided with a second starting port 1153 and attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160, and a variable starting port unit 1210 that is arranged on the right side of the variable starting port unit 1210 in the front view. and a role item unit 1220 which is provided with a role item winning opening 1155 and a V winning opening 1156 and which is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 .

Furthermore, the winning opening unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 and guides the game ball T received in the first starting opening 1152 downward. A ball detection sensor 1164 attached to a guide member 1163 for detecting a game ball T received in the first start port 1152, and a ball detection sensor 1164 arranged behind the first start port 1152 and an LED mounted on the front surface. A first starting port decoration substrate 1165, a substrate stay 1166 supporting the first starting port decoration substrate 1165 and attached to the first starting port guide member 1163, and a base at a position below the attacker unit 1200 A large winning opening decoration board 1167 attached to the rear side of the plate 1160 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface is provided.

In addition, the winning opening unit 1150 includes a second starting opening decoration board 1168 arranged on the rear side of the base plate 1160 and above the second starting opening 1153 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a second starting opening. A starter reflector 1169 attached to the variable starter unit 1210 covering the front side of the decorative substrate 1168, and a second starter 1153 attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 at a position below the variable starter unit 1210. A guide member 1170 for the second start opening that guides the game ball T received in downward, and a guide member 1170 for the second start opening that is attached to the guide member 1170 for the second start opening and detects the game ball T received in the second start opening 1153. A ball detection sensor (not shown), an attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200 attached to the rear side of the second starting port guide member 1170, a starting port solenoid 1215 of the variable starting port unit 1210, and the main control board 4100 and a board cover 1173 that covers the rear side of the first relay board 1172 and is attached to the rear side of the guide member 1170 for the second starting port.

Furthermore, the prize winning port unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the role product unit 1220, and the role product unit cover 1174 covering the rear side of the role product unit 1220 and the role product unit cover 1174 on the upper side of the prize winning port 1155 are attached. A role item prize winning opening decorative substrate 1175 arranged in the upper part of the front surface and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a role item winning attached to a role item unit cover 1174 covering the front side of the role item winning opening decoration substrate 1175. The mouth reflector 1176, the vibration sensor 1177 attached to the center of the front surface of the accessory unit cover 1174, the accessory winning solenoid 1225 and V winning solenoid 1232 of the accessory unit 1220, and the main control board 4100 are connected to each other. A second relay board 1178, a general winning opening guide member 1179 attached to the rear side of the accessory unit cover 1174 and guiding downward the game ball T received in the general winning opening 1151, and a general winning opening guide member 1179 and a general winning hole sensor 1180 (see FIG. 126) for detecting a game ball T received in the general winning hole 1151.

The base plate 1160 of the prize winning opening unit 1150 projects forward from the upper left portion of the front view, is open upward and rearward, and has a receiving portion 1160a forming a first starting opening 1152, and a receiving portion 1160a. An attacker opening 1160b, which penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends left and right on the lower side and into which a large winning opening opening/closing member 1203 of an attacker unit 1200 described later is inserted from the rear side, A second starting port opening 1160c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and faces the rear side of the second starting port 1153, and a slit-like extending through the second starting port opening 1160c in the left direction in the front-rear direction. A door slit 1160d through which the front side of the starting port door member 1214 of the starting port unit 1210 can pass. A second starting opening upper shelf light emitting decoration part 1160e that is decorated with light by the LED of the decoration board 1168 is provided.

In addition, the base plate 1160 penetrates in the front-rear direction on the right side of the second start opening upper shelf light-emitting decorative portion 1160e, and forms a role prize winning opening 1155 described later of the prize winning opening unit 1220A in the accessory unit 1220. A prize winning opening 1160f is inserted so that the front portions of the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 protrude forward from the rear side, and a prize winning opening reflector 1176 is formed above the opening 1160f. 1160g, which are arranged in rows on the front side and are luminous and decorated by the LEDs of the accessory prize winning opening decoration board 1175, and the lower side of the accessory winning opening opening 1160f penetrate back and forth. A V winning opening opening 1160h into which a ball guiding member 1238, which will be described later, of the V winning opening unit 1220B in the accessory unit 1220 is inserted so as to project forward from the rear side, A gutter portion 1160i extending upward and having an open top guides the game ball T received in the general winning opening 1151 of the front flow path forming member 1161 to the rear and delivers it to the general winning opening guide member 1179. and have.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 102, the front flow path forming member 1161 protrudes from the front surface of the flat base plate 1160 into the front game area 1100, and the flat front plate portion 1161a is the front surface. It is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side. The front flow path forming member 1161 has a receiving portion 1161b and a receiving portion 1161b which are open at the upper right and the rear when viewed from the front and guide the game ball T received from the upper side to the rear to form a general prize winning opening 1151. A shelf-like receiving part lower shelf that is separated from the receiving part 1161b by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T and extends so that the left side is lower from the right side of the receiving part 1161b to the extension line of the left side of the receiving part 1161b. 1161c, a receiving portion lower right standing wall portion 1161d extending downward from the left end of the receiving portion lower shelf portion 1161c to the upper portion of the accessory winning opening 1155, and a portion larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T from the receiving portion 1161b to the left side in front view. A position below the receiving part lower shelf 1161c and above the accessory winning opening 1155 (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball T from the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A described later) position), and from the lower end of the receiving portion left standing wall portion 1161e to the upper side of the right side of the accessory winning opening 1155 along the upper side of the accessory winning opening 1155 and a top wall portion 1161f on the prize winning opening extending to the top.

In addition, the front flow path forming member 1161 is lowered to the left from the position where the left end of the accessory winning opening upper ceiling wall portion 1161f contacts the left end of the lower left accessory winning opening 1155 (accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221). A left shelf part 1161g of the accessory winning opening that extends short, and a second starting opening region right standing wall part 1161h that extends vertically below the second starting opening 1153 from the right end of the left shelf part 1161g of the accessory winning opening. and a second starting port region lower shelf portion 1161i extending leftward from the lower end of the second starting port region right standing wall portion 1161h to the left end of the front flow passage forming member 1161 so that the left side is lowered.

In addition, the front flow path forming member 1161 is separated from the right vertical wall portion 1161h of the second start opening region to the left side by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, and is located from the upper surface of the accessory winning opening left shelf portion 1161g. It extends leftward to a position above the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the second starting port region lower shelf 1161i so that the left side is lower from a position separated downward by a distance larger than the outer diameter of T. The second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is arranged at a position directly above the second starting opening 1153, and the right end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j hangs down so as to cover the right side of the second starting opening 1153. The outer diameter of the game ball T from the left end of the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k, the guide piece 1161l protruding leftward as it goes forward from the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k, and the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and a second starting port area left standing wall portion 1161m that is slightly farther to the left than the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j and vertically extends from a position above to a position below the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j.

The winning opening unit 1150 of this embodiment includes a ball detecting sensor 1164 attached to the first starting opening guide member 1163 and a ball detecting sensor 1208 attached to the attacker unit 1200 and described later. A first start sensor 1190 for detecting a game ball T received by 1152 is formed. In addition, a ball detection sensor (not shown) attached to the second starting port guide member 1170 and a ball detecting sensor 1213 (to be described later) attached to the variable starting port unit 1210 receive the second starting port 1153. A second start sensor 1191 for detecting the game ball T is formed.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the winning opening unit 1150 includes a winning opening sensor 1206 for detecting a game ball T received in the winning opening 1154 of the attacker unit 1200, and a winning opening 1155 of the accessory unit 1220. It is equipped with an accessory winning opening sensor 1224 for detecting the received game ball T and a specific sensor 1239 for detecting the gaming ball T received in the V winning opening 1156 of the accessory unit 1220 .

[2-2A. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 1200 of the winning opening unit 1150 is mainly shown in FIGS. An attacker lower base 1201 forming the lower part, an attacker upper base 1202 attached to the upper side of the attacker lower base 1201 and attached to the base plate 1160 and forming the upper part of the big winning hole 1154, the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202 Attached between a large winning opening opening/closing member 1203 for opening and closing a large winning opening 1154 supported by a base 1202 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction, and between an attacker lower base 1201 and an attacker upper base 1202. An attacker solenoid 1204 having a plunger 1204a that advances and retreats according to the game state, a link member 1205 that transmits the advance and retreat of the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 to open and close the large winning opening opening and closing member 1203, and an attacker lower A large winning opening sensor 1206 attached to the base 1201 for detecting the game ball T received in the large winning opening 1154, and a game detected by the large winning opening sensor 1206 attached to the lower side of the attacker lower base 1201. A guide member 1207 that guides the ball T backward, and a ball detection sensor 1208 that is attached to the upper part of the attacker upper base 1202 and detects the game ball T received in the first starting port 1152 is provided.

The large winning opening 1154 formed in the attacker unit 1200 has a horizontally long rectangular shape which is 4 to 6 times longer than the diameter of the game ball T when viewed from the front and slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball T in the vertical direction. , and the opened opening can be opened and closed by a plate-like large winning opening opening and closing member 1203 . The large winning opening opening/closing member 1203 of the large winning opening/closing member 1154 is rotatable about the lower side thereof as a rotation axis. It is a so-called variable winning opening that can receive the game ball T when the large winning opening opening/closing member 1203 is in a substantially horizontal state.

The lower attacker base 1201 of the attacker unit 1200 is arranged to the left from the center in the left-right direction, and penetrates vertically through the lower housing portion 1201a in the shape of a horizontally long box whose front and upper sides are open and the bottom wall of the lower housing portion 1201a. A through-hole 1201b through which the ball T can pass, a sensor support hole 1201c formed below the through-hole 1201b and into which the big winning opening sensor 1206 is inserted from the rear side, A pair of lower bearing portions 1201d arranged, a solenoid support portion 1201e formed on the rear side of the right portion of the lower housing portion 1201a, and a U-shaped portion formed on the front side of the solenoid support portion 1201e and on the right side of the lower housing portion 1201a. and a passage hole 1201g which is formed at the rear side of the lower accommodation portion 1201a at the center in the left-right direction and penetrates vertically so that the game ball T can pass therethrough.

The lower housing portion 1201a of the attacker lower base 1201 forms the lower half of the big winning opening 1154, and the bottom wall is inclined downward toward the through hole 1201b. The pair of lower bearing portions 1201d cooperate with an upper bearing portion 1202b of the attacker upper base 1202, which will be described later, to rotatably support the big winning opening opening/closing member 1203. As shown in FIG. The shaft support portion 1201f can support the link member 1205 by inserting the rotation shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 from above. 1201 g of passing holes pass the game ball T which was received by the 1st starting opening 1152 and passed through the through-hole 1202e of the base 1202 on an attacker.

The attacker upper base 1202 of the attacker unit 1200 is arranged to the left from the center in the left-right direction, and is arranged on the upper front surface of the horizontally long box-shaped storage section 1202a that is open at the front and the bottom, and on the lower front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the upper storage section 1202a. a pair of upper bearings 1202b that are in contact with each other, a shaft hole 1202c that passes through the right side of the upper housing portion 1202a and into which the rotation shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 is inserted, and a rear upper portion of the upper housing portion 1202a. A sensor support portion 1202d into which the ball detection sensor 1208 is inserted from the upper side, and a through hole 1202e that penetrates vertically so that the game ball T can pass through the right portion of the sensor support portion 1202d. .

The upper accommodation portion 1202a of the attacker upper base 1202 forms a large winning opening 1154 in cooperation with the lower accommodation portion 1201a of the attacker lower base 1201. FIG. The pair of upper bearings 1202b cooperate with the lower bearings 1201d of the lower attacker base 1201 to rotatably support the big winning opening opening/closing member 1203. As shown in FIG. The shaft hole 1202c is for rotatably supporting a rotation shaft 1205a of the link member 1205, which will be described later. The game ball T received by the first starting port 1152 and detected by the ball detection sensor 1208 passes through the through hole 1202e.

The big winning opening opening/closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 includes a flat plate-shaped door portion 1203a extending left and right, a pair of shaft pins 1203b extending outward from the lower left and right ends of the door portion 1203a, and the door portion 1203a. and an action pin 1203c projecting rightward from a position diagonally below and behind the shaft pin 1203b on the right end side.

The door portion 1203a of the large winning opening opening/closing member 1203 is formed in a size capable of blocking the large winning opening 1154 formed by the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202 . A pair of shaft pins 1203b are rotatably supported by a pair of lower bearing portions 1201d and a pair of upper bearing portions 1202b of the attacker lower base 1201 and attacker upper base 1202, respectively. The action pin 1203c is inserted between a pair of action pins 1205c of the link member 1205, which will be described later.

The attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200 is supported between the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202 in a state where the plunger 1204a is inserted into the solenoid support portion 1201e of the attacker lower base 1201 so that the plunger 1204a advances and retreats from the right end side. . A plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 has a disc-shaped tip. The attacker solenoid 1204 has a coil spring (not shown), and when not energized, the plunger 1204a protrudes due to the biasing force of the coil spring.

The link member 1205 of the attacker unit 1200 includes a rotating shaft 1205a extending in the front-rear direction, an engaging portion 1205b projecting rearward from a position eccentric to the axis of the rotating shaft 1205a, and the rotating shaft 1205a. and a pair of operating pins 1205c protruding forward from a position eccentric to the axis of the. A rotating shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 is rotatably supported by a shaft support portion 1201f of the lower attacker base 1201 and a shaft hole 1202c of the upper attacker base 1202. As shown in FIG. The engagement portion 1205b is formed with a notch into which the disk-shaped tip of the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 is inserted. Between the pair of operating pins 1205c, the operating pin 1203c of the big winning opening opening/closing member 1203 is inserted.

The link member 1205 has a relationship between the engaging portion 1205b and the pair of actuating pins 1205c, and the engaging portion 1205b moves mainly in the left-right direction while being attached to the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202. A pair of actuating pins 1205c are arranged so as to move mainly in the vertical direction. Then, when the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 moves from the protruding state to the recessed direction (leftward in front view), the link member 1205 rotates clockwise in front view.

The guide member 1207 of the attacker unit 1200 is formed in a box-like shape with its upper and rear sides open, and is attached to the attacker lower base 1201 below the through hole 1201b.

In the normal state, the attacker unit 1200 of this embodiment projects the plunger 1204a to the right due to the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the upper operating pin 1205c of the pair of operating pins 1205c is in contact with the operating pin 105c of the special winning opening opening/closing member 1203 from above, and the flat plate-shaped door portion 1203a is in an upright state. The big winning opening 1154 is closed. In other words, the game ball T cannot be received into the big winning hole 1154 .

In the attacker unit 1200, when the attacker solenoid 1204 is energized by a jackpot game or the like, the plunger 1204a moves to the left and enters a state in which the plunger 1204a is retracted except for the disc-shaped tip. Due to this leftward movement of the plunger 1204a, the engaging portion 1205b of the link member 1205 engaged with the disk-shaped tip of the plunger 1204a revolves so as to move leftward, and the link member 1205 rotates. It rotates clockwise around the drive shaft 1205a when viewed from the front.

As the link member 1205 rotates clockwise, the pair of operating pins 1205c revolves upward, and the upper operating pin 1205c separates upward from the operating pin 1203c of the large winning opening opening/closing member 1203. , the lower operating pin 1205c comes into contact with the operating pin 1203c from below and moves the operating pin 1203c upward. Then, the special prize opening opening/closing member 1203 rotates around the shaft pin 1203b so that the upper end thereof moves forward, and the flat plate-shaped door portion 1203a becomes substantially horizontal. As a result, the big winning hole 1154 is opened, and the game ball T to the big winning hole 1154 can be received.

[2-2B1. Variable starter unit]
The variable starting opening unit 1210 of the winning opening unit 1150 is provided with a second starting opening 1153 that opens forward on the front right portion as viewed from the front, as shown mainly in FIGS. This second starting port 1153 is formed in a size that allows only one game ball T to pass through. This variable starting port unit 1210 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 1211 whose front and upper sides are open, a box-shaped upper case 1212 which is attached to the upper side of the lower case 1211 and whose front part and lower side are opened, A ball detection sensor 1213 attached to the lower case 1211 for detecting the game ball T received in the second starting port 1153, a starting port door member 1214 supported by the lower case 1211 so as to be slidable back and forth, and the lower case. 1211 and an upper case 1212, and a starter solenoid 1215 having a plunger 1215a that advances and retreats in accordance with the game state; and a slide detection sensor 1217 for detecting the slide position of the starting port door member 1214 .

A lower case 1211 of the variable starting port unit 1210 is formed in an inclined state so as to be lowered from the front side to the rear side at the right part position of the upper surface, and a ball guiding part 1211a capable of guiding the game ball T, A passage hole 1211b that penetrates vertically at the rear end side of the ball guide portion 1211a and through which the game ball T can pass, and a forward opening below the ball guide portion 1211a, into which a ball detection sensor 1213 is inserted and supported. a pair of slide grooves 1211d formed in the center in the left-right direction and facing each other and extending back and forth; and a cylindrical support pin 1211e protruding upward from the left portion of the upper surface. , is equipped with

The upper case 1212 of the variable starting port unit 1210 has a passage upper part 1212a which is open at the front and the lower part at the position of the front view right part, and the upper wall is inclined so that it becomes lower as it goes to the rear. A second starting opening decoration is provided between a front end opening forming portion 1212b forming a lower surface of the case 1212 on the front end side on the left side in front view from the passage upper portion 1212a and a base plate 1160 formed above the front end opening forming portion 1212b. A substrate rear holding portion 1212c that sandwiches the substrate 1168 and the starting port reflector 1169, a solenoid covering portion 1212d that is formed behind the substrate rear holding portion 1212c and the front end opening forming portion 1212b and covers the starting port solenoid 1215 from above, It has

A passage upper portion 1212a of the upper case 1212 forms a second starting port 1153 at a position above the ball guiding portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b in the lower case 1211. As shown in FIG. The passage upper portion 1212a is formed in a U-shape with an opening facing downward and having a right side longer than the left side and extending downward when viewed from the front. Further, the passage upper part 1212a can guide the game ball T backward by cooperating with the ball guiding part 1211a.

The front end opening forming portion 1212b of the upper case 1212 is formed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front end of the passage upper portion 1212a. The front end opening forming portion 1212b extends like a plate from the front end to near the center of the upper case 1212 in the front-rear direction. The front end opening forming portion 1212b has a shape when viewed from the front that is 1/3 of the height of the left side of the upper passageway 1212a toward the left from near the lower end of the left side of the upper passageway 1212a at a small angle (about 5 degrees) with respect to the horizontal. After extending obliquely to the height of , it further extends to the left at a large angle (about 45 degrees) with respect to the horizontal to the same height as the upper passage 1212a, and further extends horizontally to the left from there for a short time, and then the upper passage It is formed in a shape that extends downward to an intermediate height between the lower end of the left side and the lower end of the right side of 1212a.

In other words, the front end opening forming portion 1212b has a front shape that extends upward from near the left end of the lower end of the upper case 1212 to the same height as the passage upper portion 1212a, extends short horizontally to the right from the upper end, and then extends to the lower right. It extends from the lower end of the left side of the upper passageway 1212a to a height of about 1/3 of the height of the left side at an angle of about 45 degrees to the horizontal, and further lowers to the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the upper passageway 1212a on the right side. It extends obliquely for a long time. A first guide portion 1214a, a second guide portion 1214b, a third guide portion 1214c, and the like of the starting port door member 1214 are arranged below the front end opening forming member 112b and the passage upper portion 1212a.

The starter door member 1214 of the variable starter door unit 1210 includes a flat plate-like first guide portion 1214a extending obliquely (at an angle of about 45 degrees to the horizontal) toward the lower right in front view, and a first guide portion A flat plate-shaped second guide portion 1214b extending obliquely from the right end of 1214a to the lower right in front view at a smaller angle (approximately 5 degrees) with respect to the horizontal than the first guide portion 1214a, and the second guide portion 1214b. A flat plate-like third guide portion 1214c which is provided at a position lower than the right end of the second guide portion 1214b and is located on the right side of the right end, and which is inclined downward toward the rear, and the front end of the third guide portion 1214c. A front wall portion 1214d extending from the second guide portion 1214b to the same height as the right end of the second guide portion 1214b, and a flat wall portion 1214e extending upward from the right end of the third guide portion 1214c to the upper side of the front wall portion 1214d. and has.

The starting port door member 1214 includes a hanging portion 1214f extending downward from the rear end of the second guide portion 1214b, a flat plate-like slider portion 1214g extending rearward from the lower end of the hanging portion 1214f, and a slider A cylindrical connecting pin 1214h protruding from the upper surface of the portion 1214g and a detection portion 1214i formed at the rear end of the slider portion 1214g are provided.

The first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the vertical wall portion 1214e of the starting port door member 1214 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The width of the front-rear direction of the first guide portion 1214a and the like is formed substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball T. In addition, the left and right length of the starting port door member 1214 (the length from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a to the right end of the vertical wall portion 1214e) is formed to be approximately four times the outer diameter of the game ball T. It is Further, the left and right length of the first guide portion 1214a in plan view is formed to be about ⅔ times the outer diameter of the game ball T. As shown in FIG. The first guide portion 1214 a and the second guide portion 1214 b are arranged below the front end opening forming portion 1212 b of the upper case 1212 . Third guide portion 1214c, front wall portion 1214d, and vertical wall portion 1214e are arranged between ball guide portion 1211a of lower case 1211 and passage upper portion 1212a of upper case 1212. As shown in FIG.

Both left and right ends of the slider portion 1214g of the starting port door member 1214 are inserted into the pair of slide grooves 1211d of the lower case 1211, respectively. As a result, the starting port door member 1214 is supported by the pair of slide grooves 1211d of the lower case 1211 so as to be slidable forward and backward. The connecting pin 1214h is slidably inserted into a later-described connecting hole 1216e of the link member 1216 so as to be connected to the link member 1216, thereby transmitting forward/backward movement of the plunger 1215a of the start solenoid 1215. The detection unit 1214 i can be detected by a slide detection sensor 1217 .

The starter solenoid 1215 of the variable starter unit 1210 is supported in the solenoid covering portion 1212d of the upper case 1212 between the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a advances and retreats from the left end side. A plunger 1215a of the starting solenoid 1215 has a disk shape with a large diameter at the tip. The starting solenoid 1215 has a coil spring (not shown), and when not energized, the plunger 1215a protrudes (extends) due to the biasing force of the coil spring.

The link member 1216 of the variable starting port unit 1210 includes a cylindrical body portion 1216a rotatably fitted to the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 from above, and a first piece 1216b extending outward from the body portion 1216a. , an engaging portion 1216c that protrudes upward from the tip of the first piece 1216b and can be engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a of the starting solenoid 1215, and the direction in which the first piece 1216b extends from the main body portion 1216a. and a second piece 1216d that extends longer than the first piece 1216b at a right angle to the second piece 1216d. and an elongated connecting hole 1216e into which the connecting pin 1214h of the cage starting door member 1214 is slidably inserted from below.

A first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 extends perpendicularly to the central axis of the body portion 1216a from the upper end of the body portion 1216a. The second piece 1216d extends perpendicularly to the first piece 1216b in the clockwise direction in plan view from below the first piece 1216b in the body portion 1216a. The second piece 1216d is formed to have a length such that its tip end is positioned near the center of the lower case 1211 in the left-right direction when the main body portion 1216a is fitted to the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 .

As shown in FIG. 112 and the like, this variable starting port unit 1210 is arranged such that the slider portion 1214g of the starting port door member 1214 is positioned below the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. , and the starter solenoid 1215 is arranged horizontally on the rear side of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b on the upper side of the slider portion 1214g. A link member 1216 on the lower side transmits forward/backward movement of the plunger 1215a to the starting port door member 1214. As shown in FIG. As a result, the distance (size) in the front-rear direction of the variable starting port unit 1210 can be minimized. Therefore, the space behind the variable starting port unit 1210 can be relatively widened.

In the variable starting port unit 1210 of the present embodiment, the plunger 1215a of the starting port solenoid 1215 protrudes leftward under the normal state (when the starting port solenoid 1215 is not energized) due to the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, as shown in FIG. 112, the engaging portion 1216c at the tip of the first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 is positioned to the left of the center of the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211, and the first piece 1216b A connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d extending perpendicularly in the clockwise direction is located behind the center of the support pin 1211e. The front end of the starting port door member 1214 having the connecting pin 1214h inserted into the connecting hole 1216e of the link member 1216 substantially coincides with the front surface of the base plate 1160. As shown in FIG. In other words, the starting port door member 1214 is in a state (retraction impossible position state) in which it is retracted (retracted) from the inside of the game area 1100 . In this normal state, the detection portion 1214 i of the starting door member 1214 is detected by the slide detection sensor 1217 .

In the variable starter unit 1210, when the starter solenoid 1215 is energized according to the normal determination result drawn by the game ball T passing through the gate member 1134 of the center accessory 1130, the plunger 1215a moves in the right direction. (see Figure 113). When the plunger 1215a of the starting solenoid 1215 moves to the right and is retracted, the engaging portion 1216c engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a causes the entire link member 1216 to move around the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 in plan view. Rotate clockwise.

When the link member 1216 rotates clockwise, the connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d moves relatively forward, and is inserted into the connecting hole 1216e. The connecting pin 1214h of the starting port door member 1214 is pushed forward by the inner surface of the connecting hole 1216e, and the starting port door member 1214 slides forward as a whole. As a result, the front end of the starting port door member 1214 protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160, and the first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b, the third guiding portion 1214c, and the front wall portion 1214d of the starting port door member 1214 are projected. , and the vertical wall portion 1214e appear in the game area 1100 (receivable position state). In the state in which the starting port door member 1214 is slid forward and appears in the game area 1100, the detecting portion 1214i of the starting port door member 1214 is not detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

When the game ball T flows down on the first guide portion 1214a while the starting port door member 1214 appears in the game area 1100, it rolls rightward due to the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a, and the second guide portion 1214b. sent upwards. Then, the game ball T sent to the second guide portion 1214b is further rolled to the right by the inclination of the second guide portion 1214b, and is directed to the third guide portion 1214c arranged on the right side of the second guide portion 1214b. and sent.

Since the third guide portion 1214c is inclined so that the rear end is lowered, the game ball T sent to the third guide portion 1214c changes its rolling direction backward in the third guide portion 1214c, From the rear end of the third guide portion 1214c, it is sent between the ball guide portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 and the passage upper portion 1212a of the upper case 1212 on the rear side. That is, the game ball T is received in the second starting port 1153 . At this time, in the starting port door member 1214, since the right end of the third guide portion 1214c is provided with a vertical wall portion 1214e having a height about half the outer diameter of the game ball T, from the second guide portion 1214b The game ball T rolling from the left to the third guide portion 1214c abuts against the standing wall portion 1214e, and is prevented from rolling to the right side of the third guide portion 1214c. In addition, the game ball T rolling from the left to the third guide portion 1214c can be rolled backward by the guide piece 1161l of the front flow path forming member 1161 as well.

The game ball T released backward from the third guide portion 1214c flows down onto the ball guide portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 arranged below the third guide portion 1214c, and is guided by the ball guide portion 1211a. The ball enters the passage hole 1211b opened at the rear end of the ball guide portion 1211a, is detected by the ball detection sensor 1213, and is sent to the second starting port guide member 1170. As shown in FIG.

The second starting port 1153 having such a configuration is always open forward in the game area 1100 regardless of the game situation. It seems. However, since the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is arranged above the second starting opening 1153, even if the game ball T flows down from above, it is arranged below the second starting opening 1153. Unless it jumps up to the height of the second starting port 1153 when falling onto the second starting port area lower ledge 1161i, it will not be received by the second starting port 1153 . That is, the second starting port 1153 according to this embodiment is arranged in a region within the game area 1100 where the game ball T is extremely difficult to flow down.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the starting opening door member 1214 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160 for the second starting opening 1153. By doing so, the game ball T can be accepted.

That is, in the normal state (starting port solenoid 1215 is not energized), as shown in FIG. It is in a state of being in a sunken position. And, in the state of being in such a sunken position, even if the game ball T flows down between the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second start opening region left standing wall portion 1161m, the game ball T does not start. It cannot roll on the upper surface of the opening door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a, etc.) and flows down onto the second starting opening region lower shelf portion 1161i arranged on the lower side.

On the other hand, when a normal hit is obtained in the normal determination drawn by the game ball T passing through the gate member 1134, the front end of the starting port door member 1214 is moved to the base plate by energizing the starting port solenoid 1215. It protrudes forward from the front surface of 1160 .

That is, in a state in which the front end of the starting port door member 1214 protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160 (a state in which the second starting port 1153 can be received), the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting port region left When the game ball T flows down between the vertical wall portion 1161m, this game ball T comes into contact with the upper surface (bottom surface) of the first guide portion 1214a (starting port door member 1214). In this regard, since the bottom surface of the first guide portion 1214a is inclined so that the left end side is higher, this inclination guides the game ball T to the right where the second starting port 1153 is provided. .

Then, the game ball T guided to the right by the first guide portion 1214a further rolls on the right second guide portion 1214b. Since the bottom surface of the second guide portion 1214b has a smaller angle of inclination from the horizontal than the first guide portion 1214a, the rolling speed of the game ball T slows down. The rolled game ball T rolls further to the right third guide portion 1214c.

On the other hand, the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c is lowered toward the rear side where the opening serving as the second starting port 1153 is provided. In addition, in front of the third guide portion 1214c, a front wall portion 1214d is formed to prevent the game ball T on the third guide portion 1214c from falling from the front. On the other side, there is formed a vertical wall portion 1214e that abuts against and regulates the game ball T from the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b so that it does not flow rightward.

Therefore, when the game ball T from the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b is supplied to the third guide portion 1214c, the game ball T contacts the front wall portion 1214d and the vertical wall portion 1214e and The bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c is inclined so that it can be received in the opening serving as the second starting port 1153 while its movement is restricted.

According to such a configuration, when the starting port solenoid 1215 is energized, the starting port door member 1214 advances, passes through the second starting port opening 1160c of the base plate 1160 and the door slit 1160d, and passes through the first guide portion. 1214 a , second guide portion 1214 b , third guide portion 1214 c , front wall portion 1214 d , and vertical wall portion 1214 e project forward from the front surface of base plate 1160 . In this state, when the game ball T is released to the left from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, after contacting the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, the first guide of the starting opening door member 1214 It abuts on the portion 1214a, and the flow direction is directed rightward by the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a. Then, the game ball T rolls from the first guide portion 1214a through the second guide portion 1214b to the third guide portion 1214c, and the inclination of the third guide portion 1214c and the guide piece 1161l of the front flow path forming member 1161 The direction of rolling is directed rearward by the second start port 1153 opening rearward.

In addition, when the game ball T is received by the second start port 1153 and detected by the second start port sensor 1191, the main control board 4100 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 4110 according to the detection signal, and pays out. The control board 4110 controls the prize ball device 740 to cause the number (for example, one) of game balls T to be paid out to the tray unit 300 according to the received payout command.

On the other hand, when the energization of the starter solenoid 1215 ends, the depressed plunger 1215a protrudes due to the urging force of the coil spring provided in the starter solenoid 1215, and the starter door member 1214 retreats via the link member 1216. do. When the starting port door member 1214 is thus retracted, the amount of projection of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b projecting from the front surface of the base plate 1160 gradually decreases (the starting port door member 1214 is The gap between the front end of the member 1214 and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a (see FIG. 102) of the front channel forming member 1161 gradually increases). That is, in this case, when there is a game ball T rolling on the bottom surface of the first guide portion 1214a or the second guide portion 1214b of the starting port door member 1214, the gap between the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a is At the stage when the diameter of the game ball T is enlarged, the game ball T falls from the gap. However, at this time, when there is a game ball T that reaches the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c before the gap expands to the diameter of the game ball T or more, the game ball T is placed on the front wall portion 1214d or the standing wall. Guided by the portion 1214 e , the third guide portion 1214 c and the third guide portion 1214 c are received into the opening serving as the second starting port 1153 .

In this way, the second starting port 1153 according to this embodiment is provided as a remote island-type prize-winning port provided at a position away from the flow-down route in which the game ball T can flow down in the game area 1100. there is In addition, it is possible to appear and disappear by reciprocating in the depth direction with respect to the game area 1100, and the recessed position (see FIG. 122-1 (a)) and the appearing position (see FIG. 122-1 (b)) When it is in the appearance position of , it is provided as a bridging passage connecting the flow-down route and the second start port 1153 (remote island type winning port), and the game ball T on the flow-down route is different from the depth direction A starting opening door member 1214 (tombolo type movable member) is provided so as to roll to the second starting opening 1153 (remote island type winning opening) located in the direction (right direction).

Therefore, as the starting opening door member 1214, it is possible to ensure a sufficient length as the rolling distance of the game ball T until it is received in the second starting opening 1153 (remote island type winning opening). It becomes possible to strictly distinguish between actions that allow the bridging of the sphere T and actions that do not allow it. As a result, unlike the conventional structure in which the game ball on the upper surface of the movable piece that has moved is spilled by inertia, it is possible to prevent rare occurrence of winning even though the motion is not permitted. You can definitely avoid it.

In other words, the game ball T on the flow-down path starts rolling on the first guide portion 1214a and reaches the third guide portion 1214c. If the energization of the starter solenoid 1215 is controlled so that the starter door member 1214 does not protrude, the second starter 1153 does not reach the starter door member 1214 even though the starter door member 1214 is operated. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being accepted (unacceptable action, disadvantageous game mode). That is, in this case, even if the game ball T rolls on the first guide portion 1214a or the second guide portion 1214b (starting port door member 1214) due to the operation to the appearance position of the starting port door member 1214, this game ball T is the front end of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b (starting port door member 1214) that retreat before reaching the third guide portion 1214c and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a in the front flow passage forming member 1161 (See Fig. 122-2(c)).

On the other hand, a bridging time longer than the winning threshold time required for the game ball T on the flow-down path to start rolling in the first guide portion 1214a and reach the third guide portion 1214c. If the energization of the starter solenoid 1215 is controlled so that the starter door member 1214 protrudes over the entire length, when the starter door member 1214 is operated, the second starter 1153 It is possible to allow the game ball T to be accepted (acceptable action, advantageous game mode). That is, in this case, the game ball T rolling the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b (starting port door member 1214), the first guide portion 1214a and second guide portion 1214b (starting port door member 1214) It becomes possible to reach the third guide portion 1214c at an earlier stage than when retreating. Then, the game ball that reaches the third guide portion 1214c in this way is received by the opening as the second starting port 1153 due to the inclination of the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c. At this time, even if the retraction of the third guide portion 1214c (starting port door member 1214) is temporarily started, the inertial force acting on the game ball T is received by contact with the front wall portion 1214d. It can be received in the second starting port 1153 without falling from the third guide portion 1214c.

Only by controlling the operation time of the starter door member 1214 like this, when the starter door member 1214 is operated, the game ball T will enter the second starter door 1153 more surely. It is possible to properly use non-winning of the game ball T to the second starting port 1153 when the 1214 is operated, depending on the situation of the game. As a result, it is possible to realize a bold game design on the premise that no prize is won when the starting port door member 1214 is positioned at the appearing position only for a short bridging time.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The portion in which the portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b are accommodated is formed only as a hole small enough to accommodate them. That is, in this case, while the amount of protrusion of the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, etc. is gradually reduced by retreating the starting port door member 1214, the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, etc. The game ball T rolling on the upper surface is naturally drawn to the front wall surface side of the base plate 1160 (game board 4). Since it rolls to the right while being pressed against the front wall surface (or while being pressed more strongly than when it is stationary at the appearance position), the base plate 1160 (game board 4) contacts the front wall surface. A frictional force greater than or equal to a predetermined value (or a frictional force stronger than when standing still at the appearance position) can brake the speed of rolling to the right.

In this way, at the stage where the starting opening door member 1214 starts to retreat and the winning to the second starting opening 1153 is changing to an unfavorable situation, the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4) Since a system is constructed in which a brake is automatically applied to the speed toward the second starting port 1153 by the frictional force corresponding to the contact, the retraction of the starting port door member 1214 (from the appearance position to the sunken position) It is possible to suppress the number of game balls reaching the second start port 1153 after the displacement) is started, and thereby it is possible to prevent winning when performing an operation that does not allow the game ball T to bridge. Increased certainty.

In addition, since the starter door member 1214 according to this embodiment has a structure that advances and retreats back and forth, when viewed from the player (front) side, the starter door member 1214 advances or retreats. It is becoming difficult to determine whether the For this reason, by actually flowing down the game ball T between the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, the starting opening door depending on whether or not it contacts the starting opening door member 1214 The movement of the member 1214 must be recognized, and the player hits rightward so that the game ball T flows down between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the second starting opening region left standing wall 1161m. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement of the game ball T, and to suppress the deterioration of interest by making the player enjoy the movement of the game ball T.例文帳に追加

In addition, the starting opening door member 1214 is separated from the lower surface of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, so that the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is left. The game ball T rolls toward the left end of the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j and touches the second start opening region left standing wall portion 1161m, and then contacts the first guide portion 1214a and is guided to the right. The movement of , which is like a sudden U-turn, can strongly attract the player's attention (see FIGS. 122-1(b) and 122-2(b)).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 121 to 122-2 and the like, the second starting port 1153 according to this embodiment opens forward to a size that allows only one game ball T to be received. A second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j of the front flow path forming member 1161 is arranged directly above the second starting port 1153 . This second starting opening upper shelf 1161j extends to the left and right so that the left end side is lowered with a length of about 3 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, and the raised right end side is the second starting opening It is located directly above 1153. That is, the left end side of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j extends leftward from the second starting port 1153 . In addition, the difference in height between the right end portion side and the left end portion side of the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j is set to about 1/3 of the outer diameter of the game ball T.

A second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m extending vertically with an interval slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T is arranged from the left end portion of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j to the left outer side. The upper end of the second starting port region left standing wall portion 1161m is located above the upper left end of the upper surface of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j by a distance of about 1/2 of the outer diameter of the game ball T, and the lower end is the second starting port. It extends vertically so as to be positioned above the left end of the first guide portion 1214a of the starting port door member 1214 at a distance substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball T below the left end of the upper surface of the upper shelf portion 1161j.

The starting opening door member 1214 is on the right side of the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m, and is spaced apart from the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j so that only one game ball T can flow down, and the second starting opening It is arranged below the upper shelf 1161j. The length from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a of the starting port door member 1214 to the right end of the third guide portion 1214c (standing wall portion 1214e) is about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T.

[2-2B2. Modified example of variable starter unit]
The variable starter unit 1210 shown in FIGS. 122-1 and 122-2 may alternatively be used with the variable starter unit 2210 shown in FIGS. 123-1 and 123-2.

The variable starting port unit 2210 according to this modification also basically has the same structure as the variable starting port unit 1210, and the operation of allowing the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 1153 and the It is provided as a structure that makes it possible to strictly distinguish between operations that do not allow the reception of game balls into the second start port 1153 and to use them properly.

That is, as shown in FIG. 123-1, the variable starting port unit 2210 according to this modification is also a remote island type, which is provided at a position away from the flow-down path in which the game ball T can flow down in the game area 1100. The winning opening (second start opening 1153) and the game area 1100 can appear and disappear by reciprocating in the depth direction. Served as a bridging passage connecting the path and the second start opening 1153 (remote island type winning opening), the second start opening located in a direction (right direction) different from the depth direction of the game ball T on the flow down path 1153 (remote island type winning opening) and a start opening door member 1214 (tombolo type movable member) provided to roll.

In addition, even in the variable starting port unit 2210 according to this modification, the second starting port 1153 is provided as a receiving port that is opened to a size that can receive only one game ball T at a time. Also, the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214 is inclined downward toward the second starting port 1153 side, and is formed with a depth width that allows the game balls T to roll only one by one. 122-1 and 122-2 for the variable starter unit 1210 shown in FIGS.

However, as shown in FIG. 123-1(a), in the variable starting opening unit 2210 according to this modified example, first, a second starting opening sensor 1191 that detects the reception of the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153 are arranged in line with the downstream end of the starting port door member 1214 . On top of this, a proximity disconnecting member 2215 is provided that functions to block, connect, or open the ball path between the starter door member 1214 and the second starter sensor 1191 .

122-1 and 122-2, the second start sensor 1191 according to this modified example is exposed to the player side from the front wall surface of the game board 4. By this, the game ball T that has crossed over the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214 can be immediately detected at that time (detected as reception of the game ball T to the second starting port 1153). It is made possible. The game ball T detected in this manner is supplied to the passage in the depth direction leading to the back side of the game board 4 and discharged from the game area 1100 (FIG. 123-1(c)).

Also, although illustration is omitted, the proximity disconnecting member 2215 according to this modification is provided as a member that interlocks with the movement of the starting port door member 1214 by means of a predetermined link member, and is similar to the starting port door member 1214. , It is provided so that it can appear and disappear by reciprocating in the depth direction between a position where it is sunk in the game area 1100 and a position where it appears. However, the proximity disconnecting member 2215 according to this embodiment, when the starting port door member 1214 is in the recessed position, is located in the appearing position, so that the starting port door member 1214 and the second starting port It functions to block the sphere path between sensors 1191 (Fig. 123-1(b)). Also, when the starter door member 1214 is in the protruding position, it is positioned in the recessed position to connect/open the ball path between the starter door member 1214 and the second starter sensor 1191. (Fig. 123-1(c)).

As will be described later, the proximity disconnecting member 2215 according to this modified example is, as shown in FIG. It is provided so as to block the spherical path leading to the detection point by the second starting port sensor 1191 at an upstream close position not separated from T by the length of the radius (radius = r in the figure). ing.

The variable starting opening unit 2210 according to such a modified example also serves as the starting opening door member 1214 as in the case of the variable starting opening unit 1210 described above. Since it is possible to secure a sufficient length as the rolling distance of the ball T, it is possible to strictly discriminate between an operation that permits bridging of the game ball T and an operation that does not permit it. As a result, unlike the conventional structure in which the game ball on the upper surface of the movable piece that has moved is spilled by inertia, it is possible to prevent rare occurrence of a prize even though the motion is not permitted. You can definitely avoid it.

That is, the winning threshold time required for the game ball T on the flow-down path to start rolling on the starting door member 1214 and cross it (more preferably, the game ball T on the flow-down path The time required from the start of rolling on the starting port door member 1214 to the time it takes to cross over it and be detected by the second starting port sensor 1191). If the energization of the starting port solenoid 1215 is controlled so as not to protrude, the game ball T will not be received by the second starting port 1153 even though the starting port door member 1214 is operated. It is possible to do so (unacceptable actions, disadvantageous game modes). That is, in this case, the game ball T rolling on the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214, the front end of the starting port door member 1214 retreating before reaching the location detected by the second starting port sensor 1191 and The liquid spills out from the gap between the front flow path forming member 1161 and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a (see FIG. 123-1(b)).

Also, at this time, according to the variable starting door unit 2210 according to this modification, even if there is a game ball T in a state immediately before crossing over the starting door member 1214, the movement of the starting door member 1214 ( movement from the appearance position to the retracted position), the proximity disconnecting member 2215 between the starter door member 1214 and the second starter sensor 1191 moves from the retracted position to the emergence position. Since the ball path is blocked, such a game ball T can be preferably avoided from reaching the detection point by the second start opening sensor 1191 as it is due to inertia.

That is, in this case, the momentum of the game ball T rolling due to inertia is canceled by abutting the proximity disconnecting member 2215 moving to the appearing position, and the front end of the starting port door member 1214 and the front flow path forming member 1161 , and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a. It should be noted that this means that while there is a game ball T in a state just before it crosses over the starter door member 1214, there is no possibility that the starter door member 1214 will start moving from the appearing position to the sunken position. If it occurs, the same applies regardless of the length of time set as the bridging time.

On the other hand, the winning threshold time required for the game ball T on the flow-down path to start rolling on the starting port door member 1214 and cross it (more preferably, the game ball T on the flow-down path The time required for the ball T to start rolling on the starting port door member 1214, cross over it, and be detected by the second starting port sensor 1191). If the energization of the starter solenoid 1215 is controlled so that the is protruded, the game ball T can be received in the second starter 1153 when the starter door member 1214 is operated. It is possible to make it (permissible operation, advantageous game mode). That is, in this case, the game ball T rolling on the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 can reach the detection point by the second starting opening sensor 1191 at an earlier stage than the starting opening door member 1214 retreats. become. As described above, the game ball that reaches the detection point in this way is detected as a winning ball to the second start hole 1153 by the second start hole sensor 1191. It is supplied to the aisle and discharged from the game area 1100 (FIG. 123-1(c)).

As in the case of the variable starting port unit 1210 described above, the variable starting port unit 2210 according to the modified example is also controlled only for the operation time of the starting port door member 1214. When the starting port door member 1214 is operated, The more reliable winning of the game ball T to the second starting port 1153 and the more reliable non-winning of the game ball T to the second starting port 1153 when the starting port door member 1214 is operated You will be able to use it properly according to the situation. As a result, it is possible to realize a bold game design on the premise that no prize is won when the starting port door member 1214 is positioned at the appearing position only for a short bridging time.

Similarly, in the situation where the starting port door member 1214 retreats, the game ball T on the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214 is pressed against the front wall surface side of the base plate 1160 (game board 4) ( Alternatively, it rolls to the right while being pressed more strongly than when it is stationary at the appearance position.

In this respect, in the variable starting opening unit 2210 according to this modified example, as shown in FIG. 123-2(a), when the game ball T is detected by the second starting opening sensor 1191, At an upstream proximity position not separated from T by the length of its radius (radius = r in the figure), the proximity As described above, the disconnecting member 2215 is provided.

According to such a configuration, although the remaining number of game balls allowed to be accepted into the second starting port 1153 is "1", the figures 123-2 (a) and (b) show Even if a situation occurs in which two game balls are supplied in a row to the detection point (second start port 1153) by the second start port sensor 1191, as follows, 1 It is possible to suitably refuse the second game ball to be received in the second start port 1153 by allowing only the passage of the first game ball through the detection point.

That is, now, while the remaining allowable number for receiving the game ball to the second starting port 1153 is set as "1" by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 126) described later, the second starting port sensor Suppose that two game balls T1 and T2 are continuously supplied to the position detected by 1191 (the second starting port 1153).

Then, the main control board 4100, first, based on the detection of the first game ball T1 by the second start opening sensor 1191, the remaining allowable number of game balls to the second start opening 1153 to "0". Next, in order to avoid further winning of the second starting port 1153, regardless of whether or not the operation time (bridging time) as the starting port door member 1214 remains, the remaining allowable number is updated to "0". At this time, the control (energization to the starter solenoid 1215) for maintaining the starter door member 1214 at the protruded position is stopped, and control is performed to displace it to the retracted position.

That is, in this case, in the situation shown in FIG. 123-2(a), the starter door member 1214 starts to displace from the appearing position to the receding position. However, at this time, as described above, in the variable starting port unit 2210 according to this modified example, the proximity disconnecting member 2215 starts to displace from the retracted position to the exposed position.

In this regard, in the proximity disconnecting member 2215 according to this modification, the length of the radius (in the figure, radius = r) is not away from the first game ball T1 detected by the second starting port sensor 1191 The displacement to the appearing position is started at the upstream close position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 123-2(a), when the second game ball T2 exists in the appearance position to be displaced so as to be continuous with the first game ball T1, The second game ball T2, combined with the shape (sphere) of the game ball T itself, is pushed back to the side where the starting port door member 1214 is provided by contact with the proximity disconnecting member 2215 (guided). ). As a result, it spills from the gap between the front end of the starting port door member 1214 and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a of the front flow passage forming member 1161 (see FIG. 123-2(b)).

In such a configuration, two game balls T1 and T2 are connected to the second start port 1153 while the remaining allowable number of game balls to be received into the second start port 1153 is set as "1". When the second starting opening sensor 1191 detects the first game ball T1, the proximity disconnecting member 2215 is interrupted between the game balls T1 and T2. will be able to operate

Therefore, when operating the start port door member 1214 over a bridge time longer than the winning threshold time, up to a prescribed number of minutes predetermined as the number of allowed reception of game balls to the second start port 1153 While allowing the acceptance of game balls, it is possible to more appropriately refuse the acceptance of game balls exceeding the prescribed number (over winning).

The specified number may be set to any number, but for example, if it is set to 1, the starting entrance door member 1214 operates over a bridging time longer than the winning threshold time. A playability such that only one game ball is accepted in the second start port 1153 each time is realized. That is, in this case, it is possible to create a game feature in which the operation of the starting port door member 1214 is required many times in order to suspend the lottery on the side of the second starting port 1153 . In this regard, if the period during which the state in which the starting port door member 1214 is easy to operate (the state in which the so-called time saving function operates) is continued is managed by time (variation time of special symbols, etc.), the above-mentioned over winning Manage the expected value of the pending number of lotteries on the side of the second starting port 1153 only by the expected value of the number of times of operation of the starting port door member 1214 that occurs within the time (the number of operations during a long bridging time) without considering be able to

123-1(b), a smooth slope 2215a is arranged on the side where the starting port door member 1214 is provided, and a game It has a substantially triangular prism shape with an acute-angled portion on the user side. According to such a shape, when the proximity disconnecting member 2215 is displaced from the sinking position to the appearing position, even in a situation where the game ball T already exists in the appearing position to be displaced, the In addition to being able to suppress the occurrence of ball biting with the game ball T, the game ball T is pushed back more smoothly by the slope 2215a to the side where the start door member 1214 is provided ( induce).

In addition, in this modification, when a situation occurs in which two game balls T1 and T2 are continuously supplied to the detection point (second starting hole 1153) by the second starting hole sensor 1191, the second game It was operable to engage the proximity disconnect member 2215 with respect to the sphere. However, for the proximity disconnecting member 2215, the first game ball T1 of the two game balls T1 and T2 continuously supplied to the detection point (second start port 1153) by the second start port sensor 1191 Only need to operate so that it can be detected by the second starting port sensor 1191. For example, it operates to involve both the first game ball and the second game ball, or one This may be achieved by operating to involve the game ball of the eye.

Further, the proximity disconnecting member 2215 does not necessarily have to be related to the two game balls T1 and T2 by operation, and may be related to the two game balls T1 and T2 by magnetic force or the like.

In addition, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 123-2 (a), when the game ball T is detected by the second starting hole sensor 1191, the radius from the game ball T (in the figure, , radius=r), the close disconnecting member 2215 is arranged at an upstream close position which is not separated by a length of r). However, for example, if the proximity disconnecting member 2215 is configured by a magnet or the like, when the game ball T1 is detected by the second start opening sensor 1191, the diameter of the game ball T1 is detected, or Even if the proximity disconnecting member 2215 is arranged at the upstream proximity position not separated by the length of the diameter, the game ball to the second start port 1153 of the second game ball T2 It is possible to refuse to accept the

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception of game balls to such a receiving port (detection of game balls by the receiving sensor) is allowed only for a specified number (second starting port sensor 1191, The proximity disconnecting member 2215) is used for the second starting port 1153. However, this configuration may not necessarily be used for the second starting port 1153, and may be used for other receiving ports and the number of receiving ports may be limited to a specified number.

[2-2C. Regarding the special flow path leading to the accessory winning opening 1155 formed by the base plate 1160 and the front flow path forming member 1161]
As described above, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 102, the front flow path forming member 1161 protrudes from the front surface of the flat base plate 1160 into the front playing area 1100, and the flat front plate portion 1161a By forming a shallow box-like shape with a front side and an open rear side, a special flow-down passage for the game ball T leading to the accessory winning opening 1155 is formed between the base plate 1160 and the base plate 1160 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 99, the special flow-down passage has two passages X and Y formed so as to sandwich the general prize winning port 1151, and the game ball T hit to the right passes through these passages X , Y, a specific rolling area (here, an area directly above (upper surface, etc.) of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 when closed) that can be received in the accessory winning opening 1155 ).

However, in the passage X on the left side of the general prize winning opening 1151, the game ball T flowing down the passage X is guided slightly to the right by the thick portion of the left standing wall portion 1161e of the receiving portion. is formed with Also, in the passage Y on the right side of the general prize winning opening 1151, the game ball T flowing down the passage Y is once guided to the left by the receiving portion lower shelf portion 1161c, but the receiving portion 1161b The leftward movement is stopped by abutting on the vertically extending portion of the lower side of the .

According to such a configuration, the game ball T hit to the right is set to a state in which it does not have at least a leftward velocity (or a state in which it has only a slight velocity in the leftward direction), and then the closed state. It becomes possible to supply to the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door part 1221a).

In this respect, the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 according to this embodiment is provided as a flat plate-shaped door portion 1221a which is inclined so that the left side and the back side are respectively lowered, as will be described later. On the other hand, in the special flow-down passage, the game ball T that has passed through either passage X or Y has no leftward velocity (or has only a slight leftward velocity). state), and then supplied to the right side (uppermost part of the specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a).

According to such a configuration, regardless of the flow speed of the game ball T or the strength at the time of launch, all the game balls T reaching the right side of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) are left. From a state in which the speed (initial speed) in the direction is approximately "0", it slowly starts rolling in the left direction (more precisely, in the left back direction) due to its own weight. Therefore, the time that the game ball T stays on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) can be lengthened, and the variation in the initial speed is eliminated. It is possible to make it difficult for the speed of the game ball T on the upper surface of (the door portion 1221a) to vary.

On top of this, in the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A structure (base plate side regulating portion 1160k, front side regulating portion 1161k) that regulates the rolling speed of the game ball T that starts slowly so that it does not exceed a predetermined speed value due to the inclination of the upper surface. It is supposed to have

That is, in the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, the length in the horizontal direction on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (the length in the rolling direction of the game ball within the specific rolling area ) is L (for example, 6 cm), and the time interval between shots T (0.6 seconds) when game balls T are continuously shot into the game area 1100 by the ball shooting device 650 in response to the operation of the handle device 500 is T (0.6 seconds). ), the average speed (preferably the maximum speed) of the game ball T on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is less than "L/2T". It is provided as a structure associated with the game ball T to play.

According to such a configuration, as long as the player continues to hit to the right, there are at least two or more (2 or 3) on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. A game ball can be made to exist.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 99, 100, and 125, the special flow-down passage is the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). A base plate side regulating portion 1160k formed as three protrusions that engage with the game ball T rolling in the direction from the base plate 1160 side to reduce its speed, and a front flow path for the game ball T. A front-side restricting portion 1161k is formed as two protrusions that engage with each other from the forming member 1161 side to reduce its speed.

Here, the base plate side regulation portion 1160k (three projections on the side of the base plate 1160) and the front side regulation portion 1161k (two projections on the front flow path forming member 1161 side) are arranged as shown in FIG. In addition, they are provided in a staggered manner so as to face each other with the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) interposed therebetween. As described above, the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is inclined so that the left side and the back side are respectively lowered.

According to such a configuration, for example, the game ball T1, which slowly starts rolling in the direction of the back left on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a), first moves toward the base plate 1160 side. By coming into contact with the projection on the right side of the three projections (base plate side restricting portion 1160k), the leftward speed is reduced and the ball is guided forward. That is, the inclination of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) to the back side is gentle enough to guide the game ball T to the front side by the base plate side regulation portion 1160k.

In this way, the game ball T1 guided to the front side by the base plate side regulation portion 1160k is combined with the left inclination of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) itself, and the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) will slowly start to roll in the direction of the front left. As a result, the right side projection (the front side restricting portion 1161k) of the two projections on the side of the front flow passage forming member 1161 comes into contact with the leftward speed again, and the leftward speed is reduced. Be guided to the side.

That is, according to the base plate side regulation portion 1160k (three projections on the side of the base plate 1160) and the front side regulation portion 1161k (two projections on the front flow path forming member 1161 side) according to this embodiment, , The game ball T1 on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) rolls leftward zigzag while decelerating each time on the side of the base plate 1160 and the side of the front flow path forming member 1161. Therefore, the maximum speed of the game ball T1 on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) can be managed so as not to exceed "L/2T". .

As a result, while the game ball T1 is still rolling on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a), the game that is launched next (after 0.6 seconds) in the form of hitting to the right. The ball T2 (furthermore, the game ball launched next (1.2 seconds later)) reaches the right side of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). Therefore, as long as the player continues to hit to the right, at least two or more (2 or 3) game balls can be present on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. become able to.

In addition, since the game can be played so that at least two or more game balls T exist habitually in a specific rolling area, each time the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 is opened, a plurality of games can be played. An excellent prize-winning performance that the ball T can win a prize is realized, so that the prize-winning situation at the accessory prize-winning port 1155 can be given a sense of speed.

Also, as will be described later, the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) according to this embodiment is designed so that a plurality of game balls T on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) are released substantially at the same time. It slides in a direction (backward direction) perpendicular to the traveling direction (left direction) of the game balls T so as to fall into the accessory winning opening 1155 . As a result, every time the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 is opened, regardless of the number of game balls T on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221, the internal area of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1155 Since it is possible to enter all at once, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the prize winning situation to the prize winning port 1155, and it is possible to win (pay out) a large amount of prizes at once. can be expected.

Although illustration is omitted, in the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, a thick portion is formed at the confluence point of the passages X and Y on the front flow passage forming member 1161 side. The thick portion guides the game ball T that has flowed down either of the passages X and Y to the back side, and reduces the speed of the game ball T itself, thereby opening and closing the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a), the movement of the game ball T on the upper surface is further stabilized. As a result, the average speed of the game ball T on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is less likely to vary, and the right side of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) The game ball T1 that has reached the part can be brought into contact with the projection on the right side of the three projections on the side of the base plate 1160 (the regulation portion 1160k on the side of the base plate) more reliably.

According to such a special flow-down passage, when the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is in the closed state, the game balls T that sequentially arrive by being fired by the batted ball launching device 650 are 1221 (door portion 1221a) can be stopped on the upper surface (specific rolling area), and the number of game balls T waiting to enter the prize winning port 1155 can be increased over time. become.

In addition, in the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, the game ball T that first reaches the specific rolling area is placed on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) ) to the left, the two game balls have already reached a specific rolling area. Therefore, the structure is such that the number of game balls T waiting to enter the prize winning port 1155 can be increased up to three at the maximum over time.

Incidentally, the game ball T (the game ball T on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221) which is thus waiting to enter the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1155 is opened. At times, the prize is entered into the prize winning opening 1155 so as to fall from the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221 .

According to such a configuration, as long as the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 operates to the open state, even if the operation time is extremely short, the game ball T that is in the waiting state for winning a prize can be released. It becomes possible to enter the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155 . Moreover, since the game ball T that has already been launched (the game ball T that is waiting to win a prize) automatically enters the inner area of the prize winning port 1155, The entry timing of the game ball T into the inner area of 1155 can be controlled more accurately. In other words, it is possible not only to eliminate the possibility of non-winning to the accessory winning opening 1155 by the opening control while there is a game ball waiting to win, but also to accurately control the winning timing. become.

[2-2D. Schematic configuration of role unit]
The role item unit 1220 of the prize winning unit 1150 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120. FIG. This accessory unit 1220 is provided with an accessory winning opening 1155 in which the game ball T can be received according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball T into the first start opening 1152 and the second start opening 1153. The accessory winning opening unit 1220A and the game ball T received in the accessory winning opening 1155 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A are provided so as to be able to flow down the internal area, and the game ball T can be received by sorting. A V winning opening unit 1220B having a V winning opening 1156 is provided.

[2-2D1. Accessory winning entrance unit]
The accessory winning opening unit 1220A of the accessory unit 1220 supports the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 for opening and closing the accessory winning opening 1155 and the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. An upper housing 1222 that partitions the left and right ends of the opening 1155; Equipped with an accessory winning opening sensor 1224 for detecting a game ball T received in the cage accessory winning opening 1155, and a plunger 1225a supported between an upper housing 1222 and a lower housing 1223 and advancing and retreating according to the game state. A prize winning solenoid 1225, a link member 1226 for transmitting forward/backward movement of a plunger 1225a of the solenoid winning solenoid 1225 to slide a prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221, and a prize winning opening by detecting the movement of the link member 1226. and an open/close detection sensor 1227 for detecting the opening/closing of 1155 .

The accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 of the accessory winning opening opening/closing unit 1220A includes a flat plate-shaped door portion 1221a that extends laterally with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is inclined so that the left side of the front view is lower, and a door portion. An extension piece 1221b extending rearward from the rear end of the center in the left-right direction of the extension piece 1221a, and a connecting hole 1221c vertically penetrating near the front end of the extension piece 1221b and extending left and right. .

The upper housing 1222 of the accessory winning slot unit 1220A includes a box-shaped upper housing body 1222a having an accessory winning slot opening/closing member 1221 mounted on the upper surface and an open lower side, and an upper housing body 1222a at the front end of the upper housing body 1222a. A pair of flat plate-shaped partition pieces 1222b projecting upward and downward and extending forward and backward, and the left and right ends of the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 are formed at the left and right ends of the front portion of the upper surface of the upper housing main body 1222a. an opening 1222d vertically penetrating the upper housing body 1222a between the pair of first supporting portions 1222c and extending back and forth; A pair of groove-shaped second support portions 1222e are formed on the rear portion of the upper surface of the upper housing main body 1222a and slidably support the left and right ends of the extending piece 1221b of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221. In the upper housing 1222, the upper surface of the upper housing main body 1222a and the upper surfaces of the pair of first support portions 122b are aligned.

The lower housing 1223 of the accessory winning slot unit 1220A has a box-like shape with an open top and extends laterally in front of the upper housing main body 1222a in the upper housing 1222 by the same length as the interval between the pair of partition pieces 1222b. A ball receiving portion 1223a which becomes lower toward the left and lower toward the rear near the left end, a notch portion 1223b formed at the rear of the left end of the ball receiving portion 1223a through which the game ball T can pass, and the notch portion 1223b. A sensor support portion 1223c formed on the rear side and the lower side and having a shallow box-like shape with an open upper side and into which the prize winning opening sensor 1224 is fitted, and the bottom wall of the sensor support portion 1223c penetrates vertically. A discharge port 1223d through which the game ball detected by the winning port sensor 1224 can pass, and a box-shaped opening on the upper side, which is formed on the right rear side of the ball receiving portion 1223a and accommodates the winning solenoid 1225. A solenoid housing portion 1223e and a link housing portion 1223f formed on the left side of the solenoid housing portion 1223e (at the center rear side of the ball receiving portion 1223a in the left-right direction) and housing the link member 1226 in a rotatable manner are provided. .

The accessory winning solenoid 1225 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A is accommodated and supported in the solenoid accommodating portion 1223e of the lower housing 1223 so that the plunger 1225a advances and retreats from the front end side. A plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 has a disk shape with a large diameter at the tip. The accessory winning solenoid 1225 has a coil spring (not shown), and when not energized, the plunger 1225a protrudes (extends) due to the biasing force of the coil spring.

The link member 1226 of the accessory winning slot unit 1220A includes a rotating shaft portion 1226a that is rotatably supported by the bottom portion of the link accommodating portion 1223f of the lower housing 1223 and extends to the left and right, and a rotating shaft portion 1226a that extends from the upper housing 1222. A strip-shaped neck portion 1226b extending above the upper surface of the upper housing body 1222a through an opening 1222d of the upper housing body 1222a, and a columnar shape extending left and right at the upper end of the neck portion 1226b. A connecting portion 1226c inserted from below into the connecting hole 1221c of the opening/closing member 1221 protrudes rightward from the vertical center of the rod portion 1226b and is engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225. and a detection piece 1226e that extends rearward from a position between the engagement portion 1226d and the rotation shaft portion 1226a in the rod portion 1226b and is detected by the opening/closing detection sensor 1227. .

The accessory winning prize port unit 1220A of the present embodiment is in a state in which the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of the coil spring in a normal state (when not energized), and the tip of the plunger 1225a The rod portion 1226b of the link member 1226 is in a state in which it stands substantially vertically from the rotation shaft portion 1226a. In this state, the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 having the connecting hole 1221c into which the connecting part 1226c at the upper end of the rod part 1226b of the link member 1226 is inserted is pushed forward by the connecting part 1226c through the connecting hole 1221c. As a result, the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 is slid forward.

As a result, the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 protrudes forward from the front end of the upper housing main body 1222a in the upper housing 1222, and the front end of the door portion 1221a is substantially the same as the front end of the partition piece 1222b of the upper housing 1222. position. Further, both left and right ends of the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 are in contact with the upper surfaces of a pair of partition pieces 1222b of the upper housing 1222 which are separated from each other to the left and right. Therefore, the accessory winning opening 1155 that opens upward is closed by the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221, and the game ball T cannot be received (see FIG. 124(b). ), etc.). In this state, the game ball T that has flowed down onto the door portion 1221a rolls leftward along the door portion 1221a that is inclined so that the left side is lowered, and is released leftward from the left end of the door portion 1221a. be. When the accessory winning opening 1155 is closed by the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 , the detection piece 1226 e of the link member 1226 is detected by the open/close detection sensor 1227 .

Accessory prize winning opening unit 1220A, when the accessory winning solenoid 1225 is energized according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball T in the first start opening 1152 or the second start opening 1153, the plunger 1225a move backwards so that the When the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 moves backward, the engaging portion 126c of the link member 1226 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a is pulled so as to move backward. As a result, the link member 1226 rotates about the rotation shaft portion 1226a in the direction in which the upper end of the rod portion 1226b moves rearward. Then, since the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the rod portion 1226b moves backward, the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 slides backward through the connecting hole 1221c into which the connecting portion 1226c is inserted. .

At this time, the engaging portion 1226d of the link member 1226, which is engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225, has a length (height) of the rod portion 1226b extending from the rotation shaft portion 1226a. Since the plunger 1225a is located closer to the pivot shaft 1226a than the center, the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the rod portion 1226b moves rearward by a large amount with respect to the amount of rearward movement of the plunger 1225a. Therefore, the front end of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) moves to the vicinity of the front end of the upper housing main body 1222a (near the rear end of the pair of partition pieces 1222b) in the upper housing 1222, and the accessory winning opening 1155 opens. It will be in a state where it can be opened upward and can receive a game ball T (see FIG. 124(a)). When the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened by the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226e of the link member 1226 is not detected by the opening/closing detection sensor 1227.

When the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 retreats and the accessory winning opening 1155 is open and ready for reception, when the game ball T is received in the accessory winning opening 1155, the game ball T moves upward. It flows down onto the ball receiving portion 1223a of the lower housing 1223 through the pair of partition pieces 1222b of the housing 1222, and rolls leftward on the ball receiving portion 1223a due to the inclination of the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 1223a. Then, it is released rearward from the notch 1223b on the rear left end of the ball receiving portion 1223a, and after being detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 1224 supported on the lower side behind the notch 1223b, the lower housing 1223 is discharged from the outlet 1223d onto the ball inlet 1238d of the ball guiding member 1238 described later of the lower V winning port unit 1220B.

However, as will be described later, in the accessory winning opening unit 1220A according to this embodiment, when the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) changes from the closed state to the open state, the winning to the accessory winning opening 1155 The game balls T that have entered the inner area are detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 1224 before the total ball entering time required for all the game balls T in the waiting state to enter the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155. It is formed with an internal passageway that takes longer to reach the desired position. In this way, the game ball T that has entered the internal area is used to determine whether the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is closed (upper limit determination for the number of game balls T that can be won). By making it so that all the game balls T waiting to win a prize finish entering before reaching , a plurality of game balls T waiting to win a prize to the role prize winning port 1155 are addicted. In combination with the above-described configuration that is naturally produced, it becomes possible to positively generate an overflow winning against the upper limit value of the game balls T that can win, and dynamic winning performance and prize winning performance that exceed the set value. can be realized.

[2-2D2. V winning mouth unit]
The V winning opening unit 1220B of the role item unit 1220 includes a unit front base 1230 attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 below the role item winning opening unit 1220A and having a V winning opening 1156 formed thereon, and a unit front base 1230. A unit rear base 1231 attached to the rear side, a V winning solenoid 1232 having a plunger 1232a sandwiched between the unit front base 1230 and the unit rear base 1231 and moving forward and backward according to the game state, and the unit rear base 1231. A drive gear member 1233 which is rotatably supported on the rear side by a unit front base 1230 and which rotates by advancing and retreating a plunger 1232a of a V winning solenoid 1232; a driven gear member 1234 which meshes with the drive gear member 1233; and a shaft member 1235 having a rear end attached to the center of the shaft member 1235 , rotatably supported by the unit front base 1230 and having a front end projecting forward from the unit front base 1230 .

In addition, the V winning port unit 1220B is arranged on the front surface of the unit front base 1230 and attached to the front end of the shaft member 1235, and has a receiving portion 1236a capable of receiving only one game ball T on the peripheral surface. A cylindrical rotating body 1236, a disk-shaped rotating body front plate 1237 attached to the front surface of the rotating body 1236, and attached to the front surface of the unit front base 1230 so as to cover the outer circumference of the rotating body 1236. A ball guiding member 1238 that guides the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 1223d of the mouth unit 1220A to the upper outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and guides the game ball T from the rotating body 1236 to the V winning port 1156. .

Furthermore, the V winning opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear side of the unit front base 1230 and has a pair of specific sensors 1239 for detecting the game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156, and the rear side of the unit front base 1230 A V-missing sensor 1240 that detects a game ball T that is attached and is not received in the V prize-winning port 1156 after being received in the accessory prize-winning port 1155, and a rotating body 1236 that is attached to the rear side of the unit rear base 1231. and a rotation detection sensor 1241 that detects the rotation position of the.

The unit front base 1230 of the V winning opening unit 1220B has a flat surface extending vertically and horizontally, and is located on the right side of the center in a front view, and has a front portion 1230a through which the V winning opening 1156 penetrates in the front and back direction, and the vicinity of the center of the front portion 1230a. and a bearing hole 1230b for rotatably supporting the shaft member 1235 and a loss hole 1230c penetrating back and forth above the bearing hole 1230b and through which the game ball T can pass. .

In addition, the unit front base 1230 is formed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 1230a, and guides the game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156i downward, and the rear side is opened. A second discharge path 1230e is formed on the rear surface and guides downward the game ball T that has passed through the loss hole 1230c, and the rear side is open. A solenoid accommodating portion 1230f in which the cage V winning solenoid 1232 is accommodated is provided. A pair of specific sensors 1239 are mounted within the first discharge passage 1230d. A V-missing sensor 1240 is attached in the second discharge passage 1230e. The open rear sides of the first discharge passage 1230d, the second discharge passage 1230e, and the solenoid housing portion 1230f are closed by a unit rear base 1231. As shown in FIG.

The V winning solenoid 1232 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is accommodated in the solenoid accommodating portion 1230f of the unit front base 1230 so that the plunger 1232a advances and retreats from the lower end side. A plunger 1232a of the V-winning solenoid 1232 has a disk-shaped tip with a large diameter. In addition, the V winning solenoid 1232 has a coil spring (not shown) that biases the plunger 1232a in a projecting direction, and the coil spring causes the plunger 1232a to project downward when not energized.

The driving gear member 1233 of the V winning opening unit 1220B includes a shaft portion 1233a that extends in the front-rear direction and is rotatably supported on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and a flat plate-like member that extends in the direction perpendicular to the axis from the shaft portion 1233a. An extension piece 1233b, a drive gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extension piece 1233b and extending in an arc with respect to the center of the shaft portion 1233a, and a V prize protruding forward from the front surface of the extension piece 1233b. and an engaging portion 1233 d that engages with the tip of the plunger 1232 a of the solenoid 1232 .

The driven gear member 1234 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear end of the shaft member 1235 and extends in an arc with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235. The driven gear 1234a meshes with the driving gear of the driving gear member 1233. , and a detection piece 1234b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the rear surface of the driven gear 1234a. A driven gear 1234a extending in an arc shape in the driven gear member 1234 has a pitch diameter of about 1/3 of the pitch diameter of a driving gear 1233c extending in an arc shape in the drive gear member 1233. there is

The rotating body 1236 of the V winning hole unit 1220B is formed with a receiving portion 1236a capable of accommodating only one game ball T, which is opened forward and outward. In the front view of the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, two sides (two sides spaced apart in the circumferential direction) extending from the outer peripheral surface to the bottom side extend in directions that recede from each other toward the outer periphery. Specifically, when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is in a state of opening upward, the left side of the front view with respect to the center line passing through the center of the rotating body 1236 and the center of the base of the receiving portion 1236a. While the sides extend in parallel, the right side extends away from the base toward the outer periphery (see FIG. 120(a)). The radius of this rotating body 1236 is formed to be approximately 1.6 times the outer diameter of the game ball T.

Further, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is formed so that the outer diameter from the outer peripheral surface to the base is substantially equal to the outer diameter of the game ball T (see FIG. 124(a)). In addition, the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a is notched from the outer peripheral surface to the bottom side, and is formed lower than the two sides spaced apart in the circumferential direction. In addition, the receiving portion 1236a has an inclined portion 1236b on the front side (inner side) of the rear wall, which is inclined rearward as it goes upward (farther away from the rotation axis), The game ball T coming down from above comes into contact with the inclined portion 1236b, thereby guiding the game ball T forward and making it easier to receive it into the receiving portion 1236a. can mitigate the impact acting on the bottom of the The open front end side of the receiving portion 1236 a of the rotating body 1236 is closed by a rotating body front plate 1237 . Thereby, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 can allow the game ball T to be put in and out only from the radially outer side of the rotating body 1236. As shown in FIG.

The ball guide member 1238 of the V winning port unit 1220B is formed by a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 1238a that covers the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236, and an upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 1238a that is notched to form an upper port through which the game ball T can pass. 1238b, and a right opening 1238c which is formed by notching the right portion of the peripheral wall portion 1238a in front view (a position at an angle of 90 degrees clockwise in front view with respect to the upper opening 1238b) and through which game balls can pass. , a ball inlet 1238d that is arranged above the peripheral wall portion 1238a and directly below the outlet 1223d of the lower housing 1223 in the prize winning unit 1220A and that opens upward, An upper guiding portion 1238e which is lowered and bent like a crank to allow the game ball T to flow down, and a right portion opening 1238c which is lowered from the right opening 1238c toward the V winning opening 1156 at the lower right in the front view, and the game ball T is lowered. and a right guide portion 1238f that can flow down.

The sphere guide member 1238 has open rear ends of the upper guide portion 1238e and the right guide portion 1238f, and is attached to the unit front base 1230 to close the open rear end side by the front surface portion 1230a.

The shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233 of the V winning port unit 1220B of this embodiment is rotatably supported near the right end of the unit front base 1230 in a front view at a position slightly above the vertical center. On the other hand, a shaft member 1235 to which the driven gear member 1234 and the rotating body 1236 are attached is rotatably attached to the unit front base 1230 at a position slightly leftward from the front view center. Between the shaft portion 1233a of the driving gear member 1233 and the shaft member 1235, the driving gear 1233c of the driving gear member 1233 and the driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 are meshed, and the V winning solenoid 1232 is arranged. It is

The V winning opening unit 1220B has a V winning opening 1156 that opens forward at a position below the center of the rotating body 1236 and directly below the shaft portion 1233a of the driving gear member 1233 .

The V winning solenoid 1232 is energized and de-energized at regular intervals under the control of the main control board 4100 . When the V winning solenoid 1232 is not energized, the plunger 1232a projects downward due to the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the engaging portion 1233d of the driving gear member 1233 is pushed downward by the plunger 1232a protruding downward, and the driving gear member 1233 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft portion 1233a when viewed from the front. The vicinity of the clockwise end of the gear 1233c in front view meshes with the vicinity of the counterclockwise end of the driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 (see FIG. 120(b)). At this time, the detection piece 1234 b of the driven gear member 1234 is in a state of extending upward with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235 and is in a state of being detected by the rotation detection sensor 1241 .

A shaft member 1235 having a rear end attached to a driven gear member 1234 rotates a rotating body 1236 attached to the front end of the shaft member 1235 so that the open side of the receiving portion 1236a faces right in front view. It is in the release position. In this state, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is aligned with the right opening 1238c of the ball guide member 1238, and the receiving portion 1236a and the right guide portion 1238f are connected. Further, the upper opening 1238b of the ball guiding member 1238 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236. As shown in FIG.

Thus, when the game ball is received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotor 1236, it is guided from the receiving portion 1236a to the V winning opening 1156 through the right opening 1238c and the right guiding portion 1238f. The game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156 is guided downward by the first discharge path 1230d on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, is detected by a pair of specific sensors 1239, and is detected by the lower end of the first discharge path 1230d. discharged downward from the

On the other hand, the game ball T received by the accessory winning opening 1155 of the accessory winning opening unit 120B and passed through the ball entrance 1238d and the upper guiding portion 1238e of the ball guiding member 1238 and reached the upper opening 1238b is transferred to the outer circumference of the rotating body 1236. The surface and the peripheral wall portion 1238a prevent it from being received in the receiving portion 1236a, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236, which is inclined so that the rear end side narrows, opens to the rear side of the lower portion of the upper guide portion 1238e. It enters the ejection hole 1230c of the front surface portion 1230a of the unit front base 1230, is guided downward by the second ejection passage 1230e on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, is detected by the V ejection sensor 1240, and is detected by the second ejection passage 1230e. is discharged downward from the bottom end of the

When the V winning solenoid 1232 is energized, the plunger 1232a rises inwardly against the urging force of the coil spring. As the plunger 1232a rises, the engagement portion 1233d of the drive gear member 1233 engaged with the tip (lower end) of the plunger 1232a causes the drive gear member 1233 to rotate clockwise around the shaft portion 1233a when viewed from the front. move. As the drive gear member 1233 rotates clockwise, the entire driven gear member 1234 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise about the shaft member 1235 by the driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 that meshes with the drive gear 1233c. Rotate. As a result, the rotating body 1236 attached to the front end side of the shaft member 1235 also rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise in front view through the shaft member 1235 attached to the driven gear member 1234 at the rear end side. Become.

By rotating the rotating body 1236 counterclockwise by 90 degrees, the receiving portion 1236a opens upward, and the opening side of the receiving portion 1236a coincides with the upper opening 1238b of the sphere guide member 1238. state. As a result, the receiving portion 1236a communicates with the upper guiding portion 1238e through the upper opening 1238b (see FIG. 120(a)).

With the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 directed upward, a game ball is discharged from the accessory winning opening unit 1220A side, and enters the ball entrance 1238d of the ball guiding member 1238, passing through the upper guiding portion 1238e. It is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 through the port 1238b. When the game ball T enters the ball entrance 138b while the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the entering game ball T passes through the upper guiding portion 1238e and is received by the rotating body 1236. After coming into contact with the game ball T received by the part 1236a from above, it enters the loss hole 1230c that is open on the rear side, and is discharged downward through the second discharge part 130e of the unit front base 1230. be.

At this time, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is supported by the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a, and even if the game ball T abuts from above, it may come off the receiving portion 1236a. do not have. In addition, the center of the upper opening 1238b (the center of the upper guiding portion 1238e in the front-rear direction) is formed slightly behind the center of the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. As a result, another game ball T that comes after comes into contact with a position slightly behind the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a, so that another game ball T coming in contact from above comes into contact with the position. The game ball T can be guided to the rear where the loss hole 1230c exists, and another game ball T coming later can be surely discharged downward from the loss hole 1230c through the second discharge path 1230e.

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of game balls are supplied to the rotating body 1236 in the operating state shown in FIG. The ball comes to be held by the receiving portion 1236a. Each game ball supplied thereafter is guided by contact with the game ball held by the receiving portion 1236a and enters the loss hole 1230c (V loss sensor 1240). (detected by On the other hand, the game ball held by the receiving portion 1236a is moved from the operating state shown in FIG. 124(a) to the operating state shown in FIG. Holding is released and it comes to enter the V winning opening 1156 (detected by the specific sensor 1239).

On the other hand, when a plurality of game balls are supplied to the rotating body 1236 in the operating state shown in FIG. It comes to enter the failure hole 1230c (detected by the V failure sensor 1240).

[Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 125. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 98, in the game area 1100, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and windmills are provided at predetermined positions along the way. A center accessory 1130 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area 1100, and the design of the center accessory 1130 characterizes the model of the pachinko machine 1, the game concept, and the like.

In addition, behind the center accessory 1130, an effect display device 1115 is provided to display an effect with a large area in a front view so as to attract the player's attention. As the effect display device 1115, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information obtained by synthesizing decorative design image information, background image information, character image information and the like is used. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as effect display device 1115 .

Here, a gate member 1134, a first starting port 1152, and a big winning port 1154 are provided in the flow-down path from the left region of the center accessory 1130 in the game region 1100 to the lower region. On the other hand, in the flow-down path from the right side area of the center accessory 1130 in the game area 1100 to the lower side area, the gate member 1134, the general winning opening 1151, the accessory winning opening 1155, the second starting opening 1153, and the big winning opening 1154 is provided.

In this way, the first starting port 1152 is provided so that only the game ball T that has flowed down the left side area of the center role 1130 can win a prize, and the big winning port 1154 is provided on the left side of the center role 1130. It is provided so that a game ball T flowing down either the area or the right side area can win a prize.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player operates the handle device 500 to release the game balls T stored in the plate unit 300 one by one (at intervals of 0.6 seconds) on the game board 4. The upper portion in region 1100 is ready to be implanted. A game ball T hit into the game area 1100 flows down so as to pass through either the left or right of the center accessory 1130 . As a result, when winning any of the winning holes, the number of game balls T corresponding to the accepted winning holes are paid out to the tray unit 300, but none of the winning holes win. In this case, it is discharged from the out port 1112a opened at the lower end of the game area 1100. The game balls T discharged from the out port 1112a, the general winning port 1151, the first starting port 1152, the second starting port 1153, the big winning port 1154, and the accessory winning port 1155 are not returned to the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the game ball T enters the warp entrance 1131 that opens on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the center role 1130, the center role 1130 opens below the center in the left-right direction. It is released into the game area 1100 again from the warp exit 1132 that is running. Directly below this warp exit 1132, the first starting opening 1152 in the winning opening unit 1150 is always open upwards, and the game ball T released from the warp exit 1132 has a very high probability of reaching the first starting opening. 1152 to be accepted.

Here, the first starting port 1152 is located substantially in the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and below the effect display device 1115 so that game balls can always be received. When the game ball enters the first starting hole 1152, the first starting hole sensor 1190 (FIG. 126) detects the entering ball (winning) of the game ball. At this time, when it is determined by the main control board 4100 (FIG. 126) that a predetermined special starting condition has been established, the second value is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. Based on the random number for one special symbol, a first special symbol lottery (first special determination) for a hit (small hit, big win) that triggers the opening of the accessory winning prize port 1155 and the big winning prize port 1154 is performed. The first special symbol dynamically displayed on the one special symbol display 1185 (Fig. 126) is variably displayed for a predetermined time. In addition, the first special symbol display 1185 is provided as part of the function display 1114, for example.

As a result, when a small win has been obtained, after this fluctuation display is completed, the prize winning solenoid 1225 of the attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126), which will be described later, is turned in a pattern corresponding to the kind of the small win. Electricity is applied to open the accessory winning opening 1155 (small winning game). On the other hand, when a big win is obtained, after this fluctuation display is completed, the attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is energized in a pattern corresponding to the kind of the big win, The large winning opening 1154 is opened (jackpot game). Then, after the big hit game is performed, it is possible to control the transition to a time-saving game state described later in which the ease of receiving the game ball to the second start port 1153 is achieved.

As will be described later, when the entry of a game ball (winning a prize) is detected by the first starting port sensor 1190, the main control board 4100 also performs a process of transmitting a payout command to the payout control board 4110 (FIG. 126). conduct. That is, in this case, the payout control board 4110 causes the number (for example, three) of game balls T to be paid out to the plate unit 300 according to the received payout command.

On the other hand, when the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 flows rightward from the top of the center role 1130 (right hitting), it enters the right channel 1133 from the entrance 1133a of the center role 1130. Then, the game area 1100 is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 1133e disposed substantially in the center in the vertical direction. Below the ejection port 1133e, the general winning port 1151 of the winning port unit 1150 is always open upward.

Then, when the game ball T is received by the general winning hole 1151 , it is detected by the general winning hole sensor 1180 and the detection signal is sent to the main control board 4100 . The main control board 4100 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 4110 in accordance with the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 1180, and the payout control board 4110 receives the payout command. A game ball T is paid out to the plate unit 300. - 特許庁

The game ball T that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 1130 and has not been received by the general prize winning port 1151 passes through either the left or right of the receiving portion 1161b in the front flow path forming member 1161 that forms the general prize winning port 1151. It flows down to the upper surface of the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 that closes the accessory winning opening 1155 of the item unit 1220 . Then, the game ball T that has flowed down to the upper surface of the door portion 1221a rolls leftward on the upper surface of the door portion 1221a under the upper wall portion 1161f of the accessory winning opening, and moves from the left end of the door portion 1221a to the accessory winning opening. It rolls to the upper surface of the left shelf portion 1161g and is discharged to the lower left from the left end of the prize winning opening left shelf portion 1161g.

Then, the game ball T released from the accessory winning opening left shelf portion 1161g flows down to the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, rolls leftward on the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, It is discharged to the lower left from the left end of the secondary opening upper shelf 1161j. The game ball T released from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j contacts the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m on the left side, and moves downward along the right side of the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m. flow down to The game ball T that has flowed down along the right side of the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m flows down onto the second starting opening region lower shelf portion 1161i, and the upper surface of the second starting opening region lower shelf portion 1161i moves to the left. After rolling to, it is discharged to the lower left so as to pass through the front surface of the big winning opening 1154 from the left end of the second starting opening area lower shelf 1161i.

On the other hand, when the game ball is received (passed) through the gate member 1134 in the right channel 1133 or the gate member 1134 on the left side of the center accessory 1130, a gate sensor 1135 (see FIG. 126), which will be described later, is detected. ) detects that the same acceptance has occurred. At this time, when it is determined by the main control board 4100 (FIG. 126) that a predetermined normal starting condition has been established, the normal starting condition is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. Based on the random number for the symbol, determination processing (normal determination) for the normal hit that triggers the operation of the starting port door member 1214 as the movable piece is performed, and dynamic display is performed on the normal symbol display 1189 (FIG. 126). The normal symbols to be played are variably displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when the normal hit is won, after this variable display is completed, drive control of a normal accessory driving mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 126), which will be described later and is configured with a starting solenoid 1215, etc., is performed. As a result, the operation of the starting port door member 1214 to the appearing position (in the case of the modified example, the operation to the retracted position of the proximity disconnecting member 2215) is performed.

However, as described above, the variable starter unit 1210 (or the variable starter unit 2210) according to this embodiment, even if the operation by the starter door member 1214 is performed, the game ball T to the second starter 1153 It is provided with a structure that does not necessarily allow the reception of (remote island type prize opening, tombolo type movable member).

That is, in the second starting port 1153 according to this embodiment, even if the operation by the starting port door member 1214 is performed in response to winning the normal winning, the operation is a bridging time shorter than the winning threshold time If it is only performed, the game ball can not cross over the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214 and spills down, so that the reception to the second starting port 1153 can not occur. Therefore, the second starting port 1153 according to this embodiment crosses over the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214 only when the operation by the starting port door member 1214 protrudes for a time longer than the winning threshold time. It is possible to accept the game ball T that has been pulled.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal game state, when a normal win is won in the normal judgment, basically the above-mentioned winning threshold time is set as the operating time of the starter door member 1214. A shorter bridging time is selected. Thus, by almost eliminating the possibility of the game ball T being received in the second starting port 1153 across the starting port door member 1214 when in the normal game state, the second starting port 1153 side A lottery can be set to extremely advantageous game conditions.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a normal hit is won in the normal determination in the time-saving game state, the operation time of the start door member 1214 is longer than the winning threshold time. You have to choose the time. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, the player hits the game ball in the right area of the center accessory 1130 in the game area 1100 (right hitting), and the second player on the side with extremely advantageous game conditions. You can enjoy the game (second special symbol lottery) according to the reception of the game ball to the starting port 1153.例文帳に追加That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal game state, the probability that the game ball is accepted in the first start hole 1152 when hitting to the left is higher than that in the second start hole 1153 when hitting to the right. While the probability that the game ball is accepted is made lower, in the time-saving game state, the probability that the game ball is accepted by the first start port 1152 when hitting the left is higher than the probability that the game ball is accepted when hitting the right. The probability that the game ball is accepted in the second start port 1153 is made higher.

Incidentally, when the game ball is received in the second starting hole 1153, the entering ball (winning) of the same game ball is detected by the second starting hole sensor 1191 (see FIG. 126) which will be described later. And at this time, if a predetermined special starting condition is established, the prize is awarded based on the random number for the second special symbol that is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. A second special symbol lottery (second special determination) is performed for the hit (small hit, big win) that triggers the opening of the opening 1155 and the big winning opening 1154, and the second special symbol display 1186 (Fig. 126) is displayed dynamically. The displayed second special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time. The second special symbol indicator 1186 is provided as part of the function indicator 1114, for example.

As a result, when a small win has been obtained, after this fluctuation display is completed, the prize winning solenoid 1225 of the attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126), which will be described later, is turned in a pattern corresponding to the kind of the small win. Electricity is applied to open the accessory winning opening 1155 (small winning game). On the other hand, when a big win is obtained, after this fluctuation display is completed, the attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is energized in a pattern corresponding to the kind of the big win, The large winning opening 1154 is opened (jackpot game).

Here, in the small winning game, the V winning solenoid 1232 is de-energized while any of the game balls that have entered the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155 is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When the rotating body 1236 rotates clockwise, the game ball received in the receiving portion 1236 a of the rotating body 1236 is guided to the V winning opening 1156 . That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, in addition to when the big win is won, when the specific sensor 1239 detects that the game ball has been received in the V winning opening 1156, the big win game is started. Therefore, control is performed to open and close the big winning opening 1154 in a predetermined pattern.

In the big hit game, a predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds) has passed after the big winning port 1154 is opened, or a predetermined number (eg, 10) of game balls have entered the big winning port 1154. When the open/close control pattern for controlling the big winning port 1154 to the closed state is a round game of one round, this round game is repeated for the number of rounds corresponding to the type of "jackpot". It will happen.

While these games are being played, when a game ball is received in the big winning hole 1154 or the accessory winning hole 1155, the main control board 4100 detects the result of the detection by the big winning hole sensor 1206 or the accessory winning hole sensor 1224. Based on this, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 . As a result, the payout control board 4110 causes the dish unit 300 to pay out the number (for example, 10) of game balls corresponding to the received payout command.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the display by the function display device 1114, the peripheral control board 4010 displays various effects images on the effect display device 1115 based on commands from the main control board 4100. It is displayed so that the player can be entertained.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, the lottery (second special symbol lottery) on the side of the second starting port 1153 can be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. It is supposed to function as an accurate process.

More specifically, first, the probability of obtaining a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is set to a probability value of approximately 100%. Also, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, as its type, "a game ball is placed on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door part 1221a). As long as you play (continue the right-handed game) so that the existing state (waiting for winning) is maintained, the "advantageous small win that can start the big win game with a probability of about 100%" is always selected. I'm trying to be

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, up to a predetermined number (up to four) of random numbers for the second special symbol to be used in such a winning process (second special symbol lottery) is stored. (Holding) It is possible.

According to these configurations, when winning to the second starting port 1153 is permitted due to the above-mentioned long bridging time and the lottery (probability process) is put in a pending state, approximately 100% A game is made possible so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of . It should be noted that the variable starting port units 1210 and 2210 according to this embodiment are designed to receive all the game balls that have not been collected by the general winning port 1151 or the accessory winning port 1155 among the game balls hit to the right. are placed in Then, when the winning to the second starting port 1153 is permitted due to the long bridging time, at least one or more game balls are supplied to the second starting port 1153 in the open state.

In this respect, in the time-saving game state, as described above, when the normal determination is successful, the operation time of the start door member 1214 is a longer bridging time than the winning threshold time. Therefore, if it is possible to once hold the random number for the second special symbol (probability processing) up to a predetermined number as a holding state, the number of holdings is every time a big hit game is performed (holding is digested A special game property is provided such that a big win game can be continuously generated regardless of whether the game is controlled to the normal game state or the time-saving game state each time.

According to such a special game property, every time a time-saving game state occurs according to one of the results of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the reserved state, a jackpot game occurs with a probability of about 100%. It is possible to provide a winning addition game that can be played so that the winning processing (second special symbol lottery) that makes it possible to play as possible is newly added as a pending state. In other words, in this case, the number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state decreases, and as the situation becomes more disadvantageous for the player, the number that can be newly added as the pending state increases. , Accuracy addition game itself can improve reversibility from a disadvantageous situation even though the game content itself is the same.

However, if such a special game property is simply realized, every time a time-saving game state occurs, a winning game can be played with a probability of about 100%. The number of pending (second special symbol lottery) may be replenished to the upper limit (4) again. That is, in this case, the reserved number thus replenished, regardless of whether it is controlled to the normal game state or the time-saving game state, since it is possible to continuously generate the jackpot game, the jackpot game is played. may be executed more continuously than expected, and there is a concern that the load on the hall side may become excessive.

In this regard, it is conceivable to keep the probability of occurrence of the time-saving gaming state (continuation probability) low, but even with such a seeming continuation probability, it is set to a value that is less than 50%, for example. If it is lowered to this level, the apparent performance is disadvantageous to the player side, and there is a concern that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 will be adversely affected.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are pending, the second special symbol lottery is executed first regardless of the order of the pending. control as follows. And on top of this, through the setting of various game conditions such as the probability of obtaining a normal hit in the normal judgment when in the time saving game state, the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the second special pattern fluctuation time, time saving game In the state, the expected value of the number of game balls accepted in the second start port 1153 during the period from the end of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state to the start of the big win game is approximately "1". By doing so, even if the continuation probability of the time saving gaming state is set as a probability value of 50% or more (here, 50%), the end condition can be appropriately satisfied.

That is, in this case, now, assuming that the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is held for four times, on average two of the four winning processes (second special symbol lottery) After the big hit game is played, the time saving game state is generated. In this regard, the expectation value of the number of game balls accepted in the second start port 1153 between the time the winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state in the time saving game state is digested and the big hit game is started Since is generally set to "1", the expectation of the number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) that are newly put on hold while the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is digested for four times The value will be "2".

According to such a configuration, the number of winning processing (second special symbol lottery) newly added as a pending state is smaller than the number of executed winning processing (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state. Therefore, even when the above-described special game characteristics are realized, the conditions for ending the time-saving game state can be appropriately met. On the other hand, the expectation of the number of game balls accepted in the second start port 1153 during the period from the completion of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state in the time saving game state to the start of the big hit game. Since the value is generally set to “1”, each time a time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of consecutive big hit games (the number of times the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is held) is added. Expectations are being met.

Also, in order to realize such a special playability, if the variable starter unit 2210 according to the modified example is used, even if the starter door member 1214 operates over a long bridging time, the number of acceptances can be kept at a specified number (for example, one), so the second It is possible to set the expected value of the number of game balls accepted by the starting port 1153 as an appropriate value. For example, if a time longer than the time from the end of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state in the time-saving game state to the start of the jackpot game is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. , It is also possible to make it possible to suspend the winning process (second special symbol lottery) for a predetermined specified number (for example, one).

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned special game characteristics, each time a time-saving gaming state occurs according to any result of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state, the winning process (second special symbol It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the number of newly added statuses of lottery (lottery) is intentionally varied. That is, in this case, two or more game balls are allowed to be received in the second start port 1153 from the end of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) to the start of the big hit game. (advantageous fluctuation time in which the expected value of acceptance is 2 or more), and the period from the completion of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) to the start of the jackpot game despite being in the time-saving game state In addition, the short fluctuation time (adverse fluctuation time when the expected value of acceptance is less than 0.5) in which even one game ball is not accepted in the second start port 1153, etc., depends on the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. It can be set through such a setting mode (fluctuation pattern setting process to be described later).

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the game is in the time-saving game state, the above-mentioned long bridging time permits the winning of the second starting port 1153, and the lottery (winning process) is put on hold. In this case, as described above, each time the hold is terminated, the game is made possible so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. That is, in this case, even if the symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is shortened, the period during which the small winning game according to the advantageous small winning is performed, or after the small winning game is completed. During the period until the big hit game is started (the period until the so-called time saving function is stopped), the game ball can be received in the second start port 1153 . Therefore, in the time-saving game state, simply shortening the fluctuation time of the symbol according to the winning process (second special symbol lottery) will start the big hit game after the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is digested. It is considered difficult to prevent even one game ball from being accepted in the second starting port 1153 until the game is completed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. This is arranged as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from entering the second starting hole 1153 while the accessory winning hole 1155 is open.

And above this, the time required for the game ball that has not entered the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155 to be supplied to the second starting opening 1153 is the time from the position where the starting opening door member 1214 is sunk. A flow-down path between the prize winning port 1155 and the second starting port 1153 is provided so as to be longer than the time (long bridging time) maintained in the operating state (the prize winning port opening and closing member 1221 ( flow path including the upper surface of the door portion 1221a)). That is, in this case, after the opening of the accessory winning opening 1155 is completed (after the time saving function is stopped), even if it is still maintained as an operating state from the position where the starting opening door member 1214 is sunk, While the operating state is maintained, game balls are no longer supplied to the second starting port 1153 .

According to these configurations, despite being in the time-saving gaming state, the period from the start of the symbol variation according to the winning process (second special symbol lottery) to the end of the small winning game (big winning game is started), it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 1153. Therefore, while the above-mentioned special game property is realized, it is possible to dare to have a large variation in the number of game balls accepted by the second start port 1153 each time it is controlled to the time-saving game state. .

However, in this case, even if the time-saving gaming state occurs, it is not always possible to add a new winning process as a pending state. Therefore, in the situation where such a special game property is provided, even if the winning process (second special symbol lottery) that results in the possibility of generating a time-saving game state is relatively often held Even if there is, when the winning processing (second special symbol lottery) with the slowest order of execution is completed, if the time-saving game state cannot be generated as a result of the processing, the jackpot game is continuously generated. It is possible to give a risk that the special game property that can be played will be terminated.

It should be noted that, in order to preferably realize such variations, it is desirable to use the variable starting port unit 2210 according to the above-described modified example. That is, in this case, since only a predetermined number of game balls are accepted in the second starting port 1153, two game balls can be received in the second starting port 1153. A variable time is set. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent three or four game balls from entering (occurrence of unintended variation).

On the other hand, in the situation where such a special game property is provided, only one winning process (second special symbol lottery) that can obtain a result that can generate a time-saving game state is put on hold. Even in the case, if this is digested as the latest winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the order of digestion, the number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state is the same as the jackpot game. is continuously consumed, the game state (privilege game) in which the big winning game can be continuously generated can be continued.

That is, when the winning process (second special symbol lottery) with the slowest digestion order among the winning processes (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state is digested, the winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state ) does not exist. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state generated as a result of the last winning process (second special symbol lottery) being digested, if there is a first special symbol lottery in the pending state, it will be digested, If there is no first special symbol lottery in the pending state, no game will proceed.

However, the probability of a jackpot game occurring as a result of the first special symbol lottery is set at a low probability of approximately 1/400 regardless of the game state, so the first special symbol lottery was in a pending state. Even so, it can be said that the possibility of a jackpot game occurring as a result of this being consumed is extremely low.

That is, in this case, in the time-saving gaming state that occurred as a result of digesting the slowest winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the order of digestion when a special game is provided, Regardless of whether or not one special symbol lottery is in the pending state, at least one winning process (second special symbol lottery) is newly put in the pending state. Then, when a big hit game occurs by the winning process (second special symbol lottery) newly set to the reserved state, the time saving game state is terminated.

In view of this fact, if the time-saving gaming state occurs as a result of digesting the slowest processing (second special symbol lottery) in the order of digestion, the processing in the pending state (second special symbol lottery) It is obvious that the special game property that can continuously generate the big winning games will continue to be provided even after the number of the big winning games has been continuously digested.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when such a time-saving game state occurs, the first special symbol lottery is in a pending state, and a jackpot game occurs as a result of the first special symbol lottery. Even in such a case, control is performed so that special game features can be continuously provided. That is, as the fluctuation time of the design according to the first special design lottery (variation time at the time of the big hit or the advantageous small hit), the time during which the winning process (second special design lottery) can be newly put on hold ( For example, the expected value of the number of game balls accepted by the second starting port 1153 is set to approximately "2").

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a big win game occurs as a result of the first special symbol lottery, it is always controlled to the time-saving game state after the big win game is played. there is Therefore, even if the winning process (second special symbol lottery) cannot be newly put on hold until the big win game occurs as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the big win game is continued. A special game property that can be randomly generated can be continued.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the time-saving gaming state is continued over a period until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times.

On the other hand, the winning process (second special symbol lottery) that allows a game to be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of about 100% is also useful in a game state in which the time saving function does not operate.

That is, as described above, as shown in FIG. 98, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal game state, the game is started by entering the game ball into the first start hole 1152 by striking to the left. In this left channel, the gate member 1134 is arranged as a passage port in the path along which the game ball flows down to the first starting port 1152 .

In this respect, when the game ball passes through the gate member 1134, the determination processing (normal determination) for the normal hit that triggers the operation of the start port door member 1214 is performed, but in the normal game state, Even if a normal hit is obtained as a result of the determination process, basically, a bridging time shorter than the winning threshold time is selected as the operating time of the starting door member 1214. As mentioned above.

However, on the other hand, even if a normal hit is obtained in the normal game state, the probability of a slight probability (for example, the probability of obtaining a normal hit is approximately 1/4000), the start door As the operating time of the member 1214, a bridging time longer than the winning threshold time is selected. And in this case, if right-handed hitting is performed, winning to the second starting port 1153 occurs with a probability of about 100%, and the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is put on hold. Therefore, when the winning process (second special symbol lottery) set in the reserved state is completed, a big winning game will occur with a probability of approximately 100%.

According to such a configuration, in the normal game state, in addition to the case where a specific result (big hit, advantageous small win) is obtained in the lottery corresponding to the winning of the first start port 1152, the gate member 1134 Even if a specific result (normal hit with a long bridging time selected) is obtained in the determination process (normal determination) according to the passage of the, a jackpot game can occur with a probability of about 100%. It will be possible to play at That is, in this case, the normal determination can be provided with the same function as the lottery corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 1152 .

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a structure in which the gate member 1134 is arranged as a passage port in the path along which the game ball flows down to the first start port 1152. A game ball can flow down so as to satisfy both the starting conditions of a lottery according to the prize winning to the first starting port 1152 and a normal determination having a function equivalent to the lottery. That is, in this case, two lotteries having equivalent functions can be executed without consuming two game balls in order to satisfy execution conditions for the two lotteries. In this case, even if it does not depend on one lottery, it is possible to generate a big win game as long as a specific result is obtained in the other lottery having the same function although the type is different. Therefore, from the player's side, even when it is difficult to obtain a specific result in one of the lotteries, it is difficult for the player to feel distrust, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 98, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the big win game is occurring (big win game state), the game is played to the big winning hole 1154 by hitting to the right. The game progresses by entering the ball, and in the right channel, the gate member 1134 is also arranged as a passage port in the path along which the game ball flows down to the big prize winning port 1154. It has a structure.

In this respect, when the game ball passes through the gate member 1134, as described above, the determination processing (normal determination) for the normal hit that triggers the operation of the starting port door member 1214 is performed. The determination (ordinary control process (step S15)) is, as is clear from the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 131) described later, the effect of the value of the process flag updated in the special control process (step S14). It has a control structure that executes without receiving.

According to such a configuration, as a result of obtaining a specific result (big hit, advantageous small hit) in the lottery corresponding to the winning of the first start port 1152, in the special control process (step S14) Even when the processing (steps S230, S240) for execution of the big hit game is performed, the determination processing (normal determination) having the same function as the lottery according to the winning to the first start port 1152 is a big hit. This can be continued even during the period in which the game is being played. That is, in this case, during the period in which the big win game is being played, the determination process (normal determination) functions as a lottery to determine whether or not a new big win game other than this can be placed in a special standby state. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the jackpot game is being played.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the probability that the winning to the second start port 1153 is allowed in the normal game state probability) is set to a very low probability value, approximately 1/4000. However, in the above-described left flow path, the probability that the game ball passes through the gate member 1134 is about 3 to 4 times the probability that the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 1152. , and even as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the time setting that can be digested by the judgment process (normal judgment) separately for each passing game ball (for example, the expected value of the time set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 1/3 to 1/4 or less) has been realized.

Therefore, the probability (approximately 1/400) that a specific result is obtained in the lottery according to the winning of the first start port 1152, and the specific result in the determination process (normal determination) according to the passage through the gate member 1134 When the probability of obtaining a result (approximately 1/4000) is compared with such a probability of starting (probability of acceptance to the gate member 1134 or the first starting port 1152), the probability between the two is 10 times There is no difference, and it can be said that there is only a probability difference of about 2 to 4 times in practice.

In this regard, the above-described right flow path is set so that the probability of the game ball passing through the gate member 1134 is higher, thereby generating a larger winning game than in the normal game state. A specific result is more likely to be obtained in the determination process (normal determination) during the period.

However, if the probability of the game ball passing through the gate member 1134 in the right flow path is too high, a big hit game can occur when the game ball flows down the right flow path in the normal game state. The expected value (expected value that a specific result is obtained through the gate member 1134 of the right channel) is the expected value that a big hit game can be generated when the game ball is made to flow down the left channel (left channel and the expected value for obtaining a specific result through the first starting port 1152), and there is a concern that the load on the hole side will be excessive. .

Therefore, regarding the probability that the game ball passes through the gate member 1134 in the right channel, the expected value that a big hit game can occur when the game ball flows down the right channel is The probability value is set to be higher than the probability that the game ball passes through the gate member 1134 in the above-described left flow path, within the range that does not exceed the expected value that a big hit game can occur when the ball is made to flow down. I'm trying to

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if another new jackpot game cannot be placed in the special standby state during the period in which the jackpot game is occurring, the jackpot game can be played. However, if it occurs as a result of the game in the normal game state and the transition control to the time saving game state is performed (at the time of the first transition to the state where special game characteristics are provided In some cases), we are trying to realize a game property that makes it easy to hold relatively many hitting processes (second special symbol lottery).

That is, during the period in which the big win game is occurring, another new big win game cannot be placed in a special standby state, and the initial shift to the state where such special game characteristics are provided is made. In the case, since there is no winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state, if there is a first special symbol lottery in the pending state, it will be digested, and the first in the pending state If there is no special symbol lottery, no game will proceed.

In addition, since the probability of a big win game occurring as a result of the first special symbol lottery is set at a low probability of approximately 1/400 regardless of the game state, the first special symbol lottery was in a pending state. Even so, it can be said that the possibility of a jackpot game occurring as a result of this being consumed is extremely low.

Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery exists as a pending state, normally (unless a big hit game occurs as a result of the first special symbol lottery), the first special symbol lottery in the pending state The time required to digest the corresponding game (symbol fluctuation time, etc.) and the digestion of the game according to the winning process (second special symbol lottery) that was newly put on hold while the game was completed It is possible to put the winning process (second special symbol lottery) in a pending state over the required time and the two times, thereby holding a relatively large number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery). A game property that is easy to play is realized (double add-on game).

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the time required for the symbol variation on the first special symbol lottery side is longer than the time required for the symbol variation on the second special symbol lottery side. It is set so that it is easy to be selected, and this also makes it easy to hold relatively many winning processes (second special symbol lottery) at the time of the first shift to the state where special game characteristics are provided. is realized (super-additional game).

According to these configurations, for example, at the time of the initial transition to a state in which a special game property is provided (at the time of transition control from the normal game state to the time saving game state), the game that was held in the normal game state ( The first special symbol lottery) and the game held in the time-saving game state (winning process) are used to give the first-time game privilege. In this way, by using the game (first special symbol lottery) put on hold in the normal game state as a material for increasing the player's benefit, the decline in interest in the game in the normal game state is suppressed. be able to

In addition, if the first special symbol lottery does not exist as a pending state at the time of the first transition to the state where special game characteristics are provided, first, the first special symbol lottery is performed by hitting left. It is desirable in realizing these game characteristics to play a game so as to put the winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state by hitting to the right after putting it in the pending state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, once the transition is made to the state in which the special game feature is provided, a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed regardless of the game state thereafter. In addition to being able to do so, a game property is realized in which an opportunity is provided to increase the number of jackpot games that are in the state of special standby during the continuous execution. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the expected value of the prizes that the player can win through one big win game is set to about 1000 (one big win in one round game). 1154, which is the number of possible wins, etc.), thereby increasing the continuity of the big win game, which is important in realizing such game characteristics, so as not to cause a load on the hall side. .

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small win is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, the upper surface (specific If you play (continue the right-handed game) so that the state where the game ball exists in the rolling area) is maintained (waiting for winning), there is always an advantageous small hit that can start the big hit game. It is as described above that it is selected.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the principle that a big win game can be started when an advantageous small win is obtained will be explained.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as long as the player continues to hit to the right, the upper surface (specific A structure is adopted that allows at least one or more game balls (here, two or three) to remain in the rolling area). On the other hand, when at least one game ball exists on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) in the closed state, the opening and closing of the accessory winning opening When the member 1221 (door portion 1221a) operates to the open state, the game balls are dropped from the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) into the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155. It is designed to enter.

According to this configuration, as long as the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 operates to the open state, even if the operation time is extremely short, the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a), the game ball (the game ball waiting for winning) can be made to enter the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155. FIG. Moreover, since the game ball that has already been launched (the game ball waiting to win a prize) automatically enters the inner area of the prize winning port 1155, the opening of the prize winning port 1155 It is possible to more accurately control the entry timing of the game ball into the internal area.

In this regard, as will be described later, in the internal area of the prize winning port 1155, a certain sorting operation (see FIG. 142(e)) appears from a specific timing (here, timing of symbol stop). A rotator (distribution device) 1236 is provided which can thereby guide the game ball entering the internal area to either the V winning opening 1156 or the losing hole 1230c. In other words, with respect to the sorting operation of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the entry timing of the game ball into the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155 can be controlled more accurately. Aiming at the timing of being guided to 1156 (hit timing at which the game medium is guided to the specific area), the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is closed so that the winning waiting state of the game ball is released. It is supposed to operate from the state to the open state.

In addition, when a disadvantageous small hit is obtained, it is possible to more accurately control the entry timing of the game ball into the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155 with respect to such a distribution operation of the rotating body (distribution device) 1236. Aiming at the timing when it is not guided to the V winning opening 1156 (the lost timing when the game medium is not guided to the specific area), the winning waiting state of the game ball is released. 1221 (door portion 1221a) is moved from the closed state to the open state.

According to such a configuration, even if the result of the second special symbol lottery is an advantageous small hit, a game As long as the game is played (continue the right-handed game) so that the state where the ball exists (waiting for winning) is maintained, a rotating body (distribution) that performs a certain distribution operation (see FIG. 142 (e)) Since the game ball enters the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155 at the correct timing guided to the V winning opening 1156 by the minute device) 1236, the probability of entering the V winning opening 1156 is approximately 100%. A jackpot game corresponding to the acceptance can be started (jackpot making control). Thus, not only when a big win is obtained as a result of the second special pattern lottery, but also when an advantageous small prize is obtained as a result of the second special pattern lottery, the big win game is started with a probability of approximately 100%. Therefore, by setting the probability of obtaining the advantageous small win in the second special symbol lottery to be approximately 100%, the second special symbol lottery can be played with a probability of approximately 100%. It can be made to function as a winning process that enables a game to occur.

Moreover, although this will also be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, basically the , Only the game balls that are already waiting for winning on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) can enter the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155 Only for a short period of time (a short period of time during which the winning of game balls that are not in the state of waiting for winning a prize is refused), the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is operated from the closed state to the open state. It should be noted that such a time (the time for operating the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) from the closed state to the open state) should be at least shorter than the game ball shooting interval (0.6 seconds). Therefore, it is required to make it difficult for new game balls to be supplied during the open state.

As a result, variation in the winning timing of the game ball when the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened is less likely to occur. It is possible to enter the game ball into the internal area while determining in advance which one of the V winning opening 1156 and the losing hole 1230c to be guided by.

As will be described later, the probability of getting a big hit in the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment is extremely low (1/400), and the probability of getting a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is also The same low probability (7/1200) is assumed. However, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the big hit is as low as the first special symbol lottery (both 1/400), but the small win (advantageous small win) is almost 100% (for example, 399/400, or 398/400 if the loss is set at 1/400). In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are reserved, the second special symbol lottery is executed first regardless of the reservation order.

According to such a configuration, in the time-saving gaming state, among the first special symbol lottery and the winning process (second special symbol lottery), the game centered on the winning process (second special symbol lottery) If the winning process (only the game on the side of the second special symbol lottery) is progressed, as a result of such progress, usually, an advantageous small win is immediately obtained as a result of the winning process (second special symbol lottery). will be Then, by opening the accessory winning opening 1155 at the timing when the game ball that has already been shot and is waiting for winning is guided to the V winning opening 1156 (by performing a small winning game), A big win game corresponding to this can be generated.

In addition, when the advantageous small hit is obtained, the small prize game of opening the accessory winning hole 1155 at the timing when the game ball which has already been shot and is waiting for winning is guided to the V winning hole 1156.例文帳に追加Since it is possible to generate a jackpot game corresponding to this by generating , may be provided to the player.

However, simply realizing a high V winning probability that the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 each time a small win (advantageous small win) is obtained in the winning process (second special symbol lottery), Equipped with a V winning opening 1156, such as ``to provide a game property based on a machine lottery such as whether or not a game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 with a predetermined mechanical lottery probability in the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155''. There is a risk that the basic game characteristics of the time machine lottery will be lost. Usually, it is desirable to set such a machine lottery probability at a low probability of approximately 1/10 or less.

Therefore, in view of such circumstances, when opening the accessory winning opening 1155 according to the small hit (advantageous small winning) obtained as a result of the winning process (second special symbol lottery), the accessory winning opening 1155 It is conceivable to enter more than 10 game balls into the inner area of , and to allow only one of those game balls to be accepted in the V winning opening 1156 . However, the small win (advantageous small win) obtained as a result of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is different from the big win aimed at achieving a large number of prizes, and is used as an open time during the small win game. The upper limit of the time that can be set is 1.8 seconds, and the upper limit of the number that can be set as the number of game balls detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 1224 during the small winning game is 10. It is regulated as if there is.

Here, considering that the shooting interval at which the game balls can be continuously shot when the player operates the handle device 500 is 0.6 seconds, the number of game balls that can win during the small winning game is The number is usually found to be only 3 according to the formula "1.8 seconds/0.6 seconds". Also, even if many game balls can be won during the small winning game, when the number of game balls detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 1224 reaches 10, the accessory winning opening 1155 is closed. Therefore, it is necessary to make it possible to stably enter more than 10 game balls into the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155 during the small winning game, and eventually to the V winning opening 1156. It can be said that it is difficult to set the machine lottery probability to a probability value of approximately 1/10 or less despite guidance.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
(b) L (e.g., 6 cm) for the length in the horizontal direction (the length in the rolling direction of the game ball within a specific rolling area) on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a); When the game ball T is continuously shot into the game area 1100 by the ball shooting device 650 in response to the operation of the handle device 500, and the shooting interval time is T (0.6 seconds), opening and closing of the prize winning opening. A structure that interacts with the game balls rolling in the passage so that the average speed (preferably the maximum speed) of the game balls T on the upper surface of the member 1221 (door part 1221a) is less than "L/2T". By having (B), as long as the player continues to hit to the right, at least two or more (2 or 3) are on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. A game ball can be made to exist.

Furthermore, as also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(B) When the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) changes from the closed state to the open state, all the game balls waiting to enter the accessory winning opening 1155 The time required for the game ball that has entered the internal area to reach the position detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 1224 is longer than the time required for the ball to enter the internal area. By having (b), the game ball that has entered the internal area is used for closing determination of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (upper limit determination for the number of game balls T that can be won). Before reaching the detection point (accessory winning opening sensor 1224), all the game balls waiting for winning can enter and finish.

According to such configurations (a) and (b), it is possible to positively generate an overflow prize with respect to the upper limit of game balls that can be won (up to 10 in a small winning game). .

Moreover, as also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(c) so that a plurality of game balls on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) almost simultaneously fall into the accessory winning opening 1155 Accessory prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) provided so as to slide in a direction (back side direction) perpendicular to the
By having the configuration (c), every time the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 is opened, the game balls on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 are released regardless of the number of the game balls. Since it is possible to enter all of them into the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 at once, it is possible to shorten the time required for winning the prize to the prize winning opening 1155 to the utmost.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(d) When executing the opening control of the prize winning port 1155 by dividing it into a plurality of short opening times with a predetermined closing interval time between them, at least two or more game balls play a role as the predetermined closing interval time. The time required to reach the right side of the prize opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (a time more than twice the firing interval (for example, 1.2 seconds or more)) is adopted, and the short opening time , the time (shorter than the firing interval, e.g., 0.12 seconds), even though it is a short opening operation shorter than the firing interval (calculated, the expected value to win is less than 1), each time the short opening operation appears, At least two or more game balls waiting to win a prize during the lapse of the predetermined closing interval time can all enter the internal area of the prize winning port 1155 collectively.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to dramatically increase the winning number of game balls per unit time when in the open state. Even if the game ball is always guided to the V winning opening 1156, the machine lottery probability can be set at a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less.

For example, when 0.12 seconds is adopted as the short opening time when the total time allowed as the opening time during the small winning game is 1.8 seconds, the accessory winning opening 1155 is divided into 15 times. It can be opened for a short time. In this case, in view of the fact that every time the short opening appears, the two or three game balls that are waiting to win a prize enter the inner area of the prize winning port 1155 all at once, theoretically, Then, when the accessory winning opening 1155 is short-opened in 15 times, at least 30 game balls will win the accessory winning opening 1155 .

However, according to the regulation of the above-described small winning game, the tenth game ball is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 1224 before such opening control is completely extinguished. The small winning game is ended based on the detection. In this regard, in the above configuration, every time a short opening appears, the two or three game balls that are waiting to win a prize all enter the internal area of the prize winning port 1155 all at once. For example, it is difficult to imagine that only 10 game balls will always win before the end of the small winning game, and it is conceivable that overflow winning will occur and 11 or 12 game balls will win frequently. Therefore, during the small winning game in which such control is performed, the number of game balls exceeding 10 on average enters the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155, thereby causing the V winning opening 1156 to enter. Even if any game ball is always guided to , the machine lottery probability can be set at a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less.

[Various substrates]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of the main substrates 4000 includes a main control substrate 4100 that controls game operations (progress of the game), and a payout control substrate 4110 that controls the payout of game balls. In addition, the group of the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and an effect display device 1115 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of effect images.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the main control board 4100, which controls the progress of the game, has a main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor containing a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. , a main control I/O port 4100b as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e"). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as a "main control built-in ROM 4100d"), a main control built-in RAM 4100e, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), and a functions are also built in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first starting hole sensor 1190 that detects a game ball accepted into the first starting hole 1152, and a second starting hole sensor that detects a game ball accepted into the second starting hole 1153. 1191 and a detection signal from a general prize winning hole sensor 1180 that detects a game ball accepted to the general winning hole 1151 is input via the main control I/O port 4100b, or a gate sensor 1135 and a big winning hole sensor 1206. , the prize winning sensor 1224 and the specific sensor 1239 are inputted via the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I/O port 4100b.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g. It outputs a drive signal to the role item drive mechanism 3114, the attacker drive mechanism 2121 having the role item winning solenoid 1225 and the attacker solenoid 1204, the V winning solenoid 1232, the main control I/O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3040, and the function display 1st special symbol indicator 1185, 2nd special symbol indicator 1186, 1st special symbol memory indicator 1184, 2nd special symbol memory indicator 1187, normal symbol indicator 1189, normal symbol memory indicator via substrate 1114 1188, game state display 1183, and round display 1182.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I/O port 4100b. (The main control board 4100 and the peripheral control section 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100 a , which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control internal RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch 4100 c is also output to the payout control board 4110 .

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, a payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls includes a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout, a launch control by a launch solenoid 654, and a ball feed by a ball feed solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 that performs control, an error LED indicator 4130 that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator 4130, and a prize ball tank 720 , a tank rail 731, and a ball extraction switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball extraction operation.

[Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the payout control unit 4111, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 4110, is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. a payout control MPU 4111a, a payout control I/O port 4111b as an I/O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as "external WDT 4111c ), a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , is equipped with In the payout control MPU 4111a, in addition to its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), It also has built-in functions.

The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, and the ball out switch 750 , the detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the winning ball relay board 754 .

A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of game balls in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 is detected. A detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first inputted to the payout control input circuit 4111e through the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is inputted to the payout control MPU 4111a through the payout control I/O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection plate 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted through the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and then through the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

Detection signals from a door frame open switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and a main body frame open switch 619 for detecting opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first sent to the dispensing control input circuit. 4111e, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls is first transmitted to the handle device relay board 192 and then to the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the board 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I/O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED indicator. 4130 through the payout control I/O port 4111b to the error LED indicator 4130, or output a command to indicate the state of pachinko game 1 through the payout control I/O port 4111b. is sent to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, and the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 through the payout control I/O port 4111b. This external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED indicator 4130 is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it informs that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, "the ball is caught." (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 and game balls are engaged near the entrance, making it difficult for the payout rotating body 748 to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it is a "counting switch error" (specifically indicates that there is a problem with the counting sensor 751 based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number "5" is displayed, it is a "retry error" (specifically, When the number "6" is displayed, it is notified that the retry count of the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit value, and that the tank is "full" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). based on the detection signal of the foul cover unit 540 is full of game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, "CR is not connected" ( It informs that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "in stock" (specifically indicates that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending switch 365a and a prepaid card return request signal from the return switch 365b first pass through the ball lending unit board 366, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is input to the CR unit 6 via. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner. It is received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and transmits a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining degree indicator 365c to the CR unit connection terminal. The signals are output to the board 874, the main-side relay terminal board 880, and the ball rental unit board 366, and this signal is input to the remaining number indicator 365c.

[Launch control part]
A firing control unit 4120, which performs firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585, has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are inputted, as shown in FIG. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this launch. It has a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball-feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit 4120c generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 1100 per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, it generates a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

Detection signals from a touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle body 504, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal board 880, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit 4120a and to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. Signals from the rotational position detection sensor 512, which electrically adjusts the strength with which the game ball is struck toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the handle body 504, are sent first to the handle device relay board 192 and then to the main side relay terminal board 880. to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d.

This firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512, generates a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle body 504, by generating a firing reference pulse. is input to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, when the ball-feeding reference pulse is input, the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball-feeding solenoid 585 via the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192. By outputting, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 accepts one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current By stopping the output of , the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. controlled.

In addition, the power board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 has a capacitor BC1 as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off in the process at the time of power cutoff. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 .

[Peripheral control unit]
Peripheral control unit 4140, which performs performance control in the peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c is stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 4 The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the lamp driving board 3041, or the game board The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor that operates the various effect units provided in 4 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the motor attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3045 or for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, and each decoration board provided on the door frame 5 door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED, etc., and the door-side drive light-emission data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the peripheral panel. The control data (display command) indicating the screen to be transmitted to the door frame base substrate 194 via the relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, or to be displayed on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, is displayed on the liquid crystal display. In addition to transmitting from the serial I/O port for control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, it outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d to the sound source IC 4140c.

Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rotation of the dial operation portion 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressure operation portion 405 are detected by the door frame base substrate. 194, the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a also receives a signal (operation signal) from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that indicates that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. is doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided on the body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc., matched to various effects are played from the lower speaker 821, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base board 194 are connected to the door frame 5. The speakers 130 , 222 , 262 provided and the lower speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 are controlled so that music, sound effects, etc. are played in accordance with various presentations. By rotating a volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting backward from the peripheral control board box 1910, the volume can be adjusted.

Note that the peripheral control unit 4140 includes a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT”, not shown). WDT"), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses both the peripheral control internal WDT and the peripheral control external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed through a serial input/output port. ) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs initial data to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, and the movable body driving command. , and a display command through a plurality of serial input/output ports, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmit a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blinking command to the door frame through the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 . 5 provided in the LED of each decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., or a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blinking command It outputs to the LEDs of each decoration substrate 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, etc. provided on the game board 4. In addition, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmits a drive signal based on the received movable body drive command to the dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 . 414, drive motors 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508, etc. provided on the game board 4, and each solenoid.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that indicates that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, or receives a signal from the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are sent to the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It is input via a lamp drive board 3041 and a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the 3010 .

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and outputs the sound information to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral relay terminal board. 882 from the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5, or from the lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 through the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Then, control is performed so that music and sound effects, etc., are played in accordance with various performances. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged above the game window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 Sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal or a 4.1ch surround signal added with the lower speaker 391 described later, etc.) as sound information to the lower speaker 821 for bass. Therefore, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) that is more realistic than before.

[Measures to prevent abnormal noise]
The door frame 5 is equipped with equipment that requires electric power such as various audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, etc. A door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes the side speaker 130, the upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decorative units, and the lower speaker 821 (FIG. 67) in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 (FIG. It is connected to the bass speaker) (FIG. 89) and is connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided on the game board 4, and the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 is amplified and output to each speaker. It has an amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit).

In addition, on the door frame base board 194, wiring connecting various sound equipment, LEDs, sensors, etc. to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4010, etc. is bundled together and extended backward. It is designed to be connected to the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the body frame 3 (FIGS. 67 and 89). The rear side of the door frame base board 194 is covered with a door frame base board cover 195 (FIG. 23).

In addition, at the place (rear side) where the door frame base board cover 195 is arranged, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and the game balls fired by the batted ball launching device 650 enter the game area 1100. A foul cover unit 540 (transparent polycarbonate molding) for guiding game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided in close proximity (FIG. 23).

Since game balls (metal) pass through the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 at a high speed while contacting the wall surface of the passage, static electric charges are accumulated in the polycarbonate of this portion, and the voltage can be as high as 10 kV. (3-4 kV at most, even if the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge is painful). In addition, unlike metal, the electric charge accumulated in the resin can be discharged only in the vicinity thereof even if it is grounded, and most of it remains.

Electrostatic induction due to this charge may cause a malfunction of a digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the adjacent door frame base board 194 . In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time may be input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal may be excessively amplified by the digital amplifier circuit and exceed the appropriate amplification width (excessive AC voltage). Occur. In that case, for example, a broken sound such as a crackling sound is generated from the speaker, or the sound reproduced by the speaker becomes a loud unpleasant sound (abnormal sound is generated), which makes the player feel uncomfortable. will be felt. In addition, there is a possibility that the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Although the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cutting function on the input side, it usually does not on the output side.

Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is difficult to hear, there is a tendency to set the output to a large value.

The embodiment described below detects whether or not the audio signal output from the door frame base board 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-described abnormal audio signal, and if it is an abnormal audio signal, This invention relates to an abnormal audio signal blocking board (described later) that blocks abnormal audio signals from being input to the lower speaker 821 .

Regarding audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, it responds to these various commands. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 126).

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and transmits the sound information to the lower portion provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, the door frame base substrate 194, and the like. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. in accordance with various presentations are played from the speaker 821, the side speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, and the upper speakers 222, 262 (see FIGS. 126 and 127).

[Abnormal sound signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal audio signal blocking board will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. FIG. FIG. 127 is a block diagram of the door frame base board 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, and the lower speaker 821. As shown in FIG. FIG. 128 is a circuit diagram showing the circuitry of the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 127, the door frame base substrate 194 provided on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 3 are connected by wiring 196, and the door frame base substrate 194 is connected to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. To the side relay terminal board 882, a +24 V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer - signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base board 194, are output, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 through the wiring 196. It is designed to be transmitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127, in the body frame 3, an abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal The plate 882 and the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 are connected by a speaker protection harness 883 , and the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by a lower speaker harness 819 .

In FIG. 128, from the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, the ground GND, +24 V voltage, the woofer + signal which is the audio signal for the lower speaker 821 output from the door frame base board 194, and the woofer - The signal is relayed and transmitted to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 .

Also, the woofer + signal and woofer - signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, are output from the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 to the lower speaker 821, and supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. It is In this way, the sound signal output from the door frame base board 194 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 .

By the way, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 in the body frame 3 is a location that is less likely to be affected by static electricity noise. In this embodiment, an abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 is arranged at a location far away from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. In this way, by arranging the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 at a location that is less likely to be affected by static electricity noise, it is possible to stably prevent abnormal audio signals from being input to the lower speaker 821 .

[Circuit of Abnormal Sound Signal Blocking Board]
The abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 detects whether the audio signal supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal audio signal. It blocks the input of the audio signal to the lower speaker 821 .

As shown in FIG. 128, the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 includes an abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 that detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal. An abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895 is provided for blocking supply of an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 when receiving the outputted abnormality detection signal.

The +24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the +24V supply line 886 in the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 . Also, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 .

The woofer + signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two at the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, one of which is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other It is input to the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 .

In addition, the woofer signal, which is the audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two at the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, one of which is relayed in the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the woofer signal line 889. It is connected to an external lower speaker 821 through a lower speaker harness 819 . The other is input to the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 .

[Abnormal sound signal detection circuit]
The abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifier bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge configuration, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in this embodiment, 47 μF), a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are incorporated).

The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the other woofer + signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. . The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other of the two woofer signals is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

Furthermore, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifying bridge circuit. The cathode terminal of the diode SD2 is connected to a +voltage line 890 that supplies a positive voltage rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit to the subsequent stage, while the anode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the rectifying bridge circuit to the subsequent stage. A 0V line 891 is connected to supply 0V, the voltage of which is substantially 0V after the negative portion has been cut by the circuit.

In the latter stage of the rectifying bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the - terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

That is, the woofer + signal and woofer - signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit (a + voltage waveform in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0 V as the connection point) are electrolyzed through the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain, and during the period from the peak voltage of the + voltage waveform to 0 V The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 determine the time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

One end of a capacitor SC2 is connected to the +voltage line 890 after the connection point of the resistor SR1 on the +voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2 and also to the other end of the resistor SR3, one end of which is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage of the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Also, the capacitor SC2 removes ripples from the waveform of the positive voltage and smoothes the waveform.

A collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890 after the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, and a rectified and smoothed woofer signal, that is, a + voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. A resistor SR2 and a resistor SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. , the other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. One end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0V line 891. FIG.

That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 appearing based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

On the other hand, the anode terminal of a diode SD5 is connected to the +voltage line 890 after the connection point of the +voltage line 890 and the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal sound signal blocking circuit]
The abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895 is mainly composed of a phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, a transistor STR3, and a relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

In the abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one of which is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, and the other of which is connected to the 8th terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1. It is The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. A resistor SR8 and a resistor SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

A connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9 is connected to the base terminal of a transistor STR3 for relay operation, and to one end of a capacitor SC3 having the other end connected to the ground line 887 . The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

A fourth terminal (the other contact A) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground line 887 . Further, the 5th terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the 6th terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. It is connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the .

Furthermore, a varistor SZNR1 for bypassing the induced current due to self-induction is connected in parallel between the 8th terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1 and the 1st terminal (coil - input) of the relay SRL1. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1.

Since the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electrical noise does not directly enter the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 from the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885. It's like

Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 configured as above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal audio signal (an AC voltage waveform with different amplitude peaks) is input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, in the case of the woofer + signal, the diodes SD2 and SD3 become conductive, In FIG. 128, a current flows from top to bottom through the resistor SR1 to the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the positive voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain.

When a normal audio signal (an AC voltage waveform with different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage increase due to the charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage that operates the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and remains off.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

In the case of a woofer signal, the diodes SD1 and SD4 conduct, and in FIG. 128, the current flows through the resistor SR1 to the electrolytic capacitor SC1 from top to bottom, from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain. During this period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

When a normal audio signal (an AC voltage waveform with different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage rise due to the charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and remains off.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

Thus, when a normal audio signal (an AC voltage waveform with different amplitude peaks) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 remains off. Therefore, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 are also kept off, and the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 does not actually turn on.

<Abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895, the photocoupler SPC1 maintains the off state, so that the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state. Also, the relay SRL1 is in a non-operating state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in a non-excited state, the non-operating B contact (the contact is closed) between the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1, and the non-operating between the 3rd and 4th terminals. The contact is A (the contact is open). Therefore, the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 are in a conducting state, and the woofer+ signal on the woofer+ signal line 888 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 .

[When an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input] [Operation when an abnormal audio signal is input with a fixed DC voltage] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal with a fixed DC voltage (for example, a constant voltage of +24 V, +18 V, +1.5 V, etc.) is continuously input, in the rectifying bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 becomes conductive, charging current flows from top to bottom through resistor SR1 to electrolytic capacitor SC1 in FIG. 128, and electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

When an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises due to the increase in charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 over time. , and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, a current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistors SR2 and SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR2 and SR4) causes , the resistor SR5, the Zener diode SZD1, the resistor SR6, and the resistor SR7, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor STR2. This turns on the transistor STR2.

When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is pulled down to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting an abnormality detection signal. Diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the resistors SR8 and SR9. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, turning on the transistor STR3. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor SC3.

When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the No. 1 terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the terminal No. 1 is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is energized, and between the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 is the B contact (the contact is open) in the operating state, and between the 3rd and 4th terminals is the B contact in the operating state. It becomes the A contact (the contact is closed). Accordingly, the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 are switched to the cutoff state, and the woofer+ signal on the woofer+signal line 888 is cut off from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1. This cuts off the supply of the abnormal woofer+ signal through the lower speaker harness 819 to the lower speaker 821 .

Further, the 3rd and 4th terminals of the relay SRL1 are brought into conduction, the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is grounded. pulled down, turning off transistor STR3.

On the other hand, the 1st terminal of the relay connected in parallel with the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the 8th terminal, the 1st terminal, the 3rd terminal, the 4th terminal, and the ground line 887. The energized state of the coil is maintained by transitioning to the flowing conductive state. Therefore, the woofer+ signal remains cut off from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1.

In this way, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal (photocoupler turns on). When the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 receives the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photocoupler turns on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821. block the Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage to the speaker due to continuous application of a fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal sound is input, the energized state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the woofer + signal keeps the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 cut off. Ultimate safety measures are taken with the highest priority on preventing damage to the speaker. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal sound signal is identified by the staff, or when it is confirmed that the sound output is stopped, the operating state of the relay SRL1 is canceled by turning on the power of the gaming machine again. It is possible to return to a normal initial state by

[Operation when abnormal audio signal is input due to excessive AC voltage] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when the audio signal is extremely amplified and an excessive AC voltage exceeding the appropriate amplification width is input, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, Diode SD2 and diode SD3 become conductive, charging current flows through resistor SR1 to electrolytic capacitor SC1 from top to bottom in FIG. be done.

Further, for example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diodes SD1 and SD4 become conductive, the charging current flows through the resistor SR1 through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 from top to bottom in FIG. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period up to the peak voltage.

In this case, the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage of the normal audio signal. A charging current rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

Therefore, the charge stored in the + terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC1 through resistor SR1 rapidly increases. This rapid increase in charge causes the voltage at the + terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC1 to rise and reach the base terminal voltage that drives transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

The operation of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on is the same as the operation when the abnormal audio signal is input by the fixed DC voltage described above. Yes, and will be briefly explained.

Turning on the transistor STR1 turns on the transistor STR2, and turning on the transistor STR2 turns on the photocoupler SPC1. In the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on to turn on the transistor STR3, and when the transistor STR3 is turned on, the relay SRL1 is operated, and the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 are cut off. state and the woofer+ signal on woofer+ signal line 888 is cut off from terminal 6 of relay SRL1. This cuts off the supply of the abnormal woofer+ signal through the lower speaker harness 819 to the lower speaker 821 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the generation of abnormal sound due to an abnormal audio signal having an excessively amplified AC voltage that exceeds the appropriate amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unpleasant sounds from being emitted to the player.

[LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 126, the liquid crystal control unit 4150, which controls drawing of the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the peripheral control board 4010, includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that controls display of the above-described effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and a screen displayed on the effect display device 1115 and a character RAM 4150e to which the various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred and copied.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to 2 Controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 3252 . When liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to peripheral control unit 4140. FIG. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control board 4010, corresponding schedule data, and A plurality of nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display commands) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining screen configurations in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constructed by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. This non-resident area transfer data prescribes the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1115 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP 4150c. It extracts from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. In this manner, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1115 . When the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, it outputs an execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. Note that the VDP 4150c employs a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a method in which drawing data for one line drawn in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1115 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1115 or the like. This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252 .

The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the effect display device 1115 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored and affects the drawing speed on the effect display device 1115. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1115 . For example, when various characters are displayed on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, data for drawing each character is called a "sprite". As a result, a plurality of sprites are used when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 . In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. For these sprites, the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order") are set, and the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device are set. 3252 is rendered.

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". A small sprite can be expressed using one character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. be able to. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 sequentially set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and the main scanning that intersects with the one direction. and a sub-scan in which main scan is repeatedly performed in the direction to be driven. When drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the effect display device 1115 scans from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning. are sequentially output to the pixels of one line. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 move to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the next line is displayed. Based on the drawing data for one line, the data is sequentially output to the pixels for one line from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning.

[Control processing in the main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (especially the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 140. FIG. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 130 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when power failure occurs. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. Note that the timer interrupt processing is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG.

FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol control process. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the start-up winning process. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern setting processing. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during variation of special symbols. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol small winning game start processing. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol small winning game processing. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol jackpot game start processing. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol jackpot game processing.

[About main processing]
As for the main process, as shown in FIG. 129, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes power-on process (step S1). In this power-on processing, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (whether or not the set value is set when a power failure occurs). If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the CPU peripheral device settings (normal initialization) are executed according to the backup data stored in the RAM. settings, interrupt timing settings, etc.).

If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. Also, if the RAM clear switch 624a for instructing clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM is turned on during power-on processing, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. Also, in the power-on process, if backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and normal initial settings are performed.

In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has started up to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initial settings are executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the activation of the main control board 4100 and the progress of the game such as the game state at the time of power-off. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is restored. Power-on processing is executed when the supply is started.

When this power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process for repeatedly executing each game process. At the start of this loop process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted to a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board, and then each supplying the equipment. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board falls below a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure warning signal indicating that the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 will be stopped. sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects a power outage warning signal in step S2, the power failure processing is executed (step S4).

In this power failure processing, when the power supply voltage (24 V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board is restored after a power failure (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the game machine is restored to the state before the power failure. In order to start from , the state at the time of power failure is stored as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Although the details of the processing will be described later, in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure processing is not interrupt processing, but branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, if the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, if the power is normally supplied from the external power source, random number update processing 2 is performed to update various random numbers used in the game (step S3). The random numbers updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[Processing when power failure occurs]
Next, as shown in FIG. 130, the power-off occurrence process is a process that is executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. The main control MPU 4100a first performs interrupt prohibition settings so that interrupt processing is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure are retained when power is restored.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM to a specified value indicating that the power failure processing has been performed (step S4c). After completing the above processing, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for power supply stoppage. In addition, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a short-term power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as "momentary power failure"), and the power failure processing is started, Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, the above process may not be able to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined period of time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while processing is being performed normally, but when power failure occurs processing is entered, updating is not performed. As a result, even if an instantaneous power failure causes the power failure processing to occur and an infinite loop to occur, the reset is applied after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[Regarding timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing is performed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during execution of the main processing every 4 ms. After executing the register saving process (step S10), the control MPU 4100a executes the processes from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring detection signals of the above-described switches (gate switch, start sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 and the random number updated in the random number update process 2 are different. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of game balls is set in the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

In addition, in the special control process of step S14, the special symbol display devices 1185 and 1186 variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the progress of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker drive mechanism 2121 By controlling the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 and the large winning opening opening/closing member 1203) for opening and closing the accessory winning opening 1155 and the big winning opening 1154, and changing the opening/closing state of the accessory winning opening 1155 and the large winning opening 1154. process.

In step S15, a normal control process including a lottery process related to a normal hit, which triggers the operation of the starting door member (movable piece) 1214, is executed. In this normal control process, basically, corresponding processes are selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, after the end of the big win game state, when a specific condition (ON of the time saving flag) is satisfied, the variable display of normal symbols only for a predetermined period after the end of the big win game state. While shortening the time required for control, it is configured to execute the lottery process so as to allow the winning of the second start port 1153 by changing the driving mode of the start port door member 1214 (so-called time saving game situation). In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether it is in the time-saving game state or not, if normal determination is made, it is normally elected with a probability of 1/20 per hit, but when it is not in the time-saving game state When a normal hit is obtained (when a normal hit is obtained in the normal game state), the game ball T rolls on the upper surface of the start port door member 1214 as the operation time of the start port door member 1214. Basically, only a bridging time shorter than the winning threshold time required for moving and being accepted in the second start port 1153 is selected, while in the time-saving game state, when a normal win is obtained, As the operation time of the starting door member 1214, a bridging time longer than the winning threshold time is always selected. Therefore, basically, only when the player is in the time-saving gaming state, in the game area 1100, by hitting the game ball in the right side area of the center accessory 1130 (right hitting), the start entrance door member 1214 Each time is operated, the game ball T is entered into the second start port 1153 to start the big win game (big win, advantageous small win). (Second special design lottery).

In the subsequent output data setting process of step S16, the process of outputting a state signal indicating the game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (eg, management computer, etc.), outputting a drive signal to a special figure start memory display (not shown) process, etc. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control section 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processing from step S11 to step S17 is executed, the register restoration processing (step S18) is executed and the processing ends.

However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, whether or not the game ball is guided to the V winning opening 1156 in the small winning game is determined by the type of symbol at the time of winning the small winning. It is possible to judge whether or not a fraudulent act has been made by the type of the symbol. As a result, when it is determined that a fraudulent act has been performed, a signal indicating that fact is output to the outside (for example, a management computer, etc.) in the output data setting process of step S16. As control progresses, fraud management can be performed.

Various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will now be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, a random number for winning/losing determination used for determining whether or not to generate a big winning game state (also called a big winning determination or a big winning lottery), and a special symbol stop pattern are determined. symbol random number used for winning, reach random number used for determination (reach determination) as to whether or not to perform high-expectation performance such as reach performance when it is determined that there is no hit in the jackpot lottery, special symbol display device 1185 , 1186 to determine the variation pattern (variation time, etc.) of the special symbols displayed (variation time random number), determines the opening mode (number of rounds, etc.) of the big winning opening 1154 in the jackpot game. A random number for round determination used to determine whether or not to position the starting gate door member (movable piece) 1214 that can allow the winning of the second starting gate 1153 to the appearance position (state located at the front side position) There is a normal hit judgment random number used for judgment (normal judgment).

In addition, the pattern random number is used to determine the status type of the hit (small hit, big win) (such as whether to activate the time saving function) when it is determined that the win (small hit, big win) has been won are also provided. However, as will be described later, if a small win is won, a big win game will not occur unless the game ball T is received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 in the small win game corresponding to the small win (the condition device is activated do not do). That is, in this case, the next symbol variation is performed without the time saving function being activated.

Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, the random number for winning/losing determination, the symbol random number, the round determining random number, and the ordinary The random number for design hit determination is updated. That is, the random number used for determining whether or not to position the starter door member (movable piece) 1214 at the appearance position is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability of each random number in a predetermined period (probability of determining that a big win game state is generated, probability of determining that the starting door member (movable piece) 1214 is positioned at the appearance position) is constant. It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the occurrence of the jackpot game state and the reach random numbers and fluctuation random numbers that are not related to the normal determination are updated.

[Regarding special control processing]
Next, special control processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of special control processing.

In this special control process, first, the first/second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed. In this first/second starting hole winning process, judgment as to whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 1152 or the second starting hole 1153 is performed. Then, after the first and second starting opening winning process (step S110) is performed, a process corresponding to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from among a plurality of processes (steps S120 to S240) shown in the figure. will go to

More specifically, when the first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is finished, it is first determined whether the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 ( YES in step S120), the fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In this fluctuation start process (step S130), it is determined whether the process for the game on the side of the first special symbol side or the game on the second special symbol side is to proceed, and the big hit on the determined side After the setting for starting variable display of special symbols based on the result of the lottery is performed, the processing flag is updated to "1". In addition, the processing related to the game (first special symbol, second special symbol) determined in this way is performed in timer interrupt processing every 4 ms until the updated processing flag is returned to "0". It will be carried out on an ongoing basis.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140), a variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the special symbol (identification Design) fluctuation pattern (variation time from start of variable display of special design (identification design) to stop display in either the first special design display device 1185 or the second special design display device 1186) is determined After that, the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S160). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160), the during-fluctuation processing (step S170) is executed. In this process during fluctuation, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and a special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator 1185 or second special symbol) based on timeout Stop the variable display of the special symbol on the display 1186). After that, when it is determined that a big hit has been won in the variation start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to "5". On the other hand, when it is determined that a specific condition is established (a small win is won) although the player has lost the big win, the processing selection flag is updated to "3". However, when the big hit is lost and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss), the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process (step S130) is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S180). And as a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180), a small-hit game start process (step S190) for creating an interval period before starting a small-hit game is executed. In addition, when the interval period before starting the small-hit game has passed, the processing flag is updated to "4" in the small-hit game start processing.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S180 (NO in step S180), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S200). And, as a result, if the processing flag is 4 (YES in step S200), small hit game processing (step S210) is executed. In this small-hit game process, a small-hit game is performed by opening and closing (sliding) the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in a control mode corresponding to the type of the small winning. It is determined whether or not the game ball that has entered the internal area is distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 . As a result, in the first small winning game process, when it is determined that the game ball has been distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, the first processing flag is set to "5" to start the big winning game. Updated. However, if it is not determined that the game ball has been distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 within a predetermined time, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process (step S130) is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S200), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 5 (step S220). As a result, if the processing flag is 5 (YES in step S220), a jackpot game start processing (step S230) is executed. In this jackpot game start processing, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated, or the time saving function is stopped. After the preparation for starting the jackpot game is thus completed, the processing flag is updated to "6".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 in step S220 (NO in step S220), the processing flag is 6, and the jackpot game processing (step S240) is executed. In this jackpot game processing, a jackpot game mode (number of rounds, opening time, maximum winning number, etc.) for opening and closing the jackpot 1154 is set, and a jackpot opening/closing member 1203 is set based on the set jackpot game mode. is controlled. Further, when the jackpot game ends, the processing flag is updated to "0" after the processing for stopping the operation of the conditional device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process (step S130) is restarted.

In this way, when any one of the processes of steps S130, S150, S170, S190, S210, S230, and S240 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is terminated.

[Regarding the first and second starting gate winning process]
Next, the first/second start opening winning process (process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing an example of the first/second start opening winning process.

In this first and second starting hole winning process (step S110), roughly speaking, a process for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting hole 1152 or the second starting hole 1153; On the condition that it is determined that there was a ball entry, the process for updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), and the various random numbers obtained are read-ahead effects described later. , advanced performance, and so on are performed.

Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal has been output from the second start opening sensor 1191. FIG. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting hole sensor 1191, it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 1153 (YES in step S201), and then , the process of step S202 is performed. In the processing of this step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol (random number for the second winning/losing determination, second symbol random number, etc.) A determination is made as to whether the value of the two-hold counter is less than the upper limit of four. And as a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203), the hold history update process (step S204), and the second precedence determination process (step S209a) are sequentially performed. .

That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a, first, as the second start suspension storage process (step S203), various data (random number for the second win-lose determination, the second Two-symbol random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM 4100e) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as a hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e. Then, as the second precedent determination process (step S209a), the lottery is performed based on various random numbers provided for the big win lottery before the condition for executing the big win lottery held in the pending state is established. The results will be pre-determined.

In addition, in the process of step S203, a winning notification command indicating that a game ball has entered the second starting port 1153 (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of reservation, etc.) is set, The winning notification command set in this manner may be transmitted to the peripheral control section 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, when the effect display device 1115 or the like displays the second starting port 1153 side pending display, it can be quickly updated.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S201, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 1191 is not output, or in the processing of step S202, the value of the second holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined to be 4, next, as processing in step S205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been output from the first starting port sensor 1190 . As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting hole sensor 1190, it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 1152 (YES in step S205), and then , the process of step S206 is performed. In the processing of this step S206, various random numbers for the first special symbol (random number for first win-loss determination, first symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first pending number counter provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is less than 4, which is the upper limit. As a result, if the first suspension number counter is less than 4, the first start suspension storage process (step S207), the suspension history update process (step S208), and the first precedence determination process (step S209b) are sequentially performed. .

That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a, first, as the first start suspension storage process (step S207), various data (random number for first win-lose determination, first One symbol random number, etc.) is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM 4100e) while being associated with the type of special symbol and the order of reservation. Next, as a hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e. Then, as a first precedence determination process (step S209b), the lottery is performed based on various random numbers provided for the big win lottery before the conditions for executing the big win lottery held in the pending state are established. The results will be pre-determined.

Also in the process of step S207, a winning notification command indicating that a game ball has entered the first start port 1152 (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of reservation, etc.) is set, The winning notification command set in this manner may be transmitted to the peripheral control section 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). With such a configuration, through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, even when the pending display on the first start port 1152 side is displayed on the effect display device 1115 or the like, it can be quickly updated.

On the other hand, in the process of step S205, when it is determined that there is no winning of the game ball to the first start port 1152, in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first reservation number counter becomes the upper limit When it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first and second starting opening winning processing is terminated at this point.

In addition, in this embodiment, after executing the winning process (steps S201 to S204) to the second starting port 1153, the winning process to the first starting port 1152 (steps S205 to S208) is executed. there is However, instead of this, the winning process for the second starting port 1153 may be executed after the winning processing for the first starting port 1152 is executed.

Here, the second precedence determination process (step S209a) and the first precedence determination process (S209b) will be described in detail. Hereinafter, the term "precedence determination processing" means the second precedence determination process (step S209a) and the first precedence determination process (S209b).

In this precedence determination process, as described above, the result of the lottery is determined in advance based on various random numbers provided for the big win lottery before the conditions for executing the big win lottery held in the pending state are established. things are done.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses the random numbers for winning/losing judgment (first random number for winning/losing judgment, second random number for winning/losing judgment), It is determined whether or not the value is the same as the big win determination value indicating that the big win has been won in the big win lottery, the second big win lottery. As a result, if the value is the same as the jackpot determination value and indicates that the jackpot has been won, the next process is to select a variation pattern table at the time of the jackpot, select the variation pattern table and the variation random number. By comparing (first random variation, second random variation), the peripheral control board 4010 is informed which variation pattern is to be determined when determining the variation pattern at the time of a big hit described later. Set the command for prior determination of fluctuation pattern to be notified in advance. Then, using the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), peripheral control board 4010 determines which type will be determined when the value determines the type of jackpot described later. A type precedence determination time command to be notified in advance to is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the random number for the hit/lose judgment (random number for the first hit/lose judgment, random number for the second hit/lose judgment) is different from the above-mentioned big hit judgment value, the next process will be a small hit. It is determined whether or not the value is the same as the small hit determination value indicating the winning. As a result, if it is the same value as the small hit determination value and indicates that the small hit has been won, the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit is selected as the next process, and the selected variation pattern table By comparing the variation random number (first variation random number, second variation random number), the peripheral control board determines which variation pattern will be determined when determining the variation pattern at the time of the small hit described later. 4010 is notified in advance to set the command at the time of preceding determination of the variation pattern. Then, using the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), the peripheral control board determines which type will be determined when determining the type of small hit described later. 4010 is set a command at the time of prior determination of type to be notified in advance.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit/lose judgment random number (first hit/lose judgment random number, second hit/lose judgment random number) is different from the above big hit judgment value or the above small hit judgment value, the following will be done. As a process, select the fluctuation pattern table at the time of losing (including losing without executing the reach effect), and compare the selected fluctuation pattern table with the fluctuation random number (first fluctuation random number, second fluctuation random number). By, the peripheral control board 4010 is notified in advance which variation pattern will be determined when determining the variation pattern at the time of losing (including losing without executing the ready-to-win effect), which will be described later. Set the command for precedence determination. In this case, the main control MPU 4100a uses reach random numbers (first reach random number, second reach random number) to determine whether it is a reach loss described later or a loss without reach, and then determines whether it is a loss without reach. Based on the result, select a fluctuation pattern table at the time of losing or at the time of reach losing, and compare the selected fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation random number (first fluctuation random number, second fluctuation random number), At the time of loss described later Alternatively, it may be determined which variation pattern is to be determined when determining the variation pattern at the time of reach loss.

After that, the main control MPU 4100a holds the updated jackpot lottery holding number (holding number counter value) together with the type of the special symbol by various random numbers provided for the preceding determination process. Performs processing to set the command at the time of precedence determination. It should be noted that the variation pattern precedence determination time command, the type precedence determination time command, and the hold precedence determination time command set in this way are transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission processing (step S17) shown in FIG. The Rukoto.

That is, as described above, these commands (variation pattern precedence determination command, type precedence determination command, reservation precedence determination command) are transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140, so that the peripheral control unit 4140 side control With this, it is possible to make the look-ahead effect and the forward-moving effect described later appear.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the lottery (second special symbol lottery) on the side of the second start port 1153, it is certain that the game can be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. It is as described above that this is made to function as processing.

In this regard, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery (second special pattern lottery) on the side of the second start port 1153, the type (type of whether or not the time-saving gaming state occurs) is definitely shown in advance. You can also think of something like this. However, in this case, when the lottery (second special symbol lottery) that generates the time-saving gaming state is in the order of the reservation that is digested the latest, it is possible to dare not cause a new reservation. In other words, in this case, when the above-mentioned special game features are provided, it becomes possible to intentionally cause double-additional games and super-additional games, and there is a concern that the load on the hall side will be excessive. be.

Therefore, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, even if the type of the small hit is determined in advance, the same value is used regardless of the type for the type of the determined small hit. By setting this for the hour command, it is made difficult for the peripheral control unit 4140 to grasp this.

On the other hand, the peripheral control unit 4140, based on the pending precedence determination command, as to whether the information obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be grasped. , which is a small hit based on the first special symbol lottery (any one of the first disadvantageous small win, the second disadvantageous small win, and the first advantageous small win), or based on the second special symbol lottery Rough types such as whether it is a small hit (second advantageous small hit, third advantageous small hit) are grasped in advance (see FIG. 141). In this way, the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this embodiment can grasp the types of small wins to some extent, but operates on various processing programs constructed so as to be difficult to grasp deterministically. It's becoming

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the big win in the first special symbol lottery is shown in advance, the first big win can be achieved without using the information on the symbol random number (command at the time of type precedence determination). can be grasped in advance (see FIG. 141), and when the big hit in the second special pattern lottery is indicated in advance, the second big hit can be achieved without using the information on the pattern random number (command at the time of type precedence determination). can be grasped in advance (see FIG. 141).

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the contents of the precedence determination table are the same as the contents of the table used for the lottery. However, at least part of the contents of the precedence determination table may differ from the contents of the table used for the lottery.

[Regarding fluctuation start processing]
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of the fluctuation start process.

In the fluctuation start process (step S130) that is executed when the process flag is "0", the main control MPU 4100a first calculates the values of two pending number counters (first start It is determined whether or not both the number of memories and the number of second starting memories are "0" (step S301). Here, the values in the two holding number counters corresponding to the special symbol memory display devices 1184 and 1187 are the holding number of the first special symbol side game (lottery) and the second special symbol side game (lottery) holding. numbers and numbers, respectively. Therefore, if the value of the number of reservations counter is all "0" in this step S301 (YES), it is determined that neither of the starting conditions regarding the first big win lottery and the second big win lottery is established, and the interrupt is executed. The fluctuation start process within the process is temporarily terminated. That is, in this case, every time the above-mentioned interrupt processing is performed, in the processing of step S301, whether there is a game (lottery) on the first special symbol side or a game (lottery) on the second special symbol side in the pending state Until it is determined whether or not it is determined, and until it is determined that the lottery processing of any special symbol is in a pending state, the progress of the special symbol game is substantially in a standby state. It will happen.

On the other hand, if neither the first start memory number nor the second start memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), in order to update the order of execution of the special symbol side big hit lottery to be processed, Shift processing is performed in the first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (step S302 to step S310).

In addition, in the first special symbol reservation storage area, the random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol (for example, the first winning judgment random number, the first symbol random number, the first reach random number, the first fluctuation random number) The second special symbol reservation storage area contains a random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol (for example, the second winning judgment random number, the second symbol random number, the second reach random number , second random numbers) are stored based on their pending order.

The main control MPU 4100a is stored in the special symbol holding storage area on the side to be processed as a shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol holding storage area) when the special symbol changes. Random numbers are manipulated as appropriate. That is, as will be described later, the random numbers read out in this way are used not only for the processing related to the lottery for the big win, but also for the processing related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbols, the opening and closing of the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 and the big winning opening opening and closing member 1203. Processing related to mode setting, processing related to game state setting, etc. are provided, so that the start game triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153 can proceed. become.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the lottery (second special symbol lottery) on the side of the second starting port 1153 can be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. It is assumed that this function is performed as an accurate process.

In this regard, in the shift processing (step S302 to step S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol reservation storage area), the execution of the lottery of the first special symbol is always postponed, and a jackpot game occurs with a probability of about 100%. In the random number storage area (special symbol reservation storage area) so that the lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) based on the winning of the second start port 1153, which allows the game to be played as possible, is all digested first. is used to manipulate the stored random numbers. As a result, every time the lottery is digested, a big hit game can be generated until the number of reservations (special playability).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 134, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, it corresponds to the second special symbol that is preferentially digested. It is determined whether or not the value of the pending number counter (second start memory number) is "0". And as a result, when it is determined that the value of the pending number counter corresponding to the second special symbol which is preferentially digested is not "0" (NO in step S302), as the processing of step S303, the above Among the storage areas of the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, the random number group stored in the first storage area (for example, the second winning judgment random number, the second symbol random number, the second reach random number , second random number) is read from the same RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S304, a random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in each storage area of the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is first-in first-out (First-In First- Out).

More specifically, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurred is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, the main control MPU 4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" so as to indicate that the second special symbol side game is in progress (step S305). Further, in order to update the number of reservations (fluctuation) on the side of the second special design, the number of reservations counter corresponding to the second special design is subtracted by "1" (step S306). In addition, for the special symbol variation flag set to "1" in this way, after the end of the variation start process, the type of special symbol on the side to be processed by being confirmed each time an interrupt process is performed (Here, the second special symbol) can be recognized, and is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134, in the process of step S302, it is determined that the value of the pending number counter corresponding to the second special symbol, which is preferentially digested, is "0". If so (YES in step S302), as the process of step S307, the random number group stored in the first storage area among the storage areas of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (for example , first hit/lose determination random number, first symbol random number, first reach random number, first fluctuation random number) are read from the same RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S308, a random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is first-in first-out (First-In First- Out).

More specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurred is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, the main control MPU 4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "2" so as to indicate that the game on the first special symbol side is in progress (step S308). Further, in order to update the number of reserves for the lottery (fluctuation) on the side of the first special design, "1" is subtracted from the reserve number counter corresponding to the first special design (step S310). In addition, for the special symbol variation flag set to "2" in this way, after the end of the variation start process, the type of special symbol to be processed by checking each time an interrupt process is performed (Here, the first special symbol) can be recognized, and is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0".

When the shift processing (step S302 to step S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol reservation storage area) is completed in this way, the special symbol lottery on the side indicated by the special symbol variation flag (the acquired A lottery process for winning based on random numbers for winning and losing judgments) is performed. Various types of information determined in the process of step S311 are stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, etc., and are used for subsequent game judgments.

Here, in the special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141(a), regardless of the game state (normal game state, time-saving game state), it is a big hit based on one hit determination table. A determination process is performed as to whether it is a small hit, a reach loss, or a loss without a reach.

More specifically, among the hit determination tables referred to for comparison with the random number for hit/lose determination, the table on the side of the first special symbol has a , 3 types of values match the big win determination value indicating that the big win has been won, 7 types of values match the small win determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and 1190 types of values are the above loss. 1200 types of values that can be acquired as the first win-lose determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that. According to such a configuration, regardless of the game state (normal game state, time-saving game state), the probability of obtaining a big hit as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol is set as 1/400. The probability of obtaining a small hit as a result of the lottery of special symbols is set at approximately 1/171.

In addition, if the value obtained as the first hit-or-loss determination random number is a loss, it is further determined whether it is a reach loss or a loss without reach based on the value of the first reach random number obtained above. .

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the types of jackpots are:
・Although the jackpot game is progressed under the short opening control (big prize winning port 1154) such that a large amount of prizes cannot be won in any of the round games repeated over 15 times, the jackpot game is not executed. After that, the first jackpot, which is a type that always generates a time-saving gaming state, and the opening control (big winning port 1154) that makes it possible to win a large amount of prizes in all of the round games that are repeated over 15 times. A second big win, which is a type that always causes a time-saving game state after the big win game is executed, is prepared.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the types of small wins,
・Among the disadvantageous small hits that open the accessory prize winning opening 1155 in a manner that cannot be assigned to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, the time required for executing the small winning game is relatively short. The first disadvantage small hit, which is the type adopted,
・At the winning timing of the game ball when opening the accessory winning opening 1155, among the disadvantageous small hits that open the accessory winning opening 1155 in a manner that cannot be assigned to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 Using the above-described configuration that makes it difficult for variations to occur, the second disadvantageous small hit that is the type of opening the accessory winning opening 1155 multiple times while it is predetermined to be guided to the losing hole 1230c,
・Among the advantageous small hits, which are types in which the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened at the timing when the game ball that has already been launched and is waiting to win a prize is guided to the V winning opening 1156, During the period from the stop of the pattern to the midway stage after the predetermined time has passed, variation occurs in the winning timing of the game balls when opening the accessory winning opening 1155, in the same manner as (or approximately) in the case of the second disadvantageous small winning. Using the above-described configuration that makes it difficult, it is a type in which the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened a plurality of times while it is predetermined to be guided to the losing hole 1230c, and after a predetermined time has passed since the symbol stop When the ball is distributed to the V winning port (specific area) 1156, the first advantage small win, which is the type that gives the same privilege as when the first big win is won, and is already fired and waits for winning. 124(a), the rotating body 1236 operates as shown in FIG. While the state is maintained, the short opening operation by the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is performed a plurality of times, and while such short opening operation is performed, the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 2nd advantage small hit, which is the type that gives the same privilege as when the second big win is won, when it is distributed to the above-mentioned second big win. 124(a), while the rotator 1236 is maintained in the operating state shown in FIG. 124(a), The short opening operation by the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is performed a plurality of times, and when distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 while such short opening operation is performed, it is repeated 15 times. After progressing the jackpot game under the open control (big prize winning port 1154) that allows a large amount of prizes to be won in all the round games that are played, the third advantage that is the type that generates the normal game state We are planning to prepare a small prize.

Then, in the first special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 141(b), when a big win is obtained as a result, the first big win (obtained in the big win game) is obtained regardless of the value of the acquired symbol random number. Although the number of possible prizes is smaller than that of the second big win, only the 15R time-saving big win, which is always controlled to the time-saving game state after the big win game is played, is determined as its type.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 141(c), when a small hit is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the first disadvantageous small hit, Either the second disadvantageous small win or the first advantageous small win is determined.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a small win is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the big win is even lower ((7/1200)×( Although it is 20/1000)), it is designed to have the possibility of determining an advantageous small win as its type. Therefore, even when the small winning game on the side of the first special symbol is performed, the possibility that the big winning game may occur is left, so that the accessory in the small winning game on the side of the first special symbol To urge a player to win a prize to the accessory prize winning port 1155 each time the prize winning port 1155 is opened, and to make the player expect to be controlled to shift to a time-saving game state after the big win game is performed. will be able to

In particular, in the small win game when the first disadvantageous small win is obtained, it is immediately recognized that the advantageous small win was not obtained, while the second disadvantageous small win is obtained. In the small winning game, the possibility of obtaining an advantageous small winning can be expected according to the opening mode, so that the execution processing of the small winning game itself can be made to function as an expectation performance. become.

Further, in the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, only the first advantageous small win can be determined as an advantageous small win. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a big win (first big win) is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, and when an advantageous small win (first advantageous small win) is obtained. A time-saving game state is always generated for a predetermined period (for example, a period until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times) after the big win game is executed, regardless of whether the big win game is executed or not. You will be able to

On the other hand, in the table on the second special symbol side, as shown in FIG. 141(a), three types of values among the 1200 types of values that can be obtained as the second random numbers for judging winning have won the jackpot. , and 1197 kinds of values match the small-hit judgment value showing that the small-hit has been won. According to such a configuration, regardless of the game state (normal game state, time-saving game state), the probability of obtaining a big hit as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol is set as 1/400. The probability of obtaining a small hit as a result of the special symbol lottery is set to 399/400.

However, if the probability of getting a small hit as a result of the second special symbol lottery is set to about 100%, the second special symbol side lottery may also result in a loss. You can have a little bit of it. That is, in this case, if the value obtained as the second hit-or-loss determination random number is a loss, it is further determined whether it is a reach loss based on the value of the second reach random number obtained above or a loss without reach. to decide.

Also, in the second special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 141(b), when a big hit is obtained as a result, only the second big hit is the type regardless of the value of the symbol random number obtained above. Let it be decided.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), in the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit referred to when the small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, the symbol random number (second symbol Of the 1000 types of values that can be acquired as random numbers), 500 types of values are judgment values indicating that the second advantageous small win (small win that generates a time-saving game state after the big win game is played) has been won. Acquired as the second symbol random number so that it matches the judgment value indicating that the 500 types of values match the third advantageous small win (small win that does not generate a time-saving game state after the big win game is played). 1000 possible values are associated with each.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a big hit game occurs according to the result of the first special symbol lottery side, although a large amount of prizes cannot be obtained, the time-saving gaming state is always maintained. will occur. On the other hand, if a big hit game occurs according to the result of the second special symbol lottery (winning process), it is possible to win a large amount of prizes, but the probability of occurrence of a time-saving gaming state (second big win , second advantage small hit) is set with a probability value slightly exceeding 50%.

In addition, as described above, when the above-mentioned disadvantageous small win is determined as the type of small win, even if the game ball wins the role prize winning port 1155, none of these game balls enter the V winning prize port (specific area) 1156 A disadvantageous small-hit game is performed in which the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 is opened/closed so as not to be distributed. On the other hand, when the advantageous small win is determined as the type of the small win, the accessory is guided to the V winning port 1156 at the timing when the game ball which has already been shot and is waiting for the prize is guided. An advantage small winning game is performed by opening the winning opening 1155.例文帳に追加

Therefore, when the above-mentioned disadvantageous small win is determined as the type of small win, although a small winning game in which an opportunity to win a prize is given by opening the accessory winning opening 1155 is performed, the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 is executed. In a broad sense, it can be classified as one type of loss because the game ball is not accepted in the middle and a big hit game is not generated. Therefore, including such a disadvantageous small win, the lottery result that does not have the possibility of generating a big win game (or a big win game with a probability even lower than the probability of winning a big win set to an extremely low probability) A lottery result that cannot be generated may be collectively referred to as "failure".

On the other hand, when the above advantageous small win is determined as the type of small win, it is based on a mechanical lottery related to the allocation of game balls between the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 and the general area (losing area). Although a small hit game is performed, it is substantially executed as a game in which game balls are distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 to generate a big hit game. In a sense, it can be said that there are some that can be classified as one type of jackpot. Therefore, if the game is properly progressed (for example, 100 game balls are hit to the right in sequence in one minute) including such an advantageous small hit, a lottery result that generates a big win game. (Or, if the game is properly progressed, the lottery result of generating a jackpot game with a probability exceeding 1/2 (the probability of generating a jackpot game is higher)) is collectively referred to as "winning". You may do so.

Then, when the special symbol lottery on the side indicated by the special symbol variation flag (step S311) is performed in this way, the process of step S312 next includes a flag indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery. A pattern information command indicating the result (including the type when a big hit or a small hit is obtained) is set respectively. After that, as the processing of step S313, this processing ends when the processing flag is updated to "1" so as to proceed to the variation pattern setting processing (step S150).

It should be noted that the result of the special symbol lottery obtained in this fluctuation start process (including the type of special symbol to be processed) is shown in FIG. 131 as the symbol information command set in the process of step S312. It will be transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17).

[Regarding fluctuation pattern setting processing]
Next, a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of special symbols based on the result of the special symbol lottery (step S311) will be described. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process.

In the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is "1", as shown in FIG. is set (YES in step S401), a variation pattern table for the big hit corresponding to the gaming state is selected (step S402), and if a flag indicating that a small hit is won is set (step S403 YES), select the variation pattern table at the time of small hit according to the game state (step S404), and if the reach flag is set (YES at step S405), select the variation pattern table at the time of reach (step S406), in the case of a flag state indicating a loss that is neither a big win, a small win, or a reach loss, that is, in the case of a normal loss (a loss that does not execute a reach effect) (NO in step S405), A variation pattern table at the time of losing is selected (step S407).

Then, the variation pattern is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number (first variation random number or second variation random number) obtained in the variation start process (step S130) (step S408), A special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator 1185 or second special symbol indicator) on the side to be processed by setting a variation pattern command that notifies the peripheral control board 4010 to start the determined variation pattern 1186) starts the variable display of the special symbols displayed (step S409). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variable time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variable timer (step S410). As a result, variation control is performed by the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 1185 or second special symbol display device 1186) and the effect display device 1115 only for the variation time thus determined. After that, as the process of step S411, this process ends when the process flag is updated to "2" so as to shift to the process during fluctuation (step S170a).

The variation pattern set in this variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 131 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S409. . As a result, in the effect display device 1115, the result of the big win lottery is displayed based on the variation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the pattern information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. A display effect will be performed.

By the way, in the variation pattern setting process according to this embodiment, among the big hit variation pattern tables used in the process of step S402, the table on the first special symbol side, when in the normal game state In the normal jackpot variation pattern table used, a plurality of variation patterns (variation time) for enlivening the display performance in the performance display device 1115 are stored in cooperation with the reach-losing variation pattern table. That is, in cooperation with the reach-losing variation pattern table, the above-mentioned "winning" expectation is made different for each of these variation patterns, and in the process of step S408a, one of these variation patterns is selected. will be determined

Also, in the variation pattern setting process according to this embodiment, among the small hit variation pattern tables used in the process of step S404, the table on the first special symbol side, when in the normal game state In the small hit variation pattern table used in normal times, the first advantageous small hit is obtained regardless of the type of small hit (first disadvantageous small hit, second disadvantageous small hit, first advantageous small hit) It is designed to cause a specific production pattern to be expected.

According to such a configuration, when a small win is obtained as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal game state, regardless of the type, the display performance with the specific performance pattern is terminated. After that, it is possible to prompt the player to hit right so that the game ball enters the accessory prize-winning opening 1155.例文帳に追加However, when a small win game corresponding to the winning of the first disadvantageous small win is performed, it will be immediately recognized as "lost" from the opening mode. On the other hand, when the small winning game corresponding to the winning of the second disadvantageous small winning is performed, the execution processing of the small winning game itself functions as an expected performance during the period from the stop of the pattern to the midway stage after the predetermined time has passed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the expectation of "winning" for a long time.

[Regarding processing during fluctuation]
Next, the process during fluctuation (step S170) executed when the process flag is "2" will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process during fluctuation.

When the processing flag indicates that the processing during fluctuation (step S170) should be performed, as shown in FIG. 136, first, as the processing of step S501, It is determined whether or not the variable timer set in step S410 has reached 0, that is, whether or not the set variable time has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the variable timer is not 0, that is, the set variable time has not elapsed (NO in step S501), step As the process of S531, 1 is subtracted from the variable timer.

As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S501 that the variable timer has reached 0, that is, the set variable time has elapsed, the processing of steps S502 and S503 is performed. As a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 1185 or second special symbol display device 1186) to perform display control for ending the variable display, and decoration according to the stop symbol of the special symbol on the side to be processed by the effect display device 1115 A confirmation stop command for instructing derivation display of the symbol display result is set as a command to the peripheral control section 4140 . The fixed stop command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control section 4140 by the command transmission processing (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the effect display device 1115, the result of the effect in the same display effect is determined and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control section 4140 side.

After performing the processing related to the symbol stop in this way, this processing is terminated at the time when various kinds of processing according to the result of the special symbol lottery are executed.

For example, first, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win (YES in step S504), this process is terminated at the time when the processing flag is updated to "5" to start the big win game (step S506). .

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, this process is terminated when the processing flag is updated to "3" to start a small win game (step S513).

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S504 and NO in step S511), it is first determined whether or not the time saving function is operating (step S521). Then, when the time saving function is operating, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbols digested while the time saving function is operating has reached a predetermined upper limit (step S522). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols digested while the time saving function is operating reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), the time saving function is regarded as having met the conditions for terminating the time saving gaming state. is stopped (step S523). Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, the processing flag is updated to "0" assuming that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped so as to indicate that it is lost (step S524 ) and terminate this process. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the special symbols will be performed on condition that the processing of step S301 is suspended and digested.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the winning process (lottery on the side of the second special symbol) that allows the game to occur with a probability of about 100% ) can be put on hold relatively easily. Therefore, usually, the time-saving game state is terminated by immediately obtaining "winning (second advantageous small win or third advantageous small win)" and generating a big hit game on the side of the second special symbol. It can be said that it is almost impossible event that the time saving game state is terminated when the number of fluctuations of the digested special symbols reaches the predetermined upper limit value (100 times).

[Regarding small winning game start processing]
Next, the small hit game start process (step S190) executed when the process flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing an example of a small winning game start process.

As shown in FIG. 137, in the small-hit game start process (step S190), the main control MPU 4100a, first, as the process of step S601, the timer for timing the interval before the start of the small-hit game (small-hit start interval timer ) is in a set state. As a result, when the small hit start interval timer has not been set yet, in order to start the interval before the start of the small hit game, as the processing of steps S602 and S603, the small hit start interval timer is set and the small hit start interval timer is set. Set hit interval start command.

Then, as the process of step S604, when the rotation of the rotator 1236 provided in the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 is controlled, this process is temporarily terminated. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the lottery of the special symbols, a fixed value is always set after the fluctuation of the special symbols ends (the stop symbol appears). Control is performed so that movement (a constant rotation mode) appears in the rotating body 1236 . Therefore, in the processing of this step S604, the control structure is such that an execution opportunity is provided each time the small winning game start processing (step S190) is performed, and each time the execution opportunity is provided, the special symbols change. is completed (stop symbol appears), the movement corresponding to the elapsed time (for example, the value of the small hit start interval timer) is controlled to appear on the rotating body 1236.

Incidentally, the small hit interval start command set in the process of step S603 is transmitted to the peripheral control section 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect during the interval before the start of the small winning game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

Then, after the small hit start interval timer is set in this way, every time the interrupt processing is performed, it is determined that the small hit start interval timer has been set in the processing of step S601, and the following In the process of step S611, the small hit start interval timer is 0, ie, it is determined whether or not the time set as the interval before the start of the small hit game has passed. And, in the process of step S611, as long as the small hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the small hit game has not passed (NO in step S611). , Each time the small-hit game start process (step S190) is performed, the small-hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621.

However, even though the small hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 by the process of step S621, the opportunity to execute the process of step S604 is given each time, and the fluctuation of the special symbol ends. Movement corresponding to the elapsed time (for example, the value of the small hit start interval timer) after (appearance of the stop symbol) appears on the rotating body 1236 each time. As will be described later, the movement (driving control) of such a rotating body 1236 is performed continuously in a form that is taken over within the small-hit game process even after the small-hit game start process ends. A fixed movement (fixed turning mode) always appears on the rotating body 1236 after the fluctuation of the pattern ends (a stop pattern appears).

As a result of such processing, in the processing of step S611, it is determined that the small winning start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the small winning game has elapsed. When this happens, the processing flag is updated to "4" in order to execute a small winning game (step S612), and when the rotating body 1236 is controlled (step S604), this processing ends.

It should be noted that the time length of the small hit start interval timer can be set according to the type of the small hit symbol (the type determined by the symbol random number).

[Regarding small winning game processing]
Next, the small hit game process (step S210) executed when the process flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing an example of a small winning game process.

As shown in FIG. 138, in the small-hit game process (step S210), the main control MPU 4100a is in a state where the control for executing the small-hit game is already in progress as the process of step S701. It is determined whether or not the small winning game execution flag indicating is in the ON state. And as a result, when the small hit game execution flag is not in the ON state, in order to start the control related to the execution of the small hit game, as the processing of step S702, the type of small hit (first advantage small hit, second advantage An opening pattern corresponding to a minor win, a third advantageous minor winning, a first disadvantageous minor winning, and a second disadvantageous minor winning, and an opening timer for measuring the time required for executing control related to the opening pattern are set respectively. Next, as the processing of steps S703 and S704, the small winning game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the small winning game is already in progress is operated to the ON state, and the small winning start command is set. do. Then, as the process of step S705, when the drive control of the rotating body 1236 is performed, this process is temporarily terminated.

In addition, as described above, the drive control of the rotating body 1236 (step S705) is executed in such a way that the control content (step S604) in the small winning game start process is inherited as it is, and the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed. Based on the elapsed time from the end (appearance of the stop symbol), control for operating the rotating body 1236 is performed. As a result, the rotation body 1236 always appears in a constant motion (a constant rotation mode) after the special symbol has finished changing (a stop symbol appears).

After the small-hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the small-hit game is already in progress in the processing of step S701 each time the interrupt process is performed. Thus, in the process of step S711, it is determined whether or not the accessory closing flag indicating that the closing condition of the accessory winning opening 1155 is satisfied is turned on. If it is not in the ON state, it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the prize winning opening 1155 are satisfied in the processing of steps S712 and S713.

Here, in the process of step S712, it is determined whether or not the opening timer is 0, ie, the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game has reached a predetermined upper limit time. , in the process of step S713, whether or not the total number of game balls that have won the prize winning opening 1155 during the period of the small winning game has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 10). judgment is made.

As a result of these processes, if it is determined that the open timer is not yet 0 and the total number of winning prizes has not reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 10), first, as the process of step S714 , the control corresponding to the set opening pattern is executed. As a result, unless the conditions for closing the accessory winning opening 1155 are satisfied, each time the above-described interrupt processing is performed (every 4 ms), the opening/closing movement (sliding operation) of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 is performed through the processing of step S714. ) will be updated (managed), and depending on the type of small win (first advantageous small win, second advantageous small win, third advantageous small win, first disadvantageous small win, second disadvantageous small win) With this opening pattern, a small winning game is realized in which the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 opens and closes. The details of the opening pattern according to the type of small win (first advantageous small win, second advantageous small win, third advantageous small win, first disadvantageous small win, second disadvantageous small win) will be described later. do.

After the control corresponding to the opening pattern is executed in this way, as the process of step S715, whether or not the specific sensor 1239 for detecting that the game ball has been received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 has turned on. to judge. As a result, when it is determined that the game ball has been received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 (the specific sensor 1239 is ON), as the process of step S716, the V winning opening ( The V history flag indicating that there was acceptance to the specific area) 1156 is turned on. Next, as the process of step S705, when the drive control of the rotating body 1236 is performed, this process is temporarily terminated.

If it is determined in the process of step S715 that the specific sensor 1239 is not turned on, the drive control of the rotor 1236 is executed as the process of step S705 without turning on the V history flag. , the process is once terminated.

Such processing (steps S714 to S716, S705) is performed each time the above-described interrupt processing is performed unless the closing conditions (steps S712, S713) of the accessory winning opening 1155 are satisfied. It is possible to provide a game aiming at an opportunity for the specific sensor 1239 to turn on while updating (managing) the movement of opening and closing of the member 1221 and the movement of rotation of the rotating body 1236 each time.

Then, as a result of repeating such processing (steps S714 to S716, S705), in the processing of step S712, the opening timer is 0, that is, the elapsed time since the start of the small winning game is predetermined. It is determined that the upper limit time has been reached, or in the process of step S713, the total number of game balls that have won the prize winning opening 1155 during the period of the small winning game is a predetermined upper limit (here , 10), it is determined that the condition for closing the prize winning port 1155 is satisfied, and each process (step S721 to step S723) for closing the prize winning port 1155 is performed. Become.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first performs control to close the accessory winning opening 1155 by closing the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 as the process of step S721. Next, as the processing of steps S722 and S723, a post-closure interval timer for measuring the time after the accessory winning opening 1155 is closed is set, and it is determined that the closing condition of the accessory winning opening 1155 is satisfied. Operate the shown accessory closing flag to the ON state. As a result, new game balls will not enter the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155 in the small winning game process.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when there is a game ball heading for the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 while the small winning game is being performed, the winning opening 1155 The game ball is held at a position where it cannot be received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 until the closing condition is established, and the holding is released after the closing condition of the accessory winning opening 1155 is established. By doing so, it has a control (steps S604, 705) and a structure (see FIG. 120) for allowing the game ball to be received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156. FIG.

Therefore, the post-closure interval timer is set with a time longer than the time required for the game ball being held to be received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 (step S722), and step S731. Until it is determined that the time has expired in the processing of , every time an interrupt processing is performed, the control for executing the small winning game is already in progress (YES in step S701), and the role While it is determined that the conditions for closing the prize winning opening 1155 are satisfied (YES in step S711), the process of subtracting the timer value of the interval timer after closing (step S732) and the V winning opening ( The process (steps S715, S716) of turning on the V history flag on the condition that the game ball has been received into the specific area) 1156 and the process of controlling the drive of the rotating body 1236 are sequentially performed. It will be performed (step S705).

However, in this case, in the processing of step S705, based on the elapsed time from the end of the special symbol variation (the stop symbol appears), the control for causing the rotating body 1236 to appear in a certain motion is terminated. As a control after the condition for closing the accessory winning opening 1155 is established, the rotating body 1236 is moved to the state shown in FIG. supply state).

Then, as a result of repeating such processing (steps S732, S715, S716, S705), when the interval timer after closing times up (YES in step S731), each processing (step S741 to steps S746 and S751).

That is, the main control MPU4100a, first, if the time-saving function is in operation (YES in step S741), the number of fluctuations of the special symbols digested while the time-saving function is operating is a predetermined upper limit It is determined whether or not the value has been reached (step S742). That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols digested while the time saving function is operating reaches the predetermined upper limit value, the time saving game state is terminated. The time-saving function is stopped when the conditions to be performed are satisfied, and if the final variation is a pattern variation corresponding to the small win, the time-saving function is stopped at the timing when the small win game is completed. (step S743). As a result, even after the small winning pattern is stopped, the time saving function is continued until the small winning game is finished, so that the special pattern holding state in the time saving game state is preferably maintained. can be maintained, but we will discuss this later.

After that, when it is determined that the V history flag is in the ON state (YES in step S744), it is assumed that a game ball was received into the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 during the small winning game process, In order to start the jackpot game, the processing flag is updated to "5" (step S745), and various flags (small hit game execution flag, accessory closed flag, V history flag, etc.) operated in the small hit game process ) is turned off (step S746), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the V history flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S744), it is assumed that no game ball was received into the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 during the small hit game process, While updating the processing flag to "0" (step S751), various flags (small winning game execution flag, accessory closed flag, V history flag, etc.) operated in the small winning game processing are operated to the OFF state. At this point (step S746), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the special symbol is performed on condition that the processing of step S301 is suspended.

Although illustration is omitted, in this embodiment, every time it is detected that a ball has entered the prize winning hole 1155 by the prize winning hole sensor 1224, a command to that effect is set. there is As a result, as will be described later, it is possible to display an effect image suitable for the ball entry under the control of the peripheral control board 4010 side.

[Regarding jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (step S230) executed when the process flag is "5" will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot game start process.

As shown in FIG. 139, in the jackpot game start process (step S230), the main control MPU 4100a first sets a timer (jackpot start interval timer) for timing the interval before the start of the jackpot game as the process of step S801. Determine whether or not it is in a completed state. And as a result, if the jackpot start interval timer is not yet set, as the processing of step S802, the condition device is operated, and as the processing of steps S803 and S804, if the time saving function is operating (YES in step S803), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparations are completed, in order to start the interval before the start of the jackpot game, as the processing of steps S805 and S806, the jackpot start interval timer is set, and at the time when the jackpot interval start command is set, this processing is executed. It will end once.

Incidentally, the jackpot interval start command set in the process of step S806 is transmitted to the peripheral control section 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control section 4140 side.

That is, after the jackpot start interval timer is thus set, every time the interrupt processing is performed, it is determined that the jackpot start interval timer has been set in the processing of step S801, and the next step S811. 2, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start interval timer is 0, that is, whether or not the time set as the interval before the start of the jackpot game has passed. Then, in the process of step S811, as long as the jackpot start interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the jackpot game has not passed (NO in step S811), the Each time the jackpot game start process (step S230) is performed, the jackpot start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S821.

Then, as a result of such processing, in the processing of step S811, when it is determined that the jackpot start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the jackpot game has elapsed, When the processing flag is updated to "6" (step S812) in order to execute the jackpot game, this processing is terminated.

As for the jackpot start interval timer, the length of time can be set according to the type of jackpot pattern (the type determined by the pattern random number).

[Regarding jackpot game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is "6" will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot game process.

As shown in FIG. 140, in the jackpot game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first indicates that the control for executing the jackpot game is already in progress as the process of step S901. It is determined whether or not the jackpot game execution flag is on. And as a result, when the jackpot game execution flag is not in the ON state, in order to start the control related to the execution of the jackpot game using the second attacker device 2150, as the processing of step S902, the opening mode according to the type of jackpot Set (number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum number of winnings of each round).

As described above, in this embodiment, in addition to the fact that only the 15R time-saving jackpot is prepared as the type of jackpot, when the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 in the small hit game, Also, since a big hit game in which round games are performed 15 times is generated, "15 times" is always set as the number of rounds in the process of step S902. However, regarding the opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings in each round, the first special symbol side (jackpot game according to the winning of the first jackpot) and the second special symbol side (second jackpot) The second special pattern side jackpot game (jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the second jackpot) is set in a different mode, so that a larger amount of prizes can be obtained. I have to.

More specifically, when a jackpot game is performed according to the lottery results (first jackpot, first advantage small hit) on the first special symbol side, it is difficult to acquire game balls, or dozens of While the opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings in each round are determined by the manner in which a prize that can win about a game ball is given, the lottery result on the second special symbol side (second jackpot, second When the jackpot game corresponding to the second advantage small win, the third advantage small win) is performed, the opening time of each round and the opening time of each round A maximum number of prizes is determined.

After the execution mode of the big win game is set in this way, as the processing of steps S903 and S904, the big win game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the big win game is already in progress is operated to the ON state. At the same time, when the jackpot start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

That is, after the big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress in the process of step S901 each time the interrupt process is performed. Then, in the processing of the next step S911, it is determined whether or not the set number of rounds has been completed. And, in the processing of this step S911, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not yet been completed, that is, it is an intermediate stage of the control related to the execution of the big hit game (NO in step S911). , Every time the big hit game process (step S240) is performed, control according to the set opening pattern is executed as the process of step S912. As a result, each time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the opening/closing movement (including the interval between rounds) of the large winning opening opening/closing member 1203 is updated (managed) through the process of step S912. As a result, a big win game is realized in which the big win opening/closing member 1203 opens and closes with an opening pattern corresponding to the kind of big win.

Although illustration is omitted, in this embodiment, while the round game is repeated 15 times, each time a round game ends, a command to that effect is set. As a result, it is possible to display effect images suitable for each round game under the control of the peripheral control board 4010 side.

Then, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S911, when it is determined that the set number of rounds has been consumed, that is, all the control related to the execution of the jackpot game has been completed. (YES in step S911), each process (step S921, step S922, step S931, step S941, step S942) for generating the end interval of the jackpot game is performed.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (jackpot end interval timer) for timing the end interval of the jackpot game has been set (step S921). As a result, when the jackpot end interval timer has not been set yet, in order to start the jackpot game end interval, as the processing of steps S941 and S942, the jackpot end interval timer is set and the jackpot interval end command is issued. Once set, this processing is temporarily terminated.

Incidentally, the jackpot interval end command set in the process of step S942 is transmitted to the peripheral control section 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect during the end interval of the big hit game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control section 4140 side.

That is, after the jackpot end interval timer is thus set, every time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the jackpot end interval timer has been set in the processing of step S921, and the next step S922. 3, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end interval timer is 0, that is, whether or not the time set as the jackpot game end interval has elapsed. Then, in the process of step S922, as long as the jackpot end interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the jackpot game has not passed (NO in step S922), the Every time the big hit game process (step S240) is performed, 1 is subtracted from the big hit end interval timer as the process of step S931.

Then, as a result of such processing, in the processing of step S922, when it is determined that the jackpot end interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the jackpot game end interval has elapsed, Each process (step S923 to step S928) for ending the big hit game is performed.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first turns off the jackpot game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the jackpot game is already in progress as the process of step S923. Next, if the result of the special symbol lottery satisfies the conditions for activating the time saving function (YES in step S924), the time saving function is activated to control the transition to the time saving game state (step S925). ).

After the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, the operation of the conditional device is stopped (step S926), and when the processing flag is updated to "0" (step S927), this processing ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the special symbols will be performed on condition that the processing of step S301 is suspended and digested.

According to such a jackpot game process, until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum number of rounds in the process of step S911, the corresponding jackpot 1154 is opened according to the type of jackpot ( After step S912), the game is repeatedly opened, so that the player can obtain a prize corresponding to the type of the jackpot.

[About small winning games]
Fig. 142 shows the opening of the accessory winning opening 1155 when a small winning game (first disadvantageous small win, second disadvantageous small win, first advantageous small win, second advantageous small win, third advantageous small win) is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example about the relationship between a state and the operation state of the rotary body (distribution apparatus) 1236 in the internal area|region of the prize winning opening 1155. FIG. The control shown in FIG. 142 is executed by the main control MPU 4100a every 4 ms, for example, by the small winning game process (see FIG. 138).

As described above, the rotator (distribution device) 1236 according to this embodiment has an accommodation position (FIG. 124(a)) in which the receiving portion 1236a faces upward, and a release position in which the receiving portion 1236a faces rightward. (FIG. 124(b)). Then, in the state where the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodation position, only the first supplied game ball among the game balls received in the accessory winning opening 1155 is held by the receiving portion 1236a, and the other game balls are held. is supplied to the removal hole 1230c. Then, when the rotary body 1236 rotates to the release position, the held game ball is released from the rotary body 1236 and supplied to the V winning opening 1156 . On the other hand, the rotator (distribution device) 1236 according to this embodiment receives any of the game balls received in the accessory winning opening 1155 when the receiving portion 1236a is in the release position facing rightward. It also has a function of supplying the game ball to the loss hole 1230c so that the game ball is not received in the V winning opening 1156 without being held by the portion 1236a.

In this regard, in the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It rotates so that a certain movement appears. Note that such an operation is realized by performing the processing of step S604 and the processing of step S705 each time an interrupt process is performed.

Further, as described above, in the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, as long as the player continues to hit to the right, there are at least two It is formed with a structure that allows the above (2 or 3) game balls to exist as a prize waiting state to the accessory prize winning port 1155 .

[Regarding the small winning game when the second advantageous small winning or the third advantageous small winning is obtained]
The same game control is performed in the small winning game when the second advantageous small winning is obtained and the small winning game when the third advantageous small winning is obtained. Hereinafter, it will be described as a small winning game when the second advantageous small winning is obtained.

Here, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), while the structure of such a rotating body (distribution device) 1236 and the special flow passage is realized, the second advantage small hit (second special symbol side lottery) is obtained, first, a plurality of game balls on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) in the closed state due to the right hand hit by the player. It is after the timing when the time required until it is reached and slightly (0.02 seconds) earlier than the timing t2 when the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 rotates from the accommodation position to the release position At the timing, control is performed to slide the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state.

However, here, it is set that the timing t2 arrives in a shorter time than the time required for the game ball received in the accessory winning opening 1155 to reach the accommodation position of the rotating body 1236 . Therefore, according to this sliding operation, while the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodation position (the state in which the game ball can be held in the receiving portion 1236a), the accessory winning opening 1155 is in a winning state. Although a plurality of game balls can be immediately received collectively, by the time those game balls reach the rotating body 1236, they are not in the accommodation position, and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a and go to the failure hole 1230c. are sorted out and discharged.

The reason why such high-speed rotation of the rotating body 1236 can be realized is that the rotating body 1236 is rotated not by a motor but by driving the V-winning solenoid 1232. This is because the rotating body 1236 can be displaced from the accommodation position to the discharging position in a shorter time than the time required for the game ball received in the mouth 1155 to reach the rotating body 1236 .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of game balls (game balls waiting to be won) on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state Regardless of the degree, each time the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 is opened, it is formed with a structure that can enter the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155 quickly and all at once as described above. As I said. In this respect, at the timing t2, after the arrival of the timing t1 at which the stop symbol at the time of the small hit appears, it waits for a plurality of game balls to be supplied to the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). Then, a slide operation (opening) is performed for an extremely short time (0.12 seconds) required for a plurality of game balls on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) to collectively enter the accessory winning opening 1155. operation) is to be performed.

According to the control at the timing t2 as described above, although a plurality of game balls waiting to win a prize in the accessory prize winning port 1155 are entered in an extremely short opening time, all of the game balls are lost holes. 1230c and discharged, the opening time of the small winning game (maximum 1.8 seconds) is not wasted, and the game ball received in the accessory winning opening 1155 is discharged to the V winning opening. It becomes possible to preferably reduce the probability of being accepted by 1156 (probability of machine lottery).

Moreover, according to such control, basically, only game balls that are already in a winning state on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) A prize can be won only when the accessory prize winning port 1155 is opened. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to more accurately control the timing when the game ball enters the internal area of the accessory winning prize opening 1155, the probability of being accepted into the V winning prize opening 1156 (probability of machine lottery) can also be suitably controlled.

After the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is closed in this way, it waits for timing t3 at which the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the accommodation position. After that, control is performed to slide the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state again for a very short time (0.12 seconds).

Here, as is clear from FIGS. 142(d) and (e), when timing t3 arrives, at least Since two or more (2 or 3) game balls are waiting for winning, these game balls are immediately put into the prize winning opening 1155 by the sliding operation of the opening/closing member 1221 for winning the prize. and will be accepted. Moreover, at the timing t3, since the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 is displaced from the release position to the accommodation position, any one of the game balls collectively received in the accessory winning opening 1155 It will always be held by the receiving portion 1236a. The game balls held in this manner are released from the rotating body 1236 when timing t4 at which the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 is displaced from the accommodation position to the release position is reached. become accepted to 1156.

However, in the small-hit game when the second advantageous small-hit (third advantageous small-hit) is obtained, as shown in FIG. control to maintain the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 in a closed state (closing interval) only for the time required for a plurality of game balls (here, three or more) to be supplied to the opening/closing member 1221; Control for sliding the prize opening opening/closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state for a very short time (0.12 seconds) is alternately performed five times.

That is, in this case, within the period of timing t1 to t4, each time the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 is slid (opened) from the closed state to the open state for a very short time (0.12 seconds), 2, 3 The number of game balls will be accepted in the accessory winning opening 1155 . And, in view of such an acceptance situation, usually, when the fourth or fifth slide operation (0.12 seconds) is performed, the small win game (when the second advantageous small win is obtained) It will reach the upper limit (up to 10) of game balls that can be won in the small winning game (Fig. 138: YES in step S713).

In this regard, when the upper limit of the game balls that can be won at the time the fourth or fifth slide operation (0.12 seconds) is performed, the opening and closing control of the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 is performed. In addition to being terminated (FIG. 138: step S721), the control for causing the rotating body 1236 to perform a certain action based on the elapsed time from the appearance of the stop symbol (the elapsed time from timing t1) is terminated. Instead, control is performed to displace the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the accommodation position to the release position. As a result, although illustration is omitted, various controls for the small winning game (small winning game when the second advantageous small winning is obtained) are terminated before the arrival of the timing t4, and as a result, A jackpot game can be executed in response to the reception of the game ball in the V winning opening 1156.例文帳に追加

In addition, in a state where the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 in the accommodation position holds the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a, the held game ball can be supplied to the V winning opening 1156. It has a structure in which all the game balls received in the accessory winning prize opening 1155 are distributed to the losing hole 1230c and discharged. According to such a configuration, for example, in the period from timing t3 to t4, while ensuring that game balls are always supplied to the V winning opening 1156 in the future, the game that entered the accessory winning opening 1155 It is possible to suitably reduce the probability that the balls are distributed to the V winning opening 1156 (probability of machine lottery).

However, even if it is a small winning game when such a second advantageous small win (third advantageous small win) is obtained, if the player does not continue to hit to the right, it is a game that can win. A timing t4 arrives without reaching the upper limit value (maximum of 10 balls) of balls, and the elapsed time from the start of a small winning game (a small winning game when a second advantageous small winning is obtained) is predetermined. The set upper limit time is reached (FIG. 138: YES in step S712).

That is, in this case, in addition to ending the opening/closing control of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 when the upper limit time is reached (FIG. 138: step S721), the elapsed time from the appearance of the stop symbol (timing t1 Based on the elapsed time from the time point), the control for causing the rotator 1236 to perform a certain movement is terminated, and instead, the rotator (distribution device) 1236 is displaced from the accommodation position to the release position. Control will be performed. As a result, if there is a game ball accepted into the V winning opening 1156, the big win game can be executed, whereas if there is no gaming ball accepted into the V winning opening 1156, the big winning game is not executed. The next variation of the special pattern will be performed.

In this way, in the small winning game when the second advantageous small winning (third advantageous small winning) is obtained, as long as the player continues to hit to the right, a large amount of money is played in the short opening time. While suitably reducing the probability of being accepted in the V winning port 1156 (probability of machine lottery) by accepting the game ball of , by always supplying one of many game balls to the V winning port 1156 A jackpot game advantageous to the player can be started (corresponding to "winning").

In addition, short opening in which the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened only for a short time (0.12 seconds) less than the game ball shooting interval (0.6 seconds) by the ball shooting device 650 corresponding to the operation of the handle device 500 Although it performs an action (calculated, a short opening action in which the expected value to win is less than 1), each time the short opening action appears, a plurality of game balls are moved to the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155. and can enter. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically increase the number of winning game balls per unit time when the accessory winning opening 1155 is in an open state, and such excellent winning performance suppresses the decline in the interest in the game. be able to be

In this way, in the small win game when the second advantageous small win (third advantageous small win) is obtained, there are a plurality of game balls waiting for winning during a relatively long closing interval. The total opening time (0.6 seconds) of the prize winning port 1155 is short but many (10 or more) by performing the short opening operation by the prize winning port opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) several times. of game balls can enter the internal area. However, in order to set the machine lottery probability at a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less, as shown in FIG. The accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is short-opened from the closed state to the open state so that the state is released, or the rotating body 1236 is moved to the operation state (accommodation) shown in FIG. position) (at timings t3 to t4), the short opening operation by the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed a plurality of times.

According to such a configuration, even though many (10 or more) game balls are allowed to enter the inner area when the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened, the V winning opening 1156 is opened. The game balls to be guided are limited to the game balls first supplied to the rotating body 1236 while the rotating body 1236 is maintained in the operating state (accommodated position) shown in FIG. 124(a). become. That is, in this case, even if the player delays the launch of the game ball, at least one game ball can enter the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155 during the timing t3 to t4. For example, it is possible to make it finally accepted to the V winning port 1156 . On the other hand, since each game ball different from the game ball initially supplied to the rotating body 1236 is all guided to the losing hole 1230, one small winning game (a plurality of While the game ball is guided to the V prize opening 1156 while the short opening action is performed, the machine lottery probability is maintained at a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less. will be able to

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the small winning game corresponding to the result (second advantageous small winning, third advantageous small winning) of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is started, the big winning game is played. Until is started, the game ball is suppressed from entering the second start port 1153, and the game ball can be accepted in the second start port 1153 each time it is controlled to the time-saving game state. As described above, it is possible to realize a game property that dares to have a large variation in the number of characters. And, in order to suitably realize such a game property, after the small winning game corresponding to the result (second advantageous small winning, third advantageous small winning) of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is started It is important to make it difficult for the game ball itself to flow down to the second starting port 1153 until the jackpot game is started.

In this regard, in the small winning game when the second advantageous small winning (third advantageous small winning) is obtained, the accessory winning opening 1155 is closed after the timing t1 when the stop symbol at the time of the small winning appears. The opening and closing operation is performed so as to repeat the state and the open state, but the time that the closed state is maintained among the repeated closed state and open state is, at the maximum, the "game ball firing interval (0 1.8 seconds, which is three times as long as 0.6 seconds). That is, up to three game balls can be present on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) as a state of waiting for winning to the accessory winning opening 1155, so timing t1 After the arrival, even if the right-handed hitting is continued, the game ball passes through the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) to the second start opening 1153 located further downstream than this. Going forward will be suppressed.

In addition, after the small winning game when the second advantageous small winning (third advantageous small winning) is obtained, it passes through the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) and downstream from this. The game ball goes to the second start port 1153 on the side. However, as described above, even if the second starting port 1153 is in an open state over a long bridging time at the time the small winning game ends, it will be in a closed state by the time these game balls reach the second starting port 1153. Since the path between the accessory winning prize port 1155 and the second start port 1153 is provided as described above, the second It is possible to suitably suppress the entry of a game ball into the starting port 1153 .

[Regarding the small win game when the first disadvantageous small win is obtained]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), the small winning game when the first disadvantageous small winning (lottery on the first special symbol side) is obtained is also closed by the player hitting right. after the timing required for a plurality of game balls to be supplied to the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the state, and rotating body (sorting device) 1236 At a timing slightly (0.02 seconds) earlier than the timing t2 when the is rotated from the housed position to the released position, control is performed to slide the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state.

Similarly, in this slide operation, the timing t2 is set to arrive in a shorter time than the time required for the game ball received in the accessory winning opening 1155 to reach the accommodation position of the rotating body 1236. It is said that Therefore, according to this sliding operation, while the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodation position (the state in which the game ball can be held in the receiving portion 1236a), the accessory winning opening 1155 is in a winning state. Although a plurality of game balls can be immediately received collectively, by the time those game balls reach the rotating body 1236, they are not in the accommodation position, and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a and go to the failure hole 1230c. are sorted out and discharged.

However, in the small hit game when the first disadvantageous small hit is obtained, the time of the slide operation is the time during which a new game ball can be supplied during the slide operation (the time slightly longer than the firing interval ( 0.62 seconds)), and by this, in addition to a plurality of game balls (game balls waiting to win) on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) in the closed state , newly supplied game balls can also win prizes in the accessory prize winning port 1155.例文帳に追加

Moreover, in the small win game when the first disadvantageous small win is obtained, after such a sliding operation for 0.62 seconds is completed, the small winning game ( The elapsed time from the start of the small win game when the first disadvantageous small win is obtained reaches the predetermined upper limit time (the above-described open timer is timed up) (Fig. 138: YES in step S712).

In this way, in the small winning game when the first disadvantageous small winning is obtained, although it is possible to win a plurality of game balls in the accessory winning opening 1155, none of the gaming balls are the V winning opening. 1156 will not be accepted. Therefore, it is not possible to execute a big-hit game due to this small-hit game (corresponding to "failure").

[Regarding each small win game when the second disadvantageous small win and the first advantageous small win are obtained]
In the above-mentioned small win game when the first disadvantageous small win is obtained, while it is immediately recognized that the advantageous small win was not obtained, when the second disadvantageous small win is obtained In the small winning game, the possibility of obtaining the first advantageous small winning can be expected depending on the opening mode, and the execution processing of the small winning game itself can function as an expected performance. It's becoming

That is, in each small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit (lottery on the first special symbol side) or the first advantageous small hit (lottery on the first special symbol side) is obtained, Fig. 142 (b), ( As shown in c), from timing t1 to timing t8, which will be described later, operations for opening and closing the prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221 are performed in the same or similar manner.

The first operation is the same as in the case of other small winning games, until a plurality of game balls are supplied to the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state by hitting to the right by the player. After the timing required for the time to arrive, and slightly (0.02 seconds) earlier than the timing t2 at which the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 rotates from the accommodation position to the release position, Control is performed to slide the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state for an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds).

Also, here as well, the timing of this slide motion is set to be shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the prize winning port 1155 by the slide motion to reach the rotating body 1236. It is set so that timing t2 arrives. Therefore, according to this sliding operation, while the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodation position (the state in which the game ball can be held in the receiving portion 1236a), the accessory winning opening 1155 is in a winning state. Although a plurality of game balls can be immediately received collectively, by the time those game balls reach the rotating body 1236, they are not in the accommodation position, and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a and go to the failure hole 1230c. are sorted out and discharged.

The reason why such high-speed rotation of the rotating body 1236 can be realized is that the rotating body 1236 is rotated not by a motor but by driving the V-winning solenoid 1232. This is because the rotating body 1236 can be displaced from the accommodation position to the discharging position in a shorter time than the time required for the game ball received in the mouth 1155 to reach the rotating body 1236 .

However, in each small win game when the second disadvantageous small win or the first advantageous small win is obtained, the timing t3 at which the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 rotates from the release position to the accommodation position comes. After that, the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 changes from the closed state to the open state within the period until the timing t4 at which the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 rotates from the accommodation position to the release position. It does not slide to. Therefore, the opportunity to hold the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 (and the opportunity to be distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156) has not yet been provided. Control related to operations after timing t4 is performed.

That is, first, at timing t4 after a relatively long closing interval (11.4 seconds) has elapsed, a plurality of game balls waiting to win a prize are opened in an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds). 1155, but by the time these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already at the release position. These game balls are all sorted to the losing hole 1230c and discharged.

On the other hand, at timing t5 after 6.5 seconds have elapsed from timing t4, the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 rotates from the release position to the accommodation position, and 2.5 seconds from timing 5 At the elapsed timing t6, the rotator (sorting device) 1236 rotates again from the accommodation position to the release position.

However, in each small win game when the second disadvantageous small win or the first advantageous small win is obtained, the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 is changed from the closed state to the open state even within the period of timing t5 to t6. No sliding action. Therefore, the opportunity to hold the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 (and the opportunity to be distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156) has not yet been provided. Control related to operations after timing t6 is performed.

That is, first, even at timing t6 after a relatively long closing interval (8.88 seconds) has elapsed, a plurality of game balls waiting to win a prize are opened in an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds). 1155, but by the time these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already at the release position. These game balls are all sorted to the losing hole 1230c and discharged.

On the other hand, at timing t7 after 6.5 seconds have passed from timing t6, the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 rotates from the release position to the accommodation position, and 2.5 seconds from timing t7. At the elapsed timing t8, the rotator (sorting device) 1236 rotates again from the accommodation position to the release position.

However, in each small win game when the second disadvantageous small win or the first advantageous small win is obtained, the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 is changed from the closed state to the open state even within the period of timing t7 to t8. No sliding action. Therefore, the opportunity to hold the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 (and the opportunity to be distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156) has not yet been provided. Control related to operations after timing t8 is performed.

In this way, in each small win game when the second disadvantageous small win or the first advantageous small win is obtained, a plurality of game balls are produced during the period from the appearance of the stop symbol at timing t1 to the arrival of timing t8. is kept in the closed state (closing interval) for a time sufficient to be in the winning waiting state, and the control of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 for an extremely short time (0. 12 seconds) is repeated a plurality of times.

According to such a configuration, each time an extremely short sliding motion (opening motion) is performed, a plurality of game balls waiting for winning can be entered into the accessory winning opening 1155. Any of these sliding operations (opening operations) is performed with respect to the operation status of the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 that performs a constant movement after the stop pattern appears at timing t1. When the receiving portion 1236a is not at the accommodation position (more precisely, when the game ball that has entered the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155 reaches the receiving portion 1236a, the receiving portion 1236a is located at the accommodation position. It is done aiming at the timing when there is no time.

That is, in the small winning game when the second disadvantageous small winning is obtained and the small winning game when the first advantageous small winning is obtained, the time from the appearance of the stop symbol at the timing t1 to the timing t8 arrives. In the meantime, all the game balls entering the accessory winning opening 1155 are all distributed to the losing hole 1230c so that the outcome is not determined. approximation). As a result, the execution processing of the small winning game itself can be made to function as an expectation effect that makes the player aware of the possibility of obtaining an advantageous small winning (timings t1 to t8).

In addition, during the relatively long period of timings t1 to t8, the effect display device 1115 may also perform an expected effect that makes the player aware of the possibility of obtaining an advantageous small hit.

That is, as described above, in the period from timing t1 to t8, although a game in which many game balls are awarded to the accessory winning opening 1155 is provided, for the closing interval with a relatively long time Therefore, the time period during which the prize winning port 1155 is open is relatively short (more precisely, it is a short period (0.12 seconds) during which game balls that have already been shot can win). It is supposed to be controlled. Therefore, if a predetermined effect (expectation effect that makes one aware of the possibility of obtaining an advantageous small win) is performed during the period of such timings t1 to t8, the role winning opening 1155 is performed. is kept closed for a relatively long period of time (closed interval), it becomes easier to concentrate on the performance, so that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the period from timing t1 to t8, the closing interval with a relatively long time and the game ball that is in the state of waiting for the entry prize, although it is for a relatively short time, enter the inner area of the prize winning port 1155. and a short open period during which it is possible to enter repeatedly, so there is a low sense of tension when it is in the closing interval While the performance is basically appearing, it is possible to periodically generate a highly tense game performance as to whether or not the game ball is accepted in the V prize opening (specific area) 1156.例文帳に追加Therefore, this also suppresses the decline in the interest in the game.

However, as shown in FIGS. 142(b) and (c), when the timing t8 comes, the small winning game when the second disadvantageous small winning is obtained and the first advantageous small winning are obtained. Only when the small winning game when the second disadvantageous small winning is obtained is performed among the small winning games at the time, the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 is very short time (0.12 seconds) Since the sliding operation (opening operation) is performed, it is recognized which of the small winning game when the second disadvantageous small winning is obtained and the small winning game when the first advantageous small winning is obtained is being executed. become possible.

In addition, the sliding operation (opening operation) at this timing t8 is also similar to the previous case, and the plurality of game balls waiting to win the prize winning opening 1155 are opened in an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds). Although it is possible to enter balls collectively, by the time these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already at the release position. are all sorted and discharged to the failure hole 1230c.

Then, in the small winning game when the second disadvantageous small winning is obtained, when the sliding operation (opening operation) is performed for an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds) at the timing t8, it is possible to win. By reaching the upper limit value of the game balls (up to 10 in the small winning game), or when the above-described open timer times up at a predetermined timing thereafter (Fig. 138: YES in step S712), the above V winning The game is terminated without receiving a game ball into the mouth 1156. - 特許庁Therefore, there is no possibility that the big win game can be executed due to the small win game when the second disadvantageous small win is obtained (corresponding to "failure").

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142(c), in the small-hit game when the first advantageous small-hit is obtained, a plurality of game balls are placed in the above-mentioned winning waiting state. While the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 is maintained in the closed state (closed interval), it waits for the timing t9 at which the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 rotates from the release position to the accommodation position. Then, the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 is slid (opened) for a very short time (0.12 seconds).

That is, in this case, if right-handed hitting is continued, at least two or more (2 or 3) game balls are waiting for winning on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. , the slide operation (0.12 seconds) is performed at the timing t9. As a result, regardless of the number of game balls waiting to win a prize, those game balls can be immediately received collectively into the prize winning port 1155, and any one of these game balls It is always held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 at the accommodation position.

And after that, at timing t10, the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game (the small winning game when the first advantageous small winning is obtained) reaches the predetermined upper limit time (Fig. 138: step YES in S712), control is performed to displace the rotator (sorting device) 1236 from the accommodation position to the release position. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a jackpot game corresponding to the reception of the game ball in the V winning opening 1156.例文帳に追加

However, in the small winning game when the first advantageous small winning is obtained, as shown in FIG. 142 (c), within the period of timing t1 to t9, multiple (Here, three or more) game balls (here, three or more) are controlled to maintain the closed state (closed interval) of the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221, and the opening and closing member 1221 of the accessory winning opening and closing member Control to slide from the closed state to the open state for a very short time (0.12 seconds) is alternately performed four times.

That is, in this case, within the period of timing t1 to t9, each time the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 is slid (opened) from the closed state to the open state for a very short time (0.12 seconds), The number of game balls will be accepted in the accessory winning opening 1155 . And, in view of such an acceptance situation, when the slide operation (0.12 seconds) at timing t9 is performed, the small winning game (the small winning game when the first advantageous small winning is obtained) wins. There is also a possibility that the maximum number of game balls allowed (10 at maximum) will be reached (FIG. 138: YES in step S713).

In this regard, when the upper limit value of the game ball that can be won is reached at the time when the slide operation (0.12 seconds) is performed at the timing t9, the opening/closing control of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 is terminated. In addition ( FIG. 138 : step S721), the control for causing the rotating body 1236 to perform a certain action based on the elapsed time from the appearance of the stop symbol (the elapsed time from the timing t1) is terminated. Therefore, instead of this, control is performed to displace the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the accommodation position to the release position. As a result, although illustration is omitted, various controls relating to the small winning game are terminated before the arrival of the timing t10. A game becomes executable.

However, in the small-hit game when the advantageous small-hit is obtained, the chance that the game ball is held in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 (and the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 The upper limit value (maximum of 10) of game balls that can be won in the small winning game is reached before the timing of giving the opportunity to be distributed) arrives, and the V winning opening (specific area) It is required to prevent the end of the small winning game without being distributed to 1156.例文帳に追加

For example, in a small winning game when the first advantageous small winning is obtained, the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened for a short period of time three times while a maximum of three game balls can be in a winning state. At timing t9 after that, control is performed to open the accessory winning opening 1155 for a short period of time so that the game ball is held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236. FIG. That is, in this case, until the timing t9 arrives, only 9 game balls less than the upper limit (maximum 10) can be won in the accessory winning opening 1155, so the V winning opening (specified Area) 1156, the small winning game will not end without being distributed.

In this way, in the small winning game when the first advantageous small winning is obtained, as long as the player continuously hits to the right, it is possible to receive many game balls within a short opening time. A jackpot game advantageous to a player by surely supplying any one of many game balls to the V winning port 1156 while appropriately reducing the probability of being accepted in the V winning port 1156 (probability of machine lottery). can be started (corresponding to “winning”).

In addition, in both the small winning game when the first advantageous small winning is obtained and the small winning game when the second advantageous small winning is obtained, the shot ball shooting device 650 is operated according to the operation of the handle device 500. A short opening operation in which the accessory winning port 1155 is opened only for a short time (0.12 seconds) less than the shooting interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball (calculated, the expected value to win is less than 1 However, each time the short opening action appears, a plurality of game balls that have already been shot and are waiting for a prize are moved to the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155. Allowing them to enter. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically increase the number of winning game balls per unit time when the accessory winning opening 1155 is in an open state, and such excellent winning performance suppresses the decline in the interest in the game. be able to be

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, "basically, the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) already exists as a winning waiting state. By adopting a configuration such that only game balls can win only when the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened, the timing when the game ball enters the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155 can be controlled more accurately. as described above. In this regard, in each of the above-mentioned small winning games, by using such accurate control performance, the above-mentioned accessory winning opening 1155 is opened at the timing when the game ball waiting for winning is guided to the V winning opening 1156 It is possible to selectively use the control to open the state and the control to open the accessory winning port 1155 at the timing when the game ball waiting for winning is guided to the losing hole 1230c. The game property that the small winning game should bear is realized.

Further, as described above, according to each small winning game (small winning game shown in FIGS. 142(a) to (d)) according to this embodiment, the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) While having a structure that is managed so that the maximum speed of the game ball T1 on the upper surface does not exceed "L/2T", every time the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened, prior to this, the accessory winning is performed. The mouth opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is maintained as a closed state (closed interval) for the time (at least 1.2 seconds or more) required for a plurality of game balls to be supplied. As a result, as long as the player continues to hit to the right, at least two or more (2 or 3) game balls are placed on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. can exist as

In addition, in this way, it becomes possible to play so that at least two or more game balls T habitually exist in a specific rolling area (the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door part 1221a)). Each time the prize winning port opening/closing member 1221 is opened, a plurality of game balls can win prizes, thereby achieving excellent prize winning performance, thereby giving a sense of speed to the prize winning situation at the role prize winning port 1155.例文帳に追加be able to

Further, as described above, according to each small winning game according to this embodiment (a small winning game shown in FIGS. 142(a) to (d)), all the game balls that are in the state of waiting for winning The position where the game ball that entered the internal area is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 1224 (relative to the number of game balls that can be won A detection point used for upper limit value judgment) is provided, and a plurality of game balls are released each time the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 is opened. Since it is possible to win prizes, it is possible to actively generate overflow prizes against the upper limit of game balls that can win prizes, realizing dynamic prize winning performance and prize winning performance that exceed the set value. be able to

By positively generating such an overflow winning, the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit (maximum of 10) of game balls that can be won in a small winning game can be placed in the role winning opening 1155. , and such excellent winning performance always guides the game ball to the V winning opening 1156 in the above-mentioned regulations for each small winning game. Even so, the machine lottery probability can be set to be generally lower than 1/10.

Moreover, as described above, according to each small winning game according to this embodiment (a small winning game shown in FIGS. 142(a) to (d)), the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) A direction (rear side direction) perpendicular to the advancing direction (left direction) of the game balls so that a plurality of game balls waiting to win a prize on the upper surface spill down to the accessory winning opening 1155 almost at the same time. 1221 is designed to be able to receive all of the game balls that are waiting to win a prize in an extremely short period of time. Each time, the opening time is set to be much shorter (less than half, 0.12 seconds) than the game ball shooting interval (0.6 seconds) by the ball shooting device 650 corresponding to the operation of the handle device 500. I am planning to

According to such a configuration, in terms of calculation, a short opening operation is performed in which the expected value to win is less than 1, but each time the short opening operation appears, the predetermined closing interval time elapses. At least two or more game balls T waiting to win a prize can be entered into the inner area of the prize winning port 1155 almost simultaneously. The winning number of the game balls T can be dramatically increased, and a large amount of money can be obtained without wasting the opening time (maximum 1.8 seconds) in the small winning game in which the upper limit time is set. Be able to win game balls

Furthermore, according to each small hit game (small hit game shown in FIGS. 142(a) to (d)) according to this embodiment, such a short opening operation is performed by rotating body (distribution device) 1236 When the receiving portion 1236a is not at the accommodation position (more precisely, when the game ball that has entered the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155 reaches the receiving portion 1236a, the receiving portion 1236a is located at the accommodation position. We are aiming to make it appear at a timing that is not available. Alternatively, when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotator (distribution device) 1236 is in the accommodation position, when the short opening operation is performed, the above-mentioned opening timer times up, or the upper limit of the game balls that can be won Unless one of the conditions of reaching (maximum 10 pieces in a small winning game) is met, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 is prevented from being displaced to the release position. Therefore, it is possible to preferably reduce the probability (probability of machine lottery) that the game ball accepted in the accessory winning opening 1155 is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the rotating body 1236 rotates at high speed by driving the V-winning solenoid 1232 instead of the motor. rotator 1236 can be displaced from the housed position to the release position in a shorter time than the time required to reach the rotator 1236 . Therefore, at the timing (for example, timing t4, t6, t8, etc.) of displacing the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the accommodation position to the release position, the short opening operation of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed. If so, the short opening action can be positioned as an action that does not allow the prize winning opening 1155 to win. Also, at the timing (for example, timing t3, t9, etc.) of displacing the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the release position to the accommodation position, the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is short-opened. In this case, the short opening operation can be positioned as an operation for winning the prize winning opening 1155 .

Also, in order to achieve the above-mentioned excellent winning performance when a small hit (advantageous small hit) is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery,
・The number of game balls that can habitually exist on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 in the closed state as a waiting state for winning a prize is "N (up to 3 in this embodiment)",
・When the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is opened, the set value of the upper limit winning number of game balls that are allowed to enter the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155 is set to "X (this implementation in the form of 10)", and the time between shots of game balls is "Y (0.6 seconds in this embodiment)"
, the time set value allowed as the operating time for the opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) of the winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is set to a time shorter than "X·Y (in this embodiment, 6 seconds)". is set as T (0.6 seconds in this embodiment). Then, on this, the operation to the open state by the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is set to "X/N (in this embodiment, 4 which is the smallest integer larger than "10/3") '' times or more (in this embodiment, 5 times), and in each operation mode when divided into Z times, the game ball in the winning state can be maintained. By setting the short opening time in the 10) game balls can enter the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155, the opening optimization control can be executed to open the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a). You are required to do so.

According to such a configuration, the opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) can be opened Z times (in this embodiment) in a short opening time (0.12 seconds in this embodiment). 5 times), the game balls that are waiting for winning (in this embodiment, three at maximum) will enter the internal area. While the total time does not exceed the above T time (0.6 seconds in this embodiment), the "X" (10 in this embodiment) game balls are placed inside the accessory winning opening 1155. It becomes possible to enter the area, and such excellent prize winning performance can suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Therefore, the number of game balls that can habitually exist on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 in the closed state as waiting for winning does not necessarily have to be two or more (2 or 3). . For example, even when adopting a configuration such that "at least one or more game balls are waiting for winning on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 in the closed state", the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 As long as the game (continues the right-handed game) so that the game ball exists on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of (door part 1221a) (waiting for winning state) is maintained, a certain distribution A rotating body (distribution device) 1236 that performs an operation (see FIG. 142(e)) guides the game ball to the V winning opening 1156 at the correct timing so that the game ball enters the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155. Therefore, it is possible to start a big-hit game according to acceptance to the V winning opening 1156 (big-hit control). That is, in this case, the structure is controlled so that the maximum speed of the game ball on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) does not exceed "L/T".

Also, even if such a configuration (at least one or more game balls are placed in a winning state on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 in the closed state), basically, The upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is short enough to allow only the game balls that are already in a waiting state to enter the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155. Only for a short time (a short time during which game balls that are not in a state of waiting for a prize are refused to win a prize), the accessory prize winning port opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is operated from the closed state to the open state. This is more desirable in order to be able to more accurately control the timing when the game ball enters the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155 .

In addition, the machine lottery probability in the case of adopting such a configuration (at least one or more game balls are waiting for winning on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 in the closed state) is also preferable. It is possible to set a low probability value of "1/10" or less.

That is, in performing the opening control of the prize winning port 1155 by dividing it into 10 or more short opening operations with a predetermined closing interval time,
・As the predetermined closing interval time, a time longer than the firing interval for one shot and shorter than the firing interval for two shots (for example, 0.66 seconds)) is adopted, and as the short opening time, The time (shorter than the firing interval, for example, 0.000) is required for the game ball waiting to win a prize to drop into the prize winning port 1155 by the sliding operation of the prize winning port opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). 12 seconds), a short opening action will appear each time the game balls that are successively shot are placed in a prize waiting state at the predetermined closing interval time. That is, in this case, even though the short opening action is shorter than the firing interval (calculated, the expected value for winning is less than 1), every time the short opening action is repeated 10 times, the player waits for a prize. One (rarely two) game balls will win a prize, and by allowing only one of these game balls to be accepted in the V prize opening 1156, the machine lottery probability is approximately "1/10 ( In rare cases, it will be possible to set it to "less than 1/10".

Furthermore, while the opening control of the accessory winning opening 1155 can be executed by dividing it into 10 or more short opening operations with a predetermined closing interval time interposed, instead of the above configuration (b), ( b') If an internal path is provided in which the time required for a game ball that has entered the internal area to reach the position detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 1224 is longer than the time between shots, 10 Even when the 10th game ball enters the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155 when the short opening action appears for the first time, the 10th gaming ball is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 1224. The 11th game ball can enter the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155 by the 11th short opening operation before reaching the position where the 11th game ball is reached. That is, in this case, even if a configuration such as "at least one or more game balls are waiting for winning on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 in the closed state" is adopted, it is possible to win. It is possible to positively generate an overflow prize with respect to the upper limit value of game balls (up to 10 in a small winning game).

In addition, various structures of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) and various controls in the small winning game according to this embodiment are applied to the structure of the big winning opening opening/closing member 1203 and control in the big winning game, respectively. You may make it That is, in this case, a game ball habitually exists on the upper surface of the large winning opening opening and closing member 1203 in the closed state as a waiting state for winning, or a game ball per unit time when the large winning opening 1154 is in the open state to dramatically increase the number of prizes won, to give a sense of speed to the prize winning situation at the big prize opening 1154, and to positively generate overflow prizes for the upper limit of game balls that can win prizes in the jackpot game. , etc. can be obtained in the jackpot game.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a game ball is accepted into the first starting port 1152, the first special symbol side lottery is performed, but in this first special symbol side lottery , the probability of "winning" by the big win is higher than the probability of "winning" by the advantageous small win (here, the first advantageous minor win). Therefore, in the game state (normal game state) in which the time saving function does not operate, when the jackpot is won in accordance with the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 1152, the jackpot game is performed, and thus the time saving function is performed. is controlled to shift to a game state (time saving game state) in which is operated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the game state (normal game state) in which the time saving function does not operate, even if a normal hit is obtained in the normal judgment, basically, the second start As described above, the mouth 1153 has a structure that does not accept game balls. According to such a structure, the lottery on the side of the second special symbol, which is put on hold in the game state in which the time saving function operates (time saving game state), is extinguished in the time saving game state. Or, it is carried over at the time of transition control to the normal game state and is consumed in the normal game state.

That is, in this case, basically, unless "winning" is obtained in the first special symbol side lottery when in the normal game state, the time saving game state does not occur, and the second special symbol side lottery Since the lottery on the side of the second special symbol can be positioned as a relatively rare phenomenon, the lottery contents can be set to extremely advantageous game conditions. become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the jackpot game according to the result of the lottery on the side of the first special symbol is performed, the time is reduced over the period until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times. To obtain any one of a big win, a second advantageous small win and a third advantageous small win with a probability of approximately 1/1 in a lottery on the side of a second special pattern while the game state can be continued. Then, it functions as a winning process that enables a game to be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. And, in the time-saving game state (especially when it occurs for the first time), since it is relatively easy to put the second special symbol side lottery (correction process) in a pending state, control to the time-saving game state If it is done, usually, before the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the second advantage small win or the third advantage small win is obtained in the winning process (lottery on the side of the second special symbol). It will happen.

In the small winning game in response to the second advantageous small winning or the third advantageous small winning, as long as the player continues to hit to the right, the game can be played many times in a short opening time. of game balls can be entered into the accessory winning hole 1155, and any one of many game balls must be supplied to the V winning hole 1156, and the other game balls are supplied to the losing hole 1230c. It is as described above (see FIG. 142(c)). That is, in this case, the acceptance probability (probability of machine lottery) to the V winning opening 1156 when the game ball enters the accessory winning opening 1155 is suitably reduced, A jackpot game advantageous to the player can be generated by the entry of the game ball.

Also, as described above, the time saving function is activated after the big win game is performed in response to the fact that either the big win or the second advantageous small win is obtained in the lottery on the side of the second special symbol. It is controlled to the game state (time saving game state), and after the big hit game is performed in response to the third advantageous small hit, the game state (normal game state) where the time saving function does not operate ).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small win is obtained in the lottery, first, prior to the opening of the accessory winning opening 1155, either the V winning opening 1156 or the losing hole 1230c is opened. It is determined in advance whether the game ball is to be guided based on the type of symbol (first disadvantageous small win, second disadvantageous small win, first advantageous small win, second advantageous small win, second 3 advantage small hit).

That is, in general, in a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot game based on the guidance of a game ball to a specific area, the movement of the game ball has a large impact on the game. There is a concern that this may reduce the interest in the game of those who are playing the game properly. Therefore, conventionally, it has been proposed to determine whether or not a fraudulent act has been committed through magnetic detection by a magnetic sensor or vibration detection by a vibration sensor. When judging whether or not an act has been performed, there have been cases where erroneous detection occurs due to the relationship with the threshold for detection, or a fraudulent act is not detected even though it has been performed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, which of the V winning hole 1156 and the losing hole 1230c the game ball is to be guided is determined in advance based on the type of symbol. . On top of this, the game ball is guided to a specific area (V winning opening 1156) even though the determined symbol type determines that the game ball is guided to the losing hole 1230c. In such a case, it is supposed to be externally output in a specific manner.

According to such fraud management based on symbols, only by proceeding with a game corresponding to the type of symbols in a predetermined game control, when a fraudulent act is performed, it is output to the outside in a specific mode. Therefore, erroneous detection or non-detection due to the relationship with the threshold can be preferably avoided.

Incidentally, such an external output is one of the processes of outputting a status signal indicating the gaming status to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer, etc.) in the process of step S16 (output data setting process) described above. Alternatively, it is executed as a display output (for example, an image showing a game history) on the effect display device 1115 through a command output to the peripheral control board 4010 .

For example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 131, if it is determined that there was guidance to the V winning opening 1156 in the process (special control process) of step S14 (YES in step S715, or YES), in the process of step S16 in the timer interrupt process (the same interrupt process), the type of symbol at the time of winning a small hit (the result of the process of step S311) is confirmed.

As a result, when the type of the symbol at the time of winning the small win indicates an advantageous small win (first advantageous small win, second advantageous small win), it is assumed that the big win game is appropriately generated, A process of externally outputting a signal to that effect is performed (step S16).

On the other hand, if the type of the symbol at the time of winning the small win indicates a disadvantageous small win (first disadvantageous small win, second disadvantageous small win), the game proceeds to the V winning port 1156 in terms of control for the progress of the game. If the game ball is guided to the V winning opening 1156 despite the fact that the game ball is prevented from being guided, a process is performed to externally output a signal to that effect. becomes (step S16). However, even in this case, the specific sensor is turned on and the V history flag is turned on in steps S715 and S716 in the small winning game process (FIG. 138). Then, it is confirmed that the V history flag is turned on in the process of step S744, and the process flag is updated to 5 in the process of step S745, so that the jackpot game is executed.

In this case, a notification process for notifying an abnormality may also be performed. However, it is difficult to completely eliminate the possibility that the game ball was guided to the V winning opening 1156 due to a combination of various rare events even though the game was being played properly. It is desirable not to perform the notification process for notifying the abnormality. That is, if the pachinko parlor side checks whether such external output occurs frequently through the management computer, it is possible to find out the above-mentioned fraudulent act.

Further, according to fraud management using such patterns, it is advantageous in that the above-mentioned magnetic sensor and vibration sensor do not necessarily have to be provided. However, in order to confirm whether or not the person who played the game had malicious intent, the above-mentioned magnetic sensor and vibration sensor are additionally prepared, and the detection result of the sensor is also checked to find out the above-mentioned fraudulent act. It is more desirable to

In other words, in this case, the guidance of the game ball to the V winning opening 1156 occurred even though the guidance of the game ball to the V winning opening 1156 was prevented in terms of the control related to the progress of the game. When it is confirmed by the control, the detection by the sensor is confirmed. As a result, when the detection by the sensor has also been made, it is desirable to also carry out a notification process for informing an abnormality that the above-described fraudulent act has been carried out. Alternatively, the detection signal from the sensor may be output to the outside so that the hall side may determine whether or not there is fraudulent activity through the management computer.

On the other hand, when it is realized as a display output on the effect display device 1115, it is desirable to realize it as various game histories shown below, for example.

That is, the type of the determined symbol determines that the game ball is guided to the losing hole 1230c, and the game ball is guided to the specific area (V winning opening 1156) in the game according to the win. is not guided, a display image having the first identification mode appears on the effect display device 1115. - 特許庁Then, the display image having the first identification mode is controlled so as to appear continuously as a history display until the control of the game corresponding to the win is performed again.

On the other hand, the determined symbol type determines that the game ball is guided to a specific area (V winning opening 1156), and the specific area ( When a game ball is guided to the V winning hole 1156), a display image having a second identification mode appears on the performance display device 1115.例文帳に追加Then, the display image having the second identification mode is controlled so as to appear continuously as a history display until the control of the game corresponding to the win is performed again.

On the other hand, although the determined symbol type determines that the game ball is guided to the losing hole 1230c, a specific area (V winning opening 1156) is used in the game according to the win. When the game ball is guided to (when there is a possibility of fraud), the effect display device 1115 is made to display a display image having the third identification mode. Then, the display image having the third identification mode is controlled so as to appear continuously as a history display until the control of the game corresponding to the win is performed again.

On the other hand, although the determined symbol type determines that the game ball is guided to the specific area (V winning opening 1156), the specific area is selected in the game according to the win. When the game ball is not guided to (V winning opening 1156), the effect display device 1115 is caused to display a display image having the fourth identification mode. Then, the display image having the fourth identification mode is controlled so as to appear continuously as the history display until the control of the game corresponding to the win is performed again.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to find out the above-mentioned fraudulent act by history display with four types of identification modes, as well as complaints from the player side (for example, V winning mouth due to defective shooting device) It is expected that the hall side will be able to deal well with such problems as the game ball not being able to enter 1156.

However, in order for the hall to be able to detect the above-mentioned fraudulent activity with more certainty, each time there is a concern about fraud, processing to update the number of times (processing to count the number of times such situations occur) It is more desirable to do

That is, in this case, the peripheral control unit 4140 side performs processing (updating processing) to count up (or count down) the counter value of a predetermined counter each time a situation that may cause the possibility of fraud occurs. Then, based on the counter value updated by such processing, if control is performed to change the display form and its color related to the third identification mode, such a situation that can occur very rarely occurs. It will be possible to check how frequently (number of times) such situations (situations with concerns about fraud) have occurred, and this will allow the hall side to detect the above-mentioned fraudulent acts with greater confidence. become.

In addition, in order to be able to confirm the number of occurrences of possible fraudulent situations over a longer period of time, it is necessary to switch the display image having the third identification mode to the display image having another identification mode. It is desirable that the counter value of the predetermined counter is not reset even if it becomes available, and that it is held until a predetermined operation such as RAM clearing is performed.

In addition, in order to function the lottery on the second special symbol side as a winning process that enables a game to be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of about 100%, the lottery on the second special symbol side is relatively rare. It is important to process the normal symbol side so that it is positioned as an event. Hereinafter, processing on the normal symbol side will be described.

[Regarding normal control processing]
FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal control process (step S15).

Now, in the process of step S2001, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate section 1134, the main control board 4100 is changed as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a, as the processing of step S2010, first executes the gate section passing processing such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal design from the random number counter and storing it in the normal design holding storage area of the RAM 4100e.

Then, in normal control processing, one of the following five process processing is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal symbol normal process (step S2100) in which the normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and a lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. Ordinary design fluctuation time determination processing (step S2200) in which lottery processing etc. are performed for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device 1189 based on the ordinary design fluctuation random number.
3. Ordinary design fluctuation processing (step S2300) to wait until the fluctuation display of the ordinary design in the ordinary design indicator 1189 is stopped.
4. Stop the variable display of the normal symbols so that the normal symbol display 1189 displays the mode of the normal symbol variation control stop determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped. normal design stop processing (step S2400)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal pattern is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "normal pattern hit", the starting port door member 1214 is set to the appearance position (in the case of the variable starting port unit 2210 according to the modification Furthermore, by sliding to the position where the proximity disconnection member 2215 is sunk, a bridging passage that connects the downflow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second start port 1153 (remote island type winning port) is formed. Normal electric accessary product opening process (step S2500)

In addition, the normal design process flag is manipulated to indicate that normal design normal processing (step S2100) should be performed in the process of initializing data stored in various registers and main control built-in RAM 4100e.

FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S2010).

Now, in the processing of step S2001, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate section 1134, the main control board 4100 is changed as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a first acquires the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S2011. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

In the processing of this step S2011, when it is determined that the number of reserved symbols is not the maximum value, the processing of steps S2012 to S2014 below is performed in order to newly suspend the fluctuation display control of the normal symbols. It will be done. That is, first, as the process of step S2012, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S2013, normal random numbers and normal pattern fluctuation random numbers are obtained from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S2014, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

However, in the process of step S2011, when it is determined that the number of reserved symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S2012 to S2014, the variable display control of normal symbols is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal symbol normal processing (step S2100).

When the normal control flag indicates that normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of normal symbols in the pending state based on the counter value by . As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, then as the process of step S2102, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode (for example, normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers) is read from the same RAM 4100e. And next, as the processing of steps S2103 and S2104, while counting down the normal reservation number counter, the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM4100e of the main control MPU4100a Related random numbers (normal random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate section 1134 in order from the first (earmost) area. do. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate section 1134, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is read. , is moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, if the current game state is the time-saving game state (YES in step S2105), selects the normal figure hit determination table (not shown) for time-saving (step S2106), If the current game state is a non-time-saving game state (normal game state) (NO in step S2105), select a non-time-saving normal figure hit determination table (not shown) (step S2107), and select a normal figure hit The determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S2102 of the normal symbol normal process (step S2108).

It should be noted that the normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and the normal figure hit determination table used when the game state is short time and the normal figure hit determination table used when the game state is non-short time. It is provided with a normal figure hit determination table for non-time saving. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the normal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random number is the normal figure hit determination table for time saving and the normal figure hit determination table for non-time saving. In any of the 255 types of normal random numbers, 13 types match the normal pattern per judgment value indicating that they have been elected per normal pattern, and the normal pattern deviation judgment value indicating that 242 types are out of normal pattern The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with . Therefore, when there is a passage of the game ball to the gate portion 1134, it is possible to obtain a normal figure hit with a probability of about 1/20. Control is performed to slide the starting door member 1214 to the appearance position so that a bridging passage connecting with 1153 (remote island type winning opening) is formed.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal game state, the game ball is basically prevented from entering the second start port 1153, while in the time-saving game state is configured to make it easier to enter the game ball into the second start port 1153 than the first start port 1152, and even in the time-saving game state, the big hit game starts after the small win game is started. It is important to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 1153 during the period until the game is started. It may be set as appropriate.

Then, the main control MPU 4100a, as a result of comparing the selected normal pattern hit determination table and the normal random number, when it is determined to be a normal pattern hit (step S2109), that the variation is elected per normal pattern (step S2110), the normal pattern per pattern is determined as a form (normal pattern stop pattern) at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal pattern (step S2112). On the other hand, as a result of the comparison between the selected general pattern per determination table and the normal random number, if it is determined that it is lost, the general pattern loss pattern as a mode of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern (normal pattern stop pattern) Determine (step S2111). And after that, when the above-mentioned normal design process flag is updated (step S2113) so that the process shifts to the normal design fluctuation time determination process (step S2200), this process ends.

[Regarding the basic operation mode of the starting gate door member 1214 when a normal game hit is obtained in the normal game state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is important to basically prevent the game ball from entering the second start hole 1153 in the normal game state. .

Also, as described above, the second starting port 1153 according to this embodiment is a remote island type winning port provided at a position away from the flow-down path in which the game ball can flow down in the game area 1100. is provided. On the other hand, it can appear and disappear by reciprocating in the depth direction with respect to the game area 1100, and when it is at the appearance position of the appearance position and the appearance position, the flow path and the second start port 1153 ( The second starting port 1153 (remote island type winning port) located in a direction (right direction) different from the depth direction is provided as a bridge passage connecting the game ball on the above-mentioned flowing path to the second starting port 1153 (remote island type winning port). By providing the starter door member 1214 (tombolo type movable member) provided to roll (in the case of the variable starter unit 2210 according to the modification, furthermore, the starter door member 1214 and the predetermined link mechanism By providing the proximity disconnecting member 2215 provided so as to be interlocked), it realizes a structure that makes it possible to strictly distinguish between the operation that allows the bridging of the game ball and the operation that does not allow it.

In this regard, in the main control MPU 4100a, the normal game state is shown in FIGS. When a normal figure hit is obtained, the operation time of the starting port door member 1214 is the game ball on the flow-down path in the game area 1100 from the first guide part 1214a. A time (for example, 0.088 seconds) shorter than the winning threshold time required to reach the third guidance section 1214c is always selected. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, each time a normal game hit is obtained, the sliding operation by the start port door member 1214 causes the game ball flow-down path in the game area 1100 and the second start port 1153 (remote island type winning port). A bridging passage (upper surface of the starting port door member 1214) connecting the two will appear. However, this bridging passage (the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214) always disappears before the game ball from the above-mentioned flow-down passage completely crosses over, and slides so as to spill the game ball.

According to such a configuration, basically, in the normal game state, the game ball is not received in the second starting port 1153 by the operation of the starting port door member 1214, but the starting port door member 1214 operates. When doing so, a bridging passage is formed that connects the downflow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second starting port 1153 (remote island type winning port), and the game ball can roll in the bridging passage. As a result, the expectation of winning a prize to the second start port 1153 is naturally increased, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[Regarding the operation mode of the starting gate door member 1214 in the case where the normal figure hit is obtained in the time saving game state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is important to facilitate entry of game balls into the second start hole 1153 in the time-saving gaming state.

In this regard, in the main control MPU4100a, as shown in FIGS. 122-1 and 122-2 (in the case of the variable starting port unit 2210 according to the modification, FIGS. 123-1 and 123-2), the time-saving game state When a normal figure hit is obtained, the operation time of the starting port door member 1214 is the game ball on the flow-down path in the game area 1100 from the first guide part 1214a. A time (for example, 1.5 seconds) that is longer than the winning threshold time required to reach the third guidance section 1214c is always selected. That is, in this case, even in the time-saving gaming state, each time a normal figure hit is obtained, the sliding operation by the starting port door member 1214 causes the game ball to flow down the path in the game area 1100 and the second starting port 1153 (remote island type winning port) A bridging passage (the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214) that connects the two appears. However, in addition to this, if the right-handed hitting is continued, at least one of the game balls from the above flow path (here, the time (1 .5 seconds)) crosses this bridging passage (the upper surface of the starting door member 1214) and is received in the second starting port 1153 (remote island type winning port). The game balls in the passage (upper surface of the starting port door member 1214) are slid so as to be dropped.

According to such a configuration, in the time-saving game state, every time the operation of the starting port door member 1214 is performed, the flow-down path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second starting port 1153 (remote island type winning port) Since the game ball that has completely crossed the connecting bridging passage can be received in the second starting port 1153, the game ball can be easily entered into the second starting port 1153.例文帳に追加

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, at the stage where the retraction of the starting port door member 1214 is started and the winning of the second starting port 1153 is changed to an unfavorable situation, A system that automatically applies a brake to the speed toward the second starting port 1153 by the frictional force corresponding to the contact with the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4) is constructed by the structure. Therefore, in addition to the control related to the operation of the starting door member 1214, such an automatic brake system also increases the certainty of non-winning when the operation that does not allow the bridging of the game ball is performed. Furthermore, even if a relatively long bridging passage is realized as the starter door member 1214, the second starter is started when the starter door member 1214 starts to retreat (displacement from the appearing position to the sunken position). It is possible to improve the immediacy until the ball can no longer be actually entered into the mouth 1153 .

However, as described above, in the case of the variable starting port unit 2210 according to the modification, furthermore, when the starting port door member 1214 is set to the operating state according to the winning per normal figure, the game ball received in the second starting port 1153 determine the number of Then, when the determined number reaches a predetermined specified number, even if there remains time to maintain the operating state, the position where the starting port door member 1214 is sunk from the appearing position, or even close to the position. Control is performed to move the disconnecting member 2215 from the retracted position to the exposed position. According to such control, even if two game balls are supplied in a row, in combination with the configuration of the proximity disconnecting member 2215, the number of game balls to be received in the second start port 1153 can be adjusted in advance. It becomes possible to stay within the defined number (see Fig. 123-2).

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even in the normal game state, the operation time of the starting port door member 1214 is the game ball on the flow-down path in the game area 1100. A bridging time (advantageous game mode) longer than the prize-winning threshold time required from the start of rolling in the first guide portion 1214a to the third guide portion 1214c can be selected, albeit slightly. (For example, the combined probability with the probability of obtaining a normal hit is approximately 1/4000). That is, in this case, by performing an effect that prompts right-handed hitting, the winning to the second start port 1153 occurs with a probability of about 100%, and the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is in a pending state. Therefore, when the winning process (second special symbol lottery) set in the reserved state is completed, a jackpot game will occur with a probability of about 100%.

According to such a configuration, in the normal game state, in addition to the case where a specific result (big hit, advantageous small win) is obtained in the lottery corresponding to the winning of the first start port 1152, the gate member 1134 Even if a specific result (normal hit with a long bridging time selected) is obtained in the determination process (normal determination) according to the passage of the, a jackpot game can occur with a probability of about 100%. It will be possible to play at That is, in this case, the normal determination can be provided with the same function as the lottery corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 1152 .

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a structure in which the gate member 1134 is arranged as a passage port in the path along which the game ball flows down to the first start port 1152. A game ball can flow down so as to satisfy both the starting conditions of a lottery according to the prize winning to the first starting port 1152 and a normal determination having a function equivalent to the lottery. That is, in this case, two lotteries having equivalent functions can be executed without consuming two game balls in order to satisfy execution conditions for the two lotteries. In this case, even if it does not depend on one lottery, it is possible to generate a big win game as long as a specific result is obtained in the other lottery having the same function although the type is different. Therefore, from the player's side, even when it is difficult to obtain a specific result in one of the lotteries, it is difficult for the player to feel distrust, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 98, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the big win game is occurring (big win game state), the game is played to the big winning hole 1154 by hitting to the right. The game progresses by entering the ball, and in the right channel, the gate member 1134 is also arranged as a passage port in the path along which the game ball flows down to the big winning port 1154. It has a structure.

In this regard, when the game ball passes through the gate member 1134, as described above, the determination processing (normal determination) for the normal hit that triggers the operation of the starting port door member 1214 is performed. Determination (ordinary control process (step S15)) is, as is clear from the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 131), the effect of the value of the process flag updated in the special control process (step S14). It has a control structure that executes without receiving.

According to such a configuration, as a result of obtaining a specific result (big hit, advantageous small hit) in the lottery corresponding to the winning of the first start port 1152, in the special control process (step S14) Even when the processing (steps S230, S240) for execution of the big hit game is performed, the determination processing (normal determination) having the same function as the lottery according to the winning to the first start port 1152 is a big hit. This can be continued even during the period in which the game is being played. That is, in this case, during the period in which the big win game is being played, the determination process (normal determination) functions as a lottery to determine whether or not a new big win game other than this can be placed in a special standby state. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the jackpot game is being played.

[Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 146, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs initial setting processing (step S1001). This initial setting process includes a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010, and the like. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initialization process (step S1001) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S1002).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms, and executes steady processing for 2 ms. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed. Along with setting the flag T, a process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter is executed. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and then 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S1004).

In this 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, lamps/LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, etc., based on commands received from the main control board 4100 is executed. When the 16ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502, and steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated each time the 16ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing an example of 16ms steady process executed every 16ms in the sub-main process. In the 16ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the process of steps S1101 to S1106. In command analysis processing in step S1101, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control processing of step S1102, the control processing related to the display effect of the effect display device 1115 is executed based on the acquisition of the variation pattern command and the like from the main control MPU 4100a.

That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140, first, based on the variation pattern command among the various information acquired from the main control MPU 4100a, based on the variation pattern command, the effect table at the time of winning the big win and the (small) at the time of losing the big win Select one of the effect tables (including when winning a prize). In these effect tables, the contents of the display effect on the effect display device 1115 are stored in such a manner that they are associated with each variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbols.

Next, after selecting one of the two effect tables, the peripheral control unit 4140 selects the display effect stored in the selected effect table based on the variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command. Select one of the contents (display effect pattern).

After the content of the display effect (display effect pattern) is thus selected, the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects the result and type of the jackpot lottery indicated by the symbol information command among the various information acquired from the main control MPU 4100a. , the process of determining the symbol combination of the decorative symbols to be derived and displayed by the effect display device 1115 is performed.

For example, when the content of the display effect (display effect pattern) is selected from the effect table at the time of winning the big win, the big win is won as the symbol combination of the decorative symbols based on the type of the big win indicated by the symbol information command. A special symbol combination (a symbol combination in which all three red or blue decorative symbols appear as numbers) is selected, which indicates what has been done and its type. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since only one type of jackpot is prepared for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the type is not indicated by the color of the decorative symbol. do not have.

On the other hand, in the case of selecting the content of the display effect (display effect pattern) from the effect table at the time of the failure of the big win when winning the small win even though the big win is lost, the small win indicated by the pattern information command is selected. Based on the type, as the pattern combination of the decorative patterns, a pattern combination at the time of the small win showing that the small prize is won (a pattern combination appearing with a number in which all three decorative patterns are not aligned) is selected. However, when the type of the small win is a specific type that is disadvantageous to the player (disadvantageous small win), a display mode such as a predetermined chance (a combination of three decorative patterns appearing in numbers). You may make it appear the design combination with.

On the other hand, at the time of losing the jackpot, when the content of the display effect (display effect pattern) is selected from the effect table at the time of the failure of the big win, a special pattern combination is used as the pattern combination of the above-mentioned decorative patterns. selects a pattern combination at the time of different reach loss (a pattern combination that appears with (identical) numbers in which only two decorative patterns in a specific row are aligned among the three). In addition, when the content of the display effect (display effect pattern) is selected from the effect table at the time of losing the big win at the time of losing, the pattern at the time of losing is different from the special pattern combination as the pattern combination of the above-mentioned decorative patterns. Select a combination (symbol combination appearing in numbers where all three decorative patterns are not aligned).

In addition, the peripheral control MPU4140a, among the various information acquired from the main control MPU4100a, based on various commands (small hit start command, big hit start command, etc.) related to the control of the winning game (small winning game, big winning game) Then, either the performance table for the small winning game or the performance table for the big winning game is selected. In these performance tables, the content of the display performance (display performance pattern) in the performance display device 1115 is stored so as to be associated with each scene (progress) of the small winning game and the big winning game. Next, the peripheral control unit 4140 selects one of the two production tables, and then, based on the progress of the winning game (small winning game, big winning game), the display production stored in the selected production table. Select one of the contents (display effect pattern).

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment performs control related to the preceding effect (prefetching effect) for the big hit lottery that is in the pending state.

That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first, among various information acquired from the main control MPU 4100a, precedence such as a variation pattern precedence determination command, a type precedence determination command, a hold precedence determination command, etc. related to the control of precedence effect When the judgment time command is acquired, the storage area according to the number of reservations (value of the number of reservations counter) and the type of special design (first special design, second special design) indicated by the reservation preceding judgment time command among those commands (Sub-side first special symbol reservation storage area, sub-side second special symbol reservation storage area of peripheral control unit 4140), above-obtained preceding determination command (variation pattern preceding determination command, type preceding determination command, pending Precedence judgment time command) is stored.

More specifically, the sub-side special symbol reservation storage area (sub-side first special symbol reservation storage area, sub-side second special symbol reservation storage area) has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the main control The information indicated by the preceding judgment time command (variation pattern preceding judgment time command, type preceding judgment time command, pending preceding judgment time command) indicating each result in the preceding judgment processing on the MPU 4100a side is the first (first) Store in order from the area. When the information indicated by the preceding determination command is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, when the preceding determination command is acquired, the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area is stored. The information indicated by the preceding command at the time of preceding determination is stored in the area. Then, when the condition for starting the variable display based on the precedence determination command stored in the first storage area is established, the information indicated by the precedence determination command stored in the first storage area is read, and the n-th memory area is read out. The information stored in the (n=2 to 4) storage areas is moved to the (n-1)th (n=2 to 4) storage areas (shift processing). As a result, the order in which the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is reserved is memorized so as to be identifiable.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, jackpot start command, etc.) from the main control MPU 4100a, and is based on the information indicated by the preceding determination time command stored at that time. We will be performing.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs information related to the content of the display effect selected as described above to the liquid crystal control section 4150 as the display command. Also, at this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a transmits information (commands) generated in response to the selection of such display effect content (display effect pattern) to the lamp drive board 3041, the motor drive board 3045, and the sound source IC 4140c. etc., as appropriate.

Also, in the sound control process in step S1103, control processes related to the speakers 130, 222, and 262 are executed. In the lamp control process of step S1104, the control process related to the lamps/LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S1105, a process of transmitting a lamp/LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 3041, and the like are executed. In the random number update process of step S1106, the process of updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1102) is executed.

Note that the processes of steps S1101 to S1106 in the 16ms steady process are completed within 16ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately started from the beginning (command from the analysis process) is not executed. That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1102 that the 16 ms elapsed flag has been set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. to start.

In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1106) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing of updating the random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the various random numbers may be updated in either one or both of the loop processing and 16 ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

[Playability of pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment]
FIG. 148 is a time chart showing an example of the flow of the game when the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment progresses the game based on the above-described novel game characteristics. Various types of processing when a game is played on the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be summarized below.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as described above, in addition to the right flow path, the gate member 1134 is also installed in the path along which the game ball flows down to the first starting port 1152 of the left flow path. is provided as a passage port (see FIG. 98). However, in the normal game state, as a result of the normal determination according to the passage of the game ball through the gate member 1134, the probability that it will be extremely rare (the probability of obtaining a normal hit and the selection probability is approximately 1 /4000), a bridging time longer than the winning threshold time is selected. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to hit the game ball aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500, which is the side where the first start port 1152 is provided, instead of the second start port 1153. be done.

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, when a normal hit is obtained in the normal determination according to the passage of the game ball to the gate member 1134, only a time longer than the above-described winning threshold time is selected. sell. The gate member 1134 in the right channel and the gate member 1134 in the left channel are provided so that the gate member 1134 in the right channel has a higher probability of receiving a game ball. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the game ball aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, which is the side where the second starting port 1153 is provided (right hit).

Under such game conditions, assuming that a normal game is to be played (normal game state), the player hits left and the game ball passes through the gate member 1134. and acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 1152 (normal game).

Here, when a game ball passes through the gate member 1134, normal determination is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (here, 4). The normal determination thus suspended is processed in accordance with the order suspended when the starting condition for the normal symbol is established (FIG. 145: YES in step S2101). However, as described above, in a situation in which a normal game should be played (normal game state), basically, as a result of the normal judgment, a bridge time longer than the prize-winning threshold time is not selected. Therefore, although the start door member 1214 can be operated when a short bridging time is selected, such a game related to normal determination is repeatedly performed without giving the opportunity to win a prize to the second start port 1153. becomes.

More specifically, the normal pattern is varied by the variation time corresponding to the fact that the result of the normal determination is a loss, and when the variation time elapses, a stop pattern corresponding to the loss appears. Control is repeated. However, as a type of such "losing", in addition to the loss of the normal hit, the normal hit with a short transfer time is selected as "199/4000 (the probability of obtaining a normal hit and the short transfer time are selected. Since it can be obtained with the probability of "synthetic probability with the probability)", after the stop pattern corresponding to "normal hit with short bridging time is selected" appears, the start door member 1214 is set for a short bridging time. There may also be additional controls to activate.

On the other hand, when the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 1152 occurs, the first special symbol lottery is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (here, four). The first special symbol lottery thus suspended is digested according to the order of suspension when the starting condition on the first special symbol side is established (FIG. 134: YES in step S302). However, as shown in FIG. 141, the result of the first special symbol lottery includes "big win" and "advantageous small win (first advantageous small win)" as a win (winning) for generating a big win game. However, the probability of getting a big hit is as low as "1/400", and the probability of getting an advantageous small hit (multiple value of the small hit probability and the probability that the advantageous small hit is selected in the type judgment) , the probability is generally very low, such as "1/8571". Therefore, such a game related to the first special symbol lottery is repeated earnestly without obtaining a win (winning) for generating a big win game.

More specifically, the first special design is varied by the variation time determined based on the result of "failure", and when the variation time elapses, the stop design corresponding to "failure" appears. The control at the time of losing is repeatedly performed. However, as a type of such "failure", in addition to losing, a disadvantageous small hit can be obtained with a probability of "1/175", so a stop pattern corresponding to "failure" appears In some cases, the control related to the execution of the small win game at the time of the disadvantageous small win may be further performed after the game has been made.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an "advantageous small hit" is obtained, a game It is possible to start a big win game by just playing (continuing the right-handed game) so that the state where the ball exists (a prize waiting state) is maintained. is obtained, even if a game ball wins in the accessory winning opening 1155, the accessory winning opening opening and closing member 1221 is set so that none of the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 As described above, it is designed to be opened and closed.

In addition, as described above, when the second disadvantageous small win is obtained among the disadvantageous small wins, the advantageous small win (the first advantageous small win ) is obtained, control is performed to operate the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 in an opening mode similar to or similar to that obtained. At this time, the effect display device 1115 may also perform an expectation effect that makes the player aware of the possibility of obtaining an advantageous small hit.

And, as a result of repeating such a game (a game that causes the passage of the game ball to the gate member 1134 and the reception of the game ball to the first start port 1152), the first special symbol lottery Assuming that the big hit (1/400) is finally obtained as a result, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (Fig. 128: step S402a), and the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern is set in the variation timer. After that (FIG. 128: step S410), the variation of the first special symbol is started.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 148, when timing t11 at which the variable timer times up arrives, the stop symbol at the time of the big win appears, thereby ending the variable state of the first special symbol. After the stop pattern at the time of the big win appears, an interval period before the start of the big win game is generated, and execution of the big win game is started based on the lapse of the interval period before the start of the big win game.

In the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, only the 15R time-saving jackpot can be obtained as a jackpot type, so the above-described round game is repeated 15 times. The jackpot game is finished when the win is made. Then, after that, the end interval of the big win game is generated, and when the end interval period of the big win game has passed, the time saving function is operated to control the transition to the time saving game state (timing t12).

However, as described above, when the jackpot game is performed according to the lottery results of the second special symbol side (second big win, second advantage small win, third advantage small win), approximately 1000 game balls are acquired. On the other hand, if a jackpot game is played according to the lottery result on the first special symbol side (first big win, first advantage small win), it is difficult to acquire a game ball, or several dozen Since it is possible to acquire only about 1 game ball (a relatively small number of game balls than the second special symbol side), the big hit game ends in a relatively short period of time and the transition control to the time saving game state is performed. It will be done.

In addition, as described above, in the first special symbol lottery, it is rare that the first advantageous small win is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery. Similarly, when a big win game is generated through a small win game corresponding to the winning of such a first advantageous small win (based on the reception of the game ball in the V winning opening 1156), the first advantageous small win is obtained. Regardless of the game state when the winning game is finished, the shift control to the time saving game state is performed by activating the time saving function when the end interval period of the big hit game has passed (timing t12).

In addition, as described above, in such a situation where a normal game should be performed (normal game state), although it is an extremely rare event (1/4000), the reception of the game ball to the first start port 1152 Instead of the result of the lottery according to the lottery (normal judgment) according to the passage of the game ball to the gate member 1134 in the flow-down route to the first start port 1152, a specific result (a long bridging time is selected Even if a normal win is won), the big win game is played with a probability of approximately 100% only by proceeding with the game according to the performance instruction to the effect that the player should hit to the right.

More specifically, when the game is progressed according to the performance instruction to the effect that the player should hit to the right, first, a prize is awarded to the second start port 1153, and the second special symbol lottery is put on hold. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the lottery (second special symbol lottery) on the side of the second starting port 1153 can be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. Acting as a process has been described above. Therefore, when the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) set in the pending state is completed, the jackpot game is performed with a probability of approximately 100%.

Here, in the winning process (second special symbol lottery), as shown in FIG. 141, any one of the second big win, the second advantageous small win, and the third advantageous small win is obtained as a result. becomes. However, among these, when the big hit game is performed in response to the fact that either the second big hit or the second advantageous small hit is obtained, the transition control to the time-saving game state is performed (timing t12), so the big hit The probability that the shift control to the time-saving game state is performed when the end interval period of the game has passed is slightly higher than 50%.

In addition, when the big hit game is performed in response to the third advantage small hit is obtained as a result of the above-mentioned winning process (second special symbol lottery), the transition control to the time saving game state is not performed, and the above-mentioned The game is restarted from the situation where the normal game should be played (normal game state).

In this way, when the normal game is played, in addition to the case where a specific result (big hit, small profit) is obtained in the lottery corresponding to the winning at the first start port 1152, the gate member 1134 Even if a specific result (ordinary hit with a long bridging time selected) is obtained in the determination processing (normal determination) according to passage through the passage, a jackpot game can occur with a probability of about 100%. It will be possible to play like this. That is, in this case, the normal determination can be provided with the same function as the lottery corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 1152 .

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a structure in which the gate member 1134 is arranged as a passage port in the path along which the game ball flows down to the first start port 1152. A game ball can flow down so as to satisfy both the starting conditions of a lottery according to the prize winning to the first starting port 1152 and a normal determination having a function equivalent to the lottery. That is, in this case, two lotteries having equivalent functions can be executed without consuming two game balls in order to satisfy execution conditions for the two lotteries. In this case, even if it does not depend on one lottery, it is possible to generate a big win game as long as a specific result is obtained in the other lottery having the same function although the type is different. Therefore, from the player's side, even when it is difficult to obtain a specific result in one of the lotteries, it is difficult for the player to feel distrust, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which a big win game is occurring (big win game state), another new big win game is put into a special standby state. A lottery will be held to see if it is possible. However, among the events that cause the occurrence of a jackpot game in a gaming situation where a normal game should be played, the event that is most likely to cause a jackpot game is that a jackpot is obtained in the first special symbol lottery (1/400). . Then, when a big hit game occurs as a result of such an event (obtaining a big hit in the first special symbol lottery), the big win game ends in a relatively short period of time and the shift control to the time saving game state is performed. What is done is also mentioned above.

Therefore, normally, during the first jackpot game (timings t11 to t12) after the end of the game situation in which such a normal game should be performed, a new jackpot game different from this is placed in a special standby state. However, the control to shift to the time-saving game state for the first time after the end of the game situation in which the normal game should be performed is performed while the second special symbol lottery in the pending state does not exist. becomes (timing t12).

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as one of its purposes, if it is possible to temporarily hold the random number for the second special symbol (probability processing) up to a predetermined number as a hold state, the hold For several minutes, every time a big win game is played (every time a hold is canceled), a big win game can be continuously generated regardless of whether the game is controlled to the normal game state or the time-saving game state. It may provide special playability such as. And, in order to realize such a special game property, the lottery (second special symbol lottery) on the side of the second starting port 1153 is made possible so that a big hit game can occur with a probability of about 100%. It has also been described above that it functions as processing.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as partially enlarged in FIG. When the timing t12 to be performed arrives, the second special symbol lottery in the pending state basically does not exist. A game is provided in which the random numbers (probability processing) for the two special symbols are easily retained up to a predetermined number.

That is, at the timing t12, the possibility that the second special symbol lottery exists as a pending state is low, but the first special symbol lottery that is placed in a pending state when the normal game is in the gaming situation. It is very likely that it exists. In the time-saving gaming state, if such a pending situation (a situation where there is a pending only on the first special symbol lottery side) is realized, usually (as a result of the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot game occurs with an extremely low probability ), as shown in a partially enlarged view in FIG. 148, the time required to digest the game (symbol fluctuation time, etc.) according to the first special symbol lottery in the pending state, and the game is digested Suspending the winning process (second special symbol lottery) over two times, the time required for digestion of the game according to the newly suspended winning process (second special symbol lottery) state, which makes it possible to realize a game property that makes it easy to put a relatively large number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) in a pending state (double as the first first-time privilege game top-up games).

On the other hand, when the time-saving game state occurs while the above-mentioned special game properties are provided, as shown in a partially enlarged view in FIG. It often already exists as a state. Therefore, even if the first special symbol lottery exists as a pending state, the winning processing (second special symbol lottery) is digested before this, and the small winning game (rare) according to the winning of the advantageous small winning Then, a jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot occurs. And as described above, after the accessory winning opening 1155 is opened by the small winning game, it is difficult to accept the second start opening 1152. A new winning process (second special symbol lottery) can be put on hold only within one time of symbol fluctuation time according to the second special symbol lottery), and it is held compared to the above-mentioned game situation. A game that is difficult to put into a state is provided.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in a partially enlarged view in FIG. It is set so that the time longer than the time required for the symbol variation on the second special symbol lottery side is easily selected. That is, in this case, at the time of the initial transition to the state where special game characteristics are provided (situation where only the first special symbol lottery side has a hold), such a relatively long time (the first special symbol lottery side The time required for pattern fluctuation) can be provided, thereby realizing a game property that makes it easy to put a relatively large number of winning processes (second special pattern lottery) on hold (the second first-time privilege super top-up game as a game).

In addition, in favorably creating such a game (super-additional game), regarding the pattern fluctuation on the first special symbol lottery side when in the time saving game state, the number of the first special symbol lottery in the pending state Regardless, it is desirable to set so that the time (expected value) longer than the time (expected value) selected when the symbol variation on the second special symbol lottery side is performed is likely to be selected.

By the way, it is possible that the first special symbol lottery does not exist as a state of suspension at the time when the first shift to the state in which the special game property is provided is made. However, in this case, the player first starts the symbol variation on the first special symbol lottery side by striking left. After that, by playing a game so as to put the winning process (second special symbol lottery) in a pending state by hitting to the right, it is possible to play a game under the above-mentioned two initial privilege games.

According to these configurations, when the time-saving game state occurs for the first time after the game situation in which the normal game should be performed is completed, relatively many winning processes (second special symbol lottery) can be put on hold. become able to. Then, the number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) set in the reserved state in this way continues the big win game regardless of whether the control is performed in the normal game state or the time-saving game state every time the reservation is digested. A special game property such as being able to generate by doing is created.

That is, now, assuming that the second special symbol lottery for four times is put in a pending state through the above-described two first-time bonus games, as shown in FIG. 148,
・If the second special symbol lottery, which is the earliest of the second special symbol lotteries, is digested, after the symbol fluctuation time according to the second special symbol lottery has passed, the lottery will normally The corresponding small winning game (timing t13 to t14) and the big winning game (timing t14 to t15) are sequentially performed,
・After that, when the second special symbol lottery with the second earliest digestion order among those second special symbol lotteries is digested, after the symbol fluctuation time according to the second special symbol lottery has passed (timing t15 ~ t16), usually, small winning game (timing t16 ~ t17) according to the lottery, and big winning game (timing t17 ~ t18) will be performed sequentially,
・Furthermore, if the second special symbol lottery, which is the third in the order of digestion, is digested after that, after the symbol fluctuation time according to the second special symbol lottery has passed (timing t18 to t19), usually, a small winning game (timings t19 to t20) according to the lottery, and a big winning game (timings t20 to t21) are sequentially performed,
・Furthermore, if the second special symbol lottery, which is the fourth in order of digestion (latest in order of digestion) among those second special symbol lotteries, is digested, the pattern changes according to the second special symbol lottery. After the elapse of time (timings t21 to t22), usually, a small winning game (timings t22 to t23) and a big winning game (timings t23 to t24) corresponding to the lottery are sequentially performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the four second special symbol lotteries are put on hold, each time the four second special symbol lotteries are consumed, they are canceled. Regardless of the type of game state at the time (regardless of whether it is controlled to the normal game state or the time-saving game state), it is possible to continuously generate a big hit game (special game property ).

For example, in the first time-saving game state (timing t12 to t13), when the second special symbol lottery with the earliest digestion order of the second special symbol lottery is digested, the third advantage small hit will be obtained. At the timing t13 after the symbol variation corresponding to the third advantageous small win is performed, the control (steps S190, S210) for the small winning game corresponding to the third advantageous small win is started. . And, in the small-hit game corresponding to the third advantageous small-hit, as shown in FIG. As long as the game is played (continuing the right-handed game) so that the state in which the game ball exists (a winning waiting state) is maintained, a jackpot game will occur at timing t14 with a probability of approximately 100%.

In this respect, at the timing t15 when the big win game corresponding to the third advantageous small win is finished, the control for generating the normal game state is performed. However, at the time when this timing t15 arrives, the second special symbol lottery for three times out of the second special symbol lottery for four times that has been put on hold through the above-described two first-time bonus games is still left as a pending state. Therefore, regardless of the game state, the second special symbol lottery that has the earliest digestion order among the three second special symbol lotteries (the second special symbol lottery for four times that has been put on hold through the first privilege game The second special symbol lottery having the second earliest order of execution among them is completed, and the second big winning game can be continuously generated with a probability of approximately 100%.

In addition, regarding the time required for the symbol variation according to the second special symbol lottery when in the normal game state, in addition to being able to generate a big hit game with a probability of about 100% (game result (In addition to being decided), there is no game / performance that allows the second special symbol lottery to be newly put on hold, so regardless of the number of pending second special symbol lotteries, other It is desirable to select the shortest time compared to the time required for pattern variation.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 148, at timing t15, the second special symbol lottery (4 Even if the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, which is the second fastest in the second special symbol lottery for the batch) is digested, the above-mentioned third advantageous small win will be obtained, and the third advantageous small win will be obtained. At the timing t16 after the pattern variation is performed, the control (steps S190, S210) for the small winning game corresponding to the third advantageous small winning is started. And, similarly, in the small winning game corresponding to the third advantageous small winning, as shown in FIG. As long as the game is played (continuing the right-handed game) so that the state where the game ball exists in the moving area (a prize waiting state) is maintained, a jackpot game occurs with a probability of about 100% at timing t17. It will happen.

In this respect, even at the timing t18 when the big win game corresponding to the third advantageous small win is finished, the control for generating the normal game state is performed. However, even when this timing t18 arrives, the second special symbol lottery for two out of the four second special symbol lotteries that have been put on hold through the two first-time bonus games described above is still on hold. Therefore, regardless of the game state, the second special symbol lottery with the earliest digestion order of the two second special symbol lotteries (the second of the four times held through the first privilege game Only by completing the second special symbol lottery which is the third fastest among the special symbol lotteries, the third big winning game can be continuously generated with a probability of approximately 100%.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 148, at timing t18, the second special symbol lottery with the earliest digestion order of the two second special symbol lotteries (4 reserved through the first privilege game When the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery), which is the third in the order of digestion, is digested out of the second special symbol lottery for the batch, the second advantage small hit is obtained, and the second advantage small win is obtained. At timing t19 after the symbol variation is performed, the control (steps S190, S210) for the small winning game corresponding to the second advantageous small winning is started. And even if it is a small hit game corresponding to the second advantageous small hit, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), the upper surface (specific rolling A jackpot game occurs with a probability of about 100% at timing t20 as long as the game is played (continues the right-handed game) so that the state where the game ball exists in the area (a prize waiting state) is maintained. becomes.

In this respect, at the timing t21 when the big win game corresponding to the second advantageous small win is finished, the control for generating the time saving game state is performed. In other words, in this case, as a result of the normal determination, a bridge time longer than the threshold time for winning is always selected. , can function as a chance state in which the number of jackpot games that are continuously performed can be added (the second special symbol lottery is newly put on hold), and the game interest can be improved. become.

However, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, each time a time-saving game state occurs according to any result of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state, the winning process (second Special symbol lottery) is to be controlled to have variation in the number of new additions as a pending state.

That is, at the timing t21, one second special symbol lottery is still left in the pending state among the four second special symbol lotteries that have been put in the pending state through the above-described two first-time privilege games. Therefore, the time-saving game state that occurs at timing t21 is the second special symbol lottery in the pending state (the second special symbol lottery of the four second special symbol lotteries held in the pending state through the first privilege game. Special pattern lottery) will be continued only during the period during which one pattern variation is performed.

Therefore, in such a chance state (time-saving gaming state), through the setting (steps S402, S404) for the length of the symbol fluctuation time according to the second special symbol lottery when in the time-saving gaming state, the winning process ( Two or more game balls can be accepted in the second starting port 1153 during the period from the digestion of the second special symbol lottery) to the start of the jackpot game (two jackpot games can be added). ), not even one game ball is received in the second starting port 1153 from the end of the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) to the start of the jackpot game despite being in the time-saving game state. It is possible to

In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 148, at timing t21, only one second special symbol lottery is left as a pending state (out of the four second special symbol lotteries that are held in a pending state through the first privilege game When the second special symbol lottery with the slowest digestion order) is digested, a big hit game occurs as a fluctuation time despite the occurrence of a time-saving gaming state while special game characteristics are provided. A short variation time (unfavorable variation time in which the expected value of acceptance is less than 0.5) is selected during which not even one game ball is accepted in the second start port 1153.

Then, at the timing t22 after the pattern variation with the short variation time is performed, the control (steps S190, S210) for the small winning game is started. In addition, the time saving function operates even during the period in which the small winning game is performed, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the period from the start of the small winning game to the end (the start of the big winning game) As described above, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 1153 until the ball is started. Therefore, at the timing t23, the small winning game ends while the pending winning process (the second special symbol lottery) does not exist, and the big winning game occurs.

That is, in this case, even at the timing t24 when the big hit game thus generated ends, basically, the winning process (second special symbol lottery) which is in the pending state does not exist. Therefore, at this timing t24, it is very important for the player whether the normal game state or the time-saving game state occurs.

For example, at timing t24, the time-saving game state (the result of the second special symbol lottery with the slowest digestion order among the four second special symbol lotteries held through the first privilege game is a big hit, or a second advantage small win When ) occurs, as shown in the upper side of FIG. Since it is in a gaming situation in which the first special symbol lottery is completed, it is possible to play a game under the above-described two first-time bonus games. That is, in this case, it is possible to put a relatively large number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) on hold, and the number of holdings is the same as the number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) held in this way. It is possible to regenerate a special game property such that a big win game can be continuously generated regardless of whether the game is controlled to the normal game state or the time-saving game state each time the game is completed.

Moreover, at timing t24, since there is no winning process (second special symbol lottery) that is in a pending state, a maximum of four winning processes (second special symbol lottery) are newly suspended. It is possible. That is, in this case, as the number of winning processing (second special symbol lottery) remaining as a pending state decreases, the time-saving gaming state (a state where a winning chance of holding a winning lottery can be obtained) is controlled. The value (reversibility) is increased, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game when the situation becomes disadvantageous to the player.

That is, now, assuming that many second special symbol lotteries are put on hold through the above-mentioned two initial bonus games, as shown in FIG. When the second special symbol lottery is digested, after the symbol fluctuation time according to the second special symbol lottery has passed, usually, a small hit game (timing t25 to t26) according to the lottery, and a big hit game ( Timing t26-) are performed sequentially.

On the other hand, at timing t24, the result of the second special symbol lottery with the slowest digestion order among the four second special symbol lotteries held in the normal game state (the second special symbol lottery held through the first privilege game) is the third advantageous small win. When there is) occurs, as shown in the lower side of FIG. 148, there is no winning process (second special symbol lottery) that is held and Special symbol lottery) cannot be newly put on hold.

In addition, when the second advantageous small hit or the third advantageous small hit is obtained as a result of the successful processing (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state, in the small winning game according to the advantageous small win, As shown in FIG. 142(d), the state (winning waiting state) in which the game ball exists on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is maintained. As long as the game is played (continue the right-handed game), a big hit game can be generated with a probability of about 100%. After the big winning game is played, a game state corresponding to the type of the advantageous small winning is generated.

However, in the small-hit game corresponding to the advantageous small-hit, if the right-handed game is not continued and the game ball is not received in the V winning opening 1156, the big-hit game does not occur, and the above-mentioned winning process (second special The next lottery is executed while the game state at the time when the symbol lottery) is completed is maintained.

By the way, as described above, the jackpot game according to the result of the second special symbol lottery is performed over a relatively long period in which approximately 1000 prizes can be obtained. Therefore, each big hit game (timing t14-t15, timing t17-t18, timing t20-t21, timing t23-t24) according to the second special symbol lottery for four times held through the two first-time privilege games described above In , since a large number of game balls heading for the big winning opening 1154 will pass through the gate member 1134 so as to generate about 1000 prizes, a new big winning game different from this will be put on special standby. The possibility of being able to make a state is relatively high.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second special symbol lottery functions as a winning process that enables a game to be played so that a big win game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. Therefore, when acceptance to the second starting port 1153 is permitted during the period in which the jackpot game is being played, another new jackpot game can be brought into a state of special standby.

In this regard, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, when many game balls heading for the big winning opening 1154 pass through the gate member 1134 during the period in which the jackpot game is executed, the gate member 1134 Determination processing (normal determination) according to passage is performed as a lottery to determine whether or not a new big win game different from the big win game being executed can be placed in a special standby state. Then, when it is decided to put another new jackpot game in a special standby state during the period when the jackpot game is being played (normal hit in which a long bridging time is selected as a result of normal If you win), in parallel with the process (step S14) for executing the jackpot game, by performing the process (step S14) of operating the start door member 1214 for a long bridging time, to the second start port 1153 allow for the acceptance of

According to such a configuration, every time a game ball is shot toward the game area during the period in which the jackpot game is played, the shot game ball gives an opportunity to win a prize (big prize opening 1154). ) and an opportunity to execute a lottery as to whether or not a new jackpot game can be placed in a special standby state can be obtained. Therefore, the game value associated with the launching of the game ball during the period in which the jackpot game is being played is enhanced, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

In particular, regarding the lottery to determine whether or not a new jackpot game can be placed in a special standby state, since it is possible to acquire the opportunity to perform the drawing even between rounds in the jackpot game, conventionally, the game Even between rounds in a jackpot game in which the decline in interest cannot be avoided, the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed by increasing the game value associated with the launch of the game ball.

Here, when it is decided to put another new big win game into a state of special standby while the big win game is being played, the control for opening the big winning hole 1154 is performed. Among them, an effect may be performed to encourage the game ball to enter the newly opened second starting port 1153 over a long bridging time. However, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a structure in which the game balls flowing down the flow path to the big winning opening 1154 are received in the second starting opening 1153 where the starting door member 1214 operates. (See FIG. 98), it is possible to put another new big win game into a special standby state only by continuing the game (right-handed hitting) that completes the big win game as usual.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first start port 1152 is arranged so that only the game ball flowing down the left flow path when the game area 1100 is hit to the left can be received. I decided to set it up. However, the first starting port 1152 is arranged at a position where it is possible to receive the game ball flowing down the right channel when hitting to the right, or it is arranged on the left channel side and the right channel side. You may make it each arrange|position. According to such a configuration, when a right-handed game is played while the above-described special game situation is provided, the game ball is also accepted in the first start port 1152, so the first start The pending state of the lottery (first special symbol lottery) on the mouth 1152 side can be preferably maintained. That is, in this case, when the holding of the second special symbol lottery is interrupted in the time-saving game state, it is possible to smoothly shift to the game under the above-mentioned two initial privilege games.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a normal game is played, a specific result (big win, small advantageous win) is obtained by a lottery according to the winning at the first start port 1152. In addition to the case where a specific result (normal hit in which a long bridging time is selected) is obtained in the judgment processing (normal judgment) according to passage through the gate member 1134, approximately 100% A game is made possible so that a big win game can occur with a probability of . In view of such a configuration, the first starting port 1152 and the game (first special symbol lottery) according to the winning of this do not necessarily have to be provided. That is, in this case, as much as the processing related to the first special symbol lottery is omitted, the specific result (normal per which long bridging time is selected) in the determination processing (normal determination) according to the passage to the gate member 1134 It is possible to set the probability of obtaining a relatively high value, and thereby put a new big win game in a special standby state during the period when the big win game is being played. can be determined more frequently.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the lottery (second special symbol lottery) on the side of the second starting port 1153 can be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. When the second special symbol lottery is performed, either the big hit or the advantageous small hit is always obtained (see FIG. 141(a)). However, since it is conceivable that there may be a request to include a loss that does not correspond to either a big win or an advantageous small win as a condition related to game design, for example, the probability value of getting a big win, or You may make it possible to obtain a loss with the following probability values. That is, even if a loss is obtained with such an extremely low probability (for example, 1/400), when the second special symbol lottery is performed, either the big hit or the advantageous small win is about 100. %, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment can be suitably realized.

The probability (approximately 100%) of obtaining either the big hit or the advantageous small hit is, for example, a probability of 99% or more (more preferably, when the first decimal place is rounded off when displayed as a percentage, 100% It is desirable to set the value as the probability that the probability of becoming .

Also, if the probability of obtaining an advantageous small win is set to a value of approximately 100%, the lottery result does not necessarily have to be a big win.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, when a normal hit is obtained as a result of the determination processing (normal determination) according to passage through the gate member 1134, the winning threshold time Although the longest bridging time is always selected, the long bridging time may be selected with a predetermined probability. Also, the normal winning probability may be appropriately changed, and the normal winning may always be won every time the normal determination is performed.

In addition, it is desirable to set the symbol variation time corresponding to the normal determination to be shorter than the shooting interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball. In particular, if the pattern variation time corresponding to the normal judgment in the normal game state is set as a time shorter than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds), the normal judgment reaches the upper limit of suspension. Since such a situation can be suppressed, it is possible to make a normal determination each time a game ball is passed through the gate member 1134 . That is, in this case, it is possible to increase the frequency of determining that a new big win game other than the big win game is placed in the special standby state during the period in which the big win game is being played.

Also, each time the game ball passes through the gate member 1134, in order to make it possible to execute the normal judgment more reliably, the sum of the symbol fluctuation time according to the normal judgment and the bridging time shorter than the winning threshold time It is desirable to set the time to be shorter than the game ball shooting interval (0.6 seconds). That is, in this case, until a bridge time longer than the winning threshold time is selected as a result of normal determination, normal determination can be performed for the number of game balls that have been shot, so that a big hit can be achieved. It is possible to maximize the frequency of determining that a new jackpot game different from this is placed in a special standby state during the period in which the game is played.

Further, in the above embodiment, the jackpot game is started when the game ball is received in the V winning port 1156, but there is an advantageous control when the game ball is received in the V winning port 1156. As long as it is performed, it does not necessarily have to start a big hit game. For example, while the jackpot game is being performed, the opportunity to enter the ball into the role winning opening 1155 is given, and the game ball entering the role winning opening 1155 is accepted in the V winning opening 1156. It is also possible to change the setting of the probability of winning a big hit to a higher value.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small winning game is performed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery, by positively generating an overflow winning a prize, a game ball that can win a prize in a small winning game The number of game balls exceeding the upper limit value (maximum of 10) of can be habitually entered into the internal area of the prize winning port 1155, and such excellent winning performance allows each of the above small wins. Even when the game ball is surely guided to the V winning opening 1156 in the regulation of the game, the machine lottery probability can be set to be lower than approximately 1/10. According to such a configuration, even if the result of the first special symbol lottery does not necessarily include a small win, it is desirable in that a machine lottery probability set to be generally lower than 1/10 can be realized. However, if the result of the first special symbol lottery includes a small win, the probability value lower than 1/10 is only the machine lottery probability when the small win game is performed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery. may not necessarily be realized, and a probability value lower than 1/10 may be realized by synthesizing with the machine lottery probability when a small winning game is performed according to the result of the first special symbol lottery. . That is, in this case, it is possible to set the machine lottery probability higher than approximately 1/10 when a small winning game is performed according to the result of the two special symbol lottery.

[Re-description of the inner area of the prize winning port 1155]
The game ball T received in the accessory winning opening 1155 is sent to the side of the upper opening 1238b opened in the peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer circumference of the rotating body 1236, and when the game ball T reaches the upper opening 1238b, the rotating body When the receiving portion 1236a of 1236 is located in the accommodation position facing upward, the game ball T is received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 through the upper opening 1238b, and in that state, the rotating body 1236 rotates and receives. When the part 1236a rotates to the release position facing right, the game ball T is received from the receiving part 1236a through the right part opening 1238c into the V winning opening 1156, and a privilege different from the accessory winning opening 1155 (jackpot game ) is given, and the player can be entertained by the given privilege, and when the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156 through the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the privilege is granted. Therefore, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not the game ball T received in the accessory winning opening 1155 is accommodated in the receiving part 1236a of the rotating body 1236, and the game ball to the V winning opening 1156 It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player by heightening the expectation for acceptance of T.例文帳に追加

When the plunger 1232a of the V-winning solenoid 1232 is moved back and forth, the rotation of the rotating body 1236 causes the entire driving gear member 1233 to move to the shaft portion by the engaging portion 1233d of the driving gear member 1233 which is engaged with the tip of the plunger 1232a. A driven gear 1234a of a driven gear member 1234 that rotates about 1233a and meshes with a driving gear 1233c formed at the tip of an extension portion 1233b of the driving gear member 1233 rotates in a direction opposite to that of the driving gear member 1233. As the driven gear member 1234 rotates, the rotating body 1236 rotates between the accommodation position and the release position. As a result, the rotation speed of the rotating body 1236 is faster than when it is rotated by a motor as in a conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can hit the game ball T on the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. It is possible to make it difficult to get the timing to hit the game ball T so that the ball T is accommodated. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball T to be accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, it is possible to make it difficult to receive the game ball T into the V winning opening 1156. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side by reducing the provision.

Further, since the pitch diameter of the driven gear 1234a is smaller than the pitch diameter of the drive gear 1233c, the rotation angle of the driven gear 1234a (rotating body 1236) can be increased with respect to the rotation angle of the drive gear 1233c. As compared with the case where the driving gear 1233c and the driven gear 1234a have the same pitch diameter, the rotation speed of the rotating body 1236 can be increased. Therefore, since the rotation speed of the rotating body 1236 is increased, even if the player tries to strike the game ball T so that the game ball T is received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the timing is taken. can be made difficult.

Further, on the rear side of the upper opening 1238b, there is provided a failure hole 1230c for discharging the game ball T that has flowed down to the rotating body 1236 from the accessory winning opening 1155 when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is not in the accommodation position. , it is possible to prevent the game ball T from staying between the rotating body 1236 and the accessory winning opening 1155 . Therefore, even if the game ball T enters the accessory winning opening 1155 by some fraudulent act, if the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is other than the accommodation position, the game ball T is illegally accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a. It is possible to prevent the privilege from being fraudulently granted without being harassed, and reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the fraudulent act. In particular, in this embodiment, when the accessory winning opening 1155 is in a normal state, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 rotates toward the V winning opening 1156 which is aligned with the right opening 1238c. Therefore, even if an illegal game ball T is made to enter the accessory winning prize opening 1155, it can be recognized at a glance that the game ball T cannot be received by the receiving part 1236a of the rotating body 1236, and the illegality can be recognized. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act by discouraging an act.

Further, as described above, since the rotating body 1236 rotates faster than before, even if it is attempted to illegally accept the game ball T into the V winning opening 1156 (receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236), the rotating body 1236 rotates faster. By showing the rotating body 1236 in motion, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is difficult to make the receiving part 1236a of the rotating body 1236 receive an illegal game ball T at a glance, and to deter fraudulent behavior. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent force against. Moreover, since fraudulent acts can be prevented, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 is covered with the peripheral wall portion 1238a, when the receiving portion 1236a opened to the outer peripheral side is rotated from the storage position to the release position, the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a Even if the centrifugal force due to the rotation acts on the receiving portion 1236a between the accommodation position and the discharging position, the outer peripheral side of the receiving portion 1236a is closed by the peripheral wall portion 1238a. Jumping out can be prevented, and the game ball T can be reliably moved to the release position. In addition, since the peripheral wall portion 1238a can prevent the game ball T from popping out of the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 during rotation, the rotating speed of the rotating body 1236 can be increased, and the rotation speed can be increased. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 that makes it difficult to take the timing of the body 1236 and reliably exhibits the above-described effects.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball T into the game area 1100 (the game ball T to the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153 The accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A of the accessory unit 1220 is movable, and the accessory winning opening 1155 can receive the game ball T. In this state, when the game ball T is accepted into the accessory winning opening 1155, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls T is given, so that the player aims at the accessory winning opening 1155. can be entertained by performing the typing operation. When the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 aiming at the role winning opening 1155 is accepted by the role winning opening 1155, a privilege is given, and the player is further entertained by the given privilege. can be done. The game ball T received in the accessory winning opening 1155 passes through the upper guiding portion 1238e of the V winning opening unit 1220B and is guided to the upper opening 1238b formed on the upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer circumference of the rotating body 1236. , comes into contact with the rotor 1236 via the upper port 1238b. At this time, if the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 coincides with the upper opening 1238b, the game ball T passing through the upper opening 1238b is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Then, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a rotates together with the receiving portion 1236a while being received by the receiving portion 1236a as the rotating body 1236 rotates. From the receiving part 1236a, it enters the right guiding part 1238f through the right opening 1238c, is guided to the right guiding part 1238f, is accepted by the V winning opening 1156, and is granted a privilege such as a big hit game. It is possible to further entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest. Since this rotating body 1236 has only one receiving portion 1236a, compared with the case where the rotating body is provided with a plurality of receiving portions like a conventional pachinko machine, it is not guided to the V winning opening 1156. Since there is no such receiving portion 1236a, the pachinko machine 1 can easily aim at the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 even for a beginner or a player unfamiliar with the operation of hitting the game ball T at a glance. This makes it easy for the player to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play, and allows the player to enjoy the game on the pachinko machine 1, thereby preventing the player from losing interest. can do.

In addition, since only one receiving portion 1236a for receiving the game ball T of the rotating body 1236 is provided, compared with the case where the rotating body is provided with a plurality of receiving portions as in the past, the rotating body 1236 The outer diameter can be reduced, it becomes possible to easily secure the space for arranging the rotating body 1236 in the game area 1100, and the rotating body 1236 can be placed in an effective place by increasing the degree of freedom in arranging the rotating body 1236. can be placed. At this time, since the rotating body 1236 is rotated around an axis extending back and forth, the circular end face of the rotating body 1236 faces forward (toward the player), and the outer diameter of the rotating body 1236 is reduced. Even if it is made smaller than the conventional one, it is possible to prevent the rotator 1236 (receiving part 1236a) from becoming hard to see, and it is possible to make the game with the rotator 1236 enjoyable and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is made to have a size that allows only the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 1236 to open and receive only one game ball T, and the second discharge path 1230e on the rear side of the upper opening 1238b. Since the hole 1230c is in communication with the rotator 1236, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is aligned with the upper opening 1238b, and the game ball T flowing down through the upper opening 1238b is reliably caught by the receiving portion 1236a. In addition, even if another game ball T contacts from above the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a is contacted by another game ball T. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from falling out of the receiving portion 1236a due to the impact, and the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a can be reliably sent to the V winning opening 1156 side by the rotation of the rotating body 1236.

In addition, since the rear side of the upper opening 1238b is provided with the removal hole 1230c that communicates with the upper guide portion 1238e and the second discharge passage 1230e, in a state where the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 does not match the upper opening 1238b, Even if the game ball T flows down from the accessory winning opening 1155 side and comes into contact with the outer circumference of the rotating body 1236 through the upper opening 1238b, it can be discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the back failure hole 1230c. . On the other hand, in a state where the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 matches the upper opening 1238b and the game ball T is already received by the receiving portion 1236a, another game ball T flows down from the accessory winning opening 1155 side. , Even if the game ball T received by the receiving part 1236a through the upper port 1238b is contacted from above, another game ball T coming later is discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the rear side loss hole 1230c. can do. Therefore, even when a plurality of game balls T are received in the accessory winning opening 1155, only one game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and the rest of the game balls T are discharged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large number of game balls T from being received in the V winning hole 1156 in a short time, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. In addition, one of the plurality of game balls T received in the accessory winning opening 1155 is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and is received in the V winning opening 1156 to be awarded a privilege. Even if there is a game ball T ejected from a losing hole 1230c without being received by a receiving part 1236a of the player, the player hardly feels lost, and the player's interest is suppressed from being lowered. can be done.

In addition, since the game ball T that has not been received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is discharged to the rear side of the rotating body 1236 from the loss hole 1230c, the game ball that has not been received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is discharged. Compared to the case where the ball T is ejected through at least one of the left and right sides of the rotating body 1236, the size of the V winning opening unit 1220B provided with the rotating body 1236 can be reduced when viewed from the front. Therefore, since the degree of freedom of arrangement of the rotating body 1236 within the game area 1100 is increased, the rotating body 1236 can be placed at an effective location within the game area 1100, and the rotating body 1236 can be easily seen from the player side. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player by making the game by the rotating body 1236 enjoyable.

Furthermore, the center of the upper opening 1238b is formed slightly behind the center of the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 for receiving the game ball T, and is positioned slightly behind the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a. Since another game ball T comes in contact with a slightly rearward position, in a state where the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the upper opening is passed through the upper guide portion 1238e. When another game ball T from 1238b abuts on the game ball T received by the receiving part 1236a from above, the other game ball T abutting from above is guided to the rear of the missing hole 1230c. Thus, another game ball T coming later can be reliably discharged downward through the second discharge path 1230e from the loss hole 1230c.

In addition, since another game ball T comes in contact with the position slightly behind the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a A force that pushes the ball T forward on the side opposite to the slip hole 1230c acts on the ball T, making it difficult for the ball to drop toward the slip hole 1230c and maintaining the state of being received by the receiving portion 1236a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 from falling off and losing the opportunity to be received by the V winning opening 1156, thereby avoiding the disappointment of the player. The game ball T received by the receiving part 1236a can be surely received by the V winning opening 1156, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the rotating body 1236 is provided with an inclined portion 1236b on the front side (inner side) of the wall on the rear side of the receiving portion 1236a, which is inclined rearward as it goes upward (farther from the center of rotation). At the same time, by forming the center of the upper opening 1238b to be slightly behind the center of the receiving portion 1236a for receiving the game ball T, the game ball T flowing down through the upper opening 1238b contacts the inclined portion 1236b. Since the game ball T is not received by the receiving portion 1236a, when the game ball T flows down from the upper port 1238b, the game ball T contacts the inclined portion 1236, and the game ball T is moved by the inclined portion 1236b. can be guided forward to facilitate reception into receiving portion 1236a. When the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T first contacts the inclined portion 1236b and contacts the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a, so that the impact acting on the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a is alleviated. It is possible to make it difficult to damage the rotating body 1236, and attenuate the flow speed of the game ball T against the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a so that it can be brought into contact with the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a. The ball T can be made difficult to bounce, and the game ball T can be reliably received by the receiving part 1236a.

In addition, since the upper guide portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape, it is possible to attenuate the flowing speed of the game ball T guided by the upper guide portion 1238e. Therefore, even if another game ball T flowing down the upper guide portion 1238e comes into contact with the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the falling velocity is is attenuated, the impact due to contact with the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is reduced, and the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a bounces up from the receiving portion 1236a. It is possible to make it difficult to drop the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a from the receiving portion 1236a.

Furthermore, the upper guide portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape, and the flow speed of the game ball T can be attenuated by the upper guide portion 1238e. Even if the portion 1238e flows down and contacts (abuts) the rotating body 1236 (including the receiving portion 1236a) from the upper port 1238b, the impact acting on the rotating body 1236 can be reduced, and the game ball T contacts. It is possible to prevent the rotating body 1236 from being easily damaged by the impact caused by the vibration. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling frustrated and losing interest in the game due to interruption of the game due to the breakage of the rotating body 1236, thereby suppressing the player from losing interest. can be done.

In addition, in order to receive the game ball T into the V winning opening 1156 via the rotary body 1236, it is necessary to open the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 so that the accessory winning opening 1155 can be received. It is possible to limit the chance of receiving the ball T into the V winning opening 1156 (accessory winning opening 1155), and to give a premium feeling to the V winning opening 1156 and the like. Therefore, when the accessory winning opening 1155 becomes receivable according to the game state, an opportunity to receive the game ball T into the V winning opening 1156 is obtained. etc., the player can be made to pay attention to the game ball T, and the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T into the V prize-winning hole 1156 can be heightened, and the player can hit the game ball T aiming at the accessory prize-winning hole 1155.例文帳に追加The operation can be positively performed, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

[Re-description of second starting port 1153 and starting port door member 1214]
Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the slider portion 1214g of the starting port door member 1214 in the variable starting port unit 1210 extends to the left and right to guide the game ball T to the second starting port 1153 arranged on the right end side. The heights of the possible first guide portion 1214a, second guide portion 1214b, and third guide portion 1214c are made different, and the slider portion 1214g of the starting port door member 1214 is positioned on the left side of the second starting port 1153. The starting port solenoid 1215 is attached to the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a advances and retreats on the upper side and the rear side of the first guiding portion 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b on the left and right opposite side of the second starting port 1153. , according to the game state that changes when the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the link member 1216 below the starting port solenoid 1215 (lottery is drawn by the game ball T passing through the gate member 1134 The forward/backward movement of the movable plunger 1215a is transmitted to the starting port door member 1214 slidably supported back and forth by the lower case 1211, and the starting port door member 1214 is slid back and forth. Therefore, the longitudinal and vertical dimensions of the mechanism (variable starting door unit 1210) for sliding the starting door member 1214 can be made smaller than the conventional one. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the installation space for providing the variable starting door unit 1210 having the starting door member 1214 that slides back and forth according to the game state. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the member 1214 can be increased, and by arranging the starting door member 1214 in a place where it could not be arranged in the conventional pachinko machine, the atmosphere in the game area 1100 can be greatly changed. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, who strongly attracts the player's interest and wants to select it as a pachinko machine to play.

Further, as described above, the installation space for providing the variable starting opening unit 1210 can be reduced, and even if the variable starting opening unit 1210 having the starting opening door member 1214 is provided, the decorative body, the movable decorative body, Also, other members such as accessories can be installed in the pachinko machine 1 without any problems, so that the decoration effect and presentation effect of the other members can be fully exhibited. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhance its appeal to the players.

Furthermore, the second starting port 1153 is arranged on the right end side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, and the first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b and the third guiding portion extending to the left and right of the starting port door member 1214 are arranged. Since the game ball T is guided to the second start port 1153 by 1214c, when the start port door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the first guide of the start port door member 1214 When the game ball T flows down on the part 1214a, the game ball T rolls rightward on the first guide part 1214a, the second guide part 1214b and the third guide part 1214c and is received by the second starting port 1153. As a result, the game ball T rolls on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b and the third guide portion 1214c toward the second start port 1153 to the player. It is possible to increase the expectation for the reception of the game, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest. At this time, when the starting port door member 1214 that slides back and forth slides forward, the game ball T is guided to the second starting port 1153 by the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b and the third guide portion 1214c. Since the action of the starter door member 1214 is opposite to that of the variable receiving port (variable prize winning port) of the conventional pachinko machine, a strong impact can be given to players who are familiar with the conventional pachinko machine. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power can be obtained.

In addition, in a state in which the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c of the starting door member 1214 are slid forward according to the game state and projected into the game area 1100, the first guide When the game ball T flows down on the part 1214a, the game ball T can be guided to the right end side. The movement of the moving game ball T can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T rolling on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b and the third guide portion 1214c. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by

Furthermore, when the plunger 1215a of the starting solenoid 1215 is moved forward and backward according to the game state, the engaging portion 1216c of the link member 1216 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a moves left and right as the plunger 1215a moves forward and backward. The body portion 1216a also extends vertically through the first piece 1216b connecting the engaging portion 1216c and the body portion 1216a. It rotates around the axis. A connecting hole 1216e at the tip of a second piece 1216d extending from the main body portion 1216a at a right angle to the first piece 1216b is fitted and connected to a connecting pin 1214h projecting from a slider portion 1214g of the starting port door member 1214. Therefore, when the main body portion 1216a rotates, the connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d revolves around the vertically extending axis. As a result, the starting port door member 1214 slides back and forth. Therefore, the movement of the plunger 1215a of the starter solenoid 1215 can be transmitted to reliably slide the starter door member 1214 back and forth, thereby realizing the pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting the above-described effects. be able to.

In addition, the second piece 1216d of the link member 1216 has a length extending to the lower slider portion 1214g of the starting port solenoid 1215 in the starting port door member 1214, and is shorter than the conventional one. The front and rear slide range of 1214 can be narrowed, and the front and rear dimensions can be made smaller than before. In addition, since the link member 1216 is rotated around an axis extending vertically, compared to the conventional case where the link member 1216 is rotated around an axis extending horizontally, the vertical dimension can be reduced. can do. Therefore, the mechanism (variable starting door unit 1210) for sliding the starting door member 1214 back and forth can be made smaller than before, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be realized. can.

In addition, since the game ball T received in the second starting port 1153 can be released downward from the lower side of the lower case 1211 through the ball guiding portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b, the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 Equipped with a passage member or the like for receiving the game ball T received in the second start port 1153 on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 compared to the case of guiding and releasing it to the rear side. It is not necessary, and a space can be easily secured behind the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 . Therefore, on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, that is, on the rear side of the variable starting port unit 1210, it is easy to secure a space for arranging other members such as ornaments, movable ornaments, accessories, and the like. Thus, it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the starting opening door member 1214 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 is in the unreceivable position in which the starting opening door member 1214 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 retreats backward in the game area 1100, the second starting opening 1153 is positioned within the game area 1100. Since the second starting port 1153 is not closed by keeping it open at all times, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball T can be accepted into the second starting port 1153, and the game The user's attention can be strongly attracted to the second starting port 1153 . Therefore, since the second starting port 1153 is always open, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the second starting port 1153 regardless of the movement (sliding) of the starting port door member 1214. , it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the reception of the game ball T to the second start port 1153 and to make it difficult to get bored, and the second start port 1153 for the player regardless of the position of the start port door member 1214 It is possible to make the player perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the target, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and reducing the interest in the game.

In addition, since the starting port door member 1214 is slid back and forth, even if the starting port door member 1214 is positioned at any position of the forward protruding acceptable position and the rearward retracted unreceivable position, Since they look the same when viewed from the front, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the position of the starting door member 1214 . Therefore, since the position of the starting port door member 1214 is difficult to understand, the player can be given the illusion that the starting port door member 1214 is in a position where the starting port door member 1214 protrudes forward and can be accepted, and the player aims at the starting port door member 1214.例文帳に追加The player can be entertained by performing the driving operation of the game ball T.例文帳に追加

In addition, as described above, since it is possible to reduce the excess reception of the game ball T, the special lottery result in which an advantageous game state occurs due to the game ball T received in excess into the second start port 1153 is determined by lottery. It is possible to avoid that it is done, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player flows down above the second start port 1153, the second start port 1153 is flown forward. Since it is arranged below the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j of the path forming member 1161, the game ball T is prevented from being directly received into the second starting opening 1153 by the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j. , is discharged downward from the left end portion of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j. At this time, depending on the game state that changes when the game ball T is hit into the game area 100 (according to the passage of the game ball T through the gate member 1134), the starting door member 1214 extending to the left and right is opened. A game ball T released downward from the left end portion of the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j in a state of sliding forward and protruding into the game area 1100 is the second start opening in a plan view of the start opening door member 1214. When the game ball T falls to the left outer portion of the upper shelf 1161j, the game ball T rolls on the starting opening door member 1214 in the direction of the second starting opening 1153 and is received by the second starting opening 1153. When the game ball T is received in the second starting port 1153, the player can be entertained by the given benefits such as the payout of the game ball T and the lottery of the special lottery result. At the same time, it is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball T aimed at the start opening door member 1214 so that the game ball T is received in the second start opening 1153.例文帳に追加

The starting opening door member 1214 extending in the left and right direction is designed to slide in a direction different from the direction in which the game ball T can be received in the leftward direction in the second starting opening 1153. When the door member 1214 is slid from the protruding state to the non-protruding state (recessed state), if the game ball T flows down on the starting port door member 1214, the game ball T is flat on the starting port door member 1214. Since it takes a certain amount of time to reach the second starting port 1153 from the left outer side of the second starting port upper shelf part 1161j by sight, until the game ball T is guided to the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214 If the starting port door member 1214 retreats and sinks in between, the game ball T will fall from the starting port door member 1214 without being received by the second starting port 1153 . In detail, while the game ball T is rolling rightward toward the second start port 1153, the upper surface of the start port door member 1214 on which the game ball T is mounted is raised by retreating the start port door member 1214. It gradually becomes smaller, and before the game ball T reaches the second starting port 1153, it falls off from the starting port door member 1214. - 特許庁Therefore, since it is possible to reduce the excess reception of the game ball T to the second start port 1153, the extra reception of the game ball T to the second start port 1153 causes unnecessary benefits (especially, It is possible to reduce the granting of a special lottery result (lottery of special lottery results) that generates an advantageous game state, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, when the game ball T flows down on the starting port door member 1214 while the starting port door member 1214 is sliding forward so as to protrude into the game area 1100, the game ball T is moved by the starting port door member 1214. There is a possibility that it will be guided to the second starting port 1153 and accepted. However, since the starting port door member 1214 slides according to the game state, it is difficult to understand the timing at which the starting port door member 1214 slides into the game area 1100, and the starting port door member 1214 slides into the game area 1100. After confirming that it has protruded, the player performs the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting port door member 1214, so that the starting port door member 1214 slides so as to protrude into the game area 1100 The possibility of the game ball T flowing down onto the starting port door member 1214 is reduced, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed.

Further, since the starting port door member 1214 is slid back and forth, even if the game ball T flows down on the starting port door member 1214, the game ball T abuts and acts on the starting port door member 1214. The drive mechanism (starting door solenoid 1215) that slides the starting door member 1214 only by impact acting on the slide groove 1211d in the lower case 1211 of the variable starting door unit 1210 that slidably supports the starting door member 1214. , and the link member 1216), the starter door member 1214 and the like (variable starter unit 1210) can be made less likely to be damaged.

Furthermore, since the starting port door member 1214 is slid forward and backward, the length (distance) of sliding the starting port door member 1214 is shortened compared to the case where the starting port door member 1214 is slid left and right. can do. Therefore, since it is possible to shorten the time from the state in which the starting port door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100 until it is retracted, the game ball T is guided to the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214. The starting port door member 1214 can be immersed before the second starting port 1153 can receive the game ball T. In addition, since the starting port door member 214 is slid in the front-back direction, the space for immersing the starting port door member 1214 and the mechanism for sliding are arranged behind the game area 1100. To allow the inside of the game area 1100 to be used as widely as possible without pressing the inside of the game area 1100 by a mechanism (starting opening solenoid 1215, link member 1216, etc.) for sliding the start opening door member 1214.例文帳に追加can be done.

In addition, since the upper surface of the second guide portion 1214b adjacent to the second starting port 1153 in the starting port door member 1214 is formed flat without protrusions, the starting port door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100 Even if the game ball T flows down on the starter door member 1214 when it is slid and retreated from the state where it has been moved, the game ball T is drawn to the rear end side of the game area 1100 by the projection and the starter door is drawn. It becomes difficult to fall from the member 1214, and the game ball T does not jump up toward the second start port 1153 due to the protrusion, and the game ball T can be smoothly dropped from the start port door member 1214. It is possible to reliably achieve the effects of the above.

Furthermore, the game ball T can be received from the left direction with respect to the second starting port 1153, and the game ball T guided from the left side by the starting port door member 1214 extending to the left and right enters the second starting port 1153 as it is. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that when the game ball T is guided to the starting port door member 1214, it is surely received by the second starting port 1153.例文帳に追加Therefore, when the starting port door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the game state, it is possible to make the player think that if the game ball T is allowed to flow down to the starting port door member 1214, it will surely be received by the second starting port 1153. As a result, it is possible to positively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aimed at the starting door member 1214, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, by advancing and retreating the plunger 1215a that is movable by energizing the starting port solenoid 1215, the starting port door member 1214 is protruded or recessed into the game area 1100 to slide back and forth. The sliding speed of the starting port door member 1214 can be increased with a simple configuration compared to the case where the is slid by a motor. Therefore, since the starting port door member 1214 can be slid quickly, the starting port door member 1214 is moved to the game area 1100 until the game ball T on the starting port door member 1214 is guided to the second starting port 1153. It is possible to retreat from the inside, it is possible to reliably reduce the reception of extra game balls T into the second start port 1153, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lottery is drawn when the game ball T passes through the gate member 1134 as a game state that changes when the game ball T is hit into the game area 110 by the player's operation. When the starter door member 1214 of the variable starter unit 1210 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the normal determination result, the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 is the first of the front flow path forming member 1161 When it flows down to the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, it rolls leftward by the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, and when released from the left end side, it flows downward by the second starting port area left standing wall portion 1161m. , abuts on the first guide portion 1214a of the starting port door member 1214 located below between the second starting port area left standing wall portion 1161m and the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, and moves leftward along the starting port door member 1214. By being guided to the right on the opposite side, it flows down in a U-turn and is received in the second starting port 1153 . When the game ball T is received in the second start port 1153, the game ball T is paid out and the lottery for the special lottery result is performed as a privilege, so that the player can be entertained by the privilege, and the game ball can be enjoyed. In order to receive T into the second starting opening 1153, it is possible to enjoy the hitting operation (right hitting) of the game ball T aiming at the second starting opening upper shelf part 1161j. At this time, the starting opening door member 1214 is bent obliquely to the left end side away from the second starting opening 1153 below between the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m. Since the first guide part 1214a is provided, when the game ball T flows down to the first guide part 1214a, the game ball T is guided to the second start port 1153 side. It can be made to recognize, and it is possible to heighten expectations for acceptance of the game ball T into the second starting port 1153.例文帳に追加Further, in the starting port door member 1214, the first guiding portion 1214a far from the second starting port 1153 and the second guiding portion 1214b near the second starting port 1153 are inclined at different angles. The acceleration of the game ball T is fast at 1214a, and the acceleration of the game ball T is slow at the second guide part 1214b, so the rolling speed of the game ball T changes depending on the part where the game ball T rolls. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the rolling speed of the game ball T on the starting door member does not change. At the same time, the movement of the game ball T can be enjoyed by the player, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed. In addition, as described above, since the rolling speed of the game ball T changes and differs between the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b of the starting port door member 1214, the game ball T rolls on the starting port door member 1214. The player's attention can be strongly attracted to the game ball T that is rolling, and by drawing the player's attention to the game ball T rolling on the starting door member 1214, the starting door member 1214 can be drawn. It is possible to increase the expectation for the reception of the game ball T to the second starting port 1153 through which the game ball T is guided.

In addition, the first guide portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 degrees to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Even if the game ball T is reflected by the first guide portion 1214a, it moves along the first guide portion 1214a, so that the game ball T can flow down along the starting port door member 1214 extending to the left and right. , the game ball T can be made to move as intended on the starting port door member 1214, and the above-described effects can be reliably exhibited. In addition, since the first guide portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 degrees to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal, the game ball T hits the first guide portion 1214a of the starting port door member 1214 from above. In the case of contact, the player can recognize at a glance that the game ball T in contact with the first guide portion 1214a is reflected to the right where the second start opening 1153 is located, so that the game state is restored. Accordingly, when the starting port door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the player recognizes that the game ball T can be received by the second starting port 1153 by allowing the game ball T to flow down to the first guide part 1214a. can be made Therefore, when the starting port door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the player actively performs the operation of hitting the game ball T aiming at the first guide portion 1214a of the starting port door member 1214. It is possible to keep the player from losing interest by entertaining the player.

Furthermore, since the length of the left and right sides of the first guide portion 1214a in plan view is formed within the range of 0.2 times to 1 time the outer diameter of the game ball T, the first guide portion 1214a allows the game ball T can be reliably guided to the second starting port 1153 side, and the rolling speed of the guided game ball T can be suppressed from becoming faster than necessary to make it easier to see the rolling game ball T. This allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game medium, thereby preventing the player from losing interest.

In addition, since the left and right length of the starting port door member 1214 in plan view is formed within the range of 2 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, the first guide portion 1214a of the starting port door member 1214 By this, the game ball T rolling on the start opening door member 1214 toward the second start opening 1153 side can be shown to the player appropriately without excess or deficiency, and the movement of the game ball T with impact can be enjoyed. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the movement of the game ball T, thereby suppressing the decline in interest of the player.

In addition, when the game ball T is guided by the front flow path forming member 1161 provided in the game area 1100 when the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the starting opening door Since the game ball T flows down to the left end side of the member 1214 away from the second start port 1153, that is, to the first guide portion 1214a side, the game ball T is moved to the first guide portion 1214a of the start port door member 1214. can be made to flow down (contact). Therefore, since the game ball T can be rolled over substantially the entire length of the left and right of the starting port door member 1214, the movement of the game ball T by the starting port door member 1214 provided with the first guide portion 1214a can be conveyed to the player. It is possible to surely show the game, entertain the player, and prevent the player from losing interest.

Furthermore, since the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged directly above the starting opening door member 1214 so that the game ball T flows down in a U-turn shape, the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is placed on the starting opening door member 1214. Compared to the case where the game ball T is arranged in a position on the left outer side of the first guide portion 1214a with respect to directly above the game ball T, the starting port door member 1214 in the game area 1100 and the second It is possible to reduce the horizontal space occupied by the upper shelf portion 1161j of the second starting port and the like. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in arranging the starter door member 1214 and the like can be increased, it is possible to arrange the starter door member 1214 and the like in the game area 1100 at a place where it is easy for the player to see, and the above-described effects can be achieved. The pachinko machine 1 that plays can be embodied with certainty.

In addition, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the second starting opening area vertical wall part 1161m extends vertically on the left outer side of the first guide part 1214a. , By the time the game ball T released from the second starting opening upper shelf part 1161j flows down on the starting opening door member 1214, it is brought into contact with the second starting opening area left standing wall part 1161m and left from the first guide part 1214a It is possible to prevent it from flowing down to the outside, and it is possible to reliably flow down the game ball T onto the starting port door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a), and the second starting port upper shelf 1161j and the second When the game ball T flowing down between the start opening area left standing wall portion 1161m bounces in contact with the starting opening door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a), the game ball T is bounced by the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m. It is possible to reliably prevent it from flowing down to the side opposite to the second starting port 1153 side, and it is possible to reliably guide the game ball T to the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214 .

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 by the player's operation flows down to the upper side of the second start port 1153 that opens forward, the second Immediately above the starting port 1153, it abuts on the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, and by the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, it rolls away from the position directly above the second starting port 1153 to the left according to the inclination of the upper surface, and the second starting port upper shelf 1161j It is discharged from the left end side away from the second starting port 1153 in the starting port upper shelf portion 1161j and comes into contact with the second starting port area left standing wall portion 1161m. At this time, the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134, and the starting entrance door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 by drawing lots for "normal hit" as a normal determination result. Then, the game ball T, which is released from the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j and comes into contact with the second start opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, comes into contact with the start opening door member 1214 and is pushed by the start opening door member 1214. It is guided to the front side of the second starting port 1153 and received by the second starting port 1153 . At this time, the second starting port area right standing wall portion 1161k extending vertically is provided on the right outer side of the second starting port 1153 on the same side as the side where the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is raised. , Even if the game ball T guided in the direction of the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214 tries to pass the front side of the second starting port 1153, it passes by contacting the second starting port area right standing wall portion 1161k. The game ball T guided by the starting port door member 1214 is accepted to the second starting port 1153. When the game ball T is received in the second start port 1153, benefits such as the payout of the game ball T and the lottery result of the special lottery are given, and the player can be entertained by the given benefits. , so that the game ball T can be received in the second starting hole 1153, the driving operation of the game ball T aimed at the second starting hole 1153 can be enjoyed. Then, before the game ball T is received in the second start opening 1153, the game ball T contacts the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j, the second start opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, and the start opening door member 1214. Thus, the movement of the game ball T that makes a U-turn and the flow direction changes abruptly can amuse the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Also, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, when the game ball T flows down onto the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, as described above, the game ball T moves like a U-turn. Therefore, when the direction of flow of the game ball T changes by 180 degrees, the flow speed of the game ball T becomes relatively slow. Therefore, since the movement of the game ball T flowing down in a U-turn shape becomes easy to see, the movement of the game ball T can be easily enjoyed by the player, and the movement of the game ball T is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, in a state in which the starting port door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T flows down in a U-turn, and in a state in which the starting port door member 1214 does not protrude into the game area 1100, the game ball T will flow down in an inverted L shape, so even if the game ball T flows down to the same second start port upper shelf 1161j according to the protrusion of the start port door member 1214, the movement of the game ball T is made different. be able to. Therefore, the movement (flow) of the game ball T changes according to the game state (according to the passage of the game ball T through the gate member 1134). It is possible to keep the player entertained and to prevent the player from losing interest by making the player less likely to get bored.

Furthermore, between the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the starting opening door member 1214 which are arranged in the vertical direction, only one game ball T is allowed to flow down, and the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the starting opening Since the vertical interval with the door member 1214 is narrowed as much as possible, the game ball T that comes into contact with the second start opening left standing wall portion 1161m from the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j and flows down onto the start opening door member 1214. Since the movement of the ball T can be made to make a sudden U-turn, the player can be entertained by the movement of the game ball T, which has not been seen in past pachinko machines, and the player's interest in the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In addition, since the starting opening door member 1214 extends longer to the left and right than the second starting opening upper shelf part 1161j, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the second starting opening Since it is longer than the upper shelf portion 1161j, the starter door member 1214 is more conspicuous, and the protruding starter door member 1214 can strongly attract the player's interest. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes, by making the player pay attention to the starting opening door member 1214, the second starting opening upper shelf part 1161j near the starting opening door member 1214 and the second starting opening area left standing wall part 1161m Since it is possible to draw attention to both of them together, the game ball T rolling on the second starting opening upper shelf part 1161j and the starting opening door member 1214 can be reliably visually recognized, and it moves in a U-turn shape. The movement of the game ball T can be enjoyed by the player, and the game ball T can be driven toward the second start opening upper shelf part 1161j so that the game ball T flows down on the start opening door member 1214.例文帳に追加The operation can be made to entertain the player and suppress the loss of interest.

Furthermore, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes, if the game ball T is made to flow down on the starting opening door member 1214 via the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, the second Since it will be guided to the starting port 1153 and received by the second starting port 1153, when the starting port door member 1214 protrudes according to the game state, the game ball T is directed to the starting port door member 1214 for the player. It is possible to positively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the upper shelf part 1161j of the sending second starting opening, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline of interest.

In addition, when the game ball T struck into the game area 1100 aiming at the second starting port 1153 flows down onto the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, it rolls in the left direction away from the second starting port 1153. , the game ball T leaving the second starting port 1153 can make the player feel regrettable. Then, when the game ball T is released from the second starting opening upper shelf part 1161j, if the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes, the game ball T separated from the second starting opening 1153 is released by the starting opening door member 1214. It rolls to the right as it approaches the second starting port 1153 . In other words, since the game ball T makes a U-turn and returns to the second starting port 1153 side, it is possible to please the player and raise expectations for the reception of the game ball T to the second starting port 1153. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

In addition, since the second starting port area right standing wall portion 1161k extending vertically to the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is provided on the right outer side of the second starting port 1153, the second starting port upper shelf portion extending to the left and right is provided. Even if you try to receive the game ball T from the right side where the upper surface of 1161j is raised to the second start opening 1153 arranged under the second start opening upper shelf part 1161j, from the right outside of the second start opening 1153 It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being received in the second starting opening 1153 by the second starting opening region right standing wall portion 1161k extending to the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j. Therefore, in order to receive the game ball T in the second start opening 1153, it is necessary to let the game ball T flow down from the left side where the upper surface of the second start opening upper shelf part 1161j is low. The player can be urged to hit the game ball T aiming at the upper shelf part 1161j of the second start opening so that the game ball T flows down to the side. Then, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the game ball T is moved by the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, and the starting opening door member 1214. Since it makes a U-turn and is guided in the direction of the second start port 1153, it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball T flowing down in a roundabout manner, and the feeling of expectation for the reception of the game ball T to the second start port 1153. can be increased, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T is hit into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player, the game state changes due to the game ball T hit, and the changed game state is entered. Accordingly, the starting port door member 1214 that extends longer than the outer diameter of the game ball T in the horizontal direction and guides the game ball T to the second starting port 1153 slides forward and protrudes into the game area 1100 . In the game area 1100, a second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k protruding forward on the right side of the second starting opening 1153 is arranged, and the second starting opening right side is located above the second starting opening 1153. A second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j extending shorter than the left and right length of the starting opening door member 1214 is arranged so that the left side is lower from the upper end of the standing wall portion 1161k. When protruding inward, the left end of the starting port door member 1214 extends outside the left end of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j. Then, when the game ball T flows down onto the second start opening upper shelf 1161j, it rolls on the second start opening upper shelf 1161j toward the left end side and flows down from the left end. . At this time, if the starting port door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T will be received on the starting port door member 1214 with a very high probability. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the upper side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the starting opening door member 1214 and the outside of the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j When the game ball T is caused to flow down, the game ball T is received on the starting port door member 1214 . Then, after the game ball T received on the starting port door member 1214 is guided to the second starting port 1153 by the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c, the second When it is accepted into the starting port 1153, the payout of the game ball T, the lottery of the special lottery result, etc. are performed as a privilege, and the player can be entertained by the privilege. At this time, the starting port door member 1214 is elongated in the left-right direction so that it can receive a plurality of game balls T in the left-right direction (about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T). It is possible to give the player the illusion that many game balls T are to be accepted into the second starting port 1153 . More specifically, when a player gets accustomed to playing a game in a conventional pachinko machine having opening/closing members extending in the left/right direction, he or she becomes more interested in the size of the opening/closing members extending in the left/right direction. There is relatively little interest in the size of the entrance (for example, the grand prize opening). In other words, the longer the opening/closing member in the left and right direction, the more game balls T can be accepted. Therefore, the starter door member 1214 projecting into the game area 1100 depending on the game state and extending to the left and right is recognized as an opening and closing member in the conventional pachinko machine, and the starter door member 1214 is elongated to the left and right. As a result, the player will have an illusion that a large number of game balls T can be accepted. Then, the player can be made to positively perform the operation of hitting the game ball T aiming at the starting door member 1214 by making the player feel an illusion, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest. can. On the other hand, the second starting port 1153, through which the game ball T is guided by the starting port door member 1214, is actually formed in a size that allows only one game ball T to be received. Even if a plurality of game balls T flow down, they are not received at once, but only one by one, so that the number of game balls T received per hour can be reduced more than before, and the privilege to be given can be reduced. By relatively decreasing, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Also, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T can be accepted into the second starting opening 1153 even if the second starting opening upper shelf part 1161j is aimed in addition to the starting opening door member 1214.例文帳に追加Therefore, even if the second starting port upper shelf 1161j is arranged above the starting port door member 1214 (second starting port 1153), substantially the entire length of the left and right length of the starting port door member 1214 It is the same as receiving the game balls T over the entire surface, and the player can be entertained by having many game balls T placed thereon. At this time, since it is made to receive on the starting opening door member 1214 from the low end on the left side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, a plurality of game balls T exist on the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j at the same time. Even if it is, it will be delivered to the starting port door member 1214 one by one and guided to the second starting port 1153, and it is possible to avoid that many game balls T are accepted to the second starting port 1153 at once. , it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, on the upper side and the right side of the second start opening 1153, since the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second start opening right standing wall portion 1161k projecting into the game area 1100 are provided, the game can be played by the start opening door member 1214. If the ball T is not guided to the second starting port 1153, it is difficult to accept the game ball T to the second starting port 1153. Therefore, since the game ball T cannot be received in the second starting port 1153 unless the starting port door member 1214 protrudes, it is possible to impart a premium feeling to the player by the protrusion of the starting port door member 1214. To make a player think that something good will happen by the projection of the starting door member 1214, to heighten the player's sense of anticipation for the game, and to suppress the decline of interest. can be done.

Furthermore, since the vertical wall portion 1214e extending upward from the right end portion of the third guide portion 1214c of the starting port door member 1214 is provided, the first guiding portion inclined so that the right side of the starting port door member 1214 is lowered. The game ball T guided toward the front side of the second starting port 1153 by 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b contacts the standing wall portion 1214e, passing the front side of the second starting port 1153 and further to the right. You can prevent it from moving sideways. At this time, even if the game ball T climbs over the standing wall portion 1214e, the second starting hole right standing wall portion 1161k protrudes into the game area 1100 on the right side of the second starting hole 1153, so this second starting hole The right standing wall portion 1161k can also prevent the game ball T from moving to the right. Therefore, the game ball T received by the starting port door member 1214 can be reliably guided to the second starting port 1153 and received.

In addition, since the starting port door member 1214 is slid forward to protrude into the game area 1100, compared to the case where the starting port door member 1214 is rotated to protrude, more games can be played. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the starting port door member 1214 is likely to be damaged by the impact caused by receiving the ball T. More specifically, when the lower side of the starting port door member is rotatably supported around an axis extending to the left and right, and the upper side is rotated so as to move forward, the starting port door member protrudes. To make it difficult to make a stopper for preventing further rotation from being longer than the length from the lower side to the upper side of a starting port door member, and to sufficiently resist the shock caused by receiving many game balls T. There is a risk that it will not be possible. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the starting port door member 1214 is slid forward, and the rear side of the starting port door member 1214 can be made longer than the portion protruding into the game area 1100. Therefore, the impact caused by receiving many game balls T can be sufficiently counteracted.

Further, since the starting port door member 1214 is slid forward to protrude into the game area 1100, when the game ball T exists on the starting port door member 1214, the starting port door member 1214 slides backward. Then, depending on the position of the game ball T on the starting port door member 1214, before the game ball T is guided to the second starting port 1153, it falls off from the starting port door member 1214, and the second starting port 1153 It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being accepted into the game hall, reduce the excessive acceptance of the game ball T, and suppress the increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player is driven by the plurality of obstacle nails G, the windmill, and the center accessory placed in the game area 1100. 1130, the prize winning unit 1150, etc., the game ball T flows down while moving in various directions, and the player can be entertained by the game ball T moving in various ways. In this normal state, it is difficult for the game ball T to flow down directly below the obstacle nail G or the like with which the game ball T abuts. A (first region) and a region where it is difficult to flow down are formed. Therefore, the game ball T will not be received in the second starting opening 1153 arranged below the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j of the front flow path forming member 1161 . Then, when the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134, the lower side of the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j arranged on the downstream side according to the detection of the passed game ball T The starting door member 1214 advances and appears in the area (first area) where the game ball T in the game area 1100 tends to flow down, and the second start opening upper shelf outside the area where the game ball T tends to flow down A region (second region) where the game ball T easily flows down is formed in a region where the game ball T does not easily flow down on the lower side of the portion 1161j. Therefore, the flow path of the game ball T changes due to the emergence and disappearance of the starting port door member 1214, and the game ball T can be made to flow down in a region where the game ball T is difficult to flow under normal conditions. The movement of the game ball T flowing down the invisible area (second area) can be enjoyed by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by making the player less bored.

In addition, when the starting port door member 1214 appears forward, when the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 is guided by the starting port door member 1214, it is accepted to the second starting port 1153 with a very high probability. , When the game ball T is accepted to the second starting port 1153, the game ball T is paid out as a privilege, and a special lottery result for generating an advantageous game state is performed, so when the starting port door member 1214 appears, the game The player can be made to actively perform the operation of hitting the game ball T aiming at the starting door member 1214, and the player can enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball T to suppress the decrease in interest. can do.

Furthermore, the second start opening 1153, where the payout of the game ball T and the lottery for the special lottery results are performed, is arranged in an area (second area) where the game ball T is difficult to flow down when the start opening door member 1214 is in a normal state. Therefore, even if the game ball T is hit aiming at the second starting port 1153, the game ball T will not be accepted. Then, when the game ball T is allowed to flow down to the area (second area) where the game ball T is difficult to flow down by advancing the start opening door member 1214 according to the passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134, the second start opening 1153 can be made to accept the game ball T. Therefore, even if the second starting port 1153 is open in the game area 1100, the game ball T cannot be accepted in a normal state, and the starting port door member 1214 does not appear (advance). Since it is not possible, it is possible to give the player a premium feeling by advancing the starting door member 1214. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, in order to advance (appear) the starting port door member 1214 and form a region (second region) where the game ball T easily flows down, it is necessary to pass the game ball T through the gate member 1134. , the player can be made to hit the game ball T aiming at the gate member 1134 (right hit), and the player can enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball T to prevent the player from losing interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the starting port door member 1214 moves in the front-rear direction so that it appears in and out of the game area 1100, there is no need to secure a space for immersing the starting port door member 1214 in the game area 1100. In the game area 1100, the area where the game ball T flows down can be widened as much as possible, and the movement of the game ball T increases as the game ball T flows down in a wide range. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by entertaining the movement of the player.

In addition, since the flat plate-like starting door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a, second guide portion 1214b, third guide portion 1214c, etc.) is moved in the front-rear direction, when viewed from the player side, It is possible to make it difficult to know whether the starting port door member 1214 is moving forward and appearing or retreating and retracting. Therefore, depending on whether or not the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 flows down the position of the starting port door member 1214 and abuts on the starting port door member 1214, it is possible to clearly recognize the haunting state of the starting port door member 1214. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement of the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 for recognizing the haunting state, and the player enjoys the movement of the game ball T, thereby reducing interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when the game ball T flows down on the outside of the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf part 1161j in a state where the starting opening door member 1214 is advanced and appears, the first guide part 1214a of the flat starting opening door member 1214 Since it abuts on the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf part 1161j and is guided to the lower side of the second starting opening upper shelf part 1161j, the game ball T is difficult to flow down in the normal state in which the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted The second starting opening upper shelf part The game ball T can be reliably made to flow down to the lower side of 1161j, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the starting port door member 1214 is moved in the front-rear direction to appear in and out of the game area 1100, and while the game ball T is flowing down (during rolling) on the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214, the starting port door member 1214 retreats, or while the starting opening door member 1214 retreats, the second starting opening flows down from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j while contacting the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m and flowing down. When the game ball T flows down on the door member 144, it takes time for the game ball T to reach the second start port 1153 because the start port door member 1214 extends long to the left and right. Since the retraction of the starting port door member 1214 is performed in a very short time by driving the starting port solenoid 1215, before the game ball T reaches the right end of the starting port door member 1214 (third guide part 1214c), The game ball T will drop from the starting port door member 1214 . Therefore, when the starting port door member 1214 starts to retreat, it is possible to prevent the game ball T from being sufficiently guided, so that the game ball T is prevented from being received into the second starting port 1153. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. In addition, the game ball T falling from the middle of the starting port door member 1214 makes the player feel regretful and increases the expectation for the next opportunity, thereby suppressing the decline of the player's interest. can do.

[Regarding the special look-ahead effect]
By the way, as described above, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, in the advance determination process (FIG. 133, steps S209a, b), before the condition for executing the big hit lottery held in the pending state is established, that is, Prior to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, the result of the big hit lottery is pre-determined, and the pre-determination information for the peripheral control board 4010 (variation pattern precedence determination command, type precedence determination command, and pending precedence determination command ). Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 can execute the look-ahead effect in the effect control process (step S1102 in FIG. 147).

Here, the look-ahead effect is performed in a display area other than the reservation display area where the jackpot lottery held in the reservation state is individually displayed as a reservation display, or in a display area other than the reservation display area, for example, the variable display area where the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed. In many cases, especially in the pending display area, the pending display is displayed in the order of storage, and the pending prefetch effect that changes the display mode of the pending display that is the target of the prefetch effect is mainly executed. Reservation display in the reservation display area, when the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the winning of the game ball to the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153, to appropriately notify the peripheral control board 4010 of the winning. , it is quickly updated by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010, and the display for the pending number is normalized.

In the present embodiment, in order to suppress the decline in interest due to the pending prefetch effect that is becoming standardized, a novel and epoch-making pending prefetch effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 149 to 160. FIG.

The look-ahead effect of the present embodiment includes a normal look-ahead effect that is executed at the timing when a game ball wins the starting hole, and a start-up memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect at a predetermined timing until the start-up memory is digested. A continuous look-ahead effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the variable display based on the performance is configured to be executable. The normal look-ahead effect is configured, for example, to display the pending display of the starting memory to be read-ahead in a manner different from usual. Further, the continuous look-ahead effect is configured such that the display mode of the suspension display of the target of the normal look-ahead effect can be changed at the timing when the starting memory that is variably displayed in advance is consumed. Note that the timing for changing the display mode of the pending display is not limited to the timing at which the preceding starting memory, which is changed and displayed in a variable manner, is consumed, and can be set as appropriate. Also, the continuous look-ahead effect may be configured to be executable even for a pending display that is not normally targeted for a look-ahead effect until the pending display is completed. The continuous look-ahead effect of this embodiment can execute a specific effect that suggests whether or not the expectation level will increase (change) according to the change scenario of the pending display. A complete blackout effect that darkens the screen and hides the pending display, and a continuous look-ahead effect that enhances the visibility of the pending display compared to other pending displays (limited blackout effect described later, multi-region composite It is characterized by providing a production). In addition, below, the reserved display area and the variable display area are configured by separate display devices, and the second liquid crystal display device ( The look-ahead effect will be described as an example of a case where a sub display device) 3252 is provided (see FIG. 155), but it can also be applied when the variable display area and the reserved display area are configured by one display device. is self-explanatory.

[Special figure look-ahead effect control processing]
FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing an example of special figure prefetch effect control processing in the present embodiment. The special figure look-ahead effect control process is one of the processes executed in the above-described effect control process, and is a process executed when starting winning occurs. In the special figure look-ahead effect control processing, a process of setting related to normal look-ahead effect and continuous look-ahead effect is executed.

First, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S1201). Here, the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is command analysis processing (Fig. 147 is set in step S1101). If the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is not set ("No" in step S1201), the look-ahead effect is not executed, so this process ends. It should be noted that the special figure prefetch effect control process may be executed only when the prefetch effect command is received in the received command analysis process.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set ("Yes" in step S1201), based on the content of the received prefetch effect command, lottery selection of normal prefetch effect mode (step S1202). Specifically, using the normal prefetch effect lottery table (see FIG. 150) described later, based on the information of the hit type (hit type, loss) by the type precedent determination command, the state of the hold display of the start memory of the prefetch target to decide.

Here, with reference to FIG. 150, the normal look-ahead effect lottery table will be described. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a normal look-ahead effect lottery table of this embodiment.

In the normal look-ahead effect, when a game ball wins in the starting hole, except for the case where the number of reserved start memories is 0, the state of the reserved display is performed regardless of the progress of the variable display of the special symbols currently being executed. Vary at a given rate. When the number of reserved starting memories is 0, the variable display is executed upon winning a prize. You may perform a production that is possible. For example, it is also possible to provide a digestion display indicating the starting memory during variable display in the holding display area, and change the mode of the digestion display.

When the prefetch effect is not executed, the pending display is "white", but when the normal prefetch effect is executed, the display color of the pending display changes from "white" to a big hit or a small hit. Accordingly, it changes to "blue", "green", "red" and "rainbow" with a predetermined probability (FIG. 150). Here, the "rainbow" indicates the determination of the big hit. In addition, when the result of the variable display game is a big win or a small win, the color of the pending display is set to change at a higher probability than in the case of a loss. Further, the higher the value of the jackpot to the player, the higher the probability that the color of the pending display will change, and the player will select the color with the highest degree of expectation. In addition, a probability may be set for each symbol type also for the small wins, and for example, a color with a higher degree of expectation than other small wins may be selected for a small win that is likely to win a V prize. The mode of pending display determined here is the mode of pending display at the time of winning.

In addition, the normal look-ahead effect lottery table is not limited to the information on the hit type (hit type, loss) by the type precedence determination command, but also based on the ready-to-win effect information by the variation pattern precedence determination command. It may be provided so that the normal look-ahead effect is executed (the mode is changed) only when the ready-to-win effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbols.

Returning to FIG. 149, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a normal prefetch effect setting process for setting for executing the normal prefetch effect to change to the mode (color) of the reserved display selected based on the normal prefetch effect lottery table. (Step S1203). In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, settings are made to change the display color of the pending display, as well as settings for outputting sound effects, lighting lamps, and moving characters at the timing of the change. good too. After that, clear the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag (step S1204). As a result, it is possible to prevent the normal look-ahead effect from being executed a plurality of times for one starting memory.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the conditions for executing the continuous look-ahead effect are satisfied (step S1205). In this embodiment, the continuous look-ahead effect can be executed only when executing the normal look-ahead effect in which the starting memory is displayed with hold in a mode different from the default (white). It should be noted that the continuous look-ahead effect may be executed regardless of whether or not the normal look-ahead effect is executed. For example, when the number of starting memories in the pending state is a predetermined number or more (3 or more), or a performance time of a predetermined time or more can be secured. In this case, the condition for executing the continuous look-ahead effect may be established.

And, peripheral control MPU4140a, when the execution condition of the continuous look-ahead effect is not satisfied ("No" in step S1205), ends the special figure look-ahead effect control processing.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, if the conditions for executing the continuous look-ahead effect are satisfied ("Yes" in step S1205), based on the content of the look-ahead effect command received from the main control board 4100, the continuous Using the look-ahead effect lottery table (see FIG. 151A), the content of the continuous look-ahead effect is selected by lottery (step S1206). The continuous prefetch effect lottery table of the present embodiment is provided according to the number of reserved balls at the time of winning and the reserved display mode (normal prefetch effect mode determined in step S1202).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 151A and 151B, the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table will be described. FIG. 151A is a diagram showing an example of a continuous look-ahead effect lottery table of this embodiment, and FIG. 151B is a diagram showing an example of a holding display effect pattern selection probability setting table of this embodiment. Here, the case where the number of pending balls at the time of winning is "4" and the state of the normal look-ahead effect is "blue" will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 151A, in the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table, the vertical axis is provided with the holding display effect pattern number, and the horizontal axis is holding display mode at holding 1 to 4 positions and holding position information that can execute a specific effect. is provided. When performing a continuous look-ahead effect that starts with "blue" as the pending display mode (winning color) at the time of winning, "blue", "green", "red" and "rainbow (confirmed )” can be considered. Even if the winning color and the final color are the same color, the continuous look-ahead effect can be differentiated from the normal look-ahead effect because the specific effect can be executed. In the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table, effect pattern numbers (suspended display effect patterns) are attached to the change scenarios of the pending display modes conceivable from the winning color to the final color, and based on the change scenario Execution timing information (holding position information) of a specific effect is set. Note that the change scenario of the pending display mode is provided so as not to cause a drop in the degree of expectation (become a pending display mode with a lower level of expectation than the pending display mode executed earlier).

The specific effect of the present embodiment is an effect for increasing interest in the change of the pending display mode in the continuous prefetch effect, and temporarily eliminates the visibility of all pending displays to display the pending display of the continuous prefetch effect target. A production that makes it impossible to specify and arouses expectations (complete blackout production described later) and a production that enhances the visibility of the pending display for continuous prefetching performance compared to other pending displays (limited blackout production described below, multiple areas) Composite production). The specific effect is provided with a success pattern that is executed at timings that actually change and a failure pattern that is executed at timings that do not actually change. For the success pattern and the failure pattern, holding position information that can be executed with one variation (single-shot) and holding position information that can be executed with a plurality of variations (continuous) are set. "-" in the figure indicates that there is no executable holding position information. In addition, in the present embodiment, regarding the holding position information capable of executing a specific production, the holding display mode at the holding position executing the specific production is different from the difference in the holding change targeted for the specific production, before executing the specific production. A specific effect A type that is set to be selectable as a success pattern/failure pattern when changing / not changing from the holding display mode at the holding position, and the holding display mode at the holding position after executing the specific production There is provided a specific effect B type that is set to be selectable as a success pattern/failure pattern for changing/not changing from the pending display mode at the holding position where the effect is executed (see FIG. 154). In this embodiment, since the change in the hold display mode is associated with the shift of the hold position, the execution timing information of the specific effect is set based on the hold position information, but not limited to this, transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a It may be set based on various commands that are sent. It should be noted that details such as the execution, type, pattern, type, etc. of the specific effect of this embodiment are the continuous prefetch effect setting process (see FIG. 152) that is executed at the start of the fluctuation. It is selected according to the execution timing information of the specific effect. In this processing executed at the time of winning, it is only necessary that the pending display effect pattern of the continuous look-ahead effect is selected based on the pending display effect pattern selection probability setting table (FIG. 151B) described later. Details such as the method of selecting the specific effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 152-154.

As shown in FIG. 151B, in the pending display effect pattern selection probability setting table, the selection probability of the pending display effect pattern in the continuous prefetch effect lottery table (FIG. 151A) is the information of the prefetch effect command reach or not). Specifically, the higher the value of the result for the player, the easier it is for the player to select the pending display mode with the higher degree of expectation for the final mode, and the easier it is for the specific effect to be executed. The holding display effect pattern selection probability setting table of the present embodiment is provided corresponding to the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table. Further, when the reserved display effect pattern number 18 is selected, as shown in FIG. 151A, the execution timing information of the specific effect B type is all "-" (no setting), so the specific effect execution probability is 90%. is limited to the specific effect A type.

Returning to FIG. 149, peripheral control MPU 4140a provides information (suspended display effect pattern) is set in advance, and a continuous look-ahead effect presetting process is executed (step S1207). In addition, in this process executed at the time of winning, the change scenario of the pending display is determined by the determination of the pending display effect pattern, but the execution of the specific effect is continuous, which is executed at the start of the fluctuation with respect to the previously stored starting memory. It is determined in the look-ahead effect setting process (see FIG. 152).

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the number of continuous prefetch effects to the number of remaining effects (remaining number of prefetch times) (step S1208), and further sets the continuous prefetch effect execution flag (step S1209). Thereby, in the continuous look-ahead effect setting process (see FIG. 152) to be described later, the look-ahead effect can be changed at the start of execution of the lottery on the side of the first special symbol previously reserved. After that, the special figure look-ahead effect control processing is ended.

[Continuous look-ahead effect setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the continuous look-ahead effect setting process will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing an example of the continuous look-ahead effect setting process of this embodiment. The continuous look-ahead effect setting process is one of the processes executed in the above-described effect control process (step S1102 in FIG. 147), and is a process executed together with the setting of the display effect related to the special symbol variation at the start of the special symbol variation. be. The continuous prefetch effect setting process is executed for the first suspension when there are multiple pending displays for continuous prefetch effect targets.

First, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S1211). Then, when the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is not set ("No" in step S1211), the continuous look-ahead effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set ("Yes" in step S1211), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not a new specific effect can be executed (step S1212). Since the specific effect cannot be newly executed when the specific effect is already being executed ("No" in step S1212), the process proceeds to step S1217 which will be described later.

Peripheral control MPU4140a, when it is possible to execute a new specific effect ("Yes" in step S1212), based on the pending display effect pattern set in the above-mentioned special figure prefetch effect control process (Fig. 149) , according to the specific effect execution probability set in the reserved display effect pattern selection probability setting table (FIG. 151B), an execution lottery is performed as to whether or not the specific effect is to be executed (step S1213), and as a result of the lottery, the specific effect is executed. It is determined whether or not (step S1214). Then, if the specific effect is not to be executed ("No" in step S1214), the process proceeds to step S1217, which will be described later.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when executing the specific effect ("Yes" in step S1214), based on the pattern type information (big win, small win, loss) of the starting memory to be executed for the continuous look-ahead effect. A specific effect type is selected by lottery using a specific effect type selection probability table (FIG. 153(A)) described later (step S1215). As described above, the specific effect of the present embodiment is provided with the specific effect A type and the specific effect B type, which have different pending changes targeted for the specific effect, so first it is decided which type to use. do.

Here, the specific effect type selection probability table will be described with reference to FIG. 153(A). FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of various tables related to the specific effect of this embodiment. In the specific effect type selection probability table shown in FIG. 153(A), the selection probabilities of the specific effect type A and the specific effect type B are set according to the symbol type. Specifically, in the case of losing, the selection probability of the specific effect A is set to be higher than the selection probability of the specific effect B as compared to the case of the small win and the big win. Since the specific performance B is more likely to be expected than the specific performance A, the specific performance A is more likely to be selected in the case of a loss, and the specific performance B is more likely to be selected in the case of a small hit or a big hit. be.

Returning to FIG. 152, next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects the type of specific effect in the selected specific effect type based on the pending display effect pattern set in the above-described special figure prefetch effect control process (FIG. 149). or pattern is selected using the specific effect type selection probability setting table (FIG. 153(B)) or the pattern selection probability setting table (FIG. 153(C)) (step S1216).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 153(B) and 153(C), selection of the type of specific effect and pattern will be described. In the specific effect type selection probability setting table shown in FIG. 153(B), three types of selection probabilities (complete blackout effect, limited blackout effect, multiple area composite effect) are set according to the symbol type. Specifically, it is set so that an effect with a high degree of expectation is more likely to be selected as the result is more advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the complete blackout effect is the effect with the highest degree of expectation, followed by the multi-region compound effect and the limited blackout effect in that order. In addition, in the pattern selection probability setting table shown in FIG. 153(C), selection probabilities of success (single-shot, continuous) and failure (single-shot, continuous) are set according to the symbol type. Specifically, the selection rate of the success pattern increases as the result becomes more advantageous to the player, and the success pattern is set so that the continuous pattern is more likely to be selected than the one-shot pattern. In the success pattern, the degree of expectation is higher in the single-shot and continuous success patterns in which the specific effect is executed in a plurality of variations than in the single-shot in which the specific effect is performed by one variation. If one of the success and failure set in the pending display effect pattern is provided with "-" or if there is no settable pending position information, the other is selected with a probability of 100%. Also, if one of the one-shot and continuous is provided with a "-" or if there is no hold position information that can be set, the other is always selected. In addition, in the case of setting a limit such as one specific effect for the same starting memory, for example, it may be added to the execution condition of the specific effect in the above-described step S1212. In addition, the setting of the specific effect by the processing of steps S1213 to step S1216 of this process may be set at the same time as the pending display effect pattern in the special figure prefetch effect control process (FIG. 149) executed at the time of winning. . Also, in the present embodiment, the failure pattern is selected with a probability of 20% even in the case of a big win, but the selection probability may be set to 0% so that the failure pattern is not selected in the case of a big win.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes an effect setting process for setting a continuous look-ahead effect in the current symbol variation (step S1217). Concretely, on the basis of the production contents (change scenario of the pending display) set in the above-mentioned special figure prefetching production control process (FIG. 149), the pending display mode of the pending display is set, and furthermore, the above-mentioned step S1213 When the execution of the specific effect is decided in the processing of 1215 and S1216, the content of the specific effect determined in the processing of steps S1215 and S1216 is set. Details of the effect content of the specific effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 155 to 160. FIG.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a subtracts 1 from the number of remaining effects (step S1218). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining effects after the subtraction has become 0, that is, whether or not the continuous look-ahead effect has ended (step S1219). When the number of remaining effects becomes 0 ("Yes" in step S1219), the continuous prefetch effect ends, so the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is cleared (step S1220), and the continuous prefetch effect setting process ends. do. On the other hand, when the number of remaining effects is not 0 ("No" in step S1219), the continuous prefetch effect continues even when the next symbol variation starts, so the continuous prefetch effect setting process is terminated while the flag is set.

[Example of continuous look-ahead effect]
FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect pattern of the continuous look-ahead effect of this embodiment. Here, an example will be described in which the number of pending balls at the time of winning is "4", the mode of the normal prefetch effect is "blue", and the pattern number "14" is selected as the pending display effect pattern of the continuous prefetch effect. do. FIG. 154(A) is an example of a continuous look-ahead effect when the specific effect is not executed, and FIG. 154(B) is an example of a continuous look-ahead effect when the specific effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 154(A), in the pending display effect pattern number "14" of the aforementioned continuous look-ahead effect lottery table (FIG. 151A), the pending display mode at the pending 4 position is "blue" as the pending display effect pattern. A hold change scenario in which the hold display mode at the hold 3 position is a "green" rhombus, the hold display form at the hold 2 position is a "red" arrow, and the hold display form at the hold 1 position is a "rainbow" heart shape. is set. In addition, it is assumed that the shape of the pending display mode changes as the color changes. In addition, in this embodiment, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is provided with a hold display area, and the hold display 4 position and hold display 3 are displayed from the right side of the screen in the hold display area. A hold 3 position, a hold 2 position where hold display 2 is displayed, and a hold 1 position where hold display 1 is displayed are provided.

Explaining along with the progress of the game, the first special symbol lottery is executed with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1152, and while the special symbols are repeatedly changed and stopped, the fourth suspension is the prefetch effect target. When a winning prize is generated, first, a suspension display in the suspension display mode “blue” round shape is performed at the position (hold 4 position) of the suspension display area of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 where the fourth suspension is displayed. At this time, the continuous prefetch effect content (holding display effect pattern number "14") is set in the above-described continuous prefetch effect pre-setting process (step S1207 in FIG. 149). Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the previous hold is started, the hold display position is shifted and the above-mentioned continuous look-ahead effect setting process (Fig. 152) is executed, and at the hold 3 position, the "green" rhombus, hold At the 2nd position, the hold display is changed to a "red" arrow shape, and at the hold 1 position, a "rainbow" heart shape.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154(B), the case where the one-shot success pattern is executed in the pending display 2 as the specific effect in the pending display effect pattern will be described. The upper row shows the case of the specific effect A type, and the lower row shows the case of the specific effect B type.

When the specific effect is executed at the hold 2 position, the execution of the specific effect is started at the timing when the hold display of the continuous look-ahead effect target is shifted to the hold 2 position and the fluctuation is started, but the specific effect A type In the case, the hold display mode (hold display 2) at the hold 2 position is a production that suggests whether the hold display form (hold display 3) at the previous hold 3 position (hold display 3) changes to a highly expected mode , The pending display 2 maintains the pending display mode during execution of the specific effect A before the change (the mode "green" of the pending display 3), and after the specific effect A ends, the mode is set to the pending display effect pattern "red". change to The specific effect A is set to end before the variation is stopped, and when it ends, the degree of expectation (suspended display mode "red") targeted for the specific effect A is found. In the specific effect A, since the degree of expectation suggested by the specific effect is the reserved display mode at the holding position where the specific effect is executed, by ending the specific effect A before the fluctuation stops, the player can receive the reserved display mode. is fully comprehensible.

On the other hand, in the case of the specific B type, whether the hold display mode (hold display 1) at the next hold 1 position changes from the hold display form (hold display 2) at the hold 2 position to a highly expected mode Since it is a suggestive effect, the pending display 2 is displayed in the mode "red" set to the pending display effect pattern even while the execution of the specific effect B is started. The specific effect B is set to end when the change is stopped and the next change starts. ”) turns out.

[Example of screen transition for specific effects]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 155 to 160, a screen transition example of continuous look-ahead effects including specific effects will be described. FIGS. 155 to 157 are diagrams showing an example of effect change timing and screen transition for each specific effect type when a specific effect (successful pattern of continuous variation) is performed in the continuous look-ahead effect of this embodiment. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing screen transitions common to the types, FIG. 156 is a diagram showing screen transitions for the specific effect A type, and FIG. 157 is a diagram showing screen transitions for the specific effect B type. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of a pending display effect pattern and screen transitions when specific effect B (single-shot variation success pattern) is performed in the continuous look-ahead effect of this embodiment. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of a pending display effect pattern and screen transitions when specific effect B (single-shot variation failure pattern) is performed in the continuous look-ahead effect of this embodiment. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of a pending display effect pattern and a screen transition in the case of performing the specific effect B (successful pattern of continuous variation of the zone mixed effect) of the modified example in the continuous look-ahead effect of the present embodiment.

<Success pattern of continuous fluctuation>
As shown in FIGS. 155(A) and (B), here, the number of pending balls at the time of winning is "4" and the state of the normal prefetch effect is "blue", and as a pending display effect pattern of the continuous prefetch effect The screen transition when the pattern number "14" is selected and the specific effect of the success pattern is executed from the hold 3 position to the hold 2 position will be described with reference to FIG. 155(C) and later. The hold change scenario is the same as in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 155 (C), when the winning to be the target of the look-ahead effect occurs as the fourth hold, at the position (hold 4 position) to display the fourth hold of the hold display area of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 Suspension display mode "blue" Suspension display 4 is displayed in a round shape. Here, the effect display device 1115 functions as a variation display area in which the symbol variation of the first special symbol lottery being executed is displayed. In addition, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 arranged in the lower part of the effect display device 1115 stores holding information (advance determination information) is stored, and four pending displays 1 to 4 and a digest display corresponding to the pattern variation being executed are displayed as a pending display area. Normally, when a hold occurs, white balls (default) are displayed like hold display 1 to 3 (hold 1 to 3 positions), but the read-ahead effect target hold is displayed in a color different from white like hold display 4. , raises the player's expectation of the variation corresponding to the pending display 4.

After that, each time the previous hold is digested and the variation is executed, the hold is shifted to the hold 3 position and the hold 2 position in order, during which the specific performance is executed. An example of screen transition for the specific effect A at this time will be described later with reference to FIG. 156, and an example of screen transition for the specific effect B will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, when the specific effect is completed and it is shifted to the hold 1 position, the position where the first hold is displayed (hold 1 position) in the hold display area of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 When the specific effect starts (hold 3 position ), the pending display 1 is displayed in the pending display mode “rainbow” heart shape, which has a higher degree of expectation than the mode of FIG.

<Success pattern of continuous variation of specific production A type>
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition of the continuous success pattern of the specific effect A type, and is executed over two changes when the hold display of the prefetch effect target is at the hold 3 position and the hold 2 position. A screen display example of a specific effect A is shown. FIG. 156(A) shows when in the hold 3 position and FIG. 156(B) shows when in the hold 2 position. The left end is an example of a screen display when a complete blackout effect is executed to make all pending displays invisible on the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the center is the pending display of the look-ahead effect target on the second liquid crystal display device 3252. It is an example of a screen display when a limited blackout effect is executed to make the reserved display other than the reserved display for the prefetching effect invisible in order to increase the visibility of the prefetching effect. This is an example of a screen display in the case where a multi-region composite effect is executed by moving and displaying from the two-liquid crystal display device 3252 to the effect display device 1115 and then changing.

In the complete blackout effect, the suspension display area (suspension display) of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is completely invisible to the player from the start of fluctuation corresponding to the suspension 3 position. For this reason, the player is expected to see which of the invisible pending displays is changing and how it is changing. However, even if the state of the pending display cannot be grasped, it is possible to grasp the number of pending items that increase or decrease due to the occurrence of winnings and the completion of the pending display. The number may be displayed numerically. The invisible state continues even after the fluctuation stops, and after that (for example, at the start of the second fluctuation), characters (for example, "accept") are displayed in the reserved display area. The character pattern at this time is selected according to the hold display mode after the complete blackout effect (that is, hold 2 position) and the change degree of the hold change before and after the complete blackout effect. Then, the complete blackout effect is completed by the time the change executed when the hold display of the look-ahead effect target is at the hold 2 position is stopped (for example, when the change is stopped). When the invisible state (complete blackout) is canceled, the suspension display 2 is displayed in the suspension display mode "red" arrow shape at the suspension 2 position of the suspension display area. In addition, in the complete blackout effect, unlike the limited blackout effect described later, it is not possible to see the change in the pending display of the target of the pre-reading effect, so it is possible to see the change in the pending display during the period after the invisible state is canceled. Alternatively, it may be shown by a pending display or the like of the prefetch effect target. For example, at the hold 2 position of the hold display area that became visible after the completion of the complete blackout effect, the hold display mode changed from "blue" circle to "green" rhombus, and then "red" arrow-shaped hold display. 2 may be displayed. Further, the numerical display of the number of reservations may be performed only during the specific performance or may be performed all the time.

In the limited blackout effect, only the pending display targeted for the look-ahead effect is displayed, and the pending display area other than the pending display is rendered invisible to the player. Thereby, the player can surely follow the change of the pending display displayed according to the pending change scenario. Here, the suspension display of the suspension display area in the specific effect A type is displayed in the suspension display mode at the previous suspension position, and until the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension 3 position stops (for example, when the fluctuation stops) Suspension change scenario is displayed in a suspended display mode based on Specifically, the hold display mode at the hold 3 position at the start of fluctuation is a "blue" round hold display form at the hold 4 position, unlike the "green" rhombus in the hold change scenario. Then, by the time the fluctuation stops (here, when the fluctuation stops), it changes to the "green" rhombus of the hold display mode in the original hold 3 position based on the hold change scenario. Also, when the next change starts and shifts to the hold 2 position, the hold display mode is a "green" lozenge at the hold 3 position of the hold change scenario, unlike the "red" arrow in the hold change scenario. Then, the limited blackout effect is completed by the time the change executed when the hold display for the look-ahead effect is at the hold 2 position stops (for example, when the change stops), and the hold display mode at the hold 2 position after the end. is the "red" arrow for the pending change scenario. Thus, in the limited blackout effect of the specific effect A type, the pending display is performed in the pending display area in the form of following the pending change of the pending change scenario. In addition, during the limited blackout production, the suspension change scenario is not changed for each change, and the suspension display mode "blue" round shape at the start of the production is continued, and after the limited blackout production ends, the "green" rhombus → " You may want to show a hold change in the shape of a red arrow. In addition, in the process during the limited blackout production, the hold display mode at the hold 3 position is set to a "blue" round shape, and at the timing of shifting to the hold 2 position, the hold display form at the hold 2 position is changed to a "green" rhombus. can be Also, since it is difficult to grasp the number of reservations in the limited blackout as well as in the complete blackout effect, the number of reservations may be displayed numerically as shown in the figure. In addition, in the limited blackout effect in which only the hold display for the look-ahead effect is displayed, it is difficult to grasp which of the hold 1 position to the hold 4 position the hold display is located, so as shown in the figure, the hold display is displayed. A display indicating the holding position information may be provided below. Even if the display positions of the hold 1 to 4 positions are fixed in the hold display area, the other hold displays become invisible, making it difficult to grasp the hold position of the hold display targeted for the pre-reading effect. The current holding position can be grasped immediately, and the player can increase the expectation by measuring the holding completion of the look-ahead performance object.

In the multi-area composite effect, the pending display of the prefetch effect target once displayed in the pending display area of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 at the start of the effect is caused to appear in the variable display area of the effect display device 1115 from the pending display area, and the effect display device 1115 By maintaining the display mode of the reserved display in the reserved display area for a while, the player is impressed with the movement of the reserved display. The suspension display at this time is displayed in the suspension display mode at the immediately preceding suspension position, similar to the limited blackout effect. Specifically, it is the holding display mode "blue" round shape at the holding 4 position. After that, a shock (lightning bolt in this case) is given to the hold display on the effect display device 1115, and when the change corresponding to the hold 3 position stops, the hold display is enlarged and displayed together with the shock to indicate that some kind of change will occur. is being done. Then, when the next change starts and shifts to the hold 2 position, the hold display changes its form and becomes an image of a character (in this case, the sun). At this time, in the variable display area of the effect display device 1115 that has been variably displaying the pattern in the center of the screen, the pattern is reduced in order to give priority to the read-ahead effect related to the pending display in the pending display area so as to make the player recognize it. Display on the upper left of the screen. As a result, the subject of the effect in the variable display area is switched from the effect for the currently varying lottery result to the effect for the pending display to be the target of the prefetch effect. Also, during this effect, the hold display of the prefetch effect target on the second liquid crystal display device 3252 may be hidden, but as shown in the figure, the upward arrow It is better to perform an alternative display, such as a display, indicating that the effect display device 1115 is performing a display corresponding to the suspension display. It should be noted that the alternative display may be any display that allows the player to easily grasp the pending state, regardless of the display of the upward arrow. For example, an unfilled outline sphere may be displayed by blinking. Alternatively, a plurality of forms and colors may be provided as alternative displays, and selected according to expectations. For example, if red is more likely to be selected for the upward arrow display when winning, and blue is more likely to be selected for losing, the alternative display will also function as a look-ahead effect, increasing interest. In addition, the substitute display can prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the pending state (forgetting to hold the prefetching effect object and counting) due to the absence of the pending display of the prefetching effect object in the pending display area.

Then, by the time the change executed when the hold display of the look-ahead effect target is at the hold 2 position stops (for example, when the change stops), the multi-region composite effect is completed, and when the multi-region composite effect is completed An effect is performed such that the character image (image of the sun) in the variable display area is sucked into the hold 2 position of the hold display area. Then, instead of the alternative display, the reserved display 2 is displayed in the reserved display mode "red" arrow shape at the reserved 2 position of the reserved display area after the completion of the multi-area composite effect. In this way, in the multi-area composite effect, the player is given the impression that the suspended display that jumped out from the suspended display area to the variable display area at the start of the presentation returned to the suspended display area after finishing the effect in the variable display area. A performance is made. At this time, the pattern that has been reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen in the variable display area is displayed in the center of the screen in the size before the specific effect.

<Success pattern of continuous variation of specific production B type>
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a screen transition example of a continuous success pattern of the specific effect B type, and is executed over two changes when the pending display of the prefetch effect target is at the Hold 3 position and the Hold 2 position. A screen display example of a specific effect B is shown. FIG. 157(A) shows when it is in the hold 3 position, and FIG. 157(B) shows it when it is in the hold 2 position. The left end shows a complete blackout effect, the center shows a limited blackout effect, and the right end shows a multiple area compound effect. Hereinafter, the description similar to that of FIG. 156 will be omitted as appropriate, and the characteristics of the specific effect B type will be described.

In the specific performance B type, even if the specific performance is executed at the same holding position as the specific performance A type, the specific performance end timing is different. The specific effect A type ends at the timing until the fluctuation that is executed when the hold display of the look-ahead effect target is in the hold 2 position stops (for example, at the time of stoppage of fluctuation, at the time of reach, etc.), whereas the specific effect B The type ends when the fluctuation stops and ends. When the specific performance is completed, the specific performance A type notifies the suspension display mode of the suspension change scenario at the suspension 2 position, while the specific performance B type notifies the suspension display mode of the suspension change scenario at the suspension 1 position. .

In the complete blackout effect, while the hold display for the look-ahead effect is at the hold 3 position and hold 2 position, that is, from the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold 3 position to the end of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold 2 position (corresponding to the hold 1 position The holding display area (holding display) of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is made invisible to the player until the fluctuation starts). Then, at the start of the change corresponding to the Hold 2 position, characters (for example, "accept") are displayed in the hold display area, and this state is continued until the end of the change. That is, the complete blackout performance ends at the timing when the change executed when the hold display of the look-ahead performance object is at the hold 2 position is finished and the next change (variation corresponding to the hold 1 position) is started. When the invisible state (complete blackout) is canceled, the pending display of the look-ahead effect target is shifted to the pending 1 position, and the pending display 1 is displayed in the pending display mode "rainbow" heart shape.

In the limited blackout performance, only the pending display for the look-ahead performance is displayed, but the pending display in the pending display area in the specific performance B type is displayed in a pending display mode according to the set pending change scenario. Specifically, the hold display in the hold 3 position is a "green" diamond in the hold change scenario, and the hold display when shifted to the hold 2 position is a "red" arrow in the hold change scenario. The suspension display mode and change timing of the specific effect B type match the information set in the suspension change scenario, and are not irregular such as follow-up change as in the above-described specific effect A type. Then, the limited blackout effect ends at the timing when the change executed when the hold display of the look-ahead effect target is at the hold 2 position ends and the next change starts. Then, when the limited blackout is canceled, the next change is started, the hold display for the look-ahead effect target is shifted to the hold 1 position, and the hold display 1 is displayed in the hold display mode "rainbow" heart shape. be.

In the multi-region composite effect, the pending display 3 is once displayed in the pending display area in the pending display mode "green" rhombus at the pending 3 position at the start of the effect, and then from the pending display area to the variable display area of the effect display device 1115. make it appear. Then, an effect in the variable display area similar to the specific effect A type described above is performed, and the character image in the variable display area ( The image of the sun) is sucked into the reserved 2 position of the reserved display area, and the multi-region composite effect is completed. When the next change is started, the hold display of the look-ahead effect target is shifted to the hold 1 position, and the hold display 1 is displayed in the hold display mode "rainbow" heart shape. In the specific effect B type, it is possible to grasp the holding display mode at the holding position at the start of the production, but it is not possible to grasp the change process after that.

<Success pattern of one-time fluctuation>
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158(A), the number of pending balls at the time of winning is "4", the state of the normal prefetch effect is "blue", and the pattern number is "13" as the pending display effect pattern of the continuous prefetch effect. ' is selected and the success pattern of the specific effect B type is executed at the hold 3 position will be described with reference to FIG. 158(B). 155 to 157 described above will be omitted as appropriate.

In the one-shot success pattern shown in FIG. 158(B), since the specific effect is completed with one change, the effect at the end of the specific effect at the symbol stop timing of the change is greatly different from the continuous success pattern of FIG. 157 described above. Also, here, new variations are shown for the limited blackout effect and the multi-area composite effect.

In the complete blackout effect, the suspension display area (suspension display) of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is completely invisible to the player as the variation in the suspension 3 position starts. After that, at the timing when the pattern stops in the variable display area of the effect display device 1115, the characters are displayed in the reserved display area. Then, when the next variation is started and the pending display of the look-ahead effect target shifts to the pending 2 position, it changes to the pending display mode "red" arrow shape with high expectation according to the pending change scenario. Here, the number of reservations is displayed in the lower right corner of the variable display area so that the number of reservations can be grasped on the variable display area side. It should be noted that, as long as the number of pending items can be grasped, the display is not limited to numbers, and items and the like may be displayed. Further, the position (for example, the reservation display area and the variable display area) and the display mode (for example, numbers and items) for displaying the number of reservations may be determined according to the degree of expectation.

In the limited blackout effect, the pending display area other than the pending display for the prefetching effect is made to be barely recognizable through a visibility hindrance filter, thereby increasing the visibility of the pending display for the prefetching effect. Further, the hold display 3 for the look-ahead effect target is oscillatingly displayed after the start of the specific effect, and then displayed in high-speed rotation at the timing when the pattern stops in the variable display area of the effect display device 1115 . In this way, if there is no change due to the change scenario of the pending display during the specific effect, such as the specific effect ending with one change, the pending display of the pre-reading effect target can be changed dynamically. Players' expectations can be raised.

In the multi-region composite effect, when the effect is started, the pending display 3 for the prefetching effect target is temporarily displayed in the pending display region of the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the similar display corresponding to the pending display for the prefetching effect object is displayed on the effect display device 1115. Appear in the variable display area, and then give impact (lightning) to the display of the effect display device 1115 . Then, at the timing when the pattern stops in the variable display area of the effect display device 1115, the image changes to the image of the character (sun). will be At this time, an effect display is performed as if the character of the effect display device 1115 is converted to the reserved display 3, and the reserved display 3 is added with an effect such as making it shine more conspicuously than the visual recognition mode at the start of the effect. Then, the player is expected to change to a hold display mode with a high degree of expectation at the next hold 2 position.

Also, in the multi-region composite effect, in order to improve the visibility of the pending display (alternative display) of the prefetching effect target in the pending display region of the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the display other than the display of the prefetching effect target is displayed in a reduced size. Note that the display of the prefetch effect target may be enlarged and displayed.

<Failure pattern of single fluctuation>
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 159(A), the number of pending balls at the time of winning is "4" and the mode of the normal prefetch effect is "blue", and the pattern number is "4" as the pending display effect pattern of the continuous prefetch effect. ' is selected and the failure pattern of the specific effect B type is executed at the hold 3 position will be described with reference to FIG. 159(B). 155 to 158 described above will be omitted as appropriate.

In the one-shot failure pattern shown in FIG. 159(B), the effect at the end of the specific effect is different from that of the one-shot success pattern in FIG. 158 described above. In the following description, the changeover period (execution timing) of different effects is set as the pattern stop timing of fluctuation, but this is not the only option. It is preferable that the pattern is executed at a predetermined timing that allows the player to recognize the difference from the success pattern.

In the complete blackout effect, there is a high possibility that the characters displayed in the reserved display area at the timing when the symbols stop in the variable display area of the effect display device 1115 are different from the characters displayed in the success pattern. The failure pattern is provided so that "..." is more likely to be selected than "accept" in FIG. 158(B). Even if the pending display of the look-ahead effect target shifts from the pending 3 position to the pending 2 position, the pending display mode maintains the "blue" round shape and does not change.

In the limited blackout effect, even when the pattern stops in the variable display area of the effect display device 1115, the suspension display 3 targeted for the look-ahead effect is not shifted to the high-speed rotating display, and is displayed in the same manner as after the start of the specific effect. be done. Then, even if the limited blackout is canceled and the hold display of the look-ahead effect target shifts from the hold 3 position to the hold 2 position, the hold display mode maintains the "blue" round shape and does not change.

In the multi-area composite effect, a storm appears instead of the character (sun) at the timing when the pattern stops in the variable display area of the effect display device 1115, and corresponds to the pending display of the prefetch effect target displayed on the effect display device 1115. A similar display is displayed in a reduced size as if blown away by the storm and converted to the original hold 3 position hold display. The hold display of the hold 3 position at this time may be displayed in a reduced display state on the effect display device 1115 .

[Successful pattern of continuous variation of specific production (zone mixed production) of modified example]
Here, with reference to FIG. 160, the specific effect of the modified example will be described. 155 to 159 described above will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 160(A), the number of pending balls at the time of winning is "4", the mode of the normal prefetch effect is "blue", and the pattern number "7" is selected as the pending display effect pattern of the continuous prefetch effect. FIG. 160(B) shows an example of screen transition when the success pattern of the specific effect variation type is executed at the hold 3 position and the hold 2 position.

In the specific effect of the modification shown in FIG. 160(B), the reserved display mode (color) of the reserved display to be the target of the prefetch effect is changed to the band display mode of the zone display in which the frame of the variable display area of the effect display device 1115 is surrounded by a band. , and only the pending display of the look-ahead effect target is displayed in the pending display area in the default mode. In other words, a limited blackout effect is executed in the reserved display area of the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and a multi-area composite effect is performed in which the zone display appears on the effect display device 1115 as a display corresponding to the reserved display to be the target of the prefetch effect. It is configured to be able to execute the zone mixing effect to be executed. As a result, the player can easily grasp which pending display is the target of the prefetching effect due to the high visibility that only the pending display for the prefetching effect is displayed, and the effect display device 1115 Since the look-ahead effect is executed in the frame of the variable display area, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect with a wider area and higher visibility than the limited blackout effect and multiple-area composite effect described above.

Note that the zone display may be performed as a pre-reading effect (preliminary effect) that does not depend on the pending change scenario of the pending display. For example, in the variable display effect corresponding to the hold display that is the target of the prefetch effect, it may be performed as a notice effect (preliminary effect) of the result of the change. In the above description, each specific effect (complete blackout effect, limited blackout effect, multiple area composite effect, and zone mixed effect) is described as a related effect on the premise that the pending display mode of the pending display is changed as a so-called look-ahead effect. It may be applied to a look-ahead effect or other advance effects that do not depend on the change of the pending display and are not accompanied by a change.

(Effect of pending change look-ahead effect of the present embodiment)
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the pending display area that displays the pending state (number of pending) of the first special symbol lottery (winning process) so that it can be grasped, the pending state cannot be grasped contrary to the original pending display function. A pending non-display effect (blackout effect) to be set to be executable as a look-ahead effect. The blackout effect includes a complete blackout effect that darkens the screen of the pending display area and temporarily hides all pending displays, and visibility of the pending display that is the target of the prefetch effect among all pending displays. A limited blackout effect is provided which is intended to enhance the visibility of other pending indications. After the execution of the blackout effect, a look-ahead effect of changing the pending display or showing the already changed pending display is executed. In this way, the concept of temporarily hiding (blacking out) all holds / non-target holds in the hold display area where the number of holds has a strong implication and the display of the number of holds has become normal is adopted. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel performance that focuses on the look-ahead performance rather than grasping the number of suspensions in the suspension display area, thereby attracting the player's interest. In particular, in the complete blackout effect, in which the pending display area is temporarily completely blacked out (the screen becomes dark), the pending display area, which until now has become the normal image display such as the pending state, becomes completely dark. It will provide a bold and impactful production that exceeds the expectations of the viewer, and can draw attention to the subsequent screen display (continuation of the pre-reading production). In addition, in the limited blackout effect which enhances the visibility of the pending display which is the object of the prefetching effect, the player can be made to concentrate on the pending display on which the prefetching effect is executed and surely pay attention to it. As a result, it is possible to raise interest in the hold display that is the target of the prefetch effect. In addition, a plurality of pending displays are displayed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the pending prefetch effect caused by the fact that it is difficult to attract attention to the pending display performed in the prefetch effect in the pending display area where the pending display position changes from moment to moment. . In the present embodiment, the blackout effect of darkening the screen is described as an example of the suspended non-display effect that makes the suspended display in the suspended display area invisible or reduces the visibility, but the present invention is not limited to this. The adjustment of the visibility of the reserved display area is not limited to the brightness of the screen, and may be based on the image.

In addition, the pending display gives the player a sense of anticipation by the normal look-ahead effect that is executed when the start memory occurs (that is, the timing when the game ball wins the start hole), and furthermore, the mode of the look-ahead effect according to the progress of the game. It is configured so that a greater sense of anticipation can be given by a continuous look-ahead effect that changes. By providing the hold change look-ahead effect that develops step by step in this way, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the look-ahead effect.

The continuous look-ahead effect is configured so that the pending display can be changed at various timings, and if the above-described blackout effect is executed over a plurality of variations, the player's interest can be attracted more. In addition, the pending display for the look-ahead effect can appear in the pattern variation effect area (main liquid crystal display) without being placed in the pending display area (sub liquid crystal display). To provide a dynamic pending display change that moves a player's line of sight from a fixed point because it is configured to be able to execute dynamic performance (multiple display device composite performance) straddling display areas (two liquid crystal display devices) as if moving. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the look-ahead effect.

In addition, a complete blackout effect in which neither the target of the prefetching effect nor the pending change can be specified, the target of the prefetching effect can be specified, but how the pending change is unspecified, and the multi-region composite effect and the target of the prefetching effect and the pending change can be specified. Since the limited blackout effect is set selectably as the look-ahead effect, an appropriate look-ahead effect can be provided according to the look-ahead effect command, and the decrease in interest in the look-ahead effect can be suppressed.

Note that the look-ahead effect of this embodiment does not depend on the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and can be applied to a wide variety of gaming machines.

[Regarding specific area prize winning performance]
161 to 167, the effects of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, which has the above-described novel game characteristics, will be described.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, based on the value of the acquired symbol random number, the first disadvantageous small win, the second disadvantageous small win, and One of the first advantage small hits is determined (FIG. 141(c)). Therefore, even if the small winning game on the side of the first special symbol is performed, there is a possibility that the big winning game may occur if the first advantageous small winning occurs, so the accessory winning opening in the small winning game The player can expect the possibility that the game ball T that has entered 1155 will be accepted into the V winning port (specific area) 1156 . Since the second disadvantageous small win and the first advantageous small win are similar in opening/closing mode of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 in the small winning game, execution processing of the small winning game itself by the main control board 4100 is expected. As described above, it can function as a production.

Here, small hit display processing by the peripheral control board 4010 as an expected effect that suggests the possibility of winning (first advantageous small hit winning) to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 in the small hit game on the first special symbol side (Refer to FIG. 161) A description will be given of the case where the variable display process of normal symbols is functioned in the small hit display effect in the small hit medium display process (see FIG. 163).

As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 executes the display effects of the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the effect control process (step S1102) of the 16ms steady process (FIG. 147). Control. For example, display a demo screen in a state in which variable display of symbols is not executed, execute and control variable display, related effect display of variable display, and look-ahead effect display, or small win display effect based on the result of variable display , a big hit display effect, etc. are executed. In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol lottery is a small hit (first disadvantageous small hit, second disadvantageous small hit, first advantageous small hit) in the small hit display effect executed by the second disadvantage In the small win display performance in the special performance mode by the small win or the first advantageous small win, not only various commands (small win start command etc.) related to the control of the small win game but also the normal lottery executed during the small win game Various commands related to control (normal figure start command, etc.) are also incorporated to create expected effects.

[Small hit display processing]
FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing an example of small hit display processing of the present embodiment. 166 and 167 are diagrams for explaining the small hit display effect of the present embodiment, and will be referred to as appropriate along with the explanation of the process.

Peripheral control MPU4140a, first, according to the small hit information (command) small hit opening display processing to set the effect mode in the small hit game and to perform the opening display before the start of the small hit game (see FIG. 167 (A)) Execute (step S1300). Details of the small winning opening display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes display processing during a small hit to perform effect display (see FIGS. 167B and 167C) in the small hit game (step S1310). In addition, the detail about the display process during a small hit is later mentioned in FIG.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes ending display at the end of the small winning game, and executes small winning ending display processing for updating the value of the processing flag according to the subsequent game (step S1330). After that, the small hit display process is terminated. Details of the small hit ending display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Small hit opening display process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the small-hit opening display process (step S1300) of the above-described small-hit display process (FIG. 161) will be described. FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing an example of small winning opening display processing of the present embodiment.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a first determines whether or not a small hit interval start command is received (step S1301). The small-hit interval start command is a command that is set in the small-hit game start process (FIG. 137) by the main control MPU 4100a and is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. If the small hit interval start command is not received ("No" in step S1301), the small hit opening display process is terminated, and if the small hit interval start command is received (step S1301 "Yes"), the process from step S1302 is executed.

Peripheral control MPU4140a, when receiving the small hit interval start command ("Yes" in step S1301), executes the opening display according to the small hit type (step S1302). The opening display indicates a display regarding a small winning game to be started (for example, where the player should hit the game ball, etc.).

<Small hit display effect-opening display->
Here, the opening display (OP display) will be described with reference to FIGS. 166(A) and 167(A). As shown in FIG. 166(A), as the types of small wins in this embodiment, a first disadvantageous small win, a second disadvantageous small win, a first advantageous small win, a second advantageous small win and a third advantageous small win are provided. The opening display and production mode are set to be selectable according to each small hit type. In the small winning game on the first special symbol side, a small winning game is provided in which the player can immediately recognize that the advantageous small winning has not been obtained. A second unfavorable win in which a small winning game is provided to make a player expect the possibility of obtaining an advantageous small winning by the opening mode of the object winning opening 1155, and the second unfavorable winning and the opening mode of the accessory winning opening 1155.例文帳に追加In the first advantageous small win in which a small winning game similar to the above is provided, a special opening display is set in a special performance mode in which variation display processing of normal symbols is functioned in the small winning display performance. Specifically, in the special opening display, as shown in FIG. 167 (A1), after informing that the special mode will be entered and displaying the level of expectation (V winning expectation) that is an advantageous small hit. , (A2) to (A4) are displayed to notify the game method in the small winning game (right hitting to aim for V winning). In addition, in the second advantageous small win and the third advantageous small win that can be provided in the second special symbol side small winning game, the opening display is usually set, for example, the above-mentioned FIG. 167 (A2) to (A4) is displayed.

In addition, the small hit design classification corresponding to each small hit kind is set. For example, the small hits on the side of the first special symbol (first disadvantageous small hit, second disadvantageous small hit, and first advantageous small hit) are assigned to the small hit symbol types 1 to 9 (Fig. 166 (B) reference). The opening display may be set according to these small winning symbol types. As will be described later, even if the types of small wins are the same, the degree of expectation for V prizes differs depending on the type of small-win pattern. Therefore, the use of the type of small-win patterns can make the level display in the opening display more appropriate. can.

Returning to FIG. 162, the peripheral control MPU 4140a instructs the execution of the opening display, and then determines whether or not the current small win game is a small win (second disadvantageous win, first advantageous small win) that enters the special effect mode. (step S1303). Then, when the special effect mode is not entered ("No" in step S1303), the small winning opening display process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a enters the special effect mode ("Yes" in step S1303), the setting is performed so as to smoothly proceed with the display processing during a small hit, which will be described later. First, the normal pattern scenario flag indicating that the fluctuation display processing of the normal pattern is to function in the small hit display effect is set to ON (step S1304).

In the special performance mode, a variable display scenario performance is performed according to a scenario performance pattern determined in advance regardless of the lottery for the normal symbol lottery executed during the small winning game. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a lottery to select the scenario effect pattern of the small winning game period blocks A to D according to the small winning symbol type (step S1305), and sets the scenario effect pattern of each block A to D. (Step S1306).

<Small hit display effect-scenario effect pattern->
Here, with reference to FIGS. 166(B) and (C), FIGS. 167(B) and (C), a small winning game corresponding to the small winning symbol type to be a special performance mode and a scenario rendering of blocks A to D Describe the pattern.

As shown in FIG. 166 (B), the small hits on the side of the first special symbol (first disadvantageous small hit, second disadvantageous small hit, and first advantageous small hit) are assigned to the small hit symbol types 1 to 9. ing. The second disadvantageous small win and the first advantageous small win are given 60 seconds as a small win game period, and the first disadvantageous small win is given 1.5 seconds as a small win game period. Of these, the second disadvantageous small hit and the first advantageous small hit, which are in the special performance mode, are assigned with the small winning symbol types 2 to 5 and the small winning symbol types 6 to 9, respectively. As described above, the second disadvantageous small win and the first advantageous small win need to provide a small win game in which the opening mode of the accessory winning opening 1155 is similar to each other. The pattern types 2 to 5 are set with 1 to 4 opening times (V chance times) corresponding to the small winning pattern types 6 to 9 of the first advantageous small winning, respectively. When the number of V chances is 4 times, that is, when the small winning symbol type and the small winning symbol type 9 are explained with a timing chart as an example, the small winning game period is divided into four periods of blocks A to D. The operation of the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 is constant regardless of the small hit symbol type. In this embodiment, an open period for the prize winning opening 1155 is provided for each block as a V chance. An opening mode is provided so that only the game ball entering the object winning opening 1155 can be received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 . The V winning acceptance timing of this embodiment is the same for the other first advantageous small wins (small win symbol types 6 to 8), and an open period is always provided in block D as shown in the table in the figure. Therefore, as shown in the timing chart, the opening timing of the accessory winning opening 1155 in blocks A to C is provided after the rotator 1236 is switched from the housed state to the released state. A game ball entered in is not accepted to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 . In addition, the opening timing of the small winning pattern type 5 in the block D is set so that even if the ball enters the accessory winning opening 1155 at this timing, it is all distributed to the losing hole 1230c until the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodated state later. It is

<Small hit display effect-screen display example->
In the small hit display effect here, first, as shown in FIG. 167(A), a special opening display is executed when a small hit occurs. Next, as shown in FIG. 167(B), when a small winning game is started, a normal symbol variation display scenario effect based on the normal symbol variation is executed. The normal symbols displayed on the effect display device 1115 are different from the special symbols (see FIG. 153), so that the player can easily understand that the variable display target is not the special symbols but the normal symbols. I'm trying Then, as shown in FIG. 167(C), at a predetermined timing according to the opening mode of the accessory winning opening 1155, the preset V-chance effect is preferentially executed. In the V-chance presentation, a countdown display for opening the accessory prize-winning opening 1155 is displayed, or a message prompting the player to launch a game ball is displayed. Incidentally, when the V chance effect is preferentially displayed on the effect display device 1115, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 displays the variable display scenario effect of normal symbols executed during this period. In addition, it is preferable that the reserved display area of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 displays the reserved display of the normal symbol. Then, when all blocks are finished, a special ending display is executed. Although illustration is omitted, the ending display is set with the OP display (that is, the small winning pattern type), and in the special ending display, when there is no V prize, "special mode end" etc. are displayed, V When there is a prize, a V prize performance for celebrating the success of the V prize is executed.

As described above, the present embodiment is characterized in that the variation display scenario presentation of the normal symbols based on the variation of the normal symbols is executed in the special performance mode of the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 166(C), an example of the block scenario effect pattern lottery table is shown. Blocks A to D each have a scenario effect pattern lottery table. One scenario effect pattern is set from the scenario effect patterns. If the lottery probability of each pattern is changed according to the type of small winning pattern, for example, scenario performance patterns 3 and 4 are likely to be set in the type of small winning pattern with high expectation of V winning, and more appropriate performance is provided. be able to. Then, the variable display scenario effect of the normal symbols is executed based on the scenario effect pattern set in the block period of the timing when the normal lottery is executed. For example, when pattern 2 of the scenario effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG. It becomes the stop mode of the losing eye "124". Here, the pseudo fluctuation is performed twice for one normal lottery, and both times are stopped at the loss. Similarly, the variation of the normal symbol executed for the second time in the block A period varies twice in the order "123". Note that the fluctuation start and fluctuation time of the ordinary lottery are determined by the main control MPU 4100a, and the number of fluctuations within the block period is variable, so a spare frame (5th time) is provided. It is preferable that the fluctuation time of the normal lottery that occurs during the small winning game is controlled within a predetermined time (4 seconds) by the main control MPU 4100a.

In the present embodiment, the table is set so that the outcome indicating the degree of expectation does not occur within the block (a outcome with a lower degree of expectation than the outcome that appeared earlier) does not occur. When compared to the roll in , the roll can go downhill. For example, when the scenario effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG. Even if it becomes the eye, in the next block B, the first variation is the losing eye regardless of the scenario production pattern. This means that the confirmation that the pattern alignment means here means that the player can win a V prize if the player shoots the game ball aiming at the role winning opening 1155, and confirms the occurrence of the big winning game. not something to do. In order to obtain a big hit game, it is necessary to continue launching the game ball. In this embodiment, in order to prevent players from misunderstanding (a big win game can be obtained without continuing launching) by frequently matching patterns and causing the player to stop launching, the blocks are intentionally not associated with each other in this embodiment. I'm trying As a result, the player can be made to concentrate on the variable display (output) each time, and the game characteristics of the normal symbols can be enhanced.

As a modified example, the following processing may be performed. In the case of the modified example, the necessity of the player's continuation of launching is notified so that there is no misunderstanding of the above-described matching of the symbols by the player.

For example, in any of the blocks, when the pattern combination "555" which indicates that the game ball can be accepted into the V winning hole (specific area) 1156 is displayed, after that, the normal pattern is displayed. Execution of the variable display scenario effect is stopped, and a shift is made to a fixed notification effect. In the fixed notification performance, a performance is performed to make the player recognize that a V prize can be won if the player continues hitting the game ball to the right. Specifically, the shooting interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) when the game balls are continuously hit into the game area 1100 is reported to encourage the player to win the V prize. You can also Also, since winning a V prize leads to the occurrence of a big hit, a spectacular performance such as a fanfare may be performed. Since the player can grasp the value of the small win (possibility of V winning) in the middle of the small win game, it is possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the specific area winning expectation performance.

In addition, in the case of a combination of symbols "555" which confirms that it is possible to accept the game ball into the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 in any of the blocks, the following normal symbols are displayed. Control may be performed so that the symbols match in the variable display scenario effect. According to this, it is possible to ensure the game property by ensuring the number of times of variable display of the normal symbols, and to increase the interest in the game by frequently matching symbols in the result of the variable display.

Returning to FIG. 162, the peripheral control MPU 4140a completes the small-hit opening display process after performing the preliminary setting of the display effect in the small-hit game period (steps S1304 to S1306).

[Display processing during small hit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the display process (step S1310) during the small hit of the above-mentioned small hit display process (FIG. 161) will be described. FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing an example of display processing during a small hit of the present embodiment.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a first determines whether or not a small hit start flag is set (step S1311). The small hit start flag is set in the command analysis process (step S1101 in FIG. 147) by the peripheral control MPU 4140a when the small hit start command (set at step S704 in FIG. 138 described above) is received from the main control MPU 4100a. is a flag that When the small hit start flag is not set ("No" in step S1311), the display processing during the small hit is ended.

When the small hit start flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the small hit game time has timed up (step S1312). A command is sent from the main control MPU 4100a to end the small hit game time. Then, when the small-hit game time has not timed up ("No" in step S1312), a small-hit middle effect display set according to the small-hit symbol type is executed (step S1313). Variation display scenario production of normal symbols, which will be described later, is executed as appropriate with the occurrence of a normal lottery, so it is not included in the production display during a small hit here.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the general pattern scenario flag is set to ON in the small hit opening display process (FIG. 162) (step S1314). When the general pattern scenario flag is set to ON ("Yes" in step S1314), it is determined whether or not the normal pattern start command indicating execution of the normal lottery has been received (step S1315). The general map start command is a command that is appropriately transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a.

When the peripheral control MPU 4140a has received the normal pattern start command ("Yes" in step S1315), the conditions for executing the variable display scenario effect of the normal pattern are satisfied, so the previous small winning opening display process (Fig. 162), based on the scenario effect pattern set in step S1316. After that, it is determined whether or not the current small hit display effect is in the V chance effect (step S1317), and if it is in the V chance effect (“Yes” in step S1317), the sub display device (the 2) In the reserved display area of the liquid crystal display device 3252), the normal design variation display of the block design is executed (step S1318). If the V-chance effect is not being performed ("No" at step S1317), the normal symbol variable display of block symbols is executed on the main display device (variable display area of the effect display device 1115) (step S1319). After that, the display processing during the small hit is terminated.

On the other hand, when the normal map scenario flag is not set (“No” at step S1314), or when the normal map start command is not received (“No” at step S1315), the peripheral control MPU 4140a , The display processing during the small hit is ended by performing only the effect display during the small hit executed in the processing of step S1313.

After that, the peripheral control MPU 4140a turns off the small hit start flag (step S1320) and turns off the normal scenario flag (step S1321), and ends the small hit display process.

[Small hit ending display process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 164, small-hit ending display processing (step S1330) of the aforementioned small-hit display processing (FIG. 161) will be described. FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing an example of the small hit ending display process of the present embodiment.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a first determines whether or not a small hit end command is received (step S1331). The small hit end command is a command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a when the small hit game period (eg, blocks A to D) ends. Then, if the small hit end command is not received ("No" in step S1331), the small hit ending display process is terminated, and if the small hit end command is received (step S1331 "Yes"), the processing after step S1332 is executed, and the small hit display effect is ended.

If the peripheral control MPU 4140a has received the small hit end command ("Yes" in step S1331), it determines whether or not V winning has occurred (step S1332). In this embodiment, the opening of the accessory winning opening 1155 that can win a V prize is set to the timing when it is opened at the end of block D. It is after the end of the small hit game period that it is detected that it has been accepted in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 . Then, when the V winning occurs ("Yes" in step S1332), the V winning effect display is executed as the ending display (step S1333), and the value of the processing flag for starting the jackpot display is updated (step S1334), ending the small hit ending display process.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the V winning has not occurred ("No" in step S1332), executes the ending display corresponding to the small winning opening display (step S1335), and starts the symbol variation display. It updates to the value of the processing flag (step S1336), and ends the small hit ending display processing.

[Normal pattern fluctuation display processing]
Here, referring to FIG. 165, the normal symbol variation display scenario effect control (steps S1314 to S1319) executed in the above-described small hit medium display processing (step S1314 to step S1319) is performed as normal symbol variation display processing. A case of executing as one of the effect control processing (step S1102 in FIG. 147) executed every 16 ms in the main processing will be described. FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal pattern fluctuation display processing of the present embodiment. In the normal pattern fluctuation display process, the normal pattern fluctuation display control can be performed in line with the game property of the present embodiment.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a first determines whether or not a general pattern start command indicating execution of a normal lottery is received (step S1401). Here, information related to normal map control such as the normal map start command is sent as appropriate from the main control MPU 4100a. If the general pattern start command has not been received ("No" in step S1401), the general pattern variation display process is terminated.

Peripheral control MPU4140a, when receiving the general pattern start command ("Yes" in step S1401), determines whether or not the general pattern scenario flag is set (step S1402). The general pattern scenario flag is a flag that can be set in the above-mentioned small hit opening display process (Fig. 162), and during the game period (special effect mode). If the normal scenario flag is set, that is, during the game period for a specific small hit ("Yes" in step S1402), it is set in the above-described small hit opening display process (FIG. 162). Based on the scenario effect pattern obtained, the normal drawing fluctuation display mode of the normal lottery is selected (step S1403). After that, it is determined whether or not the current small hit display effect is in the V chance effect (step S1404), and if it is in the V chance effect ("Yes" in step S1404), the main display device (effect Since priority is given to the V-chance effect in the variable display area of the display device 1115), the normal symbol variable display of the block symbols is executed in the sub-display device (reserved display area of the second liquid crystal display device 3252) (step S1405). If the V-chance effect is not being performed ("No" at step S1404), the normal symbol variable display of block symbols is executed on the main display device (variable display area of the effect display device 1115) (step S1408). After that, the normal pattern fluctuation display process is terminated.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the time saving function is in operation when the normal scenario flag is not set ("No" in step S1402) (step S1406). Then, when the time saving function is not in operation ("No" in step S1406), the normal pattern fluctuation display process is terminated. Also, when the time saving function is in operation ("Yes" in step S1406), the normal figure fluctuation display mode is selected based on the determination result of the normal lottery (step S1407), and the main display device (effect display In the variable display area of the device 1115, normal symbol variable display of block symbols is executed (step S1408). After that, the normal pattern fluctuation display process is terminated.

(Effect of special area winning expectation production)
As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display of normal symbols in the effect display device 1115 is executed according to the game state. Specifically, in a small winning game in which the result of the first special symbol lottery is the second disadvantageous small winning or the first advantageous small winning, the variable display of the normal symbols according to the scenario production pattern determined based on the small winning symbol type. A performance is held. In addition, in the time-saving game state, a variable display performance of normal symbols is performed according to a variable display pattern determined based on the result of the normal lottery.

In the normal game state of the present embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to hit the game ball aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 (left hit). A first special symbol lottery is executed according to the winning prize. Then, when a big win is obtained in the first special symbol lottery, the game state shifts to a time-saving game state after the big win game. In addition, when the first advantageous small hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery, the same as the first big hit is obtained by hitting the right hand aiming at the role winning opening 1155 and obtaining the V prize (specific area prize). A game state shifts to a time-saving game state through a jackpot game. In the time-saving gaming state of the present embodiment, the probability that a win that can be won to the second winning opening 1153 is obtained in the normal lottery executed according to passage to the gate member 1134 increases. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery according to the winning of the second start port 1153, there is a probability of 399/400 for a small win (second advantageous small win, third advantageous small win) and a 400-minute Since a big win (second big win) can be obtained with a probability of 1, it is set so that a big win game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. Therefore, in the time-saving game state of the present embodiment, if a win is obtained in the normal lottery, a novel game property that can win a jackpot game of approximately 100% is provided, and the normal lottery itself is equivalent to the second special symbol lottery. It is provided so that it can have a function.

On the other hand, in the normal game state, the probability of obtaining a winning that can be won in the second winning opening 1153 in the ordinary lottery is very small. However, gate members 1134 are provided on both sides of the center accessory 2500 . Therefore, when hitting the left hand aiming at the first starting port 1152 and when hitting the right hand aiming at the accessory winning prize port 1155 in the small winning game, a considerable number of ordinary lotteries that do not win substantially can occur. The low probability of winning the ordinary lottery in the normal game state is well known to the players, and the players have no expectations. In this way, the normal lottery in the normal game state is simply consumed indifferently, lacking in game playability, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may rather be reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the possibility of acceptance (expectation) of the game ball to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 in the small winning game is suggested by the variable display of the normal symbol. As a result, the value of the normal lottery, which cannot be expected to be won in the normal game state, can be increased. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the variable display of normal symbols exhibits the same function as the variable display of the second special symbol lottery (if it is a hit, a big win game can be obtained). In this way, the variable display of the normal symbols of the present embodiment functions as an expected effect of the occurrence of the big hit game in the normal game state and the time-saving game state, so the variable display effect of the normal symbols beyond the scope of the player's expectation is performed. can be provided, and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, like the first special symbol lottery and the ordinary lottery of this embodiment, not only the effect contents corresponding to the lottery according to the result of one lottery, but also the effect contents corresponding to the other lottery can be determined. The function is also useful in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery that can fluctuate simultaneously. For example, there is a possibility that the first special symbol lottery will lead to a result that is disadvantageous to the player (reduction of working hours, etc.), and when performing a long-term fluctuation, the player must wait for the second before the end of the long-term fluctuation. A second special pattern lottery is frequently performed in order to obtain a hit by the special pattern lottery. Here, if the performance contents corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are determined according to the result of the first special symbol lottery being executed, the player frequently causes the second special symbol lottery to cause the first special symbol lottery. can recognize the game state derived by Therefore, concerns about the result of the first special symbol lottery being executed (feeling of uneasiness about unfavorable results) can be dispelled, and the player can make an appropriate game judgment, thereby suppressing a decline in interest in the game. can do. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is preferentially executed, if the performance contents corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are determined according to the result of the first special symbol lottery in the pending state, the player can obtain the second special symbol lottery. The game state derived by the first special symbol lottery can be recognized after the lottery is digested. In the game property in which prize balls can be obtained by frequent small hits in the second special symbol lottery in the time saving game state, it is desired to delay execution of the first special symbol lottery as a trigger for canceling the time saving game state as much as possible. To prevent a decline in interest in a game by allowing a game reflecting the player's intention to play by recognizing the game state derived by the later first special symbol lottery by effecting the second special symbol lottery in advance. can be done. In addition, in the game characteristic of frequent small hits in the second special symbol lottery, there is no expectation for the variable display of the second special symbol lottery, and the production value of the variable display tends to be low. By determining according to the result of the subsequent first special symbol lottery, the variable display effect value of the second special symbol lottery can be increased.

Further, the variable display mode of the normal symbols as the specific area winning expectation effect is determined based on the small winning symbol type. Then, when the normal symbols come out with matching symbols, it is determined that the small winning symbol type is a small winning that can win a V prize. That is, if the normal symbols are aligned in the specific area winning expectation performance, the jackpot game can be obtained through the V winning. In this way, the same function as the normal pattern in the time-saving game state (if it is a hit, the big hit game can be acquired) can be shown to the player in the small-hit game in the normal game state before shifting to the time-saving game state. It becomes possible. As a result, the normal symbols in the specific area winning expectation performance also function as an introduction performance for facilitating understanding by instilling novel game specifications in a time-saving game state in the player in advance.

In addition, the small hit game by the second disadvantageous small hit and the first advantageous small win of this embodiment divides the opening time of the accessory winning opening 1155, which is regulated to 1.8 seconds, into a plurality of times (4 times). By opening it, a small winning game can be configured including the interval time of the opening interval, and a small winning game period (60 seconds) can be set so as to be a predetermined long-term game. Since the normal symbols are variably displayed during the small winning game executed as a game for a predetermined long period of time, a new symbol game can be created by connecting the variable display of the special symbols before and after the small winning game. In addition, since the variation display of the normal symbols executed during the small winning game is all associated with the variation display result (small winning result) of the special symbols immediately before the small winning game, the series of games can be made consistent. It is possible to increase the interest of the game. In this way, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player by the unique specific area winning expectation performance, and the interest of the small winning game which tends to give a weak impression in the ordinary and lacking freshness of the conventional performance. Decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, the specific area winning expectation effect of the present embodiment can be executed immediately after the start of the small winning game (beginning of block A), and the player is notified at the V winning timing that there is a possibility of winning V by matching the normal symbols. before you can figure it out. Therefore, in order to grasp the possibility of winning the V prize, the player tries to win the ordinary lottery by continuously launching game balls not only at the timing when the accessory prize winning port 1155 is opened (at the time of the V chance presentation). Therefore, it is possible to improve the game property and promote the launch of the game ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, normal symbols are used for the specific area winning expectation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if a new game feature can be created during a small winning game, and for example, a configuration such as a reel or a roulette having a plurality of images that are dynamically displayed periodically may be used. In addition, the specific area winning expectation effect is not limited to the V winning in the small winning game (winning the big hit by winning the V), but also passing through the variable gate during the big hit game (winning variable by passing) and passing through the production gate provided in the game area (passing It can also be applied to acquisition of a privilege effect by

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, the pachinko machine according to the above embodiment includes the following technical ideas.
[Technical concept 1]
A gaming machine having a game area into which a game ball is struck, and in which a game can be progressed by movement of the game ball in the game area,
a specific detection unit that detects a game ball passing through a specific portion of the game area;
When the game ball is detected by the specific detection unit, the specific place at the upstream proximity position not separated from the game ball detected at the specific place by the length of the diameter or the length of the diameter and proximity disconnecting means operable to interrupt a ball path leading to a gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball is detected at a specific location, the ball path is cut off by the width of one ball from the game ball, or at an upstream close position not far from the game ball. Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which two game balls are continuously supplied to a specific position to be detected by the specific detection unit, the first game ball will not be detected at the specific position. Only passing through will be allowed.

[Technical concept 2]
When giving a privilege to a player based on the fact that a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery performed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the game medium driven into the game area can be accepted. As a means of winning prizes,
a detection unit for detecting acceptance of game media into the winning opening means;
When the reception of the game medium is detected, even if there is a situation in which another game medium is supplied to the winning opening means in a continuous manner with the detected game medium, the two consecutively supplied game media and an interrupting movable member provided so as to operate to interrupt between game media to refuse acceptance of the different game media.

In the above configuration, even if two game media are continuously supplied to the winning opening means, the interrupting movable member can be operated to interrupt between the game media. It becomes possible to refuse acceptance of the game media on the rear side (another game media) of the game media to the prize winning port means.

[Technical concept 3]
When giving a privilege to a player based on the fact that a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery performed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the game medium driven into the game area can be accepted. As a means of winning prizes,
A remote island-type winning port provided at a position away from a flow-down path along which game media can flow, in the game area;
It can appear and disappear by reciprocating in the depth direction with respect to the game area, and when it is at the appearing position between the sunken position and the appearing position, it connects the flowing path and the remote island type winning opening. a dragonfly-shaped movable member that serves as a bridging passage and is provided so as to roll the game medium on the flow-down path to the remote island-shaped prize opening positioned in a direction different from the depth direction;
a detection unit that detects acceptance of game media into the remote island type winning opening;
When the reception of the game medium is detected, even if there is a situation in which another game medium is supplied to the remote island type winning opening through the bridging passage so as to be connected to the detected game medium, An interrupting movable member provided so as to operate to interrupt between two game media supplied in succession to refuse acceptance of the other game media into the remote island type winning opening. A game machine characterized by comprising and.

According to the above configuration, the dragonfly-shaped movable member can appear and disappear by reciprocating motion in the depth direction. It was formed with a structure (bridging passage) that supplies to the remote island type winning port. For this reason, it is possible to secure a sufficient length as a rolling distance until it is accepted in the remote island type winning opening, and it is similar to the case of adopting a structure that spills the game ball on the upper surface of the movable piece that has moved due to inertia. It is possible to preferably avoid such a situation that the inertia does not work well and the player wins the prize.

Further, in the above configuration, even if two game media are continuously supplied to the winning opening means, the interrupting movable member can be operated to interrupt between the game media. , it becomes possible to refuse acceptance of the later game media (another game media) among those game media into the prize winning port means.

[Technical concept 4]
A first special control means capable of executing control to generate a big win game when a specific result is obtained in a special lottery performed based on the establishment of a first start condition by a game medium flowing down a game area. other,
Even when a specific result is obtained in a normal lottery performed based on the establishment of a second starting condition by the game media flowing down the game area, a jackpot game occurs with a probability of approximately 100%. A second special control means capable of executing control to enable a game to be played in such a manner that the game medium used to satisfy the second starting condition is also used to satisfy the first starting condition. A game machine characterized by being able to flow down to.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to execute two kinds of lotteries (special lottery and normal lottery) that can generate a big win game by only one game medium flowing down. That is, in this case, from the player's side, it is possible to generate a big win game as long as a specific result is obtained in the ordinary lottery without depending on the special lottery. It becomes difficult for the player to feel distrust, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[Technical concept 5]
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
An opening/closing member operable between a closed state and an open state is provided, and when the opening/closing member is in the open state, a game medium in a specific rolling area of the game area enters the internal area. a prize-winning means for
a receiving port capable of receiving game media flowing down the game area;
Lottery means for performing a lottery under the condition that the probability of obtaining either the specific win or the big win is approximately 100% based on the acceptance of the game medium in the receiving slot;
When a specific win is obtained in the lottery by the lottery means, as long as the shooting of the game medium to the specific rolling area is continued, approximately 100 will be sent to the specific area provided in the internal area of the winning opening means. precision game control means capable of executing control of opening and closing of the opening/closing member in an accurate manner in which game media are accepted with a probability of 100%;
Big win game control means capable of executing control to generate a big win game when a game medium entering the internal area of the winning opening means is received in a specific area or when a big win is obtained in a lottery by the lottery means. and, depending on the progress of the game, every time a game medium is received in the receiving slot, control is performed by the big win game control means with a probability of approximately 100% so that the big win game can occur. Characteristic game machine.

In the above configuration, depending on the progress of the game (for example, whether it is during the execution period of the jackpot game, the number of reservations, etc.), as long as the game medium is accepted at the receiving port, approximately 100% Since the big win game can be generated with probability, the reliability of the big win lottery can be greatly enhanced, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[Technical concept 6]
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
a movable receiving port that is allowed to receive game media when a predetermined movable member operates;
a surety process executing means capable of executing a surety process that enables a game to be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of approximately 100% when a game medium is received in the movable receiving port;
Advantageous game occurrence control means for controlling so that an advantageous game state can occur with a predetermined occurrence probability after a big win game is generated through the winning process by the winning process executing means;
a valid process suspending means for suspending and suspending the valid process by the valid process executing means for a predetermined upper limit number of suspensions until the execution condition is satisfied;
There is a special game situation in which a game can be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state each time the winning process held by the winning process suspending means is completed. When the winning process is terminated while the game is in the advantageous game state, a winning adding game is added so that the winning process by the winning process executing means is newly added as a pending state. and an additional game control means capable of executing the control to be provided, and when the said certain additional game is provided as the number of the winning processing in the pending state decreases and the situation becomes disadvantageous to the player. By increasing the number of times the winning process can be newly added as a state of suspension in consideration of the predetermined upper limit number of suspensions, the same game can be reversed from a disadvantageous situation. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, every time the winning process in the pending state is completed, there is a special game situation in which the game can be played with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state. As a result, the sense of trust in the game can be greatly enhanced, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Moreover, according to the above configuration, as the number of winning processes that are in the pending state decreases and the situation becomes disadvantageous for the player, the game content of the winning addition game itself is the same. Since the game value is increased, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest when the situation becomes disadvantageous for the player.

It should be noted that the time required to finish the game according to the winning process does not necessarily have to be set to a long time such that the expected value of the number of new winning processes added as a pending state exceeds 1. It may be set for a short period of time such that it is difficult to add a new pending state. That is, when the winning process is completed in an advantageous game state, it is sufficient if there is a slight chance of adding a new winning process as a pending state for the time required for completing the game according to the winning process.

[Technical concept 7]
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
a movable receiving port that allows receiving of game media when a predetermined movable member operates;
a surety process executing means capable of executing a surety process that enables a game to be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of approximately 100% when a game medium is received in the movable receiving port;
Advantageous game continuation control means for controlling so that an advantageous game state can occur with a predetermined probability of occurrence after a big win game is generated through the winning process by the winning process executing means;
a valid process suspending means for suspending and suspending the valid process by the valid process executing means for a predetermined upper limit number of suspensions until the execution condition is satisfied;
There is a special game situation in which a game can be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state each time the winning process held by the winning process suspending means is completed. When the winning process is completed while the player is in the advantageous playing state, the winning process by the winning process executing means is newly suspended for the time required for completing the game according to the winning process. Add-on game control means capable of executing control to provide an add-on game that is allowed to be played as a state,
a normally open receiving port that always allows receiving of the game media;
a low-probability process execution means capable of executing a low-probability process in which a jackpot game occurs only with a relatively low probability when a game medium is received in the normally open receiving port;
Low-probability processing suspending means for suspending and suspending the low-probability processing by the low-probability processing execution means until the execution condition is satisfied for a predetermined upper limit suspension number,
The add-on game control means is
When the advantageous game state occurs under a gaming situation in which the winning probability processing is not suspended and the low probability processing is suspended, the game corresponding to the winning probability processing is performed. Having a means capable of executing control for providing a super-additional game which is made possible such that the sure process by the sure process executing means is newly added as a pending state during a time longer than the time required for completion. A game machine characterized by

According to the above configuration, every time the winning process in the pending state is completed, there is a special game situation in which the game can be played with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state. As a result, the sense of trust in the game can be greatly enhanced, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Moreover, according to the above configuration, as the number of the winning processes in the pending state decreases and the situation becomes disadvantageous to the player, the winning process is newly put on hold when the winning addition game is provided. Since the number that can be added as a number increases due to the balance with the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit number of reservations, the game contents of the winning addition game itself are the same. Become.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, when an advantageous game state occurs under a gaming situation in which the winning probability processing is not in a pending state and the low probability processing is in a pending state, the winning probability processing is executed. To provide a super-additional game that can be played so that it can be easily joined as a new reserved state. That is, in this case, for example, when the advantageous game state first occurs (at the time of transition control from the normal game state to the advantageous game state), the first game privilege using the suspended game (low probability processing) in the normal game state is given. be able to

It should be noted that the time required to finish the game according to the winning process does not necessarily have to be set to a long time such that the expected value of the number of new winning processes added as a pending state exceeds 1. It may be set for a short period of time such that it is difficult to add a new pending state. That is, when the winning process is completed in an advantageous game state, it is sufficient if there is a slight chance of adding a new winning process as a pending state for the time required for completing the game according to the winning process.

[Technical concept 8]
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
a movable receiving port that is allowed to receive game media when a predetermined movable member operates;
a surety process executing means capable of executing a surety process that enables a game to be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of approximately 100% when a game medium is received in the movable receiving port;
Advantageous game continuation control means for controlling so that an advantageous game state can occur with a predetermined probability of occurrence after a big win game is generated through the winning process by the winning process executing means;
a valid process suspending means for suspending and suspending the valid process by the valid process executing means for a predetermined upper limit number of suspensions until the execution condition is satisfied;
There is a special game situation in which a game can be played so that a jackpot game can occur with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state each time the winning process held by the winning process suspending means is completed. When the winning process is completed while the game is in the advantageous game state, the winning process by the winning process executing means is newly suspended for the time required for completing the game according to the matching process. Add-on game control means capable of executing control to provide an add-on game that can be played so as to be added as a state of
a normally open receiving port that always allows receiving of the game media;
a low-probability process execution means capable of executing a low-probability process in which a jackpot game occurs only with a relatively low probability when a game medium is received in the normally open receiving port;
Low-probability processing suspending means for suspending and suspending the low-probability processing by the low-probability processing execution means until the execution condition is satisfied for a predetermined upper limit suspension number,
The add-on game control means is
When the advantageous game state occurs under a gaming situation in which the winning probability processing is not in a pending state and the low probability processing is in a pending state, the low probability in the pending state Unless a big hit game occurs through processing, the low probability time required for digesting the game according to the low probability processing in the pending state and the new probability processing that is in the pending state during the low probability time Control is executed to provide a double-addition game that is made possible so that the winning process by the winning process execution means is newly added as a pending state over two times, the matching time required for completing the game. A game machine characterized by having a possible means.

According to the above configuration, every time the winning process in the pending state is completed, there is a special game situation in which the game can be played with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state. As a result, the sense of trust in the game can be greatly enhanced, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Moreover, according to the above configuration, as the number of the winning processes in the pending state decreases and the situation becomes disadvantageous to the player, the winning process is newly put on hold when the winning addition game is provided. Since the number that can be added as a number increases due to the balance with the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit number of reservations, the game contents of the winning addition game itself are the same. Become.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, when an advantageous gaming state occurs under a gaming situation in which the winning probability processing is not in a pending state and the low probability processing is in a pending state, the pending state Unless a big hit game occurs through the low-probability processing in the state, the low-probability time required for digesting the game according to the low-probability processing in the state of suspension and the low-probability time are newly put in the state of suspension. In addition, a double-adding game spanning two times, ie, the certainty time required for digestion of the game according to the certainty processing, is provided. That is, in this case, for example, at the time of the first occurrence of the advantageous gaming state (during the transition control from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state), the suspended game in the normal gaming state (low probability processing) and the suspended game in the advantageous gaming state ( It is possible to provide the first-time game privilege using two of the winning probability processing).

It should be noted that the time required to finish the game according to the winning process does not necessarily have to be set to a long time such that the expected value of the number of new winning processes added as a pending state exceeds 1. It may be set for a short period of time such that it is difficult to add a new pending state. That is, when the winning process is completed in an advantageous game state, it is sufficient if there is a slight chance of adding a new winning process as a pending state for the time required for completing the game according to the winning process.

[Technical concept 9]
A gaming machine that can perform transition control from a normal game state to a specific game state,
a shooting means for shooting a game medium to the game area;
An opening/closing member operable between a closed state and an open state is provided, and when the opening/closing member is in the open state, a game medium in a specific rolling area of the game area enters the internal area. a prize-winning means for
Advantageous game control means capable of executing game control advantageous to the player when the game medium that has entered the internal area of the winning opening means is received in the specific area;
a movable receiving port disposed so as to supply game media that have not entered the internal region of the winning port means, and allowing receiving of the game media when a predetermined movable member is in an operating state;
Specific time movable control means for controlling the operation of the predetermined movable member so that the probability of accepting game media into the movable receiving port is higher in the specific game state than in the normal game state. and
When the specific time opening time during which the predetermined movable member is maintained in the operating state when the predetermined movable member operates based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in the specific game state is set to "T", the winning opening means The game medium that has not entered the internal area of the flow down between the winning port means and the movable receiving port so that the time required for the game medium to flow down until it is supplied to the movable receiving port is longer than the above "T". A gaming machine characterized in that a path is provided.

That is, in a game state in which it is easy to enter a ball into the movable receiving port, a game property is usually realized using the ease of entering a ball into the movable receiving port. is being developed, it may be considered to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the movable receiving port even though it is in a game state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the movable receiving port.

In this regard, if the variation time of the special symbols is set short when the game state is such that it is easy to enter the ball into the movable receiving port, it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the movable receiving port during the variable time. You can. However, if a specific condition is met in a game state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the movable receiving port, the jackpot game starts during the period during which the winning port means is opened, or after the opening is completed. Since game balls enter the movable receiving port during the period until the game is finished (the period until the so-called time-saving function is stopped), the development of more innovative game machines will be adversely affected There are concerns about a decline.

Therefore, in the above configuration, first, the movable receiving slot is arranged so as to receive the supply of game media that have not entered the internal area of the winning slot means. In addition, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the movable receiving port. Further, the winning opening means and the movable receiver are arranged such that the time required for the game medium that has not entered the inner area of the winning opening means to flow down to be supplied to the movable receiving opening is longer than the above "T". By providing a flow-down path between the entrance and the opening of the winning opening means, the game can be played at the movable reception opening during the period until the jackpot game is started (the period until the so-called time saving function is stopped). It is possible to suitably suppress the ball from being hit.

That is, in this case, even if it is controlled to the specific game state, at least the period from the opening of the winning opening means to the occurrence of the jackpot game based on the reception of the game medium in the specific area. It is possible to prevent game media from being received by the movable receiving port (until the so-called time saving function is stopped), and it is possible to promote the development of more innovative game machines.

[Technical concept 10]
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
A jackpot game control means capable of executing control to generate a jackpot game when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
a big winning opening that accepts game media when the big winning game is occurring;
special standby lottery means for performing a lottery for a special standby condition for a new big win game while game media are flowing down in a path leading to the big win opening during the period in which the big win game is occurring; ,
a special standby control means capable of executing control to put a new jackpot game in a special standby state when the special standby condition is satisfied in a lottery by the special standby lottery means;
a special standby canceling means capable of executing control for generating a new big winning game put in the special standby state after the big winning game is finished.

According to the above configuration, during the period in which the big win game is occurring, a lottery is performed for the special standby condition for a new big win game other than this. When the lottery satisfies the special standby condition, control is executed to put the new big win game into the special standby state, and after the big win game is over, the new big win put into the special standby state. Since the control related to the occurrence of the game is performed, the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

1 Pachinko machine 4 Game board 1100 Game area 1112 Game panel 1115 Effect display device 1120 Table unit 1134 Gate member 1150 Winning opening unit 1151 General winning opening 1152 First starting opening 1153 Second starting opening 1154 Large winning opening 1155 Accessory winning opening ( variable receiving port)
1156 V Prize Entrance (Special Entrance)
1220 accessory unit 1220A accessory winning opening unit 1220B V winning opening unit 1221 accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1230 unit front base 1230c failure hole (discharge port)
1232 V winning solenoid 1232a plunger 1233 drive gear member (transmission mechanism)
1233a Shaft portion 1233b Extension piece 1233c Drive gear 1233d Engagement portion 1234 Driven gear member (transmission mechanism)
1234a driven gear 1236 rotating body 1236a receiving portion 1238 ball guiding member 1238a peripheral wall portion 1238b upper opening (receiving opening)
1238c right port (discharge port)
1238d ball entrance 1238e upper guiding portion 1238f right guiding portion 3252 second liquid crystal display device 4100a main control MPU
4140a Peripheral control MPU
T game ball

Claims (1)

starting information storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of starting information that can be acquired upon receipt of a game medium in a receiving area within the game area;
lottery execution means capable of executing a lottery based on the starting information;
an effect executing means capable of executing an effect including a variable display of symbols on a display device based on the lottery result of the lottery;
a specific game state control means for controlling to a specific game state advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery is a specific result;
advance determination means capable of determining whether or not the lottery result of the lottery is the specific result before execution of the variable display;
The starting memory display can be individually displayed according to the starting information stored by the starting information storage means, and the displayed starting memory display ends the pattern variation display of the starting information corresponding to the starting memory display. starting memory display means capable of displaying up to
starting memory number display means capable of displaying the number of the starting information stored by the starting information storage means;
The display of the number of starting information by the starting memory number display means is performed on a display device on which the starting memory display is displayed by the starting memory display means,
Based on the result of determination by the prior determination means, a pre-performance indicating the degree of expectation that the determined starting information will result in the specific result is executed before the variable display of the determined starting information is executed. a possible pre-rendering execution means;
Composite effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect using a variable area in which the symbol is variably displayed,
In a situation where the specific effect is being executed, at least the starting memory display that is not subject to the preliminary effect among the plurality of starting memory displays displayed by the starting memory display means is hidden,
The number of the starting information stored by the starting information storage means by the starting memory number display means while the specific effect is executed and at least the starting memory display not targeted for the preliminary effect is hidden. can be displayed and
There are a plurality of aspects with different expectations in the pre-production,
At least after the specific effect in which the starting memory display that is not the target of the preliminary effect is hidden is started, the mode of the preliminary effect for the starting memory display that is the target of the preliminary effect is changed to the above. It is possible to display by changing to a mode with a higher degree of expectation than before the specific effect is started,
The change in the mode of the preliminary performance with respect to the starting memory display that is the target of the preliminary performance is that the starting memory display that is not the target of the preliminary performance among the starting memory displays is hidden and the preliminary performance is performed. executable in a situation where only the target starting memory display is displayed,
A game machine, wherein the display of the number of the start information displayed by the start memory number display means is displayed at a specific display position without changing the display position.

Images